You are on page 1of 1177

Embroidery Software 2006

Online Manual

Copyright 1998-2005 Wilcom International Pty Ltd. All rights reserved.


No parts of this publication or the accompanying software may be copied or
distributed, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any
human or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to any third party without the express
written permission of:
Wilcom International Pty Ltd. (A.B.N. 62 062 621 943)
146-156 Wyndham Street, Alexandria (Sydney)
New South Wales, 2015, Australia
PO Box 581, Alexandria, 1435
Phone: +61 2 9578 5100
Fax: +61 2 9578 5108
Email: wilcom@wilcom.com.au
Web: http://www.wilcom.com.au
The Stitch Processor (SP) portion of this product is protected by the following patents:
US Patent N 4,821,662
European Patent N 0221163
Japanese Patent N 2029491
Curve Line Fill Stitching in this product is protected by US Patent No. 6,587,745.
TrueView and Point & Stitch are trademarks of Wilcom International Pty Ltd.
Portions of the imaging technology of this product are copyrighted by AccuSoft
Corporation. The EPS File Import/Export Convertor used in this product is copyrighted
by Access Softek, Inc. All rights reserved.
Wilcom International Pty Ltd. makes no representation or warranties with respect to
the contents of this publication and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of
merchantable quality or fitness for any particular purpose.
Further, Wilcom International Pty Ltd. reserves the right to revise this publication and
to make changes in it from time to time without obligation of Wilcom International Pty
Ltd. to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes.
The screen illustrations in this publication are intended to be representations, not
exact duplicates of the screen layouts generated by the software.
Subject to any warranties implied by law which are incapable of limitation or exclusion,
the software is purchased as is without any warranty as to its performance, accuracy,
freedom from error or to any results generated through its use and without any implied
warranty of merchantability or of fitness for any particular purpose for which the
software is being acquired. The purchaser relies on its own skill and judgement in
selecting the software for its own use and assumes the entire risk as to the results and
performance of the software. Wilcom International Pty Ltd. specifically does not
warrant that the software will meet the purchasers requirements or operate without
interruption or error.

Rev 1

April 2005

Introduction

Welcome to Wilcom ES 2006, the leading software application for


embroidery industry design and manufacture. Wilcom ES is a suite of
CAD/CAM tools providing a fast, flexible way to create, edit, organize and
stitch out embroidery designs. It is designed to support the high productivity
and efficiency requirements of professional digitizers. It also allows novices
and less frequent users to become productive digitizers. Wilcom ES lets you
edit designs at any stage, or adapt existing designs for use with different
fabrics and machines.

First-time users
Wilcom ES provides a wide range of design capabilities, allowing you to
create, edit, and output embroidery designs with ease. Before you begin
working with the product, read Digitizing with Wilcom ES. This chapter
presents an overview of the basic concepts of digitizing with Wilcom ES and
provides important guidelines on how to use the software for best results.
You should also familiarize yourself with Basic Procedures. This chapter
explains how to start the application and how to use some of the essential
tools and features that Wilcom ES provides. The chapters Viewing Designs
and Working with Design Objects contain essential information about the
many ways of viewing designs in Wilcom ES as well as selecting and
manipulating design objects.

Upgrade or update users


Wilcom ES 2006 has many new and expanded features which make
digitizing easier and more efficient. Read the chapter Digitizing with Wilcom
ES to familiarize yourself quickly with the scope of these improvements.

Wilcom ES product models


Wilcom ES 2006 is available in five product levels21L, 21E, 21D,
45 and 65. Each is designed to fulfil the needs of specific embroidery
businesses and to build upon the others to provide for the whole gamut of
stitching and digitizing requirements of professional digitizers.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

21LLettering
Monogramming, Lettering
Do you routinely embroider lettering and sports Team Name garments?
Empower your business with the flexibility and reliability of in-house
lettering provided by Wilcom ES level 21L. Take possession of over 130
professionally digitized embroidery alphabets, or utilize the endless variety
of Windows fonts with Wilcoms TrueType Font converter. Team Names and
mass monogramming is a breezeautomatically create hundreds of name
badges and emblems in seconds. Powerful lettering reshape tools let you
handle custom lettering jobs with confidence. Combined with professional
colorway and stitch processing technology, Wilcom ES level 21L provides for
all your lettering and monogramming needs.

21ELettering and Editing


Monogramming, Lettering, Editing
Empower your business with the flexibility and reliability of in-house
lettering and editing provided by Wilcom ES level 21E. Take possession of
over 130 professionally digitized embroidery alphabets, or utilize the
endless variety of Windows fonts with Wilcoms TrueType Font converter. Edit
and reshape your embroidery designs or combine them with existing ones.
Change between Satin, Zigzag and Tatami, as well as adjust stitch density
and underlay settings over the whole or selected parts of a design. With
Wilcom ES level 21E, you are professionally equipped for any embroidery
lettering or editing job that comes your way.

21DPowerful Digitizing
Corporate, Sports, Fashion
Wilcom ES level 21D introduces you to professional embroidery digitizing.
Backed with the advanced lettering and editing features of level 21E, 21D
delivers a suite of integrated and powerful digitizing tools plus the flexibility
to create reliable, quality embroidery designs. Using scanned or imported
artwork, create embroidery shapes with turning or parallel stitching plus
advanced stitch types like Program Split or Motif Fill. Ideal for companies
that do corporate, sports and fashion embroidery, level 21D supports all
common embroidery industry formats.

45Creative Digitizing
Creative Flair, High Fashion, Inspiration
Boasting a blend of powerful digitizing tools and creative stitch effects,
Wilcom ES level 45 is Wilcoms most popular embroidery digitizing system.
Import and convert vector files to embroidery using Wilcoms legendary

ES 2006

Introduction

Point & Stitch technology. Advanced stitch effects such as Florentine Effect,
3D Warp, Trapunto and Stipple stitch bring your embroidery to life. Smart
Branching sequences your embroidery design, eliminating trims, while
Offset Object automatically create borders around lettering and other
design objects. Wilcom ES level 45 gives you the competitive edge to create
superior embroidery designs faster and more simply than ever before.

65Advanced Digitizing
High Volume Maximum Power
To arm yourself with the full power of Wilcom ES, level 65 is the only choice
for the advanced digitizer. Encompassing Wilcoms complete range of
embroidery lettering, editing and digitizing tools, level 65 contains as
standard superior Chenille embroidery and stunning automated Sequin
design tools. Productivity and efficiency is the main focus of level 65.
Crafted to support high volume embroidery, time-saving tools such as
Mirror-Merge, Fusion Fill and Color Blending complement the easy-to-use
interface to give you maximum power. Take charge of your embroidery
design process with the powerful capabilities of Wilcom ES level 65.
Note For a complete feature listing, see Product Differentiation Table in the
Online Manual.

Wilcom ES documentation
Wilcom ES provides you with a number of ways to access information about
the software and how to use it, both in printed form and online via the Help
menu.
Warning Screen illustrations in the user documentation are intended to be
representations, not exact duplicates of the screen layouts generated by the
software. Procedural descriptions may be at slight variance from particular
installations depending on which default system settings are activated.

Printed documentation
With your Wilcom ES installation CD you will have received the following
printed documentation:

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Release Notes
The Release Notes provide you with information about system requirements
for your Wilcom ES installation, details of new features and major and minor
improvements to the software release, as well as known limitations and
workarounds. For an itemized listing of the new and improved features for
each level of product, refer to the Product Differentiation Table at the end of
this document. For a complete table, refer to Product Differentiation Table
in the Online Manual.

Quick Start Guide


The Wilcom ES Quick Start Guide contains installation instructions as well as
an overview of the ES Designer and ES Design Explorer applications. The
guide provides fully worked sample projects for each product level. While
these projects do not cover all product features, they provide a useful
starting point. There is also a Quick Reference section which lists all the
commands and shortcut keys used in ES Designer.
For detailed procedures covering all features of the ES Designer and
ES Design Explorer applications, refer to the online manual which can be
accessed via the Help menu. To identify sources of information relevant to
your specific model and any options you may have selected, see Product
Differentiation Table in the Online Manual.

Online documentation
Online documentation is provided in two formatsHTML Online Help and
Adobe Acrobat. Components include Release Notes, Quick Reference, Online
Manual, Online Help, as well as various User Manual Supplements.

Release Notes
An online version of the Release Notes is included with the software
installation.

Quick Reference
All commands in ES Designer can be accessed via the various menus, both
dropdown and popup, toolbar icons, menu chart (for use with digitizing
tablets), as well as access and shortcut keys. Many commands can be
accessed by more than one method. The Quick Reference lets you see at a
glance which method best suits you.

ES 2006

Introduction

Online Manual
The Online Manual contains hundreds of step-by-step instructions together
with samples and screen images. These are intended to be used as a
reference, not a tutorial. The manual documents the following product
components: ES Designer and ES Design Explorer. ES Machine Manager,
and the ES Chenille, ES Schiffli, and ES Cross Stitch Options are
documented in separate supplements described below.

Online Help
Online Help provides quick access to general information on ES Designer
features and step-by-step instructions. Context Sensitive help is currently
available for dialogs by pressing the 1 key.

User Manual supplements


With your Wilcom ES installation CD you will have also received the
following online supplements:

Wilcom ES Machine Manager Supplement


This manual supplement documents the following product capabilities:






ES Machine Manager Direct Connect


feedback from machines
machine activity reporting
technical details of machine network setup.

The supplement must be used in conjunction with the Wilcom ES User


Manual.

Wilcom ES Cross Stitch Supplement


This manual supplement documents the following product capabilities:






manual and automatic cross stitch digitizing


cross stitch editing
cross stitch lettering
handling cross stitch design files.

This supplement is supplied with the ES Cross Stitch Option. It must be used
in conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Wilcom ES Chenille Supplement


This manual supplement documents the following product capabilities:

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

 ES Chenille features within ES Designer


 ES Chenille machines, including chain, moss, needle height
 ES Chenille stitch types and effects.
This supplement is supplied with the ES Chenille Option. It must be used in
conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Wilcom ES Schiffli User Manual


This manual documents the following product capabilities:

 ES Schiffli features within ES Designer


 read/output to Schiffli files
 ES Schiffli disk utilities, Fixpat, Defced.
The manual is supplied with the ES Schiffli Option. It must be used in
conjunction with the Wilcom ES User Manual.

Viewing online documentation


Online documentation can be accessed from the Wilcom ES Programs folder
or from the Help menu in Wilcom ES. You can read it with Adobe Acrobat
Reader which is supplied with your Wilcom ES software installation. Quickly
search for the information you need using standard Adobe Acrobat Reader
features.

To view the online documentation


1

From Windows Start, go to the Programs > Wilcom 2006 folder.


You will find the following online documents:

 Wilcom ES Online Manual


 Wilcom ES Release Notes
 Wilcom ES Quick Reference Guide.
2

ES 2006

Double-click the required document to open it in Adobe Reader.

Introduction

Fit in Window
Actual Size
Fit Width

Bookmarks

Zoom dropdown

Page turning controls

Paging settings

Tip You can open your online documentation directly from ES Designer.
Go to the Help menu and select the document you want from the
dropdown list.
3

Select the topic you want by clicking on its Bookmark.

Change the view magnification in any of the following ways:

 Click the Actual Size, or Fit in Window, or Fit Width buttons.


 Select the Zoom In tool, then click anywhere on the pageeach
click increases the magnification.

 Click the Reader Zoom dropdown and select a settingtry 200% if


you want to look closely at screen diagrams.
5

Use the page turning controls at the bottom of the window to scroll
backwards and forwards through the book or return to previous views.
Tip Select Help > Reader Guide from the top of the Reader screen for
comprehensive information about using Reader.

Using online help


Online Help can be accessed from the Help menu in Wilcom ES.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

To use the online help


1

Select Help > Help Topics.


The ES Designer Help window opens.

Click Contents to display the main list of topics.


Topics are grouped under high-level headings with book icons.

Double-click a book to view the list of topics, then double-click a topic.


Alternatively, click Find and enter keywords to search on a specific
subject.
Note Context Sensitive help is available for dialogs. When you open a
dialog box, press 1 to invoke relevant help.

Linking to the Wilcom website


You can access sales and support information about the products easily from
within the software.

To link to the Wilcom website

 Select Help > Wilcom Web Page.


You are directly connected to the Wilcom homepage at
http://www.wilcom.com.au/
Note You must have a correctly configured web browser on your system
together with web access.

Conventions used in the documentation


The documentation adopts the following conventions:

Commands
Commands on a submenu are referred to by both the submenu and
command name. For example the command Open on the submenu
Embroidery Disk is referred to as Embroidery Disk > Open.

Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes are referred to as dialogs and are displayed only if they
provide important information on using Wilcom ES. The screen images

ES 2006

Introduction

provided may differ slightly to the layouts generated by the software and
operating system you are using.

Mouse conventions
Instruction

Symbol

Description

Click

Click the left mouse button.

Right-click

Click the right mouse button.

Double-click

Click the mouse button twice without moving the


mouse.

Shift-click

V+[

Hold down Shift and click left mouse button.

Click OK

[ or j

Click OK with the mouse or press the Enter key


on the keyboard to complete the action.

Keyboard conventions
Shortcut

Description

C+S

While holding down the Control key (Ctrl), press the


lowercase letter S key.

C+V+H

While holding down the Control key (Ctrl), press Shift and
the H key.

For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts, see Keyboard Shortcuts.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

PART I

OBJECT-BASED
EMBROIDERY
Designs created in ES Designer are composed of embroidery objects. They
are called objects because they are discrete entities which can be
manipulated independently of each other. Each object has certain defining
characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. The
most important property of an embroidery object is its stitch type.

Basic procedures
This section describes how to start ES Designer, how to open designs, start
new ones and use the basic commands. It also explains how to turn on and
off the grid and measure distances on-screen. You will also find out how to
select machine formats for different output as well as how to save designs.
The section also explains the procedure for entering security codes. See
Basic Procedures for details.

Working with design objects


This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and
keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs or by
using the Color-Object List. See Working with Design Objects for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

10

Viewing designs
This section explains the design viewing modes available in ES Designer as
well as the various design viewing settings. It also describes how to view
designs by traveling through the stitching sequence. Design colorways are
explained, as well as how to obtain and modify design information. See
Viewing Designs for details.

ES 2006

Object-Based Embroidery

11

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

Embroidery digitizing consists of turning the basic shapes of a design into


embroidery objects. Different tools are suited to different shapes. You can
digitize them manually by marking points along an outline, or by using
smart tools which transform shapes automatically into embroidery objects.

Planning designs
High quality embroidery starts with good design and forward planning.

Artwork
Artwork in both bitmap and vector formats can be inserted, pasted or
scanned into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdrops. Unless you are
an experienced digitizer, do not use complicated artwork. Possible sources
include:










books of embroidery patterns


childrens story books
printed table cloths or tea towels
business cards, post cards and wrapping paper
clipart libraries from your word processing or graphics programs
internet or CD clipart libraries
samples in the Wilcom ES Design folder
original artworke.g. childrens drawings.

Note Be sure to check the copyright of any images you have not created
yourself. If unsure, contact the company and seek their permission.

Design shapes and stitching sequence


Before digitizing, you need to analyze and plan design shapes and stitching
sequence carefully. Design shapes need to be clearly defined to make them
easy to embroider. The best shapes have relatively constant width, with
smooth edges, no sharp turns and no small, protruding details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

12

The digitizing sequence defines the stitching sequence, or order in which


shapes are stitched out. Of course you can always change the sequence to
improve the stitchoutfor example, to minimize color changes. Details
should be stitched last.
1

details last

2
3
4

Completed design
Good design is enhanced by the use of the correct backing, tension and a
good quality embroidery machine. Keep the following points in mind when
digitizing your design and assessing the final output:

design looks
goodshapes, colors,
balance
shapes are filled with
correct fill and outline
stitches

details are clearly


defined

stitches are angled to


match shapes

lettering is clear and


easy to read

The stitched-out design should also have the following characteristics:







ES 2006

The design stitches out efficiently on the machine.


Stitches are neat, smooth and even.
Shapes are stitched correctlyno unwanted gaps.
The fabric has not puckered around the stitched areas.
The design is free of loose ends.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

13

Digitizer tablet
If you are using a digitizer tablet, you
need to prepare an enlargement drawing
from the artwork and place it on the
digitizer tablet. After registering the
drawing, you digitize it using the digitizer
puck. See Using Digitizing Tablets for
details.

Object-based embroidery
Designs created in ES Designer are composed of embroidery objects. They
are called objects because they are discrete entities which can be
manipulated independently of each other. Each object has certain defining
characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. The
most important property of an embroidery object is its stitch type.

Working with design objects


ES Designer provides various ways to select the objects in an embroidery
design. Modify the design as a whole or select individual objects for more
precise modification. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select
objects and colors in designs and access their properties. Use it to group and
ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects as well. See Working
with Design Objects for details.

Viewing designs
ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with
your designs. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at
actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview
window. Pan the design to move it across the design window instead of
scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

14

Show or hide various design elements with


the available display settings. You can show
or hide outlines, needle penetration points,
connectors, stitch angles, machine function
symbols and the stitches themselves. You
can also view designs in TrueView.
When working with embroidery designs, you
need to understand the stitching sequence.
Check this by traveling through the design
stitch-by-stitch. You can also check it by
slowly redrawing the design on-screen. You
can also preview a design in different colors
on different fabrics by selecting from among
any number of pre-defined colorways.

Normal view

ES Designer gives you comprehensive


information about your designs. Even before
opening a design, you can check the
software version number and other design
TrueView
information for EMB files directly from
Windows Explorer. View stitching details in
the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet also provides
essential production information, including a design preview, the size of the
design, color sequence and any special instructions. See Viewing Designs for
details.

Digitizing designs
In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects.
These are like ordinary vector objects in that they have certain defining
characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They
also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density.

Digitizing methods
The process of creating embroidery objects on-screen is called digitizing.
Like the creation of designs in graphics applications, this involves the use of

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

15

input or digitizing tools. These are similar to drawing tools except that the
end result is an embroidery rather than a vector object.
large irregular shape
(Complex Fill)

line (Run)
columns of varying width (Input A)
narrow columns (Input C)
turning stitches (Input B)

Different tools are suited to creating different shapes or design elements.


There are specific tools for digitizing larger complex shapes, asymmetrical
columns of turning stitches, columns of varying width, columns of fixed
width, lines, and even individual stitches. See Digitizing Methods for details.

Fill and outline stitches


The most important property of all embroidery objects is the stitch type. The
software uses object outlines and associated stitch type to generate
stitches. Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are
regenerated according to its stitch type and settings.

Run for lines


Tatami for large
shapes

Satin for narrow


shapes

Stitch types divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Satin fills
are generally suited to columns and borders. Tatami stitch is used to fill
larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Run stitch, Backstitch, and
Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Both
Zigzag and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is frequently used
for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the cover stitch. Both
can also be used for decorative effect. See Fill and Outline Stitches for
details.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

16

Colorways and thread charts


When digitizing, you select thread colors for each object you create from the
color palette. This contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each
design or color scheme.
Colorway 1

Colorway 2

The particular colorway represents the actual thread colors in which a


design will be stitched. In fact you can define multiple color schemes and
switch between them. This has important implications for sales
presentations as well as production. You can also print multiple colorways,
design backgrounds, and icons of color blocks together with the production
worksheet.
For each colorway you define, you can
select colors from commercial thread
charts or define your own. Search for
particular threads by various criteria.
Automatic thread color matching helps
you locate thread colors based on
closest match across one or several
thread charts. You can also match
thread colors from imported
graphicsvector or bitmap. See
Colorways and Thread Charts for

1
2
3
4
5

details.

Connecting embroidery objects


Connectors link objects in a design. They can be run stitches or jumps. You
can use automatic settings to generate connectors, trims and tie-offs, or
add them manually.
connector

trim

ES 2006

stitching starts

Wilcom ES Online Manual

17

Travel runs are typically used to connect segments within filled objects.
Adjust travel run length to reduce stitch count. See Connecting Embroidery
Objects for details.

Improving stitch quality


ES Designer provides many techniques for achieving smooth, even
placement of stitches, and eliminating gaps in your designs. Strengthen and
stabilize designs with automatic underlay.

with underlay

without underlay

Compensate for fabric stretch with pull compensation. Reduce stitch


bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing. Adjust stitch density
for more efficient production and remove small stitches automatically.
Control corner stitching with Smart Corners and fine-tune handling of long
stitches with Auto Split and Auto Jump. Set automatic start and end points.

with no effects

with Auto Split

with Auto Jump

These features are all object properties and can be applied, removed or
modified at will. See Improving Stitch Quality for details.

Digitizing with artwork


There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be
imported into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdropsvector and
bitmap. To create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create
suitable artwork of either format.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

18

Digitizing with vector images


ES Designer provides tools to draw shapes and outlines directly on screen.
Alternatively, insert or paste vector images created in third-party drawing
packages for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the
same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for vector object
outlines and fills. When working with overlapping vector or embroidery
objects, merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools.

Vector images have the advantage over bitmap images that they can be
converted directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods.
This allows you to concentrate on design shapes without having to think
about stitch properties and sequence. See Digitizing with Vector Images for
details.

vector image
converted to
embroidery design

Digitizing with bitmap images


Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer and cropped
for use as digitizing templates or backdrops. These help you to:






digitize shapes manually


digitize shapes automatically with Point & Stitch
digitize complete images automatically with Smart Design
digitize photographs with Photo Flash.

Scan artwork directly into ES Designer and edit it before use. Open images
directly in MS Paint, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images
updated in this way are automatically re-imported into ES Designer.
Alternatively, insert bitmap images saved on your hard disk into

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

19

ES Designer. Show or hide them as you digitize. See Digitizing with Bitmap
Images for details.

Preparing images for automatic digitizing


ES Designer supports the automatic and semi-automatic digitizing of both
bitmap images and vector images. The quality of the resulting designs
greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork. In order to
make bitmap imagesboth outlined and non-outlinedmore suitable for
automatic digitizing, ES Designer provides image processing capabilities
and links to graphics packages. See Preparing Images for Automatic
Digitizing for details.

Bitmap image scaled and background


removedready for manual digitizing

Areas recolored and outlines


improvedready for automatic digitizing

Automatic digitizing
ES Designer provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques for
automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork. See Automatic Digitizing
for details.
All colors omitted
except black

Background color
omitted

 The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector
objects. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a
variety of input methods.

 The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes
in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

20

 Smart Design automatic digitizing is intended for people working at all


levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design automatically converts
bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery.

 Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from


photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles
the output of a line printer.
gray scale
image

digitized with
Photo Flash

Modifying designs
After digitizing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects
or even individual stitches.

Combining and resequencing objects


ES Designer provides techniques for
combining and resequencing
objects. You can add to designs by
duplicating and copying objects.
Combine designs. Split objects into
smaller ones and remove overlaps
between objects. See Combining
and Resequencing Objects for
details.
The stitching sequence
naturally occurs in the order
in which the design was
digitized. The Color-Object
List displays a sequential list
of objects grouped by object
and color. It provides an easy
way to group, cut, copy and
paste, and resequence

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

21

selected objects and color blocks. See Selecting and viewing objects with
the Color-Object List for details. See also Resequencing embroidery objects.
Group objects together to apply a
change to them all at once. Better
still, apply Branching to join
like-objects to form a single
branched object. Objects are
resequenced, connectors
minimized, component objects
grouped, and stitches regenerated.
Apply an underlay to all. See
Automatic branching for details.

Arranging and transforming objects


ES Designer also provides techniques for
arranging and transforming objects. Change the
position, size and orientation of objects by
moving, scaling, rotating, skewing, and mirroring
them. Group objects together to apply universal
changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional
modification. Modify objects directly on-screen or
using the Object Properties dialog. Access
commonly used functions via the Color-Object
List. See Arranging and Transforming Objects for
details.

Converting and reshaping objects


There are also techniques available for converting
and reshaping objects. Convert among vector and
embroidery objects of different types at all stages
of the design. The points you mark when digitizing
a shape become its control points. These vary
slightly with the object type. Use them to edit or
transform objectse.g. reshaping, scaling, letter
spacing, changing entry and exit points. Modify
stitch angles of selected objects. Add multiple
stitch angles as required. See Converting and
Reshaping Objects for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

22

Editing stitches and machine functions


Techniques are available for specialist stitch and
machine function editing. In essence, you edit
individual stitches like any other object, moving
the needlepoint position as required.
ES Designer also lets you manually insert
machine functions and modify them. This
flexibility allows you to adapt designs to almost
any machine requirement. A Stitch List is
available to help you locate stitches and
machine functions. See Editing Stitches and
Machine Functions for details.

Advanced digitizing techniques


ES Designer provides specialized productivity features as well as special
effects and digitizing techniques.

Object properties, styles and templates


Every object you create in ES Designer has a unique set of properties that
are stored with it whenever you save the design. You can set the properties
of a selected object to be the current property settings. You can also apply
current property settings to existing objects. A style is a group of property
settings stored under a unique name. You can save any combination of
settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply these settings to selected
embroidery and lettering objects. Templates are special files used to store
styles and default property settings. See Object Properties, Styles and
Templates for details.
Style 1

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Style 2

23

Specialized digitizing techniques


ES Designer provides specialized
digitizing features to save time as
you digitize, and for special
effects and machine functions.
There are input tools for digitizing
circles, stars, rings and appliqu
objects, as well as methods for
creating repeated or backtracked
duplicates, adding borders or
filling holes. See Specialized Digitizing Techniques for details.

Borders
Add attractive borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields to
designs using the Borders symbol set. When you add a border, it is
automatically sized to fit the current design. See Adding borders to designs
for details.

Appliqu
Automatically create all the stitching you need for
appliqu using Auto Appliqu. Simply extract
appliqu shapes from a design to a separate file.
See Digitizing for appliqu for details.
Tip Cross stitch is sometimes combined with
appliqu for special effects. Cross stitch is a popular
technique for filling large areas with low stitch
counts. It can also be used for outlines and borders.
It is suitable for homeware, tablecloths, childrens clothes and folk designs.
See ES Cross Stitch Supplement for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

24

Textured fills
ES Designer provides special tools to create textured effects from needle
penetrations. Apply offset fractions and partition lines to Tatami fills to
create split-line patterns.

Tatami Offset

Partition Lines

Random Factor

Alternatively, apply Program Split or Flexi Split to create decorative fills


from pre-defined patterns of needle penetrations. Select from the library or
create your own. With User Defined Split, create your own split lines when
you want to add detail to filled objects. See Textured Fills for details.

Program Split

Flexi Split

User Defined Split

Artistic stitch effects


ES Designer provides many artistic effects and stitch types to create
textured and contoured fill stitching. Use Jagged Edge to create rough
edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and other fluffy textures. Accordion
Spacing varies stitch spacing between dense and open fill, producing
shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually. The Color

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

25

Blending effect creates interesting perspective, shading and color effects by


blending two colored layers.

Jagged Edge with


Tatami backstitch

Accordion Spacing
with circles

Tatami with Color


Blending

Apply Trapunto effect to force


underlying travel runs to the
edges of an object so that they
cant be seen through open
stitching. See Connecting
Embroidery Objects for details.
Create chiaroscuro effects with
Contour. Choose between Standard and Spiral. For another type of curved
effect, use Florentine Effect to curve needle penetrations along a digitized
line. Liquid Effect allows you to enter twin curves. See Artistic Stitch Effects
for details.

Contour spiral

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Open fill with


Trapunto

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

Single curve with


Florentine Effect

26

Motif runs and fills


Motifs are pre-defined design
elements, such as hearts,
leaves or border patterns. They
generally consist of one or more
simple objects, and are stored
in a special motif set. Use Motif
Run and Motif Fill to create
ornamental runs and textured
fills. Create your own motifs or
use the ones provided with the
software. Motifs can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the same way as
other objects. Using 3D Warp with motif fills, you can also create interesting
three dimensional effects. See Motif Runs and Fills for details.

Sequins and boring


Some embroidery machines are equipped with a
sequin dispenser that drops sequins onto the
garment as it stitches. Some are also equipped
with a boring knife or needle to cut holes in the
fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. Often the
two techniques are used in combination.
ES Designer provides support for both.
ES Designer provides a dedicated set of Sequin
tools which allow you to digitize sequined designs
for compatible machines. Create sequin runs along
digitized lines, either placing sequins manually or
letting the software generate placement positions
according to current settings. The Sequin tools also
allow you to digitize individual sequins for even
greater control. If your embroidery machine is
equipped with a boring knife or needle, you can use
the Borers tool to cut holes in the fabric, producing
an effect similar to lace. See Sequins and Boring for
details.

Embroidery lettering
Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large
range of scalable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy
stitching alphabets to choose from.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

27

Creating embroidery lettering


Add lettering directly to designs using current settings or with the aid of the
dialog. With object-based operation, you can type and manipulate your text
directly on-screen, changing the size or spacings to fit. Apply formatting just
like a word processor, including italics, bolding, and right/left justification.
Change values for the whole text or for individual letters. See Creating
Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering layout


ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numeric control over
many settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and
lettering objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved
baselines. Modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as
position. You can even define the rotation angle of letters relative to the
baseline or the design itself. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering stitch settings


When it comes to stitching, you can fine-tune the density, add pull
compensation and underlay, or change to center-out stitching. Like all
embroidery objects, each lettering object has its own stitch properties.
Adjust settings at any stage. ES Designer also gives you precise control over
the stitch angles of individual letters. You can also specify the join method

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

28

and stitching sequence you prefer. See Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings
for details.

Special lettering features


Add special characters and symbols to your lettering. Create interesting
distortions using lettering envelopes. See Creating special effects with
envelopes for details.

Bridge

Pennant

Perspective

Diamond

Use the Team Names feature to create designs with multiple names. For
example, use the same logo with different names for sports teams or
corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same
design. See Team lettering for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

29

Custom alphabets
Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery
alphabet. See Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets for
details.

Typically spacing between certain character pairs appears uneven due to the
optical illusion of having straight lines and curves side-by-side. Automatic
kerning is a user-defined option allowing you to customize kerning. See
Automatic letter kerning for details.

Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its
appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. ES Designer lets
you save the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple
versions of the same letter within the same alphabet. See User-refined
alphabets for details.
Letter a opened
up at smaller size

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Default a too narrow


at small size

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

30

You can even create your own custom alphabets. Alternatively, modify an
existing alphabet for special applications. See Creating custom alphabets for
details.

Merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone alphabet
merging utility. See Merging alphabets for details.

Design processing & encoding


Design processing and encoding involve all the important, back-end
operations of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you
actually output your designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For
this, you will need an understanding of embroidery file types as well as
different machine formats. Depending on your setup, you will also need an
understanding of traditional storage media including embroidery disks and
paper tapes.

Processing design files


By default ES Designer saves to its native file format, EMB. This format
contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later
modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats,
ES Designer converts the design internally to EMB format. You can then
modify it using the full range of ES Designer features. Depending on the file
type, you may need to provide additional information to assist ES Designer
in the conversion process. ES Designer also supports the processing of
Melco CND outline files, including color merging and reassignment of colors.
See Processing Design Files for details.

Changing machine formats


Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their
own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can
stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the
embroidery machine. When you select a machine format, ES Designer
translates the digitized design into machine functions that can be

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

31

understood by that machine. If required, you can customize machine


formats to meet specific machine requirements. See Changing Machine
Formats for details.

Outputting designs
You can output embroidery designs in a variety of wayssaving to
embroidery disk, punching to paper tape, sending appliqu shapes to a
cutter, or sending directly to machine for stitching. From the same design
file, you can also output a production worksheet for the embroidery machine
operator. Designers frequently want to distribute their designs so that they
can be seen in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise. In ES Designer you can
save both design images and production worksheets to disk or email them
direct. See Outputting Designs for details.

Embroidery disks and paper tapes


Embroidery disks are specially formatted floppy disks used to transfer
designs from computer to embroidery machine. You can format embroidery
disks and save designs to them from within ES Designer. The format you
use will depend on the selected embroidery machine. You can also open
designs from embroidery disk directly into ES Designer.
Paper tape is the traditional medium for storing designs in stitch data
format. You can read paper tape designs of various formats into
ES Designer. Once a design is read, you can output it without change,
modify it and output it in its original format, or save it as an EMB file. You
can also punch designs to paper tape from ES Designer. See Embroidery
Disks and Paper Tapes for details.

Design management
ES Designer provides a number of productivity tools to help you manage
designs and design elements for re-use. The Embroidery Clipart feature is
a powerful productivity tool which makes whole designs and design
fragments easily available. ES Design Explorer provides an efficient way for
viewing and managing embroidery designs in folders.
Note ES Design Explorer is not a multi-user database for company-wide
design management. Wilcom Design Workflow is a central design storage
and management application. Any design format that can be read by
ES Designer can be stored in Design Workflow. Design Workflow uses

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

32

Microsoft SQL technology and is a true multi-user tool, allowing far greater
control of designs throughout your company. For this type of requirement,
refer to the Design Workflow User Manual.

Embroidery Clipart
The Embroidery Clipart feature allows you to recycle
commonly used design elements and greatly speeds up the
process of creating new designs. Use the clipart library to
permanently store useful embroidery elements and assign
keywords to them. Summary information such as width and
height, number of stitches and colors is automatically
recorded.
The library displays all design elements currently recorded to
your personal database. Behind this functionality is the
powerful Microsoft Data Engine or MSDE. Sort and search
functionality is provided to filter your list according to name,
keywords, number of colors, or number of stitches. Once a
suitable design element is located, simply drag and drop it
as embroidery clipart into the current project.
Automatically find the nearest match between selected
clipart element colors and the current palette. See Embroidery Clipart for
details.

ES Design Explorer
With ES Design Explorer, you can browse design files stored on your
computer hard disk, CD-ROM, or floppy disk, as well as cut, copy, paste and
delete them. It recognizes all design file formats used by ES Designer. See
ES Design Explorer Basics for details.
Designs in ES Design Explorer
folders can be sorted in various
ways. This is useful when you
want to select designs for
stitching out, printing,
archiving, and so on. Once a
design is selected in an
ES Design Explorer folder, you
can send it direct to an
embroidery machine or
punching machine. You can also
batch-convert your EMB and
other design files to and from
other file formats directly from ES Design Explorer. See ES Design Explorer
Advanced Functions for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

33

Create design catalogs containing thumbnail images and/or summary


information. These can be sent to a printer, published on your website or
intranet, and exported in formats suitable for spreadsheet and database
programs, and for integration with third-party e-commerce solutions.
Archive design files in folders with the built-in WinZip utility. This can be
useful for sending or receiving multiple files via email. You can even view
design files within zipped archives.

ES 2006

Chapter 1

Digitizing with Wilcom ES

34

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

Wilcom ES software is an MS Windows-based product incorporating many of


the conventions with which most PC users are already familiar. To start using
ES Designer, you need to understand something about the organization of
the graphical user interface (GUI) as well as a few basic procedures such as
opening and saving designs. Other basic procedures include displaying the
grid, accessing design information, and selecting machine formats.

Security codes enable access to features within the software. You also need
to be able to identify your systems access codes, and enter new codes for
upgrades.
This section describes how to start ES Designer, how to open designs, start
new ones and use the basic commands. It also explains how to turn on and
off the grid and measure distances on-screen. You will also find out how to
select machine formats for different output as well as how to save designs.
The section also explains the procedure for entering security codes.

Starting ES Designer
Double-click to start ES Designer.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

35

Open ES Designer using the desktop icon or the Windows Start menu. The
screen image shown here displays an exploded view of all toolbars in the
product.

To start ES Designer

 Double-click the ES Designer shortcut icon on the Windows desktop.


Alternatively, select Programs > Wilcom ES > ES Designer from the
Start menu. ES Designer opens with a new, blank design (Design1).
Title and Menu bars
Standard toolbar
Stitch Types toolbar
Show Vertical toolbar
Pointer toolbar
Input toolbar
Travel toolbar
Image toolbar

Status bar
Prompt line
Design Window

Color toolbar

General object properties

 Customize the design window by showing or hiding the grid, changing


the grid dimensions, and showing and hiding toolbars. See Displaying
the grid and Showing or hiding toolbars for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

36

 The Status and Prompt bars include a General Properties panel for
continuous display and routine modification of general object properties.
See also Accessing object properties.
Stitch type and
current settings
Status bar
Prompt line
Stitch count
Coordinates of current
needle position

Length and angle of


current stitch

General properties
permanently available

Current color
Current function

Using commands and tools


Once you start ES Designer, you use commands or tools, and dialogs to
complete your tasks. You select commands in ES Designer in the same way
as other Windows applicationsfrom menus, toolbars, or popup menus.
Dialogs provide the other principal way of engaging with the system. They
come in two formsmodal and modeless. Modal dialogs effectively lock the
system until you have finished with them. The idea of the modeless dialog
is that you can keep it open as long as you need to while working
interactively with different settings. Keyboard shortcuts are also available
for the most frequently used commands. See Quick Reference for details.

Showing or hiding toolbars


Use Show Pointer Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Pointer
toolbar.
Use Show Input Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Input
toolbar.
Use Show Travel Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Travel
toolbar.
Use Show Image Toolbar (Show Vertical toolbar) to display the Image
toolbar.
Toolbars provide quick and easy access to most ES Designer commands. You
can choose to show or hide them for convenience.
Tip To increase your working area, hide unwanted toolbars and use the
menu and keyboard commands instead. See also Quick Reference.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

37

To show or hide toolbars


1

Select View > Toolbars.


The Toolbars dialog opens.

Select the toolbars you want to display.

Click OK.
Tip Use the buttons on the Show Vertical toolbar to display the Pointer,
Input, Travel, and Image toolbars on the side of the design window.

Toolbar docking and parking


ES Designer toolbars are dockable. To move a toolbar to a more convenient
location, click-and-drag it. To dock it in its normal position, double-click the
toolbar title. The toolbar parking feature allows you to make better use of
available screen real estate.
Click-and-drag toolbars and
modeless dialogs into
toolbar park

By default, the Toolbar Park toolbar is situated just above the design
window. Simply drag and drop any toolbar into the Park to move it out of
the way. Click the tab and drag it back out when you need it. You can also
park the Color-Object List, the Color Palette Editor, and the Object

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

38

Properties dialog. The Toolbar Park toolbar itself can be docked at the
bottom of the screen.
Tip A toolbar parked in the Toolbar Park area is automatically removed by
deactivating it in the Toolbars dialog.

Selecting commands from toolbars


Toolbars provide quick and easy access to ES Designer commands. Click a
toolbar button to activate a command or, where applicable, right-click to set
its properties. Some icons are toggles which turn on or off associated
functions.

To select commands from toolbars

 Rest the pointer over a tool icon to see its name in a tooltip.
 Click the icon to activate the command.
 Right-click to adjust settings or activate the secondary command.
 If the tool has both left and right-click commands, the name is split
with a slash (/). For example, the Polygon Select/Line Select tool
lets you select objects within a polygon when you click it, or objects
along a line when you right-click.

 For many tools, right-clicking accesses current command settings.


For example, left-clicking Satin/Values selects Satin as the stitch
type, while right-clicking accesses Satin stitch settings in the Object
Properties dialog.

Note Object properties can be modified with or without objects


selected. The former affects only selected objects. The latter affects
current settings. See Working with object properties for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

39

Using popup menus


Generally speaking, popup menus of context-specific commands can be
accessed from the design window as well as some modeless dialogs.

To use popup menus


1

Right-click a selected object/s in the design window or modeless dialog


such as the Color-Object List.
The popup menu opens.

Select a command from the menu.


Tip A frequently used command is Properties. This opens the Object
Properties dialog for selected objects. See Accessing object properties
for details.

Accessing object properties


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to set properties for selected
objects.
The most important dialog in ES Designer is the Object Properties dialog.
This is a modeless dialog, meaning that it stays in the design window as
long as you need it. Use it together with a General Properties toolbar to
adjust properties of selected objects as you work.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

40

To access object properties


1

Open the Object Properties dialog by any of the following means:






Select View > Object Properties.


Click the Object Properties icon.
Double-click an object in the design window.
Right-click an object in the design window and select Properties
from the popup menu.

 Right-click an object in the Color-Object List and select Properties


from the popup menu.

Select required
tab

Adjust settings

Scroll to view
dialog

Apply settings

ES 2006

Select a tab to access the object property set you want to adjust.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

41

Use dropdown lists, radio buttons and checkboxes to choose options.


Adjust settings by keying in precise values or by using the popup slider
control.

After clicking
swivel button, drag
popup slider to set

Click swivel button


to invoke slider
control

Radio buttons are


mutually exclusive

Checkboxes are
optional

Tip The slider control has two operating modesNormal and


Accelerated. Holding down the Ctrl key puts it in Accelerated mode.
4

Apply settings by means of the control buttons at the bottom of the


dialog.
Revert to previous settings
Apply current settings to
selected object/s

Save settings to the


current template

Click to invoke the


effects tabs

Click to invoke help


about a particular tab

Note You have the choice of applying changes to object properties


immediately or by means of the Apply button. See Setting Object
Property apply options for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

42

Click the FX button to access a separate set of more specialized object


property settings such as Accordion Spacing, Stitch Shortening, Smart
Corners, etc.

General properties
permanently available on
right side of status bar

Click to apply
or revert

Adjust general object propertieswidth, height, positionby means of


the General Properties controls at the bottom of the screen where they
are permanently available.
Tip The Object Properties dialog can be temporarily parked in the new
Toolbar Park toolbar for easy access. See Toolbar docking and parking
for details.

Close the Object Properties dialog by any of the following means:

 Click the Object Properties icon.


 Click the X icon in the Object Properties dialog to close.
Undoing and redoing commands
Use Undo icon (Standard toolbar) to undo an action and Undo Arrow to
undo a range of actions.
Use Redo icon (Standard toolbar) to redo an action and Redo Arrow to redo
a range of actions.
You can undo the effects of most commands. If you change your mind, you
can redo them again. ES Designer remembers up to 256 undo and redo
command actions.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

43

To undo and redo commands

 To undo a previous command, simply click the Undo icon.


When ES Designer cannot remember more commands, Undo is
dimmed.

 Click Redo to re-apply an undone command.


 To undo or redo a range of actions, use the dropdown lists by clicking
the arrow next to Undo/Redo icons.

Redo selected
actions
Undo selected
actions

Tip To cancel the current selection in the Undo/Redo List or close it, click
the Undo/Redo Arrow button again or click away the list without
selecting any action.

Opening designs
Use Open (Standard toolbar) to open an existing design.
ES Designer opens a comprehensive range of both outline and stitch files.
You can also open designs from proprietary embroidery disks, or read them
from paper tape. See also Embroidery design formats and Embroidery Disks
and Paper Tapes in the Online Manual.
Warning You cannot open EMB files created with a later version of the
software than the one you are currently running.

To open a design
1

ES 2006

Click the Open icon.

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

44

The Open dialog opens.

preview panel

design data

preview on/off

Select a folder from the Look In list.

If the design is not in EMB format, select a file type from the Files of
Type list.

Select a design or designs.

 To select a range of items, hold down Shift then select the first and
last in the range.

 To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.


5

Select the Preview checkbox to preview the design (for supported file
formats) together with the design data. This includes stitch and color
numbers, design height and width, and software version number (V6.0
onwards).
Tip For more information about a selected file, right-click and select
Properties from the popup menu. See Viewing design information in
Windows Explorer for details.

For file types other than EMB or ESD, click Options and change the
recognition options. See Processing Design Files for details.

Click Open.

Creating new designs


When you start ES Designer, a new fileDesign1is automatically created,
ready for you to start digitizing. By default, Design1 is based on the
NORMAL template. Templates contain pre-set styles, default settings or
objects, to make digitizing quicker and easier. When you create a file based

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

45

on a template, the templates values are copied to the new design. You can
create additional designs based on the NORMAL template, or select a
different template. New designs are given a name, and numbered
sequentiallye.g. Design1, Design2, and so on. See also Working with
design templates.

Creating new designs with the NORMAL template


Use New (Standard toolbar) to start a new design with the NORMAL
template.
Whenever you click the New icon, a blank design opens in the design window
using the default NORMAL template.

To create a new design with the NORMAL template

 Click the New icon.


A blank design opens in the design window.
Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See
Saving designs for details.

Creating new designs with selected templates


Use New (File menu) to start a new design with a selected template.
You can select a custom template to base your new design on. See also
Working with design templates.

To create a new design with a selected template


1

Select File > New.


The New dialog opens.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

46

Note If there is no template other than the default, the New dialog may
not appear.
2

Select a template from the list.

Click OK.
Tip Whenever you create a new design, save it with a new name. See
Saving designs for details.

Generating stitches
Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or
selected objects.
With ES Designer designs, stitches are automatically generated from design
outlines and properties. You can either generate stitches as you digitize, or
wait until you have defined the outlines. With Generate Stitches on (the
default), stitches are calculated for new objects whenever you press Enter.
They are also updated whenever you scale, transform or move the object.
If speed is an issue, you can digitize objects with Generate Stitches off. You
can also select objects and remove all generated stitches. With Generate
Stitches off, only object outlines appear.

To generate stitches

 To generate stitches for new or selected objects, click the Generate


Stitches icon or press G.
If any objects are selected, stitches are generated for them
automatically. If no objects are currently selected, stitches are
generated for new objects as soon as you press Enter.

 To remove stitches, or digitize without generating stitches, deselect


Generate Stitches icon or press G again.
Tip Make sure Show Outlines is selected, and the colors of background
and object(s) when selected contradict each other, otherwise the objects
will not be visible in the design window. See Changing background colors
and fabrics for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

47

Displaying grids, rulers and guides


ES Designer provides a set of grid lines to help accurately align or size
embroidery objects. The Show Rulers and Guides feature improves
usability by allowing you to accurately position stitches and align objects in
the design.

Displaying the grid


Click Show Grid (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the grid. Right-click to
change the Grid settings.
Use grid lines to help accurately align or size embroidery objects. You can
show or hide the grid at any time. Default grid spacing is 10 mm x 10 mm.

To display the grid

 Toggle grid display by any of the following means:


 Click the Show Grid icon.
 Select Special > Options > Grid and Guides tab and select the
Show Grid option.

Show Grid

 Select View > Grid and Guides tab and select the Show Grid option.
 Press Shift+G.
Tip You can change grid spacing, select a reference point and turn Snap
to Grid on or off in the Options dialog. You can also change the color of
the grid lines. See Changing display colors for details. See also Setting
grid options.

Displaying rulers and guides


Click Show Rulers and Guides (Standard toolbar) to show or hide rulers and
guides. Right-click to change the Guides settings.
Drag the Ruler Zero Point to reset a new ruler zero point.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

48

Rulers are located to the top and left side of the design window. The unit of
measurementmm or inchesdepends on the regional settings in the
Windows Control Panel. The ruler scale, illustrated with numbers and ticks,
depends on the zoom setting. Guides are dotted vertical and horizontal lines
placed across the design window to help you align objects. Each guide has
a yellow guide handle on the ruler that can be used to move or delete it.
Guides are displayed on top of the grid, if present, but beneath all images,
vector objects and embroidery objects. Rulers must be displayed before a
guide can be created.

Note By default, rulers and guides are switched on. When they are
switched off, guides are hidden but are stored in the design and will
reappear when switched back on.

To display rulers and guides

 Toggle ruler display by any of the following means:


 Click the Show Rulers and Guides icon.
 Select Special > Options > Grid and Guides tab and select the
Show Rulers and Guides option.
Show Rulers and
Guides

 Select View > Grid and Guides tab and select the Show Rulers and
Guides option.

 Press Ctrl+R.
Click-and-drag to
reset ruler zero
point
Click-and-drag to
reposition guides
Click ruler to
create new guide
Drag guide off
ruler to remove

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

49

 Reset the ruler zero point by clicking and dragging the box in the top
left-hand corner of the design window to the required point in the
design.
The point where you release the mouse becomes the new zero
pointX,Y (0,0). The grid always lines up with the rulers. Whenever the
ruler zero is changed, the Set Reference Point checkbox in Special >
Options > Grid tab is deselected.

 To create a guide, click on either rulerhorizontal or verticaland


click-and-drag it into position. Multiple guides can be created and just as
easily removed.

 For more accurate positioning of guides, double-click the yellow handle.


In the Guide Position dialog, enter a precise distance from the zero
point, and click OK.

Enter precise
position

Note The ruler zero and the design zero are not the same and in
general do not coincide. When the zero point of the rulers is changed,
the guides maintain their current displacement from the zero point of
the design, not the zero point of the rulers.

 To remove a guide, drag the yellow guide handle off the design window.
Tip You can turn Snap to Grid and Snap to Guide on or off in the
Options dialog. You can also change the color of grid and guidelines. See
Changing display colors for details. See also Setting grid options.

Measuring distances on-screen


Use Measure (View menu) to measure distances on-screen.
Measure the distance between two points on screen using the Measure
command. You can show these measurements in a tooltip. Measurements
are shown in millimeters or inches, depending on the option selected in the
Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for more
information.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

50

Tip For more accurate results, zoom in before you measure. The
measurement is always the actual size, and is not affected by the zoom
factor.

To measure a distance on-screen


1

Select View > Measure or press M.

Click the start point.

Move the pointer to the end point and hold the mouse still.
The following information displays in the Status bar:

 Position coordinates of the end point (X=, Y=)


 Length of the measured line (L=)
 Angle of the line relative to the horizontal (A=).

Tip If turned on, the measurements will also appear in tooltips. Use the
tooltip with the crosshair cursor on for a more accurate measurement.
See Setting other options for details.

measurements
appear as tooltip

Press Esc to finish.

Selecting machine formats


Select the Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to select a machine format.
Before you start digitizing, decide which machine format to use. A designs
machine format can be changed at any time for stitching to another machine
type, or sending to a paper tape punch or embroidery disk.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

51

To select a machine format


1

Select Machine > Select Machine Format.


The Select Machine Format dialog opens.

Select machine
format

Select a machine format from the list.


Note You can customize or add formats to suit the embroidery machine
you will use to stitch the design. See Creating custom formats or
Adjusting standard machine format settings in the Online Manual for
details.

Click OK.

Saving designs
Use Save (Standard toolbar) to save the current design. Right-click to open
the Save As dialog.
ES Designer lets you save designs in EMB as well as other outline and stitch
file formats. You can also save designs to proprietary embroidery disks, or
punch them to paper tape. See Embroidery design formats and Embroidery
Disks and Paper Tapes in the Online Manual. See also Saving designs for
machine.
Saving a design records its file name, location and format, and updates it
with any changes you make. When you save an existing design under a new
name, to a different location or format, you create a copy of the original
design.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

52

Tip Save your design early and often. Do not wait until you finish working.
You can also set ES Designer to save automatically while you work. See
Setting automatic save and backup options for details.

To save a design
1

Click the Save icon.


If this is the first time you have saved the design, the Save As dialog
opens.
Tip To save changes to an existing file but preserve the original, use
Save As.

folder containing
design

design name
format list

Select the folder where you want to save the design from the Save In
list.

Enter a name for the design in the File name field.

Select a file format from the Save as type list. See Supported
embroidery file formats for details.
Warning If a design feature is not available in the file type you select,
it will be convertede.g. Flexi Split stitching may be changed to plain
Tatami.

ES 2006

Click Save.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

53

Tip Files saved in EMB format are automatically compressed when


saved and decompressed when re-opened. This reduces the storage
space required, and makes it possible to save large files to floppy disk,
or send them as email attachments.
Once you have saved a design, every time you click Save on the toolbar
the file will be updated.

ES 2006

Chapter 2

Basic Procedures

54

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

ES Designer provides various ways to select the objects in an embroidery


design. Modify the design as a whole or select individual objects for more
precise modification. The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select
objects and colors in designs and access their properties. Use it to group and
ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects as well.

Note In ES Designer vector objects and embroidery objects are in fact


inter-convertible since they share many of the same characteristics. See
also Digitizing with Vector Images.
This section describes how to select objects using the selection tools and
keyboard. It also shows how to select while traveling through designs or by
using the Color-Object List.

Selecting and deselecting objects


You can select all objects in a design, cancel all selections, or remove
individual objects from a selected group.

Selecting all objects in a design


Select all objects to apply changes to a whole design. See also Quick
Reference.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

55

To select all objects in a design

 Select Edit > Select All or press Ctrl+A.


Selection handles appear around the entire design.

no objects selected

all objects selected

 To deselect, select Edit > Deselect All, press X or Esc.


Deselecting objects
You can cancel all selections in the design, or remove individual objects from
a group of selected objects.

To deselect objects

 Deselect an object/s by any of the following means:







Click an empty area of the background.


Select a different object.
Press Esc or X to deselect all.
Select Edit > Deselect All to deselect all.

 Remove an object from a group of selection by holding down Ctrl and


clicking the object to deselect.

Selecting objects with Select Object


ES Designer provides various means for selecting objects including point
and click, and bounding box selection. You can also use the Select Object
tool in conjunction with Shift and Ctrl keys to select groups of objects.
ES Designer allows precise selection of object outlines or fill stitches. It also
allows selection of a solid color (for vector objects), fabric (for appliqus) or
the visible portion, after cropping, of a bitmap. See also Quick Reference.

ES 2006

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

56

Selecting objects by point & click


Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and click the object to select.
The simplest way to select objects is by pointing and clicking with the Select
Object toolthe default. With Shift and Ctrl keys, you can select multiple
objects. Filled objects can be selected by clicking their outlines or stitches.
Closed unfilled objects, such as drawing objects with no fill color, can only
be selected by clicking their outlines. Clicking an object outline selects the
object regardless of whether another object is on top. When clicking at a
point where two or more objects intersect, the last object in the sequence
is selected. Where you have a mixture of closed-curve objects, you can
select object outlines or fill stitches. Clicking within an objects extent box
but outside its outline does not select it. With low-density stitching and/or
at high zooms, it is actually possible to click between stitches and not select
the object.
Note ES Designer allows a degree of selection tolerance around stitches
and outlines when selecting, as though the lines were thicker. Selection
tolerance does not apply to color or fabric fills. When stitching has low
density and/or at high zooms, it is possible to click between stitches and not
select the object.

To select objects by point & click

 Click the object you want to select.


Selection handles appear around it. You can move the cursor anywhere
within these extents to click-and-drag the object.

OR

Click first object

Ctrl +

Hold down Ctrl and


click another object

Shift +

Hold down Shift and


click last object

 To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

57

Tip It helps to know the design stitching sequence for this method. See
Traveling by object for details.

 To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click.


Note Clicking within the objects extent box but outside its outline does
not select it.

 Where you have a mixture of closed-curve objects with or without fills,


you can select object outlines or fill stitches.

Clicking fill selects the object


even if it is within the bounds
of a larger object

Clicking fill behind an object


without fill selects the object

Clicking outline of object


selects the object

Tip To select an object which is sitting behind another object, zoom in


and position the cursor over the area where they overlap, and holding
down the 2 key, click until the second object is selected. Each click
selects the next overlapping object.

Selecting objects with a bounding box


Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and drag a bounding box around the
object to select.
With the Select Object tool activated, you can select objects by dragging a
bounding box around them. The selection tool is generally activated by
default.

To select objects with a bounding box

 Drag a bounding box around the objects you want to select.

ES 2006

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

58

Objects are selected when you release the mouse button.

Drag a bounding box around


the objects

Objects are selected

Note Only objects completely within the bounding box will be selected
when you release the mouse button. See also Grouping and ungrouping
objects.

Selecting objects on the fly


You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On
activated, or using the Select Object tool in conjunction with Shift, Ctrl and
Tab keys.

Selecting objects with Selects On


Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of objects as you travel
through the design.
The Selects On tool adds objects to the selection as you travel through the
stitching sequence.

To select objects with Selects On


1

Click the Selects On icon.

Click the Select Object icon.


Note If the Select Object tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.

Travel through the design. See Traveling by object for details.


As you travel, objects are added to the selection.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

59

Selecting objects while traveling through a design


Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) together with the Ctrl key to select
objects as you travel through a design.
You can select objects as you travel through the design using the Ctrl key.
Traveling is usually associated with checking the stitching sequence.

To select objects while traveling through a design


1

Click the Select Object icon.

Travel through the design, stopping just before the object to select. See
Traveling by object for details.

Stop before the first


object

Hold down Ctrl, and travel over the object to select it.
Note If an object is already selected, it is deselected when you travel
through it.

Hold down Ctrl and


travel by object

 To select more objects, continue traveling with Ctrl held down.


 To leave an object out of the selection, release Ctrl before you travel
through it.
Tip You can select the object you are currently traveling through by
pressing Shift+O or right-clicking the Select Object tool.

ES 2006

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

60

Selecting next or previous object


Click Select Object (Pointer toolbar) and press Tab or Shift + Tab to select
next or previous objects.
If an object is already selected, you can select the object before or after it
in the stitching sequence using Tab or Shift + Tab with the Select Object tool
activated. With no object selected, you can select the first or last object in
the design sequence.

To select next or previous object


1

Click the Select Object icon.

Select an object as required.

Do one of the following:

 Press Tab to select the next object in the stitching sequence.


 Press Shift + Tab to select the previous object in the stitching
sequence.
Tip Hold down Ctrl and press Tab or Shift + Tab to add the next or
previous objects to the selection.

Selecting objects with Polygon Select/Line Select


Sometimes the Select Object tool does not provide fine enough control. The
Polygon Select /Line Select tool lets you select individual objects by
drawing an outline around them or a line through them.
Tip To select an object which is behind another object, you can zoom in and
click the outline. Alternatively, position the pointer over the object, hold
down the 2 key, and click until the object is selected. Each click selects the
next overlapping object.

Selecting objects with Polygon Select


Click Polygon Select /Line Select (Pointer toolbar) to select objects with a
bounding box.
With the Polygon Select /Line Select tool you can select a specific object
by drawing a bounding box around it.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

61

To select objects with Polygon Select


1

Click the Polygon Select /Line Select icon.

Mark reference points around the object/s you want to select.

Mark reference
points around
object/s to select

The objects you want to select must be completely within the outline.
3

Press Enter to select.

Selecting objects with Line Select


Click Polygon Select/Line Select (Pointer toolbar) to draw a line through the
object to select.
With the Polygon Select /Line Select tool you can select a specific object
by drawing a line through it.

To select objects with Line Select


1

Right-click the Polygon Select/Line Select icon.

Mark two or more reference points to create a line touching all objects
you want to select.
Mark two
reference points

Any object intersected by the line is selected.


3

ES 2006

Press Enter to select.

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

62

Selecting related objects


You can select all objects of the same color or stitch type with a single
command. Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same
type.

Selecting objects by color


You can select all objects of the same color with a single command. Use this
feature to apply a change across all objects of the same color. See also
Viewing design objects by color.

To select objects by color


1

Select Edit > Select By > Color.


The Select By Color dialog opens.

Select a thread color from the list.

 To select a range of colors, hold down Shift as you click.


 To select multiple colors, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3

Click OK.
Objects using the selected thread colors are selected in the design.
Note Manual color changes are ignored. Any objects with manual color
changes are selected according to their original color.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

63

Selecting objects by stitch type


You can select all objects of the same stitch type with a single command.
Use this feature to apply a change across all objects of the same stitch type.

To select objects by stitch type


1

Select Edit > Select By > Stitch type.


The Select By Stitch Type dialog opens.

Select stitch type

Select a stitch type from the list.

 To select a range of stitch types, hold down Shift as you click.


 To select multiple stitch types, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3

Click OK.
Objects using the selected stitch types are selected in the design.

Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List


Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Color-Object List
display on and off. Use it to select and view objects in a design.
The Color-Object List provides a sequential list of objects as digitized,
grouped by color block. It offers an easy way to select objects and
selectively view them. It is synchronized with the design window,
dynamically updating whenever you manipulate objects. It is normally

ES 2006

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

64

docked on the right of the design window but can be dragged to any position
you require.
Note You can use the Color-Object List to group and lock objects. Use it
also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as well as branch objects. See also
Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying and pasting
objects, Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List, and
Branching objects with the Color-Object List in the Online Manual.

To select and view objects with the Color-Object List


1

Click the Color-Object List icon.


The Color-Object List opens. It can be docked to the left or right side
of the design window, or dragged to any position.
total color
block count

object
icons

total
object
count

total stitch
count

bitmap image
node
vector image
node
color block
node

object type

stitch type
stitch count

more than one


stitch type
more than one
object type

The Color-Object List shows a separate icon for each color block and
each object in the design, in order of stitching sequence. Each objects
stitch count is also shown, together with the input method and stitch
type used in its creation.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

65

Click a node icon to open or close a color block and see its component
objects.
Click to
open/close all
color block nodes

Click to open/close
individual color block
node

Blue border appears


around selected
objects

Click an icon to select a color block and/or individual objects.


When a color block is selected, all of its component objects are selected
as well. A blue border appears around each.

 To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click.


 To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click.
 To select all items, right-click any object or color block, and choose
Select All from the popup menu.

Right-click any object or


color block, and select
Select All

 To deselect all objects, click away from objects and color blocks.
4

Hide selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu commands.

 Right-click a color block or object icon and apply Hide from the
popup menu.

 To show all items, right-click any object or color block, and select
Unhide All from the popup menu.

Select Unhide All

ES 2006

Chapter 3

Working with Design Objects

66

 To view selected items only, select Hide Others from the popup
menu.
Hold down
Locate to
quickly view
selected items

Select Hide
Others to view
only selected
items

Alternatively, select the items you want to view in isolation, and hold
down Locate.
Note The Locate button will hide all unselected objects, but it will not
pan to the located object. Nor will it update the Overview window.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

67

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with


your designs. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at
actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview
window. Pan the design to move it across the design window instead of
scrolling, and quickly change between one view and the last. Show or hide
various design elements with the available display settings. You can show or
hide outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch angles, machine
function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also view designs in
TrueView.

When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the


stitching sequence. Check this by traveling through the design
stitch-by-stitch. You can also check it by slowly redrawing the design
on-screen. You can also preview a design in different colors on different
fabrics by selecting from among any number of pre-defined colorways.
ES Designer gives you comprehensive information about your designs. Even
before opening a design, you can check the software version number and
other design information for EMB files directly from Windows Explorer. View
stitching details in the Design Properties dialog. The production worksheet
also provides essential production information, including a design preview,
the size of the design, color sequence and any special instructions.
This section explains the design viewing modes available in ES Designer as
well as the various design viewing settings. It also describes how to view
designs by traveling through the stitching sequence. Design colorways are
explained, as well as how to obtain and modify design information.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

68

Design viewing modes


ES Designer provides many viewing modes to make it easier to work with
your design. Zoom in on an area to see more detail, view the design at
actual size, or view a thumbnail of the whole design in a separate Overview
window. Pan across the design instead of scrolling, and quickly change
between one view and the last.
Note To make sure your design is being displayed at the correct size, you
might need to calibrate your monitor. See Calibrating the monitor for details.

Zooming and panning designs


Click Zoom 1:1 (Zoom toolbar) to display a design at actual size.
Click Show All (Zoom toolbar) to display the whole design in the design
window.
Click Zoom Box (Zoom toolbar) to zoom in on a section of a design.
Select Zoom In 2X (Zoom toolbar) to display a design at twice its current size.
Select Zoom Out 2X (Zoom toolbar) to display a design at half its current
size.
Select a Zoom Factor (Zoom toolbar) from the dropdown list to
display the design at a particular scale.
Magnify your view of the design by zooming in on individual stitches or
details, or zoom out to display more of the design in the window. In addition
to the scroll bars, panning provides a quick way to view parts of a design
which are not currently visible in the design window. Panning is typically
used after zooming in on an area.
Tip Use Auto Scroll to scroll the design automatically while you are
digitizing. This can be more convenient than using panning or the scroll
bars. See Setting auto scroll options for details.

To zoom and pan a design

 To display a design at twice its current size, click the Zoom In 2X icon
or press Z.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

69

 To display a design at half its current size, click the Zoom Out 2X icon
or press Shift+Z.

 To display a design at actual size, click the Zoom 1:1 icon or press 1.
 To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View or press V.
 To view the entire design in the design window, click the Show All icon
or press 0.
Tip To fit selected objects in the window, select View > Show All >
Selected Objects. Alternatively, press Shift+0 on the keyboard. Press
Shift+S to only show selected objects. See also Design viewing settings.

 Select a Zoom Factor from the dropdown list to display the design at a
particular scale or key it directly into the field. Alternatively, select View
> Zoom Factor or press F on the keyboard. In the Zoom Factor dialog,
enter a viewing scale and click OK.

Enter viewing
scale

 To zoom in on a section of a design, click the Zoom Box icon and drag
a bounding box around the zoom area. Alternatively, press B on the
keyboard.

Click & drag bounding


box around area to
zoom

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

70

 To pan across a design in the design window, select View > Pan or press
P. Move the pan box over the part of the design you want to view and
left-click. ES Designer centers the design window around the point you
clicked.

Place pan box


over area to view
and click

Working with the Overview Window


Use Overview Window (Standard toolbar) to toggle Overview window
display on/off. Use it to view a thumbnail of the design.
Use the Overview Window to view a thumbnail of the design. The window
updates whenever you make a change and can be used to zoom in or pan
across the design window. See also Zooming and panning designs.
Note To change the view settings for the Overview window, click it to make
it the active window. See Design viewing settings for details.

To work with the Overview Window


1

ES 2006

Click the Overview Window icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

71

The Overview Window opens.

Click for
zoom box

To zoom in or out, click the Zoom button at the bottom of the window
and drag a bounding box around the area to zoom.

Drag bounding box


around area to zoom

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

72

To pan across the design, move the cursor inside the zoom boxit
changes to a four-way arrow cursorand drag it.

Drag zoom box to


area to pan

Showing and hiding selected objects


ES Designer provides a number of techniques for quickly hiding or showing
selected objects in the design window. You can also switch quickly between
the current view and the last view you selected. After certain operations,
such as editing thread colors, you may also need to redraw the screen for a
clearer display.
Note To view the stitching sequence, use Slow Redraw. See Redrawing the
stitching sequence slowly for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

73

To show or hide selected objects

 To view a selected object in isolation, press Shift+S.

Press
Shift+S

 To display the selected object full-screen, press Shift+0.


 To return to the previous view, select View > Previous View or press V.
 To re-display the entire design, press Esc followed by press Shift+S.
 To redraw the screen, select View > Redraw or press R.
 For further techniques in showing and hiding objects, see also Viewing
selected parts of a design.

Viewing selected parts of a design


Select Options (Special menu) to display all embroidery objects in a design, or hide
all but the selected objects.
You can set your system to display all embroidery objects in a design, or
hide all but the selected objects. You can also turn off all embroidery objects
in order to see backdrop images more clearly.
Note Display settings apply to both the design window and production
worksheet. See also Design viewing modes and Previewing production
worksheets.
Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view design objects. See
Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

74

To view selected parts of a design


1

Select Special > Options.


The Options dialog opens.

Select the View Design tab.

Select viewing (and


print) options

In the Visibility panel, select a display option.

 No Change: the display remains the same as before.


 Show Whole Design: all embroidery objects in the design are
visible. See also Viewing selected parts of a design.

 Show Selected Objects: only objects that are currently selected are
visible. This option is only available when objects are selected.

 Show Unselected Objects: the reverse of the above option. This


option is only available when objects are selected.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

75

 Hide Whole Design: all embroidery objects in the design are hidden.
Note From this dialog you can also select the design elements you want
to displaye.g. stitches, outlines, etc. You can also change TrueView
settings for different effects. See Setting design element view options
and Setting TrueView options in the Online Manual.
4

Click OK.

Viewing design objects by color


Select View By Color (View menu) to view design elements by color.
To help you isolate individual design elements for checking or manipulation,
the View By Color function lets you view objects by color. This is particularly
useful when you are reseqencing objects by color. See also Resequencing
objects by color.
Tip The Color-Object List provides another way to view design objects. See
Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List for details.

To view design objects by color


1

Create or open a design.

Select View > View By Color.


The Select By Color dialog opens.

Select the colors you want to view.

 To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

76

 To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.

Click OK.
The design appears with only those colors you selected in view.
Note The View By Color command will not work with grouped objects.

Design viewing settings


You can show or hide design elements with a variety of display settings.
Show or hide object outlines, needle penetration points, connectors, stitch
angles, machine function symbols and the stitches themselves. You can also
show or hide selected colors.
Tip You can change Overview window view settings separately to the design
window. For example, you can view the design in TrueView in the Overview
window and in normal view in the design window. See also Working with the
Overview Window.

Viewing stitches and outlines


Click Show Stitches (Standard toolbar) to show or hide stitches.
Click Show Outlines (Standard toolbar) to show or hide object outlines.
You can show or hide stitches and object outlines as you work. Hide stitches
to see outlines more clearly when reshaping. Show outlines if Generate
Stitches is turned off. See also Generating stitches.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

77

Note Show Outlines will not work with stitch files that have been read
without stitch recognition. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for
details.

To view stitches and outlines

 Click the Show Outlines icon to turn outlines on or off.


 Click the Show Stitches icon (or press S) to turn stitches on or off.

stitches ON

outlines ON

stitches and
outlines ON

Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab.
See Viewing selected parts of a design for details.

Viewing designs in TrueView


Use TrueView (Standard toolbar) to change between normal view and
TrueView.
TrueView offers a graphical representation of what the final embroidery will
look like.
Tip Change TrueView settings for different effects. See Setting TrueView
options for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

78

To view designs in TrueView

 Click the TrueView icon to switch between TrueView and normal view.
Normal view (stitches
and outlines)

TrueView ON

Tip Use TrueView together with a background fabric to see how your
design will look when stitched out. See Changing background colors and
fabrics for details.

Viewing needle points, connectors and functions


Click Show Needle Points (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the needle
points in a design.
Click Show Connectors (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the connectors.
Click Show Functions (Standard toolbar) to show or hide the function
symbols.
You can show or hide design elements such as needle points, connectors and
machine function symbols in your design. For example:

 View needle points to select stitches for editing


 View functions to check color changes or trims
 View connectors to help position entry and exit points.
See also Connecting Embroidery Objects and Editing Stitches and Machine
Functions in the Online Manual.
Note You can display or hide design elements in any combination. None
displays while viewing in TrueView.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

79

To view needle points, connectors and functions

 To show or hide needle points, click the Show Needle Points icon.

Needle Points ON

Functions ON

Connectors ON

 To show or hide connectors, click the Show Connectors icon. See also
Types of connectors.

 To show or hide machine functions, click the Show Functions icon. See
also Machine function types.
Tip Right-clicking these tools opens the Options > View Design tab.
See Viewing selected parts of a design for details. See also Setting
design element view options.

Viewing the stitching sequence


When working with embroidery designs, you need to understand the
stitching sequence. You can check a designs stitching sequence by
traveling through it by stitches, segments, functions or objects. You can
also check the sequence by slowly redrawing the design on-screen.
ES Designer simulates stitching out by changing stitches from black to their
allocated thread color as they are stitched.
Note The stitching sequence can only be viewed in stitch view. It cannot
be used with TrueView.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

80

Tip You can change the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing
display colors for details.

Traveling by stitches
Click Travel 1 Stitch (Travel toolbar) to travel 1 stitch at a time.
Click Travel 10 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 10 stitches at a
time. Right-click Travel 10 Stitches to travel forwards 10 stitches at a time.
Click Travel 100 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 100 stitches at
a time. Right-click Travel 100 Stitches to travel forwards 100 stitches at a
time.
Click Travel 1000 Stitches (Travel toolbar) to travel backwards 1000 stitches
at a time. Right-click Travel 1000 Stitches to travel forwards 1000 stitches at
a time.
Use the stitch travel tools or keyboard shortcuts
to travel through the design one or more stitches
at a time. The current needle position is indicated
by a large white cross or needle position marker.
Initially, this is located at the end of the design.
When you travel through stitches, the needle
position marker moves accordingly. The current
stitch number appears in the Status Line.

To travel by stitches

 Click the travel tool you require to travel backwards through the
stitching sequence by 1, 10, 100, or 1000 stitches.

 Right-click the required tool to travel forwards through the stitching


sequence.
Travel backwards
one stitch

 Alternatively, use the arrow keys, with no objects selected, to travel


backwards and forwards through the stitching sequence. See Quick
Reference for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

81

Tip Slow Redraw lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a
design in slow motion. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for
details.

Traveling by segment
Click Travel by Segment (Travel toolbar) to travel to previous and next
segments.
Use the Travel by Segment tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the
design by object segment. See also Quick Reference.

To travel by segment

 To travel to the previous segment, click the Travel by Segment icon.


 To travel to the next segment, right-click the Travel by Segment icon.
Traveling to the start or end of a design
Click Start/End Design (Travel toolbar) to travel to the start or end of a
design.
Use the Start/End Design tool or keyboard shortcut to travel quickly to the
start or end of the stitching sequence. See also Quick Reference.

To travel to the start or end of a design

 To travel to the start of the design, click the Start/End Design icon.
 To travel to the end of the design, right-click the Start/End Design icon.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

82

Traveling by object
Use Travel by Object (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next object.
Use the Travel by Object tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the
design by object. This is useful if you need to locate a specific object to
delete it from the stitching sequence, or in order to insert another object.
Use it in conjunction with the stitch travel tools if you want to nest an
object. See also Nesting objects.

Tip You can select a range of objects by traveling by object with Selects On
activated. See Selecting objects with Selects On for details.

To travel by object

 To travel to the previous object, click the Travel by Object icon.


 To travel to the next object, right-click the Travel by Object icon.
Tip You can also use keyboard shortcuts to travel through the design
by object. See also Quick Reference.

Traveling by color
Use Travel by Color (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next color
change function.
Use the Travel by Color tool or keyboard shortcut to travel through the
design by color. This is useful if you need to locate a specific color change in
order to insert an object or delete it from the stitching sequence. See also
Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List and Quick
Reference.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

83

Note When you travel by color, the system looks for the next or previous
color change function. Both automatically and manually inserted color
change functions are recognized.

To travel by color

 To travel to the previous color, click the Travel by Color icon.


 To travel to the next color, right-click the Travel by Color icon.
Traveling by machine function
Use Travel by Function (Travel toolbar) to travel to the previous or next
machine function.
Use the Travel by Function tool to travel through the design by machine
function. This is useful, for example, if you are looking for an extra trim that
should not be there. Note, however, that the needle point will stop at every
jump, trim, and color change. See also Quick Reference.
Note Both manually and automatically inserted functions are recognized.
See also Changing Machine Formats.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

84

To travel by machine function

 To travel to the next machine function, right-click the Travel by


Function icon.

 To travel to the previous machine function, click the Travel by Function


icon.
Tip You can use the Stitch List to help locate stitches and machine
functions for editing. See Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List
for details.

Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly


Use Slow Redraw (View menu) to view the stitching and color sequence of a design
in slow motion.
The Slow Redraw tool lets you view the stitching and color sequence of a
design in slow motion. Redrawing can be started from any stitch in the
design. Hide previously stitched parts of the design as required. With larger
designs, you can choose to scroll automatically so that the area being
stitched remains on-screen.
half-stitched
design

Note Slow Redraw cannot be used with TrueView.

To redraw the stitching sequence slowly


1

ES 2006

Select View > Slow Redraw or press Shift+R.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

85

The Slow Redraw dialog opens.

Adjust display
options

Go

Back to Start
Pause

Stop

Tip To redraw only a section of the design, travel to the point where you
want to start Slow Redraw. See Viewing the stitching sequence for
details.
2

Use the slider bar to adjust the redraw speed.

Select the options as required:

 Hide Before: Hide all sections of the design prior to the current
cursor position.
Only areas being
redrawn are displayed,
the rest are hidden

Travel to middle of
design, then start Slow
Redraw

 Auto Scroll: With larger designs, scroll automatically so that the


area being stitched remains on-screen.
4

Click Go.
The design is redrawn on-screen according to the stitching sequence and
selected speed.

Click Pause, Stop or Back to Start as required.

 Pause pauses the redraw, letting you resume where you left off.
 Stop stops the redraw and returns to the beginning of the design.
 Back to Start redraws from the beginning of the design.
Note You can adjust the display color of unsewn stitches. See Changing
display colors for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

86

Viewing colorways, backgrounds and display colors


In ES Designer, you can define multiple colorways for the one design. This
means you can preview or stitch out the same design in different colors to
different fabrics. Background colors and fabrics are treated as part of the
colorway rather than design window settings. In addition, display colors for
borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part
of the colorway definition.

Viewing colorways
Use the Colorways dropdown (Color toolbar) to select a new color
scheme for your design.
A colorway is a color scheme or palette of thread colors. It may also include
a background color or fabric sample. This means you can preview or stitch
out the same design in different colors to different fabrics. In ES Designer,
you can also print multiple colorways, icons of color blocks, and design
backgrounds with the production worksheet. See also Working with
colorways.

Tip When you start a new design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color
palette. You can change it by selecting from among any number of
pre-defined colorways saved to the current template.

To view a colorway
1

Open a design.

Select a colorway from the Colorways toolbar.


Tip Select View > Redraw to refresh your screen.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

87

Select
colorway

Changing background colors and fabrics


Use the BKG button (Color toolbar) to change background color and
fabrics.
ES Designer lets you change the background color of the design window to
match the color of your fabric. Or you can select a background fabric for
more realistic previews and presentations. The background is saved with the
colorway.

Note Default settings are stored in the template as Colorway 1. If you


change the background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always
display like this at start up. See also Working with colorways.

To change the background color or fabric


1

Select a colorway and click the BKG button.


The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway.

Edit color

Select background
color or fabric

Select fabric
pattern

Center or tile fabric


pattern in design
window

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

88

Select the design window background type.

 Color: uses the selected color.


 Fabric: uses an image of a fabric.
3

Select a color or fabric to use.

 To select a background color, click Edit. Select a color from the Color
dialog and click OK.

 To select a fabric, click Browse. Select a fabric type from the Open
dialog and click OK.
You can center or tile the fabric bitmap in the design window. If the
bitmap is large enough to fill the entire window, select Center.
Otherwise, select Tile.
4

Click OK.
Tip Textured backgrounds can also be imported into ES Designer.
Almost any artwork can be usedphotographs, magazine pictures,
clipart images, and even fabric samples. See also Scanning artwork into
ES Designer.

Changing display colors


Use the BKG button (Color toolbar) to change background color and
fabrics.
In addition to background color or fabric, display colors for borer holes,
unsewn and selected stitches, object outlines and grid are part of the
colorway definition. You may want to change them if the default display
color is not visible against the current colorway background.

blue outline

black outline

To change display colors


1

ES 2006

Select a colorway and click the BKG button.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

89

The Display dialog opens for the selected colorway.

Select items
displayed
Edit color

Select an item from the Selection list.







3

Borer: borer points.


Unsewn: unsewn stitches when traveling through design.
Selected: selected objects or stitches.
Object Outline: object outlines.
Grid: grid lines.
Guides: guides.

Click Edit.
The Color dialog opens.

Select or mix new


display color

ES 2006

Select or mix the new display color and click OK.

Click OK to close the Display dialog.

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

90

Viewing design information


You can obtain design information in a variety of ways and formatsbefore
opening the EMB file via Windows Explorer, from the Design Properties
dialog, as well as from the production worksheet.

Viewing design information in Windows Explorer


Before opening EMB files, you can check the software version number and
other design information through Windows Explorer. The Properties dialog
displays a design preview together with design information such as stitch
count, number of stops and color changes, as well as machine format. You
can also view general file information, such as file size and modification
dates.
Note This same dialog can be accessed from within the Open dialog in
ES Designer. See also Opening designs.

To view design information in Windows Explorer


1

In Windows Explorer, select a file.

Right-click the file and select Properties from the popup menu.
The Properties dialog opens and displays the EMB tab.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

91

Check the design information, or click the other tabs for general file
information.

Fish
Marine animals
Hatice Onay

fish, tropical, marine


Tropical fish using curve line fills and trapunto
effect.

Tip The Summary tab provides some of the same information entered
in the Design Properties > Summary dialog in ES Designer. See
Viewing design information in ES Designer for details.
4

Click OK.

Viewing design information in ES Designer


Use Design Properties (File menu) to view stitching details about a design.
You can check the software version number and other design information
through the Design Properties dialog. Stitching details are also provided.
Most of the fields cannot be modified directly except for stitch counts,
summary information, Colorways, and Elements.
Note An element, in software terms, is a color block consisting of
sequential, same-color objects. You can assign names to elements which
then appear on the production worksheet. The operator generally uses these
to make sure colors are correct during production. See Naming design
elements via Design Properties for details.

To view design information in ES Designer


1

ES 2006

Select File > Design Properties.

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

92

The Design Properties > Information dialog opens.

This tab contains information about the design height, width, stitch
count and colors. The data is extracted from the design and, except for
stitch count, cannot be modified.
Note This tab also provides important information about the file source
Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or Imported
Stitches. See Embroidery design formats for details.
2

Click Length Calculation to revise stitch counts according to target fabric


thickness. See Estimating total thread usage for details.

Select the Stop Sequence tab to view the color sequence and stitch
counts for each design element.

Enter Element
name

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

93

The data in this tab is extracted from the design and, except for
Element, cannot be modified. See also Naming design elements via
Design Properties.
Note There is a stitch count for each element in the design. You can
show this as a stitch count for each element or a cumulative stitch count.
See Setting other options for details.
4

Select the Summary tab to view or enter summary information about


the design.

Hatice Onay
fish, tropical, marine
Tropical fish using curve line fills and trapunto.

Fish
Marine animals

Click a field and enter any text which will help you identify the design at
a later date.
Note Information from this tab is included on the production worksheet
as well as the Summary tab of the Windows Properties dialog. See
Viewing design information in Windows Explorer and Previewing
production worksheets for details.

Click OK.

Estimating total thread usage


Use Design Properties (File menu) to view total stitch usage.
In order to get more precise thread usage estimates, you can adjust the
fabric thickness setting to suit the target fabric.

To estimate total thread usage


1

Select File > Design Properties.


The Design Properties > Information dialog opens.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

94

Click Length Calculation.


The Length Calculation dialog opens.

Enter target fabric


thickness in mm
Enter bobbin thread
length as a%

Enter the thickness of the target fabric in millimeters.

Adjust the bobbin thread length according to the mixture of thread types
in the design.
This factor provides a simple mechanism for a more accurate bobbin
thread length estimate. The default value (100%) is suitable for a design
with a mixture of stitch types. If the design is all Run stitches or all
Tatami, more bobbin thread will be used and the factor can be increased
say to 125%. If the design is all Satin stitch, the factor can be reduced
to say 65%.

Click OK.
The Total Thread and Total Bobbin values are adjusted to take into
account fabric thickness on total thread requirement.
Tip Click Save to save the revised settings to the current template.

Naming design elements via Design Properties


Use Design Properties (File menu) to assign names to blocks of sequential, same
color objects.
You can assign names to blocks of sequential, same-color objects, known as
elements. Each color block can be given a descriptive name for easy
identification. Element names appear on the production worksheet.
Tip The Usage field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected color
blocks which correspond to design elements. See Naming design elements
via the Color Palette Editor for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

95

To name design elements via Design Properties


1

Select File > Design Properties.


The Design Properties > Information dialog opens.

Select the Stop Sequence tab.

Enter element
names for each
color block

In the Element fields, enter names for each color block as required. To
do so, click the field, type the name, and press Enter.
Note This information may be included on the production worksheet.
See Customizing production worksheet information for details.

Click OK.

Previewing production worksheets


Click Print Preview (Standard toolbar) to preview the production worksheet
on-screen.
The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the
embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview and essential
production information, including the size of the design, color sequence and
any special instructions. See also Printing or plotting production worksheets.

To preview a production worksheet


1

ES 2006

Click the Print Preview icon.

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

96

The production worksheet displays in a preview window.


Click to display one or
two pages

Click Close to return to


Design Window

Click Print to print


the production
worksheet

production
information
Design appears
at actual size

Adjust the view as required:

 To change the orientation of the paper, click Landscape or Portrait.


 To change the information that displays, and set printing/plotting
preferences, click Options. See also Setting production worksheet
print options.

 To print the design, click Print.


 To close the production worksheet preview, click Close.
Tip Zoom in to read the production information or view the design
preview more closely. Large designs may be displayed over a number of
pages.

Showing and hiding backdrops


Use Show Bitmap (Standard toolbar) to show and hide bitmap images.
Right-click to set image display options.
Use Show Vectors (Standard toolbar) to show and hide vector images.
Right-click to set image display options.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

97

Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as


digitizing templates or backdrops. You can show or hide backdrops
temporarily while you digitize. Depending on the view options set up in the
Options dialog, the image displays in full color, or dimmed. See Setting
image viewing options for details.
Note A design may include both bitmap images and vector images which
can be selectively turned on or off.

To show or hide backdrops

 Click the Show Bitmap and/or Show Vectors icons.


When selected, backdrop images are visible.

 To hide images, click the icons again.

vector image
together with
bitmap image

Tip So you dont accidentally move or delete the backdrop, select it and
press K on the keyboard to lock it down. See Locking and unlocking
objects for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 4

Viewing Designs

98

PART II

DIGITIZING DESIGNS
In ES Designer, you build designs from basic shapes or embroidery objects.
These are like ordinary drawing objects in that they have certain defining
characteristics or properties such as color, size, position, and so on. They
also have properties unique to embroidery such as stitch type and density.

Digitizing methods
This section describes how to digitize shapes manually with the available
digitizing tools. It also explains how to adjust input settings to obtain the
best results. See Digitizing Methods for details.

Fill and outline stitches


This section explains how to apply fill and outline stitch types to your
embroidery objects, as well as how to change stitch settings to obtain the
best results. See Fill and Outline Stitches for details.

Colorways and thread charts


This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as
how to change colorways. It also explains how to define, modify and delete
colorways. There is also an explanation of how to define your own thread
colors and charts. See Colorways and Thread Charts for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

99

Connecting embroidery objects


This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your
designs. It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors,
including the stitch length for travel runs. There is also a topic on hiding
travel runs using the Trapunto effect. See Connecting Embroidery Objects
for details.

Improving stitch quality


This section describes how to strengthen and stabilize designs with
automatic underlays, as well as how to compensate for fabric stretch.
Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening and fractional spacing is
covered, together with adjusting stitch density and removing small stitches
automatically. Techniques for controlling corner stitching and long stitches
with Auto Split and Auto Jump are described. You will also find details of
setting automatic start and end points. See Improving Stitch Quality for
details.

ES 2006

Digitizing Designs

100

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

In ES Designer, you build designs


from basic shapes or embroidery
objects. These are like ordinary
vector objects in that they have
certain defining characteristics or
properties such as color, size,
position, and so on. They also have
properties unique to embroidery
such as stitch type and density.
Note The most important property
for an embroidery object is in fact its
stitch type. Different stitch types are suited to different shapes. See also Fill
and Outline Stitches.
The process of creating embroidery objects on-screen is called digitizing.
Like the creation of designs in graphics applications, this involves the use of
input or digitizing tools. These are similar to drawing tools except that the
end result is an embroidery rather than vector object. Different tools are
suited to creating different shapes or design elements. There are specific
tools for digitizing larger complex shapes, asymmetrical columns of turning
stitches, columns of varying width, columns of fixed width, lines, and even
individual stitches.
Tip Vector objects themselves can be converted directly to embroidery
objects using the Point & Stitch tools. See Digitizing shapes with Point &
Stitch for details.
This section describes how to digitize shapes manually with the available
digitizing tools. It also explains how to adjust input settings to obtain the
best results.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

101

Digitizing tools
Different digitizing methods or tools are suited to creating different shapes
or design elements. Digitizing methods divide broadly into two
categoriesoutline and fill. Different stitch types are suited to different
digitizing methods. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.
Note When you create an embroidery object, you can accept the default
settings for the particular tool, or apply new ones. Default settings are
stored in the design template. You can also define current properties to
influence all the objects you create in the current design. See Object
Properties, Styles and Templates for details.

Selecting digitizing methods


Use Manual (Input toolbar) to enter individual manual stitches.
Use Triple Manual (Input toolbar) to enter triple manual stitches.
Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Input A (Input toolbar) to create columns of varying width and stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Input B (Input toolbar) to create asymmetrical columns of turning
stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Right-click to adjust
settings for new or selected objects.
Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width.
Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch
angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Run
and Manual digitizing methods are used to digitize outlines or individual

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

102

stitches. Inputs A, B & C are used to create filled columnar shapes with
differing characteristics. Complex Fill and Fusion Fill, the most commonly
used digitizing tools, can be used to create almost any filled shape. You can
adjust the settings of most of the digitizing methods by right-clicking the
tools and selecting options in the dialog.
Note Run stitch, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are
considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. Other digitizing
methods may use different fill stitch types depending on the particular
application. See also Fill and Outline Stitches.

Control points
Once you have selected a digitizing method, you digitize shapes in the same
way by marking points along an outline. ES Designer uses automatic Beziers
to create object outlines which creates objects much faster than traditional
Bezier methods. Unlike the traditional Bezier method, you do not need to
click-and-drag to create a curved line. Simply use the left mouse button for
a cusp or corner point or right mouse button for a smooth curve
pointES Designer automatically curves the line for you.
2

4
3

4
3

1
6

Object is closed
automatically

Object is closed
automatically

The points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control points.
These are used to edit or transform the objects. Such actions may include
reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry and exi points. You can
modify stitch angles of selected objects, including setting multiple stitch

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

103

angles. Control points vary slightly with the object type. See Modifying
Designs for details.
entry point
= entry point
= exit point
stitch angle
line
corner point

exit point

= corner point
= curve point
= stitch angle points

Corner and curve points can be interchanged. Most control points can be
added, deleted, or moved. Entry and exit points, however, cannot be
deleted.

Switching between fill and outline digitizing methods


You can quickly switch from a fill stitch digitizing method to Run or Manual
digitizing methods using keyboard shortcuts.
Tip After digitizing, you can convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C
objects, as well as between Complex Fill and Input A & B objects. See
Converting between object types for details.

To switch between fill and outline digitizing methods

 Press Enter to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Manual
digitizing method.

 Press Spacebar to switch between a fill stitch digitizing method and Run
digitizing method.

Digitizing individual stitches


Use Manual (Input toolbar) to enter individual manual stitches.
Use Triple Manual (Input toolbar) to enter triple manual stitches.
Digitize individual stitches with the Manual digitizing method. You can enter
single manual stitches, or enter three stitch layers at a time with the Triple

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

104

Manual tool. Manual stitches digitized together form a single embroidery


object. They are not well suited to scaling and transforming actions as the
stitches have no associated properties. This means they will either be
stretched or pinched during scaling operations. Use them sparingly, for
example to add a few stitches to a finished design. See Editing Stitches and
Machine Functions for details.
Note As each stitch is individually defined, the only object properties
required by manual objects are general and connector properties.

To digitize individual stitches


1

Click the Manual or Triple Manual icon.

Click to mark the start of the stitch and again to mark its end.
The end-point becomes the beginning of the next stitch.

Continue marking stitch points until the manual stitch object is


complete.
2

6
4

1
Use the left
mouse button

10
11

Tip Stitches that are too long will automatically become jump stitches,
but you can also create jumps manually by right-clicking as you digitize.
See also Using jumps as connectors.

Click for manual


stitches

Right-click for
jumps

Digitizing lines
Use the Run and Triple Run tools to digitize lines of single or triple run
stitching. Run places a single row of run stitches along a digitized line. Triple

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

105

Run repeats each stitch three (or more) times for a thicker line. These tools
are typically used to add borders and pickout runs to designs.

length
1
Run

Triple Run

2
3

For thicker, decorative lines, use Backstitch or Stemstitch. Backstitch is an


older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for delicate outlines. This
stitch follows intricate curves well. Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to
mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other
decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills. See Creating
decorative outlines for details.
Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run,
Backstitch, Stemstitch and Input C objects. See Converting between run
objects for details.

Creating stitch runs


Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use the Run and Triple Run tools to
digitize lines of run stitching. Left and
right mouse clicks create reference
pointscorner points and curve points
respectively. Use the Stemstitch and
Backstitch tools for decorative runs.
Motif Run is also available. See also
Creating Motif Run objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

106

To create stitch runs


1

Click an input tool:





2

Run for run stitch


Triple Run for triple run stitch
Backstitch for backstitch
Stemstitch for stemstitch.

Digitize the shape of the line by marking points.

 Click to enter corner points.


 Right-click to enter curve points.
1

14
2

13

Click for
corner points

8
4

9
Right-click for
curve points

12
11

10

 To constrain the line to 15 increments, hold down Ctrl as you


digitize. This is useful for digitizing straight lines.

 For a perfect circular arc, mark three points with a right-click.


 Where curves connecteither to a straight line or another
curveclick to mark the connection point.
Connect corners and
curves with a corner point

90 60

curve
point
1
curve
point

45
30

3
curve
point

180

270

Hold down Ctrl to


constrain the line to
15 increments

Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
3

Press Enter to finish digitizing the line.


Note For details of adjusting Backstitch and Stemstitch settings, see
Creating decorative outlines.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

107

Setting run stitch length


Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
For both Run and Triple Run stitches, set the stitch length to suit the
digitized shape. Where the object has tight curves, select a shorter stitch
length. To reduce the stitch count for flatter curves, increase the stitch
length.
Note These values only apply to objects created with the Run or Triple Run
tools. They do not affect travel runs, or underlay stitching.
You can change the stitch length, chord gap and number of stitch repetitions
(Triple Run only) in the Outlines tab of the Object Properties dialog. Preset
Run and Triple Run values by changing the current properties before you
digitize. See Modifying current property settings for details.

Run Length
2.5 mm

Run Length
1.6 mm

Variable Run on
Length 2.5 mm

To set run stitch length


1

Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon.


The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens.

Select stitch type


Adjust stitch length

ES 2006

Select a stitch type from the list.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

108

Enter a stitch length in the Length field.

Run length

Not enough stitches to


follow tight curve

Run length

Stitches follow the curve


more closely

If a line has tight, sharp curves, reduce the length, for example to
1.8 mm, so that the stitches follow the line. Alternatively, activate
Variable Run Length. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for
details.
Tip Mimic hand-made embroidery by setting the Triple Run length to
4.0 mm.
4

Click Apply.

Setting variable run stitch lengths


Use Run (Input toolbar) to place a row of single run stitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Automatically shorten stitches to follow tight curves with the Variable Run
Length option.

To set variable stitch lengths


1

Right-click the Run or Triple Run icon.


The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens.

Select variable run length


Adjust variable run
length values

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

109

Select the Variable Run Length checkbox.

In the Min Len field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow.

In the Chord Gap field, enter the maximum distance to allow between
the digitized outline and the stitches. When this value is exceeded the
stitch length is reduced to follow the outline more closely.

Chord
gap
Run
length

Fixed Run Length

Variable Run Length:


2 mm

Variable Run Length:


0.07 mm (default)

Note Stitches will not be reduced to less than the specified minimum
length, even if the chord gap value is exceeded.
5

Click Apply.

Setting Triple Run stitch count


Use Triple Run (Input toolbar) to place a triple row of run stitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
By default, Triple Run repeats each stitch three times. You can change the
number of repetitions used for Triple Run by changing the value in the
Object Properties dialog.

To set Triple Run stitch count


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Triple Run icon.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

110

The Object Properties > Outlines dialog opens.

Select stitch type

Select # repetitions

Select Triple Run from the list.

Enter the number of repetitions in the Run Count field.

Click Apply.

Digitizing columns of fixed width


Use Input C to digitize columns of fixed width. It is typically used for
digitizing borders and outlines of larger shapes. You can digitize columns to
create thick lines or borders. Input C is typically used with Satin stitch but
you can use any fill stitch type except Motif Fill.

Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run and Input C
objects. See Converting between run objects for details.

Creating columns and borders


Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width.
Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Digitize columns and borders of fixed width with the Input C tool. Create
objects using left and right mouse clicks to mark points to form an outline.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

111

Use left-clicks to enter corner points and right-clicks to enter curve points.
Then specify the column width. You can leave the shape open, or create a
border by joining the first and last points. See also Corresponding object and
stitch types.

To create columns and borders


1

Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch
types for details.

Click the Input C icon.

Digitize the shape of the column by marking points.

 Click to enter corner points.


 Right-click to enter curve points.
4
2

3
6

Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
4

When you have finished digitizing the line, either:

 Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last
point marked, or

 Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the
opposite side of the column.
Tip To make a border, close the shape by entering the last point exactly
on top of the first. If the points are not exactly on top of each other, the
stitches will not turn smoothly around the corner.
5

ES 2006

Specify the column width.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

112

 To use the current width (as set in the Special > Input C tab), press
Enter.

 To specify the width, mark two additional points. The distance


between these points is the width of the column. (You can mark the
column width anywhere on the screen.)
8

Digitize column width


anywhere in design
window

Tip You can offset stitches by right-clicking the column-width points


(rather than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in
relation to the center line.

Right-click
reference points

Right-click
reference points

Setting offsets
Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width.
Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
By default, stitches are positioned around the center of a digitized line. Enter
an exact offset value in the Object Properties dialog. See also Creating
columns and borders.
Tip You can offset stitches by right-clicking the column-width points (rather
than left-clicking) exactly where you want the offset to be in relation to the
center line. See Creating columns and borders for details.

To set offsets
1

ES 2006

Right-click the Input C icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

113

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Select Offset

Set offsets in either


Side 1 or Side 2
fields

In the Input Side panel, select Offset.

Set an offset in either Side 1 or Side 2 field, either as an exact


measurement (in mm) or a percentage.

Input C offset: 25%

Input C offset: 75%

Note You only need to enter the value for one side as ES Designer
automatically calculates the other, based on the Column Width value.
4

Click Apply.

Setting column width


Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width.
Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
You can set the exact width of Input C columns in the Object Properties
dialog. The value you set becomes the current width for new Input C
objects.

To set the column width


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Input C icon.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

114

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Adjust column width

Enter a width in the Column Width field.

Click Apply.
Note You can also change the width of Input C objects by selecting the
Reshape tool, and moving the width control points. See Reshaping
embroidery objects for details.

Setting corner fractions


Use Input C (Input toolbar) to digitize columns or borders of fixed width.
Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
You can control the way stitches turn at the corners of Input C objects by
changing the distance over which they turn. This distance is set by the
corner fraction. The larger the fraction, the greater the distance.
Tip Round Sharp Corners is also available for Input C objects to give you
the option of sharp or round points. See Rounding sharp corners for details.

To set corner fractions


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Input C icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

115

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Adjust corner fraction

Enter a new corner fraction in the Corner Fraction field.


corner
fraction 0.8

corner
fraction 0.5

corner
fraction 0.25

 Increasing the fraction spreads the turn over more stitches.


 Decreasing the fraction reduces the number of stitches that turn.
3

Click Apply.

Digitizing columns of varying width


Use Input A (Input toolbar) to create columns of varying width and stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

116

Use the Input A tool to digitize columns of


varying width and stitch angle. Digitized pairs
of points define the outline, while lines
connecting the pairs define the stitch angles.
See also Corresponding object and stitch
types.
Tip The Continuous Input feature provides you with a simple and efficient
way of digitizing a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched
sections. See Creating smooth joins for details.
Note ES Designer lets you convert between Complex Fill and Input A or B
objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for
details.

To digitize columns of varying width


1

Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch
types for details.

Click the Input A icon.

Digitize the column by marking points on alternate sides of the column.

 Click to enter corner points.


 Right-click to enter curve points.
Mark a pair of points wherever the outline changes, and wherever you
want the stitch angle to change.
Stitches change their
angle gradually
through the entire
shape

Stitches remain parallel


between parallel stitch
angles

Note The control points in a pair do not have to be the same type. For
example, one can be a corner point, the other a curve.
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
4

When you have finished digitizing the column, either:

 Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last
point you digitized, or

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

117

 Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the
opposite side of the column.
start

start
Press Enter

finish
Press Spacebar

OR

finish

Tip If you are joining two columns, omit the last stitch on the first
column so that the exit point is close to the entry point of the next
column.

Digitizing asymmetrical columns of turning stitches


Use Input B (Input toolbar) to create asymmetrical columns of turning
stitches, where opposite sides are different shapes. Right-click to adjust
settings for new or selected objects.
Use the Input B tool to digitize shapes where one side is different to the
other, especially where one side requires more points than the other.
Stitches turn evenly throughout the entire shape. See also Corresponding
object and stitch types.

Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Complex Fill and Input A or B
objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill for
details.

To digitize asymmetrical columns of turning stitches

ES 2006

Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Satin. See Selecting stitch
types for details.

Click the Input B icon.

Digitize the first side of the shape (i.e. top or left) by marking points.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

118

 Click to enter corner points.


 Right-click to enter curve points.
2

3
1

Press Enter.
An elastic line attaches to the pointer, ready for you to digitize the
second side of the shape.
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.

Digitize the secondi.e. bottom or rightside of the object.


Press Enter or
Spacebar

stitches turn
evenly

10

Tip Stitch angles vary from tightly turning fills to parallel fills,
depending on the ends of the shapethe more pointy, the tighter the
stitch angles.

90

turning fill

sloping fill

parallel fill

When you have finished digitizing the shape, either:

 Press Enter to keep the last stitch and place the exit point at the last
point you digitized, or

 Press Spacebar to omit the last stitch and place the exit point on the
opposite side of the column.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

119

Digitizing complex shapes


Use the Complex Fill tool to digitize large, irregular shapes with fixed stitch
angles. Use the Fusion Fill tool to digitize complex shapes with turning
stitches. Many shapes can be digitized with these tools. By digitizing further
boundaries within shapes, you can create filled objects with holes.

Tip Use the Shaping tools to join, trim or split selected vector or
embroidery objects to make different shapes. See Shaping vector and
embroidery objects for details.
Boundaries in complex objects should not overlap or intersect each other. A
boundary should not overlap itself and should not have a second boundary
inside (hole within a hole). These shapes below, for example, cannot be
successfully digitized with Fusion Fill or Complex Fill.

boundaries overlap

boundary overlaps itself

hole within hole

Where they occur, overlapping boundaries in Fusion Fill or Complex Fill


shapes are ignored and stitches are generated in the largest area defined
by the boundaries.

Creating complex shapes with fixed stitch angles


Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

120

Digitize complex shapes with the Complex Fill tool. Create objects using
left and right clicks to mark points to form the boundary outlines. See also
Corresponding object and stitch types.

Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Fusion Fill or Complex Fill and
Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion
Fill for details.

To create complex shapes with fixed stitch angles


1

Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Tatami. See Selecting stitch
types for details.

Click the Complex Fill icon.

Digitize the boundary of the shape, by marking points around the outline
of the shape.

 Click to enter corner points.


 Right-click to enter curve points.
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
4

Close the shape.


8

4
5
6

3
ht
ig
ra e
t
s lin

2
1

12

4
5

7
10
11

3
2

Press Enterthe object is


closed automatically

r
cu

13

ve 12

10
11

Last point marked on top of


first with right button

 To close the shape with the same type of point as the last one
enteredi.e. corner or curvesimply press Enter.

 To close the shape using a different type of point, mark the last on
top of the first and press Enter.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

121

Digitize any additional boundaries in the same way.


Note Boundaries must not overlap.

Press Enter.

Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary.
Tip To minimize segments and gaps in your embroidery, place the entry
and exit points opposite each other on the outside boundary. Then
define the stitch angle so it is perpendicular to the line between the
entry and exit points.

Define the stitch angle by marking two points.


13

14

15

12
1

14

stitch angle
direction

13

stitch angle
direction

Press Enter.
Note Complex Fill objects generally stitch out in several segments,
joined by travel runs. However, all segments and boundaries are part of
the same object. See also Adding underlay by segment.

Creating complex shapes with turning stitches


Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch
angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Eliminate the need to digitize multiple objects with Fusion Fill. This tool
allows you to create a single complex object with multiple stitch angles and
even holes. It is best used with designs containing complicated, turning

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

122

columns such as trees, animals, or large filled areas. See also


Corresponding object and stitch types.

Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Fusion Fill or Complex Fill and
Input A or B objects. See Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion
Fill for details.

To create complex shapes with turning stitches


1

Select the stitch type you want to usee.g. Tatami. See Selecting stitch
types for details.

Click the Fusion Fill icon.

Digitize the boundary of the shape, by marking points around the outline
of the shape.

 Click to enter corner points.


 Right-click to enter curve points.
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.
4

Close the shape.


8

4
5
6

3
ht
ig
ra
st line

2
1

12

4
5

7
10
11

3
2

Press Enterthe object is


closed automatically

7
10

11
ve 12
r
cu
Last point marked on top of
1
first with right button
13

 To close the shape with the same type of point as the last one
enteredi.e. corner or curvesimply press Enter.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

123

 To close the shape using a different type of point, mark the last on
top of the first and press Enter.
5

Digitize any additional boundaries in the same way.


Note Boundaries must not overlap.

Press Enter.

Mark the entry and exit position by clicking outside the object boundary.
Tip To minimize segments and gaps in your embroidery, place the entry
and exit points opposite each other on the outside boundary. Then
define one of the stitch angles so it is perpendicular to the line between
the entry and exit points.

Define the stitch angles by marking two points for each angle.
13

14

15

12
1

14

stitch angle
direction

13

stitch angle
direction

Press Enter.
Note Fusion Fill objects generally stitch out in several segments,
joined by travel runs. However, all segments and boundaries are part of
the same object. See also Adding underlay by segment.

Adding boundaries
Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch
angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

124

ES Designer lets you add boundaries to Complex Fill and Fusion Fill
objects.

Tip You can also create new objects from existing boundaries using the
Filled Holes feature. Alternatively, you can use other objects to cut holes.
See Filling holes in objects and Removing underlying stitching for details.

To add boundaries
1

Select the object to modify.

Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon.


Points display around the object outline.

Digitize additional boundaries making sure they do not overlap. Press


Enter each time.
Tip Use the prompts in the prompt line to help you digitize. If you make
a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last point. Press Esc to undo
all new points. Press Esc again to exit digitizing mode.

When you have digitized all additional boundaries, press Enter again.

When prompted, enter a new entry point, exit point and stitch angle for
the object.
Tip To use the current settings, press Enter to bypass each option.

ES 2006

Press Enter.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

125

Note To remove unwanted boundaries, select the object and select the
Reshape Object tool. Delete each control point on the unwanted
boundary, and press Enter.

Adjusting stitch angles using object properties


Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch
angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object
properties. By definition, Fusion Fill objects contain multiple stitch angles.
However, they also have a property called the nominal angle. This has two
functions. First, if a Fusion Fill object fails to stitch correctlyfor instance,
if the stitch angles are irreconcilableit will revert to parallel stitching in the
direction of the nominal angle. Second, the nominal angle affects certain
underlay styles. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic
underlays.

Tip You can adjust the stitch angle of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects
interactively using the Stitch Angles tool. See Adjusting stitch angles for
details.

To adjust stitch angles using object properties

ES 2006

Select an object.

Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

126

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Adjust stitch
angle

In the Angle or Nominal Angle field, enter the required stitch angle and
click Apply.

Angle: 90

Angle: 0

Note The nominal angle in a Fusion Fill object only takes effect if
multiple stitch angles are irreconcilableit then reverts to parallel
stitching in the direction of the nominal angle. The nominal angle also
affects certain underlay styles.

Adjusting segment overlaps


Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with a single stitch
angle. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch
angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Where segments within an object meet, the push-pull effect on the fabric
during stitching may cause gaps to appear. These gaps can be prevented by
adding overlapping rows. An overlap of 1 row means no real overlap. An
overlap of 2 rows means that the first segment is extended by the addition
of one extra row of stitches. And so on. With Fusion Fill objects you can
also adjust the stitch angle where segments join. Normally, when you create
an overlap, it is formed by continuing the two sides of a segment in the
direction of their endpoints. This becomes a problem if either side is parallel,

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

127

or almost parallel, to the cover stitches the overlap may become


disproportionately wide. For this reason, you can adjust the tapering angle.

To adjust segment overlaps


1

Right-click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon.


The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Enter required
number of rows

Adjust the number of overlapping rows where segments join.

overlapping
rows

For Fusion Fill objects, you can also adjust the stitch angle where
segments join. In the Overlap Taper Angle field, enter the required
angle.

Enter overlap taper angle

ES 2006

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

128

Click Apply.

Overlap taper angle


set to minimum

Overlap taper angle increased


to minimize overlapping area

Adjusting travel margins


Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar) to digitize filled shapes with turning stitch
angles. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
When dealing with complex shapes with multiple segments, you may want
to keep travel runs away from the boundary of the filled shape for various
reasons. If, for instance, you are using Jagged Edge effect, the travel might
become visible through the shortened stitches. For this reason, you can
specify a margin for the travel stitches. As you increase the travel margin,
the travels are positioned more towards the center. Where the filled area
becomes very narrow, however, travel stitches do not necessarily remain at
the specified distance from the boundary.

To adjust travel margins


1

Select an object.

travel run too close to edge

ES 2006

Right-click the Fusion Fill icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

129

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Adjust travel margin distance

Adjust the travel margin distance in the Distance field.


The greater the distance, the more the travels are positioned towards
the center of the shape.

Travel run closer to


center of shape

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Chapter 5

Digitizing Methods

130

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

All embroidery objects in ES Designer contain a defining set of settings or


values. The values stored with an object become its properties. All objects
have certain properties in common such as size and position. There are
other, more specific properties of objects which depend on the object type.

The most important property of all embroidery objects is the stitch type. The
software uses object outlines and associated stitch type to generate
stitches. Whenever you reshape, transform or scale an object, stitches are
regenerated according to its stitch type and settings.
Stitch types divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Satin fills
are generally suited to columns and borders. Tatami stitch is used to fill
larger shapes with solid fields of stitching. Run/Triple Run stitch, Motif Run,
Backstitch, and Stemstitch are considered both digitizing methods and
stitch types. Both Zigzag and E Stitch are used as outline stitches. Zigzag is
frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used as the
cover stitch. Both can also be used for decorative effect. See also Digitizing
Methods.
This section explains how to apply fill and outline stitch types to your
embroidery objects, as well as how change stitch settings to obtain the best
results.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

131

Selecting stitch types


Use Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) for narrow columns and shapes.
Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) for large, irregular shapes.
Use Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) for long, narrow columns of slanted,
side-by-side stitches in a zigzag pattern.
Use E Stitch (Stitch Types toolbar) for a comb effect with long, narrow
columns.
Different stitch types are suited to different objects. When you digitize an
object, it uses the current stitch type for the selected input method.
However, you can change an objects stitch type at any stage. You can also
preset the stitch type by selecting it as current before digitizing. See
Modifying current property settings for details. See also Corresponding
object and stitch types.
Tip You can change between fill stitch types quickly using the buttons on
the Stitch Types toolbar, or using the keyboard to switch between fill and
outline stitching. See Selecting commands from toolbars and Switching
between fill and outline digitizing methods for details.

To select a stitch type


1

Select the object (or objects) whose stitch type you want to change.

Select a stitch type icon.


The new stitch type is applied to the object.
Note You cannot select Run, Triple Run, Backstitch or Stemstitch
stitch types from the Stitch Types toolbar. To use these stitch types you
need to change input methods. See Digitizing lines for details.

Creating fills with Satin stitch


Use Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Satin stitch to new or selected
narrow columns and shapes. Right-click to adjust Satin settings.
Satin stitch is well-suited to stitching narrow columns and shapes, where the
length of each stitch forms the width of the column. Satin stitches are

ES 2006

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

132

almost parallel, with every second stitch slightly slanted. Because there are
generally no needle penetrations breaking up the fill, Satin stitch creates a
glossy, high-quality effect. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

If a column is too wide, stitches may be loose and not cover the fabric
properly. Conversely, in very narrow columns, the stitch density can be too
high, and the needle penetrations can damage the fabric. Adjust stitch
density by setting a fixed spacing value, or let Auto Spacing calculate the
spacing for you. Auto Spacing automatically adjusts the stitch spacing
wherever the column changes width.
Tip The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long Satin
stitches. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long
stitches with Auto Jump for details.

Adjusting Satin stitch spacing


Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Satin spacing.
Stitch spacing is the distance in millimeters between two needle
penetrations on the same side of a column. Where a column is narrow,
stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric. Where a
column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too many
needle penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Adjusting stitch
density.
Satin spacing

Satin spacing

Change the stitch density in Satin fills by adjusting the stitch spacing setting
in the Object Properties dialog. The larger the spacing between stitches,
the lower the density. The smaller the spacing, the higher the density.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

133

Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between
preset styles with different spacing settings. Each button on the puck
accesses the next preset style. For example, clicking button 1 accesses
<PRESET_SATIN_1>.

To adjust Satin stitch spacing


1

Right-click the Satin icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens.

Adjust stitch spacing


Deselect Auto Spacing

Deselect the Auto Spacing checkbox.


Note If Auto Spacing is selected, the fixed stitch spacing setting is not
used. See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch for details.

In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the spacing.

 To increase stitch density, enter a smaller value.


 To reduce the density for more open stitching, enter a larger value.

Stitch Spacing 1.0 mm

Stitch Spacing 1.8 mm

If you want to control long Satin stitch, select the Auto Split checkbox
and specify the Auto Split Length and Auto Split Minimum Stitch
values.
See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving long stitches
with Auto Jump for details.

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

134

Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch


Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Auto Spacing settings.
The Auto Spacing option adjusts stitch spacing for Satin stitches according
to column width. For varying width objects, Auto Spacing changes spacing
to the best density for the width. See also Adjusting stitch density.

To apply Auto Spacing to Satin stitch


1

Right-click the Satin icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens.

Select Auto Spacing and


adjust spacing percentage

Select the Auto Spacing checkbox.

Adjust standard Auto Spacing in the Adjust field.


The spacing is given as a percentage of the preset values:

 To decrease stitch density, increase the percentagee.g. to


110-115%.

 To increase stitch density, decrease the percentagee.g. to


90-85%.

>100%fewer stitches

ES 2006

100%no adjustment

Wilcom ES Online Manual

<100%more stitches

135

Tip 75% generally produces high quality embroidery. An increased


stitch count means the design will take longer and be more expensive
to stitch.
4

Click Apply.
Note For even more precise results, you can adjust Auto Spacing
settings. See Adjusting Auto Spacing settings for details.

Adjusting Auto Spacing settings


Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Auto Spacing settings.
Adjust Auto Spacing settings to get the exact results you want. You can
specify how rapidly spacing changes, and by how much, by changing the
stitch length and spacing settings. You can also specify spacing offsets to
automatically adjust spacing for different thread types.
Tip Take a note of the default settings before you start. You will usually
want to save modified settings to a template. See Working with design
templates for details.
spacing 2
spacing 1
length 2

length 1

Auto spacing

Fixed spacing

Warning If you want to restore the default settings and have not kept a
record of them, use the Revert utility in the Wilcom ES folder to revert to
factory settings.

To adjust Auto Spacing settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Satin icon.

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

136

The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens.

Select Auto Spacing


Click to adjust Auto Spacing values

Click Values in the Auto Spacing panel.

Enter spacing
offsets for each
thread type

Adjust stitch
length values
Adjust spacing
values

Adjust stitch settings in the Stitch panel:

default spacing values

custom spacing values

 Length: These values define the increments by which spacing is


adjusted.
The smaller the distance between each length, the more rapidly
stitching changes from open to dense. Each length value must be
greater than the previous one.

 Spacing: These values define the spacing corresponding to each


stitch length.
4

ES 2006

Adjust spacing offsets for different thread types.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

137

The offset set the compensatory amount by which stitch settings will be
adjusted for different thread types.

 Thread type A is average thread, and will generally use the default
value, 0.01 mm.

 Thread Type B is thicker than average and requires a larger offset


valuee.g. 0.03 mmin order to slightly increase stitch spacing
(decrease density).

 Thread type C is thinner than average and requires a negative


valuee.g. -0.03 mmto decrease stitch spacing (increase
density).

 Thread Type D is very thin and requires an even greater negative


valuee.g. -0.06 mmto decrease stitch spacing.
Note You assign the thread type in the Add Thread dialog. Stitch
spacing of the assigned thread type is automatically adjusted according
to the values set here. See Adding your own colors to thread charts for
details.
5

Click OK in the Auto Spacing dialog.

Click Apply.
Tip If you change your mind, click Reset to revert to the factory default
settings.

Adjusting Satin stitch count


Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the Satin stitch count.
Triple Satin is often used for folk
designs to mimic handmade
embroidery that uses thicker thread.
If you require thicker stitches, set the
Satin stitch to repeat itself multiple
times. You set the number of
repetitions of each stitch in the Satin
Count field. Every odd (forward)
stitch of a Triple Satin column can be
stitched up to 15 times.

To adjust Satin stitch count


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Satin icon.

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

138

The Object Properties > Fills > Satin dialog opens.

Enter number of repetitions

Enter the number of repetitions in the Satin Count field.


Warning Using a value higher than 10 may cause thread breaks,
depending on the design, fabric, or thread tension.

Click Apply.
Tip When you increase the Satin stitch count, you should also increase
the stitch spacing to avoid bunching of stitches and thread breaks. See
Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details.

Creating fills with Tatami stitch


Click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Tatami stitch to new or selected
large, irregular shapes. Right-click to adjust Tatami settings.
Tatami stitch consists of rows of run stitches and is suitable for filling large,
irregular shapes. Stitches are laid in rows going back and forth across the
shape. Stitch offsets in each row are used to eliminate horizontal split lines.
See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

139

You can control stitch density in Tatami objects by adjusting the backstitch
type, stitch length, and row spacing. With Tatami fills you can specify how
each row is offset in order to control the patterns formed by needle
penetrations. See Creating textures with Tatami offsets for details.

Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length


Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami spacing and length.
Tatami stitch density is determined by the distance between each row of
stitches. The spacing setting is the distance between two forward rows.
Specify the optimum and minimum stitch lengths to be generated for Tatami
objects. The stitch length varies slightly in Tatami fills to ensure that small
stitches are not generated at the edges of the shape. See also Adjusting
stitch density.
row spacing

offset fraction

stitch length

row direction

Tip Sometimes you may want to increase row spacing to create open
stitching. This is often useful for backgrounds. However, this also means
that travel runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows between segments
are visible and can spoil the effect. The Trapunto effect automatically moves
underlying travel runs to the edges of an object so that they cant be seen.
See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.

To adjust Tatami stitch spacing and length


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Tatami icon.

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

140

The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Adjust stitch values

In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the new spacing value.


This value is the distance between each forward row of stitching.

 To increase the density, enter a smaller value.


 To decrease the density, enter a larger value.

Spacing: 0.4 mm

ES 2006

Length: 2 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

Length: 1 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

In the Min Stitch Length field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to
be generated.

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

Spacing: 0.8 mm

Enter a stitch length in the Length field.

Length: 4.5 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

Spacing: 0.6 mm

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.8 mm

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 1.2 mm

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

141

Selecting a Tatami backstitch


Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to select a Tatami backstitch.
Click to apply Standard backstitch.
Click to apply Borderline backstitch.
Click to apply Diagonal backstitch.
Tatami backstitch is the term used for every second row of stitches in a
Tatami fill. There are three types availableStandard, Borderline, and
Diagonal.

Standard backstitch

Borderline backstitch

Diagonal backstitch

Standard backstitch
The rows are approximately parallel, with every backstitch row slightly
shorter than the forward row. Because the rows are different lengths, there
are fewer small stitches at the edge of the shape, reducing possible damage
to the fabric. Standard backstitch is suitable for high density fills.

Borderline backstitch
The rows are approximately parallel. With lower density fills, borderline
backstitch creates a smooth, well-defined edge. Borderline backstitch is also
called Trapunto style. See Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

142

Note Borderline backstitches may not follow the outline of the shape if the
stitch spacing is less than the minimum stitch length. Where the stitch rows
are perpendicular to the boundary, connecting stitches are adjusted to be
longer than the minimum stitch.
.

minimum stitch
stitch spacing
connecting stitches
follow the boundary

connecting stitches
are adjusted

Diagonal backstitch
The backward rows are diagonal, directly connecting the forward rows.
Diagonal backstitch is suitable for turning shapes, and gives good results
with Jagged Edge. See Creating jagged edges for details.

To select a Tatami backstitch


1

Right-click the Tatami icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Select backstitch type

Select a backstitch type in the Backstitch panel.

Click Apply.

Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch


Click Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Zigzag stitch to new or selected
objects. Right-click to adjust Zigzag settings.
Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of
the column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal,
Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch.
Zigzag is frequently used for tacking down appliqus, while E Stitch is used

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

143

as the cover stitch. It can also be used for decorative effect or where fewer
stitches are required. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

Tip Zigzag and Double Zigzag stitches are frequently used as underlays.
See Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings for details.

To create outlines with Zigzag stitch


1

Right-click the Zigzag icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Zigzag dialog opens.

Adjust stitch spacing

Enter a spacing value in the Stitch Spacing field.


This value is the distance in millimeters between two needle
penetrations on the same side of the column.

stitch spacing: 2.0 mm

stitch spacing: 3.0 mm

stitch spacing: 4.5 mm

Click Apply.

Creating outlines with E Stitch


Click E Stitch (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply E Stitch stitch to new or selected
objects. Right-click to adjust E Stitch settings.

ES 2006

Chapter 6

Fill and Outline Stitches

144

E Stitch, sometimes referred to as blanket stitch, produces long, narrow


columns with a comb effect. It is often used to stitch borders around
appliqus. The needle penetrates both sides of the column, and then
penetrates the second side again, laying the thread along the side.
E stitches are usually more open than Satin or Zigzag stitches. See also
Corresponding object and stitch types.

To create outlines with E Stitch


1

Right-click the E Stitch icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > E Stitch dialog opens.

Adjust stitch spacing

Enter # run stitches

In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the spacing value.


This value is the distance in millimeters between each perpendicular
stitch.

Stitch Spacing: 1.0 mm

ES 2006

Stitch Spacing: 2.0 mm

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Stitch Spacing: 3.5 mm

145

In the Number of Runs field, enter the number of run stitches between
each E Stitch.
3 runs

E Stitch spacing

1 run

E Stitch spacing

Click Apply.

Creating decorative outlines


Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Digitizing methods divide broadly into two categoriesoutline and fill. Run
and Manual digitizing methods are used to digitize outlines or individual
stitches. Run stitch, Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, and Stemstitch are
considered both digitizing methods and stitch types. See also Digitizing lines
and Creating motif runs.
For thicker, decorative lines, use Backstitch or Stemstitch. Backstitch is an
older-style, adaptable stitch which can be used for delicate outlines. This
stitch follows intricate curves well. Stemstitch is thicker and can be used to
mimic hand-sewn embroidery. It is used for stems and vines with other
decorative stitches, or as an outline for Satin or Motif fills.

Backstitch

ES 2006

Chapter 6

Stemstitch

Fill and Outline Stitches

Stemstitch with
Motif Fill

146

Tip ES Designer lets you convert between Run, Triple Run, Motif Run,
Backstitch, Stemstitch and Input C objects. See Converting between run
objects for details.

Adjusting Backstitch settings


Use Backstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of backstitches along a digitized
line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Adjust Backstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify
the exact stitch length, chord gap, thickness and overlap values as well as
the number of strokes.

To set Backstitch settings


1

Right-click the Backstitch icon.


The Object Properties > Outlines > Backstitch dialog opens.

Adjust backstitch values

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

147

Enter minimum and maximum run lengths in the Length and Min
Length fields.

Run Length: 1.5 mm

Run Length: 2.5 mm

Run Length: 4.5 mm

Adjust the Chord Gap setting as required. See Setting variable run
stitch lengths for details.

Adjust stitch thickness in the Thickness field.


Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker stitches.

Stitch Thickness: 0.30 mm

Stitch Thickness: 0.70 mm

Adjust the backstitch overlap percentage in the Overlap field.

Overlap: 10%

ES 2006

Stitch Thickness: 0.50 mm

Chapter 6

Overlap: 50%

Fill and Outline Stitches

Overlap: 90%

148

Select the number of strokes3 or 5.

Strokes: 3

Strokes: 5

Click Apply.

Digitize Backstitch outlines as you would a Run stitch outline. See


Creating stitch runs for details.

Adjusting Stemstitch settings


Use Stemstitch (Input toolbar) to place a row of stemstitches along a
digitized line. Right-click to adjust settings for new or selected objects.
Adjust Stemstitch settings to get the exact results you want. You can specify
the exact stitch and line thickness, spacing and overlap values as well as the
number of strokes.

To adjust Stemstitch settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Stemstitch icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

149

The Object Properties > Outlines > Stemstitch dialog opens.

Adjust stemstitch values

Select type and adjust thickness

Adjust the line thickness in the Thickness field.

Line Thickness: 1.0 mm

Adjust stitch spacing in the Spacing field.

Spacing: 1.2 m

Spacing: 0.8 mm

Enter a stitch angle in the Angle field.

Angle: 90

ES 2006

Line Thickness: 1.5 mm

Chapter 6

Angle: 45

Fill and Outline Stitches

150

Select either Single or Triple.

Type: Triple

Type: Single

Note For Triple only, you can also adjust stitch thickness in the Stitch
Thickness field. Needle penetrations are spaced more widely for thicker
stitches.

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Digitize Stemstitch outlines as you would a Run stitch outline. See


Creating stitch runs for details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

151

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

When digitizing, you select thread colors for each object you create from the
color palette. This contains a selection of thread colors tailored for each
design or color scheme. The particular colorway represents the actual
thread colors in which a design will be stitched. In fact you can define
multiple color schemes and switch between them. This has important
implications for sales presentations as well as production. You can also print
multiple colorways, design backgrounds, and icons of color blocks together
with the production worksheet.

For each colorway you define, you can select colors from commercial thread
charts or define your own. Search for particular threads by specific code.
Automatic thread color helps you locate thread colors based on closest
match across one or several thread charts. You can also match thread colors
from imported graphicsvector or bitmap.
This section describes how to select colors from the color palette as well as
how to change colorways. It also explains how to define, modify and delete
colorways. There is also an explanation of how to define your own thread
colors and charts.

Changing thread colors


New objects are digitized using the selected color in the color palette. You
can change the color before or after digitizing. If the color you want is not

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

152

available in the color palette, you may need to add it to the colorway. See
Modifying colorways for details.
Note Color change machine functions are automatically inserted when you
assign a color.

Selecting colors
When you digitize a new object, it automatically takes the color selected in
the color palette. This is the current color. Change the color of one or more
selected objects in your design at any time.
Tip If the color palette itself does not appear, you need to select it from the
Toolbars dialog. See Showing or hiding toolbars for details.

To select a color

 Deselect all objects, and then select a color from the palette.
Edit background
Select color

Split palette color


Edit color palette

Edit colorways

Compact palette

Change colorway

Add color to palette

This color becomes current for all new objects.

 To change the color of selected objects, simply select a new color from
the palette.
object selected

color changed

Note While the selected object/s change color, the current color does
not change.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

153

Recoloring consecutive objects


Select Set Color (Machine menu) to change the color of consecutive objects.
You can change the color of consecutive objects of the same color at the
same time. Consecutive objects follow each other in the stitching sequence.
See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object List.

To recolor consecutive objects


1

Select the first object in the sequence to recolor.

blue

blue

green

Select Machine > Set Color.


The Set Color dialog opens.

Change color of
consecutive objects
Select color

Select the All consecutive objects of the same color option.


Note If you selected more than one object, this option is not available.

Select a color from the list.


Only colors in the colorway are available.

ES 2006

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

154

Click OK.

red
red
green

Working with colorways


ES Designer lets you define multiple color schemes, or colorways, for the
one design. Change them to preview an existing design in different colors
on different fabrics.

When you start a design, Colorway 1 appears as the default color palette.
Colorways are saved automatically with the design when saving in EMB
format. You can save all your colorways as an EMT template file for use in
future designs. Colorways cannot, however, be saved with stitch files. See
also Viewing colorways and Working with design templates.
Note Certain properties are included as part of the colorway
definitionbackground color or fabric, unique number, as well as display
colors for borer symbols, unsewn stitches, selected objects, object outlines
and the grid.
As dark-colored threads cover light-colored fabrics better than vice versa,
different densities may be required when you change from one colorway to
another. For example, a black design on a white shirt may have been
digitized with slightly open Tatami to save on stitches. If the colorway is
changed to white on black, the Tatami density may need adjusting. See
Adjusting stitch density for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

155

Note Colorways are not intended to compensate for the different densities.
Rather, different styles should be used, or separate designsone for dark
threads on light fabric, and one for light threads on dark fabric.

Setting up color palettes


Use Add Color To Palette (Color toolbar) to add a new color slot to the
palette. This can be edited by means of the Color Palette Editor.
Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to assign thread colors to slots in the
Color Palette.
Use Compact Palette (Color toolbar) to remove all unused colors from
palette. Unused slots appear gray.
When you create a new design, it includes a single default colorway called
Colorway 1. This contains 15 default colors, unassigned to any thread
chart. The Color Palette Editor displays the same default colors. Add extra
color slots as required.

To set up a color palette


1

Open a new design.


The default color palette provides 12 colors.

Click to add color slots

Tip If you using artwork as a backdrop, you can match image colors
directly to the nearest matching threads in selected thread charts. See
Matching image colors to threads for details.
2

Click the Add Color To Palette icon to add further color slots as
required.

Click the Color Palette Editor icon.


The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the same default
colors.

ES 2006

Click the Thread Charts button.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

156

The Active Thread Charts dialog opens.

Select tread
chart/s to use

Select the thread chart/s you want to use and click OK.
All color definitions from the selected chart/s are transferred to the Color
Palette Editor.

Click to select
thread chart/s

Click Match to match


selected color

Search color list manually


for suitable colors

Enter exact color


code if known
Default
colors

Select a color slot in the Color Palette Editor and match it to a suitable
thread by one of the following means:

 Simply click the Match button at the top of the color list to find the
nearest equivalent thread color in the selected charts.

 Enter an exact color code in the Find Code field.


 Click-and-drag the selection handle and scroll down the color list to
locate a color you want to use.

 Click the arrow buttons on top and at the bottom of the color list.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

157

Note The current selection in the Color Palette Editor is not linked to
the current selection in the Color Palette itself.
7

Select the color in the list by clicking the color or the code.
The color is assigned to the selected color slot, ready for use.

Click Assign.
The selected thread is assigned to the color slot and the Color Palette
Editor selection is advanced by one slot.
Tip Once all colors are assigned to objects, you can click the Compact
Palette icon to display only those colors used in the design. See also
Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor.
Note The Compact Palette tool is disabled for machine formats that use
needle addressingi.e. that have Color Change set as Needle No in the
Machine Format Values dialog. See also Setting color change functions.

Adding and deleting colorways


Use Multi-Colorway Box (Color toolbar) to open or close the modeless
Multi-Colorway Box dialog which allows you add and edit colorways.
It is often difficult to imagine your designs stitched out on different fabric
colors and textures, using different combinations of thread colors. When you
create a new design, the design contains a single default colorway called
Colorway 1. You can define up to 100 colorways for each design.

To add or delete a colorway


1

Create a new design or open an existing one.

Click the Multi-Colorway Box icon.


The Multi-Colorway Box dialog opens.

Click to add new


colorways

ES 2006

Chapter 7

Colorway 1

Colorways and Thread Charts

158

Click New and enter a New Colorway name.

My Colorway

Enter new colorway name

Colorway 1

Select colorway to base on

Tip By default, the Based on Colorway field contains the current


colorway. Select from the dropdown list to change colorways. If you
want to base the new colorway on default settings, leave the field blank.

Colorway 1

Click to choose
colorway

My Colorway

Click to delete colorway

Edit the colors and background of the new colorway using the Color
Palette Editor. See Modifying colorways for details.

Select a colorway in the list to view.


This has the same effect as selecting the colorway from the dropdown
list on the Color toolbar.

To delete a colorway, select it and click Delete.


You are prompted to confirm the deletion.

Click OK.

Modifying colorways
Use Multi-Colorway Box (Color toolbar) to open or close the modeless
Multi-Colorway Box dialog which allows you add and edit colorways.
Use Add Color To Palette (Color toolbar) to add a new color slot to the
palette. This can be edited by means of the Color Palette Editor.
Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to assign thread colors to slots in the
Color Palette.
Use Compact Palette (Color toolbar) to remove all unused colors from
palette. Unused slots appear gray.
You can modify a colorway by adding or changing colors. New colors can be
selected from any of the available thread charts. Any modifications to thread

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

159

colors only affect the selected colorway. All others remain unchanged. The
modified colorway can be saved with the design you are working with and/or
the current template.
Note The default settings are stored as Colorway 1. If you change the
background in Colorway 1 and save your template, it will always display like
this at start up. All defined colorways are saved in the template.

To modify a colorway
1

With a design open, click the Multi-Colorway Box icon.


The Multi-Colorway Box dialog opens.

Colorway 1

Select colorway
to edit

My Colorway

Click to change background of colorway

Select the colorway you want to edit.

To edit the name, click the field, key in a new name, and press Enter.

To add further color slots, click the Add Color To Palette icon.

To change the colorway background and display colors, click BKG.


The Display dialog opens. Background colors and fabrics are treated as
part of the colorway rather than design window settings. In addition,
display colors for borer holes, unsewn and selected stitches, object
outlines and grid are part of the colorway definition. See Viewing
colorways, backgrounds and display colors for details.

ES 2006

To modify the thread colors of the selected colorway, click the Color
Palette Editor icon.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

160

The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway.

Search color list manually


for suitable colors

Enter exact color code if known


Click to assign color to
selected color slot

1 - Clouds

Click to locate selected color


Enter descriptive name for
selected color

Assign colors from the current thread chart to selected color slots. See
Setting up color palettes for details.
Tip Once all colors are assigned to objects, you can click the Compact
Palette icon to display only those colors used in the design. See also
Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor.

Modifying thread colors


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify threads in existing charts.
Change the code, description, brand, thickness or display color of existing
threads by means of the Color Palette Editor.

To modify a thread color


1

ES 2006

Click the Color Palette Editor icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

161

The Color Palette Editor dialog opens.


Click to assign
new color to slot
Click to edit
selected thread

Import threads from the thread chart of your choice. See Setting up
color palettes for details.

Select the color slot you want to edit and click the Edit Thread button.
The Edit Thread dialog opens.

Click to select
or mix color

Edit thread
details

Edit thread details as required. See Adding your own colors to thread
charts for details.

Click OK.

Naming design elements via the Color Palette Editor


You can assign names to blocks of sequential, same-color objects, known as
elements. Element names appear on the production worksheet. The Usage
field in the Color Palette Editor shows a list of selected color blocks which
correspond to design elements. By default, the number in the stop sequence
is displayed. However, each color block can be given a descriptive name for
easy identification.
Tip You can also name design elements via the Design Properties dialog.
See Naming design elements via Design Properties for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

162

To name design elements via the Color Palette Editor


1

Use the Color Palette Editor to set up a new palette or edit an existing
colorway. See Setting up color palettes for details.
The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway.

Select color slot

Enter descriptive
name for selected
color

1 - Clouds

Click and hold to locate selected color

Select a color slot.

To view the color, click Locate and hold.


Tip When more than one element appears in the Usage list, you can
select and locate them singly or as a group.

To name the design element, double-click the Usage field and key in a
descriptive titlee.g. Clouds.

To check the naming of all design elements, select File > Design
Properties.
The Design Properties > Information dialog opens.

Select the Stop Sequence tab to view the color sequence and stitch
counts for each design element.
The data in this tab is extracted from the design and, except for
Element, cannot be modified.

Click to edit
design elements

Tip You can show the stitch count for each element individually or as a
cumulative count. See Setting other options for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

163

To edit an Element name, simply click the field, key in a new name, and
press Enter.
Tip The information on this tab may be included in total or in part on
the production worksheet. See Customizing production worksheet
information for details.

Splitting color blocks


Use Multi-Colorway Box (Color toolbar) to open or close the modeless
Multi-Colorway Box dialog which allows you add and edit colorways.
Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to assign thread colors to slots in the
Color Palette.
Use Split Palette Color (Color toolbar) to create a new color slot with the
same thread specification as the selected slot.
A color block or element corresponds to a color stop in the design. It may
be comprised of a single iteme.g. ropesor moree.g. ropes and birds.
In one colorway you may want to assign the same thread color to both
items, while in another you may want to assign different colors to each. The
Split Palette Color tool makes this easysimply create a new color slot
with the same thread specification as the selected slot. This is added to the
palettes of all colorways. Selected objects are assigned to the new palette
position.
Note The design needs to contain at least two colorways and two objects.
The button is disabled when objects of different colors are selected.

To split a color block


1

With a design open, click the Multi-Colorway Box icon.


The Multi-Colorway Box dialog opens.

Select colorway
to edit

ES 2006

Select the colorway you want to modify.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

164

Select the object(s) whose color needs to changethey must be


assigned to the same color slot.
The Split Palette Color button is activated.

Select objects
to change

Click the Split Palette Color icon.


A new color slot of the same color is added to the palette and all
colorways. Selected objects are assigned to the new palette position.

New color slot added to all colorways


based on selected color (#2)

Assign a new thread color to the new color slot in the selected colorway.
See Setting up color palettes for details.
The colors of the other colorways remain unaffected.

New color assigned to slot


in selected colorway

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

165

Note By default, the new color slot is placed at the end of the Color
Palette. This, however, does not affect the stitching sequence.

Consecutive
blocks of same
color remain
separate

Matching image colors to threads


Right-click the image and select the Match Bitmap Color command to match image
colors to actual threads.
You can manually match colors from an inserted bitmap or vector image to
thread colors in a selected chart. But the quicker way is by using automatic
color matching.

To match image colors to threads

ES 2006

Right-click the image.

Select Match Bitmap Color from the popup menu.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

166

All colors used in the image appear in the Match Bitmap Color dialog.

Select color
to match
Click to
assign
Select thread
chart

Matched
colors listed

Click to
match

Select the thread chart/s to include in the search from the Thread
Charts list.
Note To automatically match the image colors to available threads,
simply click OK. The system automatically assigns thread colors from
the selected chart/s to the current colorway.

To make your own color selections, first select the color to match.

Click Match.
The system searches for the closest match across all selected charts and
displays them in the thread color list below.

Select a thread and assign to the color palette by double-clicking or


clicking Assign.

Repeat until all the colors you intend to use in the design have been
matched.
Note Each search negates the previous results.

Click OK.
The selected thread colors are assigned to the current colorway. If the
number of available thread colors is less than the number of colors in
the image, the system will increase the number of slots in the color
palette accordingly.
Note The maximum number of new thread colors which can be added
to the color palette from a bitmap is 128.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

167

Customizing thread charts


Thread charts are lists of pre-defined thread colors. They may be based on
commercially available thread charts, or charts you define yourself. When
you create a thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in future
use. You may use pre-defined thread colors from existing charts or define
your own. You may also want to update existing thread charts by modifying
thread details or removing threads.

Creating new thread charts


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to create new thread charts.
ES Designer lets you define your own thread charts. When you create a
thread chart, you are creating a store of colors to use in future use.

To create a new thread chart


1

Click the Color Palette Editor icon.


The Color Palette Editor dialog opens displaying the current colorway.
Click to select
thread chart/s

Click to modify
thread charts

Click the Thread Charts button.


The Active Thread Charts dialog opens.

Click Modify.
The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread
chart.

Click to create new chart

ES 2006

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

168

Click New.
The New Thread Chart dialog opens.

A-My Thread Chart

Enter new thread


chart name

Enter a name for the chart and click OK.


You return to the Modify Thread Chart dialog. The new chart is created,
ready for you to add thread colors.

Click to add your


own threads

Click to copy
threads from
other chart

Click Add to add your own colors. See Adding your own colors to thread
charts for details.

Click Copy From to add colors from an existing chart. See Copying colors
between charts for details.

Click Close to finish.


The new chart is created and ready for use.

Modifying existing thread charts


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.
Use the Modify Thread Chart dialog to rename existing thread charts and
remove them entirely from the system. Select names that will help you
remember the charts you need or to help you sort frequently-used charts to
the top of the list.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

169

Warning Be careful when deleting thread charts. If you delete the wrong
chart you will need to reinstall Wilcom ES to restore it.

To modify existing thread charts


1

Open the Active Thread Charts dialog. See Creating new thread charts
for details.

Select
thread chart

Click to modify
selected thread chart

Select a thread chart and click Modify.


The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread
chart.

Click to rename

From the Name list, select the chart to modify.

Click Delete to remove the entire chart.

Click Rename to change names.

Click to delete

The Rename Thread Chart dialog opens.

A-My Royal Chart

Enter new thread


chart name

Enter the new name for the thread chart and click OK.

Modifying threads in existing charts


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.

ES 2006

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

170

Remove obsolete thread colors from a thread chart using the Modify
Thread Chart dialog. Change the code, description, brand, thickness or
display color of existing threads.

To modify threads in existing charts


1

Open the Active Thread Charts dialog. See Creating new thread charts
for details.

Select the required thread chart and click Modify.


The Modify Thread Chart dialog opens displaying the current thread
chart.

Select
thread chart

Select color
to modify

Click to remove
selected thread color
Click to edit selected
thread details
Click to remove ALL
colors from chart

From the Name list, select the chart to modify.

In the Threads list, select the thread to modify.

Click Remove to remove the selected thread from the chart.


Tip To delete all the threads from the thread chart, click Clear All.

ES 2006

Click Edit to change thread details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

171

The Edit Thread dialog opens.

Click to select
or mix color
Edit thread
details

Edit thread details as required. See Adding your own colors to thread
charts for details.

Click OK.

Copying colors between charts


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.
You can copy colors between different thread charts to create your own
charts from existing colors.

To copy colors between charts


1

Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts
for details.

Select
existing chart

Click to create
new chart

Click to copy
threads from
other chart

ES 2006

Create a new chart or open an existing one from the Name list.

Click Copy From.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

172

The Copy From dialog opens.

Select
thread chart
Select color
to copy

Select the source thread chart from the Name list.

Select the color/s you want to copy.


Tip Use Ctrl or Shift keys to copy a group or range of colors.

Click OK.
All colors are copied to the new thread chart.

Adding your own colors to thread charts


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.
You can add colors to thread charts using colors from other charts or colors
you mix yourself.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

173

To add your own colors to a thread chart


1

Open the Modify Thread Chart dialog. See Creating new thread charts
for details.

Select
existing chart

Click to create
new chart
Click to add
own colors to
thread chart

Create a new chart or open an existing one from the Name list.

Click Add to add your own colors.


The Add Thread dialog opens.

Enter code,
brand, and
description details

Click to select
or mix color
1234
My Brand
Deep Purple

Select thread
thickness

Enter code, brand, and description details for the new thread color.
Code is the identification number of a thread color in a brand.

Select the appropriate thread thickness.






Thickness A: normal embroidery thread (thickness 120/2, or 40).


Thickness B: thicker than normal.
Thickness C: finer than normal.
Thickness D: very fine.

Note This setting determines the Auto Spacing setting used with the
thread. See also Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch.
6

ES 2006

Mix the thread display color. See Mixing your own thread colors for
details.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

174

Click OK.
The new color appears in the Threads list.

Mixing your own thread colors


Use Color Palette Editor (Color toolbar) to modify existing charts.
You can change the color that displays for a particular thread, or create new
thread colors using the Color dialog.

To mix your own thread colors


1

Add your own colors to a thread chart or modify threads in an existing


chart. See Adding your own colors to thread charts or Modifying threads
in existing charts for details.

Click Mix.
The Color dialog opens.

Drag crosshairs to
adjust color

Click to
select color

Drag arrow to
adjust brightness

Enter exact values


if known
Click to add selected
color to Custom Colors

From the Basic colors palette, select a color that approximates the one
you require.

To further refine your color choice, drag the crosshairs on the color
spectrum.

To adjust color brightness, drag the arrow on the slider bar.


Alternatively, set the exact HLS or RGB values you require.

ES 2006

Click Add to Custom Colors to add mixed color to Custom Colors palette
for future use.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

175

ES 2006

Click OK.

Chapter 7

Colorways and Thread Charts

176

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

Connectors link objects in a design.


They can be run stitches or jumps. You
can use automatic settings to generate
connectors, trims and tie-offs, or add
them manually. Travel runs are
typically used to connect segments
within filled objects. Adjust travel run
length to reduce stitch count.

Warning For Schiffli work, you are advised to add connectors manually
rather than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic connectors are turned
off in the Schiffli template. See Adding connectors manually for details.
This section describes how to add connectors, tie-offs and trims to your
designs. It also describes adjusting settings for automatic connectors,
including the stitch length for travel runs. There is also a topic on hiding
travel runs using the Trapunto effect.
Note You can set separate connector settings for Auto Start and End. See
Setting automatic start and end points for details.

Types of connectors
The type of connector you use depends on whether you want it to be visible
in the final design. The default connector setting in ES Designer is for jumps.

Jumps
Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without
needle penetrations. You can use automatic jumps as connectors between
embroidery objects. The connecting thread generally needs to be tied-off

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

177

and trimmed. The default connector jump length is the same as that set for
Auto Jump.
Tip You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function
or with Manual stitch. See Adding jumps with penetrations off and Digitizing
individual stitches for details.

Runs
Travel runs are typically used to connect segments of complex shapes. They
can also connect adjacent objects. Because runs are not trimmed, they may
be visible in the final embroidery. For this reason, they are less commonly
used as connectors between objects than jumps. If objects are adjacent and
connectors will be hidden, they can be used. You can change the stitch
length of travel runs to ensure they do not protrude from the cover stitching.
You may also adjust the travel run length to reduce the stitch count. See
also Adjusting travel run stitch length.
Note While you can control the properties of run connectors between
objects, you generally cannot control connectors within objects. Lettering
and motif run objects are the exception.

Tie-ins
Tie-in stitches are inserted at the start of objects to prevent stitches from
unraveling. They are inserted inside the shape on the second stitch. You
generally use them when the previous connector is trimmed.

Tie-offs
Tie-offs are generally placed before trims to prevent stitches from
unraveling. You can adjust connector settings to automatically add tie-offs
under certain conditions, or add them manually. You can also include trim
functions so machines with trimmers cut the thread automatically.

Trims
If you are using a machine with an automatic trimmer, the trim function
causes the thread to be cut after a tie-off. In the software, trims are
represented by a triangle with a small circle at the point where stitching

ES 2006

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

178

starts again. The trimmed connector appears as a dotted line. You can
adjust connector settings to automatically add trims, or add them yourself.
connector

trim

stitching starts

Using automatic connectors


ES Designer lets you generate automatic connectors in your design based
on settings in the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. You can change
the connector settings for the whole design or selected objects.
Tip If you prefer to add tie-offs and trims as you digitize, you can turn off
automatic connectors altogether. For Schiffli work, you are advised to add
connectors manually rather than rely on the automatic settings. Automatic
connectors are turned off in the Schiffli template. See Adding connectors
manually for details.
Note The Branching feature lets you digitize like-objectse.g. the fingers
of a handwithout having to think about the most efficient stitching
sequence and joins. See Automatic branching for details.

Using jumps as connectors


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off. Use it to set jumps as connectors.
You can use automatic jumps as connectors between embroidery objects.
Jumps move the frame from one part of the design to another without

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

179

needle penetrations. You generally need to tie-off and trim the connecting
thread.

You can also digitize jumps manually using the Penetrations function. See
Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.

To use jumps as connectors


1

Click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

Select the Connectors tab.

Select connector method


Select Jump and
enter distance

Adjust Trim
After settings

Adjust tie-in /
tie-off settings

Select a connector method.

 After Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors


immediately following the current object.

 Inside Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors joining


letters within a lettering object, and motifs within motif runs. This
setting also applies to disconnected parts of branched objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

180

Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also
Adjusting travel run stitch length.
4

Select Jump and enter a distance for each frame movement.

In the Trim After panel, adjust the trim settings. See Adjusting
automatic trim after settings for details.

Select Tie In from the list to adjust tie-in settings. See Adjusting
automatic tie-in settings for details.

Select Tie Off from the list to adjust tie-off settings. See Adjusting
automatic tie-off settings for details.

Click Apply.

Using runs as connectors


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off. Use it to set runs as connectors.
You can use runs of single stitches to connect objects in a design. Because
runs cannot be trimmed, they are visible on the final embroidery, unless
another object is digitized to cover them. For this reason, runs are less
commonly used as connectors than jumps.

Run
connectors

Jump
connectors

To use runs as connectors


1

Click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

181

Select the Connectors tab.

Select connector method

Select Run and


adjust stitch length

Adjust tie-in
settings

Select a connector method.

 After Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors


immediately following the current object.

 Inside Object: allows you to adjust settings of connectors joining


letters within a lettering object, and motifs within motif runs. This
setting also applies to disconnected parts of branched objects.
Note This option does not apply to segments within an object. See also
Adjusting travel run stitch length.
4

Select Run and enter a length for the connecting run stitches.
The Tie Off and Trim After options are disabled as they do not apply to
travel runs.

Select Tie In from the list to adjust tie-in settings. See Adjusting
automatic tie-in settings for details.

Click Apply.

Adjusting automatic tie-in settings


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off.

ES 2006

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

182

Tie-in stitches are inserted at the


start of objects to prevent stitches
from unraveling. They are inserted
inside the shape on the second
stitch. You generally use them when
the previous connector is trimmed.

Tie-in with four


stitches

To adjust tie-in settings


1

Click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

Select the Connectors tab.

Adjust tie-in
settings

Select Tie In from the list and select a tie-in option:

 Off: no tie-ins are inserted.


 Always tie in: tie-ins are inserted before the object.
 Tie In If: tie-ins are created if certain conditions are met. When you
select this option, the condition checkboxes become available.
4

If you selected Tie In If, set the conditions:

 After Trim/Color Change: tie-ins are inserted after trims and color
changes.

 Previous Connector: tie-ins are inserted when the previous


connector exceeds the length you specify.
5

Set the tie-in values:

 Length: determines length of tie-in stitches.


 Number: determines number of tie-in stitches to generate.
6

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

183

Adjusting automatic tie-off settings


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off.
With trims, stitches need to be tied off so the thread can be trimmed without
unraveling. Select between two automatic tie-off methods.

Method 1 with four


stitches

Method 2 with
two stitches

Method 2 with four


stitches

Method 1 is generally more visually pleasing on smaller objects and Satin


columns. With this method, however, stitches sew on top of each other with
the consequent risk of thread breakage. On larger areas, the safer
alternative is Method 2.
Tip For narrow shapes or columnse.g. small letteringuse only one
tie-off stitch. You may also decrease the stitch length.

To adjust tie-off settings


1

Click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

Select the Connectors tab.

Adjust tie-off
settings

ES 2006

In the Tie Off panel, select a tie-off option:

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

184

 Off: no tie-off is inserted. By selecting this option, you need to add


tie-off functions manually. See Adding tie-offs for details.

 Always Tie Off: a tie-off is inserted after the object.


 Tie Off If: a tie-off is created if certain conditions are met. When
you select this option, the condition checkboxes become available.
4

If you selected Tie Off If, set the conditions:

 Before Trim/Color Change: a tie-off is inserted before a trim or


color change.

 Always Tie Off Last: a tie-off is inserted if the object is the last one
in the design.

 Next Connector Longer Than: a tie-off is inserted if the next


connector exceeds the specified length.
5

Select a tie-off method:

 Method 1 inserts tie-off stitches along the last stitch. This hides well
and prevents stitches from bulging. It is suitable for Satin columns
and lettering objects.

 Method 2 inserts tie-off stitches between the last two stitches. This
is suitable for larger Tatami-filled shapes.
6

Set the tie-off values:

 Length: determines length of tie-off stitches.


 Number: determines number of tie-off stitches to generate.
7

Click Apply.

Adjusting automatic trim after settings


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off.
You can choose to turn off automatic trimming, to always trim connecting
stitches, or to trim only when the connecting stitch is longer than a specified
value.

To adjust automatic trim settings


1

Click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

185

Select the Connectors tab.

Adjust trim after


settings

In the Trim After panel, select a trim option:

 Off: no trims are inserted. This feature is useful if trimming causes


your machine to slow down, or the needle to lose the thread. You can
either add trim functions yourself, or trim the final embroidery by
hand.

 Always Trim: trims are inserted after the object.


 Trim If Next Connector Is Longer Than: trims are inserted if the
next connector exceeds the length you specify.
Tip Usually, connectors shorter than 3 mm are not visible on the final
embroidery. You may sometimes require a smaller valuee.g. if the
thread color contrasts with the background color.
4

Click Apply.

Adding connectors manually


You can add tie-offs and trims in a design yourself, using the Tie Off, Trim
and Empty Stitch tools. This method is less efficient than using automatic
connectors and it is not recommended, but gives you more control over the
final design. Some machine formats are unable to read functions that
appear on a normal stitch. For these machines, you need to add trim, tie-off
and other machine functions to an Empty Stitch or Empty Jump. You may
also need to add one or more empty stitches or empty jumps to either side
of a function for the machine to read it correctly.
Note If you want to add all the tie-offs and trims yourself, turn off
automatic features in the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. See
Using automatic connectors for details.

Adding tie-offs
Click Tie Off (Pointer toolbar) to insert a tie-off.

ES 2006

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

186

You can add tie-offs in your design using the Tie Off tool. This provides a
semi-automated technique for adding tie-offs as an alternative to digitizing
them with manual stitches. Tie-offs are usually added before a trim at the
end of an object.
Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert
Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for
details.

To add a tie-off
1

Travel to the object you want to tie-off. See Traveling by object for
details.

Click the Tie-off icon.


A Tie-off function is inserted.

Tie-off
function start
Tie-off
function end

Tie-off function inserted, needle


backtracks and returns

The default number of tie-off stitches is two. This means the needle
backtracks twice and returns at the insertion point. Adjust this value in
the Object Properties > Connectors dialog. See Adjusting automatic
tie-off settings for details.
Note Generally you will follow a tie-off with a trim. See Adding trims for
details.

Adding trims
Click Trim (Pointer toolbar) to insert a trim.
You can add trims in your design, using the Trim tool. When you add a trim
in this way, the trim function is added to the current stitch. Some machines

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

187

require empty stitches or empty jumps on either side of the trim. If this is
the case for the machine you want to stitch to, you will need to insert them.
Tip Make sure that all stitches you trim have been tied in and tied off,
otherwise the stitches will not be secured.

To add a trim
1

Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See
Traveling by stitches for details.

Click the Trim icon.


A trim function is inserted at the current needle position.

tie-in symbol

trim symbol

Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert
Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for
details.

Adding empty stitches and empty jumps


Click Empty Function (Pointer toolbar) to insert an empty stitch. Right-click
to insert an empty jump.
Empty stitch is a tight (zero length) lockstitch, used together with, or as an
alternative to, tie-in and tie-off stitches. Use empty stitches instead of
tie-ins or tie-offs for objects filled with light density stitching where standard
tie-ins and tie-offs may be visible. Also, use empty stitches or empty jumps
when required by the selected machine format.
Tip You can also insert machine functions manually using the Insert
Machine Function dialog. See Inserting machine functions manually for
details.

ES 2006

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

188

To add empty stitches and empty jumps


1

Travel to the needle position where you want to trim the thread. See
Traveling by stitches for details.

Click the Empty Function icon to insert an empty stitch.

Right-click Empty Function to insert an empty jump.

Adding jumps with penetrations off


Deselect Penetrations (Generate toolbar) to create jumps with needles or
borers out.
You can create jump connectors manually in a design by digitizing with
penetrations off. The Penetrations tool (formerly known as Needles In)
prevents the needle from penetrating the fabric, forcing the machine to
move across the design in a series of jumps. You can use Penetrations with
any input method.

To add a jump with penetrations off


1

Select an input method.

Deselect Penetrations.

Digitize the connector (or row of jumps) in the usual way for the selected
input method.
The jumps are saved together as an embroidery object.

Penetrations offjump stitches

Satin

Jumps

Tatami

Adjusting travel run stitch length


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off. Use it to set the travel run stitch length.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

189

Travel runs are usually used to connect segments within filled objects. They
are usually covered by fill stitches when the object is stitched out. You can
adjust the travel run length to reduce the stitch count.

To adjust travel run stitch length


1

Click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

Select the Special tab and Travel Run from the list.

Adjust travel run length

Enter a value in the Length field as required.

Travel Run length: 1mm

Travel Run length: 3mm

Tip Increase stitch length to reduce the stitch count. Travel Run
automatically varies the stitch length on tight curves.
4

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Chapter 8

Connecting Embroidery Objects

190

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

ES Designer provides many techniques for achieving smooth, even


placement of stitches, and eliminating gaps in your designs.

Strengthen and stabilize designs with automatic underlay. Compensate for


fabric stretch with pull compensation. Reduce stitch bunching with stitch
shortening and fractional spacing. Adjust stitch density for more efficient
production and remove small stitches automatically. Control corner stitching
with Smart Corners and fine-tune handling of long stitches with Auto Split
and Auto Jump. Set automatic start and end points. These features are all
object properties and can be applied, removed or modified at will.
This section describes how to improve stitch quality with automatic underlay
and pull compensation. It also covers stitch shortening and fractional
spacing together with adjusting stitch density and automatic removal of
small stitches. Auto Split and Auto Jump are described as well as setting
automatic start and end points.

Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays


Embroidery appearance and quality depends a lot on underlay which serves
as a foundation for the cover stitching. Without an underlay, embroidery lies
flat on the underlying fabric which can often show through. New digitizers
might be tempted to increase stitch density but it is much more effective to
apply an underlay. Although it increases the stitch count, underlay helps to

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

191

stabilize fabrics and reduce puckering and pulling especially on larger


designs. It also provides loft, raising cover stitches and preventing them
from sinking into soft fabrics. It can also prepare a napped fabric by
flattening it.
Larger areas and stretchy fabrics such as knits and pique generally need
more underlay than smaller areas and firm fabrics such as drill or leather.
ES Designer lets you set values to suit different fabrics, lettering appearance
and size. Underlay settings are stored with each object in the same way as
other object properties. They are regenerated whenever the object is scaled
or transformed.

Applying automatic underlays


Use Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to strengthen and stabilize
embroidery designs with automatic underlays. Right-click to adjust underlay
settings.
You can generate automatic underlay stitching from scratch or apply it to
existing objects. The type of underlay you choose is determined by the
purpose it is to serve. Any combination of underlay types can be applied in
order to achieve the desired purpose.

with underlay

without underlay

To apply automatic underlays

 Click the Auto Underlay icon with or without objects selected.


With no objects selected, underlay stitches are automatically generated
for all new objects. For both new or selected objects, automatically
generated underlay stitches are based on current properties.

 Click again to turn off the effect.


Selecting underlays
Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust underlay settings.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

192

ES Designer provides a selection of underlay types to choose from. Use a


single layer of underlay, or for more support, combine two underlay types.
The Auto Underlay feature lets you see both underlay settings at the same
time.

Center Run and


Edge Run underlays
used together

To select underlays
1

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.


The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select 1st
underlay

Select 2nd
underlay

Select 1st
underlay type

Select 1st
underlay type

Adjust 1st
underlay settings

Adjust 2nd
underlay settings

Adjust 1st
underlay margins

Adjust 2nd
underlay margins

Select the First Underlay checkbox.

From the first Type field, select the first underlay type.

Select the Second Underlay checkbox as required.

From the second Type field, select the second underlay type.

Adjust settings as required and click Apply.


Adjusted settings are applied to any selected objects. Otherwise, new
settings become current.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

193

Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Center Run and
Edge Run underlay settings.
Center Run places a row of stitches along the center of a column. It is used
to stabilize narrow columnse.g. 2-3 mm wide. Edge Run places stitches
around the edge of an object. Use Edge Run together with the Zigzag or
Tatami underlays when digitizing large shapes.

Center Run underlay

Edge Run underlay

Note You cannot use Center Run with Complex Fill objects.
Adjust the stitch length for Center Run and Edge Run underlays to ensure
the underlay stitches follow the shape of curves and are not visible in the
final embroidery. Set a specific run stitch length, or use a variable stitch
length calculated by ES Designer. If you use a variable length, enter a chord
gap value to control how closely the stitches follow the digitized lines. The
chord gap is the distance between the digitized curve and the underlay
stitch. See also Setting variable run stitch lengths.
Note Stitch settings for Center and Edge Run underlays are stored
separately from and do not affect Run and Triple Run objects.

To adjust Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

194

The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select 1st
underlay

Select 2nd
underlay

Select Center Run


(or Edge Run)

Select Edge Run


(or Center Run)

Adjust fixed or
variable run length

Adjust fixed or
variable run length

Adjust underlay
margins

Select the first and second (as required) Underlay checkbox and select
Center Run or Edge Run as the First or Second underlay type.

Enter the required length values for each underlay type:

 Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch.


 Vary Run Length: If enabled, specify minimum stitch length and
Chord Gap values as required. See Setting variable run stitch
lengths for details.

Edge Run and Center Run underlay


with 2.5 mm stitch length

Edge Run and Center Run underlay


with variable run length

Click Apply.

Adjusting Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Zigzag and Double
Zigzag underlay settings.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

195

Use Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay stitching to support wide columns.
You can combine Zigzag or Double Zigzag with Center Run or Edge Run
underlays. These underlays are best used under Satin cover stitching.

Zigzag underlay

Double Zigzag underlay

You can set spacing and stitch length properties for Zigzag and Double
Zigzag underlay.
Note Zigzag underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not
affect, zigzag cover stitch settings.

To adjust Zigzag and Double Zigzag underlay settings


1

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.


The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select 1st
underlay

Select 2nd
underlay

Select Zigzag (or


Double Zigzag)

Select Double
Zigzag (or Zigzag)

Adjust spacing
and length

Adjust spacing
and length

Adjust underlay
margins

Adjust underlay
margins

Select the first and second (if required) Underlay checkbox and select
Zigzag or Double Zigzag as the First or Second underlay type.

Enter the required spacing and length for each underlay type:

 Spacing: Sets the required distance between two needle


penetrations on the same side of the column.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

196

 Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch.

Spacing: 3.0 mm

Spacing: 4.0 mm

Click Apply.

Adjusting Tatami underlay settings


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami underlay
settings.
Tatami underlay is used to stabilize large, filled shapes. It resembles an
extremely open Tatami fill stitch, where rows of stitches are placed across
the object to create the underlay. Tatami underlay is often used together
with Edge Run, especially for Complex Fill objects under Tatami cover
stitching.
Tatami stitch with
Edge Run and
Tatami underlay
direction of underlay
direction of cover
stitching

Change stitch spacing and length settings for Tatami underlay in the same
way as for Tatami fill stitches. Select the backstitch type you require and,
for Complex Fill objects, set the angle of the underlay stitches.
Note Tatami underlay stitch settings are stored separately from, and do not
affect, Tatami cover stitch settings.

To adjust Tatami underlay settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

197

The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select 1st
underlay
Select Tatami
Adjust Tatami
underlay values

Adjust underlay
margins

Select first or second Underlay checkbox as required and select


Tatami.

Adjust spacing and length settings as required:

 Spacing: Sets the distance between each row of stitching.


 Length: Sets the maximum length of each stitch.
Spacing: 3mm

Spacing: 2mm

For Complex Fill objects, you can also set the stitch angle for Tatami
underlays.
Angle: 45

Angle: 135

ES 2006

Select a backstitch. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details.

Click Apply.

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

198

Setting underlay margins


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust underlay margins.
The underlay margin is the distance between an object outline and the edge
of the underlay. Increase this margin to prevent underlay stitches from
extending outside the cover stitches.

underlay margin

For Complex Fill objects, you can enter a single margin value which is used
for all edges in the shape. For objects created with the Input A, Input B,
Input C or Lettering tools, you can set three different marginsone for the
sides of the column and one for each end.
Note Margin values do not apply for Center Run underlays.

To set underlay margins


1

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.


The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

ES 2006

Select 1st
underlay

Select 2nd
underlay

Select required
underlay type

Select required
underlay type

Set underlay
margins

Set underlay
margins

In the Margins panels, set the required margins.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

199

 For Input A, Input B, Input C and Lettering objects, enter margins in


the 1:, 2: and 3: fields, using the diagram as a guide.

 For Complex Fill objects, enter a margin in the 1: field only. Values
in the other fields will be ignored.

Mgn 1: 0.8 mm, Mgn 2: 0.2 mm,


Mgn 3: 0.4 mm

All margins: 0.1 mm

Tip If you are joining two columns, use a negative value at the joining
end. The underlay will extend outside the cover stitching, allowing for
smooth joining of the columns.

two columns joined

Click Apply.

Adding underlay by segment


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to add underlay by segment.
Normally underlay is applied to all segments before the cover stitches are
sewn. With Fusion Fill objects, however, underlay can be applied by
segment. This means that underlay and cover stitch are stitched segment
by segment.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

200

To add underlay by segment


1

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.


The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select By
Segment

Or select By
Segment for the
2nd underlay only

Select first and second underlays as required.

Select By Segment for either first or second underlay.


Note If you select By Segment for the first underlay, it is selected by
default for the second as well.

Click Apply.

Compensating for fabric stretch


Embroidery stitches tend to pull fabric inwards where the needle penetrates.
This can cause fabric to pucker, and gaps to appear in the embroidery.
Experienced digitizers can manually compensate for pull by overlapping
objects as they digitize. Automatic pull compensation, however, counters
the pull effect by overstitching outlines of filled shapes on the sides where
the needle penetrates. See also Adjusting stitch density.

Digitized outline
Calculated outline
Pull compensation

Adjust the amount of overstitching you need by varying the pull


compensation setting in the Object Properties dialog. This is handy if you
want to stitch a design on fabrics with varying degrees of stretch.
Tip Applying underlay stitching, and using appropriate backing and topping
when stitching out can also reduce the push-pull effect.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

201

Applying automatic pull compensation


Use Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to automatically compensate
for fabric stretch. Right-click to adjust pull compensation settings.
Apply automatic pull compensation to objects in your design, either before
or after you digitize.

Pull Compensation OFF

Pull Compensation ON

To apply automatic pull compensation

 Click the Pull Compensation icon with or without objects selected.


With no objects selected, pull compensation is applied to all new objects.
For both new or selected objects, pull compensation is based on current
properties.

 Click again to turn off the effect.


Adjusting pull compensation settings
Right-click Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust pull
compensation settings.
Appropriate pull compensation settings vary with the type of
fabricstretchy, pile, etchooping methodtight or loosely hoopedand
size of embroidery objectwide or narrow columns. Use the following table
as a guideline.

ES 2006

Fabric

Pull compensation (mm)

drills, cotton

0.20

T-shirt

0.35

fleece, jumper

0.40

lettering

0.2 - 0.3

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

202

To adjust pull compensation settings


1

Right-click the Pull Compensation icon.


The Object Properties > Pull Comp dialog opens.

Select Pull Compensation


and enter overstitch
allowance

Select the Pull Compensation checkbox.

Enter the amount (in millimeters) by which you want to overstitch.

Pull Compensation: 0.3 mm

Pull Compensation: 0.6 mm

Click Apply.

Adjusting column width


Right-click Pull Compensation (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust column width
setting.
The Column Width setting adjusts the width of columnar shapes, allowing
you to change the column width at every point by a constant amount in the
direction of stitching. The purpose is to fatten or thin a column, for
example, in order to create bold lettering. See also Making bold lettering.

Tip Reduce column width if you need to allow the underlay to extend
outside the object boundary.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

203

To adjust column width


1

Right-click the Pull Compensation icon.


The Object Properties > Pull Comp dialog opens.

Select Column Width


and enter column width
adjustment

Select the Column Width checkbox.

Enter the amount (mm) by which you want to adjust column widths.

column width: -1

no adjustment

column width: +1

Click Apply.

Reversing stitch direction


Use Reverse Curves (Image menu) to reverse stitch direction in vector or closed
embroidery objects.
Stitching direction can affect embroidery quality because of the push-pull
effect. This is especially visible with Input C objects. Reverse Curve lets
you control the push-pull effect by reversing the stitch direction. This in turn
affects the stitching direction of Jagged Edge, Contour Stitch and E Stitch
objects. It can also affect Contour stitching, Tatami offsets, Flexi Split
pattern orientation, and Motif Run orientation.
Note Only closed vector and embroidery objects such as Input C can be
reversed. The effect on vector objects will not be visible, convert them to
embroidery objects first.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

204

To reverse stitch direction


1

Select a closed embroidery object.

Select Image > Reverse Curves.


The stitch direction is reversed.
Input C object with
Jagged Edge

Reverse Curve
applied

Creating smooth joins


Use Input A (Input toolbar) together with Continuous Input to create single
objects comprising separately stitched sections.
The Continuous Input feature provides a simple and efficient way of
digitizing a single Input A object comprised of separately stitched sections.
You can also create two smoothly joined objects with different cover stitch
parameters in each.
Note Continuous Input applies only to Input A. The objects so created can
be deleted or edited using standard reshape tools.

To create smooth joins


1

Select Special > Options and click the General tab.

Select a continuous
input style

Select a continuous input style.

 Normal: Use this for non-continuous input.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

205

 Continuous Replace: Use this to continue digitizing the same


object after each Enter keypress. Any properties you change during
digitizing will affect the entire object, not just the section you are
working on.

First section created

Second section
smooth joined to
firsttwo sections
become a single
object

 Continuous Add: Use this to join objects of different size where


different stitch types are usede.g. a narrow section of Satin stitch
joining to a larger section of Tatami.

Second section
smooth joined to
firsttwo sections
become separate
objects
First section created

Click OK.

Digitize the Input A object. See Digitizing columns of varying width for
details.
When you press Enter, the digitized object fills with stitches. The input
tool is still active.

If you are using Continuous Add mode, you can select another stitch
type at this point.
Tip To stop the screen scrolling while moving the mouse, hold down
Shift and click the stitch type button you require.

Recommence digitizing where you left off and press Enter when you have
finished.
The new section fills with stitches and joins to the previous one. If you
are using Continuous Add mode, the new section actually comprises a
new object. This means that, while the two sections (objects) are
smoothly joined, they can have quite different property settings.

ES 2006

To start a new object without joining to the previous object, click the
Input A icon again.

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

206

Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening


Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With
sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside
edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread
breakage when stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the
problem.

shortened stitches

Stitch shortening reduces the length of some stitches in sharp turns so that
the needle penetrations are distributed evenly, creating smoother stitching.
Tip Fractional spacing provides another way of reducing stitch bunching.
See Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing for details.

Applying stitch shortening


Use Shortening (Stitch Types toolbar) to reduce stitch bunching in tight
curves by shortening some stitches on the inside edge. Right-click to adjust
stitch shortening settings.
Apply stitch shortening to sharp corners to decrease stitch density on the
inside edge.

To apply stitch shortening

 Click the Shortening icon with or without objects selected.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

207

With no objects selected, stitch shortening is applied to all new objects.


For both new or selected objects, stitch shortening is based on current
properties.

 Click again to turn off the effect.


Adjusting stitch shortening settings
Right-click Shortening (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust stitch shortening
settings.
Default shortening settings are set to suit most designs. However, advanced
users can adjust the way ES Designer shortens stitches by setting precise
shortening settings.
Note Only change these settings if you understand how stitch shortening
is calculated.

To adjust stitch shortening settings


1

Right-click the Shortening icon.


The Object Properties > Shortening dialog opens.

Select Shortening
Adjust shortening
settings
Access further
settings

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

208

In the If Spacing < field, enter the minimum spacing permitted


between stitches (as % of nominal spacing) before automatic
shortening takes effect.

If spacing < 90%

If spacing < 40%

In the Max No Of Short Stitches field, enter the maximum number of


consecutive short stitches to allow, up to a limit of five.

Max no. of short stitches: 1

Max no. of short stitches: 5

A higher number allows smoother distribution of the needle penetrations


in tight curves, and reduces stitch bunching.
4

Click the Values button.


The Shortening dialog opens.

Define length of short


stitches relative to
original stitch length

Randomize
shortening pattern

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

209

In the Shorten Stitch Length to (%) panel, define the individual


lengths of consecutive short stitches, as a percentage of the original.

Max no. of short stitches: 1


Shorten stitch length to: 80%

Max no. of short stitches: 1


Shorten stitch length to: 50%

Note A value of 80% means that the stitch is shortened to 80% of the
original length, not by 80%. The smaller the percentage, the shorter the
stitch.
If you allow three short stitches, you need only fill in the first three rows.
If you allow five short stitches, fill in all five rows.

Max no. of short stitches: 5


Shorten stitch length to: 50%
Row 1: 90
Row 2: 70 60
Row 3: 55 85 55
Row 4: 55 85 75 55
Row 5: 55 70 45 70 55

Max no. of short stitches: 5


Shorten stitch length to: 50%
Row 1: 80
Row 2: 85 70
Row 3: 70 90 70
Row 4: 70 90 80 70
Row 5: 70 85 65 85 70

If only one short stitch is generated between normal stitches, the value
in Row 1 will apply. If two consecutive short stitches are generated, the
values in Row 2 will apply to 1st and 2nd stitch respectively. And so on
up the scale.
Tip For best results use a jagged pattern between consecutive stitches.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

210

Select the Randomize checkbox to randomize the shortening pattern


values. This will eliminate unwanted lines appearing in regular curves.

Randomize ON

Randomize OFF

Click Apply.

Reducing stitch bunching with fractional spacing


Standard stitch spacing is calculated at the outside edge of a shape. With
sharp curves, spacing which provides adequate coverage on the outside
edge may cause bunching along the inside edge. This may cause thread
breakage when stitching out. The longer the stitches, the worse the
problem.
offset fraction:

0.00
0.33
0.66

outside edge

1.00

With Fractional Spacing, ES Designer calculates spacing settings from a


specified point called the offset fraction. This lies between the outside and
inside edges of the shape. You can change the offset fraction to adjust stitch
spacing at inside and outside edges.
Tip Stitch shortening provides another way of reducing stitch bunching. See
Reducing stitch bunching with stitch shortening for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

211

Applying fractional spacing


Use Fractional Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to reduce stitch bunching in
tight curves by adjusting the point at which stitch spacing is calculated.
Right-click to adjust fractional spacing settings.
Apply fractional spacing to curved shapes to even out the stitch density
along the outside and inside edges. Fractional spacing is particularly useful
for columns of Satin stitches with sharp turns.

Fractional Spacing OFF

Fractional Spacing ON

Tip For best results, combine stitch shortening and fractional spacing
effects.

To apply fractional spacing

 Click the Fractional Spacing icon with or without objects selected.


With no objects selected, fractional spacing is applied to all new objects.
For both new or selected objects, fractional spacing is based on current
properties. See Adjusting fractional spacing settings for details.

 Click again to turn off the effect.


Adjusting fractional spacing settings
Right-click Fractional Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust fractional
spacing settings.
Fractional stitch spacing calculates the spacing at some point between the
outside and inside edges of the shape. This point is called the offset fraction.
The offset fraction is entered as a fraction of the column width, where the
outside edge is 0.00, and the inside edge is 1.00.

To adjust fractional spacing settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Fractional Spacing icon.

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

212

The Object Properties > Smart Corners dialog opens.

Select Fractional Spacing


and enter offset fraction as
fraction of column width

Select the Fractional Spacing checkbox.

In the Offset Fraction field, enter the offset fraction value as a fraction
of the column width, where the outside edge is 0.00, and the inside
edge is 1.00.

59 stitches

49 stitches

offset fraction 0.00

offset fraction 0.33

43 stitches

offset fraction 0.66

Tip An offset fraction of 0.33 generates fewer stitches than standard


spacing, reducing bunching along the inside edge. An offset fraction of
0.66 eliminates bunching on the inside edge, but may produce
insufficient stitches to cover the fabric.
4

Click Apply.

Controlling corner stitching


Sharp points in a shape may cause a bunching of stitches and needle
penetrations which can create a hard spot in the embroidery and may
damage the fabric or needle. Smart Corners helps you control sharp corners
in Input A and Input C objects. There are two typesMitre Corners and
Cap Corners. Specify the corner angle at which either will be automatically
invoked. Mitre Corners create a sharp line at the intersection of the two

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

213

columns. Use them primarily for corner angles of 75 to 90. Cap Corners
are suitable for very sharp corners as they generate fewer stitches.

Smart Corners OFF

Mitre Corners

Cap Corners

Applying Smart Corners


Use Smart Corners (Stitch Types toolbar) to control the stitching out of sharp
corners in Input A and Input C objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
Apply Smart Corners to reduce the number of stitches and the risk of
bunched, distorted embroidery, in sharp corners.

To apply Smart Corners

 Click the Smart Corners icon with or without objects selected.


With no objects selected, Smart Corners are automatically generated for
all new objects. For both new or selected objects, Smart Corners are
based on current properties. See Adjusting Smart Corners settings for
details.

Smart Corners OFF

Mitre Corner

Cap Corner

Note You can also apply Smart Corners in Input C objects in conjunction
with sharp corner rounding. See Rounding sharp corners for details.

 Click again to turn off the effect.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

214

Adjusting Smart Corners settings


Right-click Smart Corners (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Smart Corners
settings.
You can set the angles at which Mitre Corners and Cap Corners will be
applied, and specify the overlap and stitch length allowances.
Note You can use Mitre Corner and Cap Corner options together. For
example, you may wish a corner with an angle less than 75 to be mitred,
but sharp corners of less than 45 to be capped.

To adjust Smart Corners settings


1

Right-click the Smart Corners icon.


The Object Properties > Smart Corners dialog opens.

Select Smart Corners


Adjust Mitre Corner
settings

Select Cap Corner


and adjust settings

ES 2006

Select the Smart Corners checkbox.

In the Mitre Corner panel adjust the following settings:

Wilcom ES Online Manual

215

 Mitre below Angle: the angle below which to apply Mitre Corner.
Any corners less than this angle are mitred.
mitre below
angle: 75

mitre below
angle: 45

For example, set ES Designer to automatically mitre corners with an


angle of less than 75, but stitch wider angles using normal fill stitch
values.

 Mitre Overlap: the distance by which the stitches are allowed to


overlap in the center of the corner.
mitre overlap:
0.5 mm

mitre overlap:
1.5 mm

In the Cap Corner panel adjust the following settings:

 Cap below Angle: the angle below which to apply capped corners.
Any corners less than this angle are capped.
cap below
angle: 45

cap below
angle: 75

If Mitre Corners are also selected, then the cap angle is usually
smaller than the mitre angle.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

216

 Capping overlap: the number of overlapping rows to allow where


the sections of the cap join.
capping
overlap: 1

capping
overlap: 3

 Max Capping stitch length: the maximum length of cap stitches.


Cap Corners with stitches exceeding this length will become Mitre
Corners. This prevents long and short stitches appearing next to
each other.
5

Click Apply.

Rounding sharp corners


Right-click Input C (Input toolbar) to set sharp corner rounding.
ES Designer applies rounding to sharp corners by default. Round Sharp
Corners is available for Input C objects to give you the option of sharp or
round corner points. The option is only available in conjunction with the
Smart Corners effect, and is typically used with the Cap Corner option. See
also Applying Smart Corners.

To round sharp corners


1

Right-click the Input C icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Input C dialog opens.

Select Round
Sharp Corners

Select the Round Sharp Corners checkbox.


This checkbox is only enabled when Smart Corners is turned on in the
Object Properties dialog. See Controlling corner stitching for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

217

Click Apply.

Sharp corner

Rounded corners

Adjusting stitch density


You may want to change stitch density in order to stitch on a different fabric
or with a different thread. Alternatively, you may want to make production
cheaper by reducing the overall stitch count. The Process feature lets you
change the density of all stitch types (except Manual) across the whole or
selected parts of a design. It also lets you adjust the density of selected
stitch types. You can even use the feature to scale a design. See also
Adjusting Auto Spacing settings and Removing small stitches automatically.

100%: 5195 stitches

20%: 987 stitches

Adjusting overall stitch density


Use Process (Generate toolbar) to adjust stitch density of and/or scale the
whole or selected parts of a design.
The Process tool lets you adjust the overall stitch density across the whole
or selected parts of a design in order to achieve a target number of stitches.
You can adjust density as a percentage to avoid calculating the absolute
stitch spacing and length values for each stitch type.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

218

Tip If a design was originally created in ES Designer, or was converted into


objects, the changes you make through the Process dialog will change the
properties of the selected objects. You can check any changes via the
Object Properties dialog.

To adjust overall stitch density


1

Select the design or objects you want to process.

Click the Process icon.


The Process dialog opens.

Enter target
stitch count

Adjust Pull
Compensation

In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches either
as a percentage or absolute value.
This value sets how much the density of each stitch type needs to
change to achieve the target stitch count. The spacing and length
settings for each stitch type automatically adjust according to the new
overall density setting.

In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to


overstitch (or understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.
If the design was originally created in ES Designer, or has been
converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be
applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric
stretch.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

219

In the Dimensions panel, adjust the Width and Height values to scale
the selected objects as required.
Adjust width and
height settings to
scale

Enter the new sizes as an absolute value or as a percentage of the


current size. The default 100% for stitch spacing and length adjusts
automatically to reflect the new density. See Scaling objects by an exact
amount for details.
6

Click Apply.
Stitches for Tatami, Satin, Run, and Program Split objects are
regenerated using the new settings.

100%: 5195 stitches

20%: 987 stitches

Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you
specify design dimensions precisely.

Adjusting stitch density of certain stitch types


Use Process (Generate toolbar) to change the density of selected stitch
types in a design.
The Process tool lets you adjust the density of one or more stitch types
across the whole or selected parts of a design. You do not have to select
objects individually, and you can change density as a percentage. Even if the
selection includes objects created with different stitch types, you can
change the density of only one type. For example, you can select the whole
design, then change the density of all Satin objects. The changes are
reflected in the properties of the individual objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

220

To adjust the density of certain stitch types


1

Select the design or objects you want to process.

Click the Process icon.


The Process dialog opens.

Select Auto
Spacing

Adjust stitch
densities

Adjust Pull
Compensation

In the Stitch Values panel, adjust the density for each stitch type as
required.
You can select the new spacing or length as a percentage of the
originalfrom 10% to 1000%or as an absolute value (in millimeters).
Note If you do not want to change the density of a certain stitch type,
leave it as 100%.

Select the checkbox if you want to use Auto Spacing for Satin stitching.
If the checkbox is cleared, Auto Spacing will be removed from all Satin
elements of the design which will change to fixed spacing. If the
checkbox is dimmed, the original Auto Spacing values are retained. See
also Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch.

ES 2006

In the Pull Compensation field, enter the amount by which to


overstitch (or understitch) in order to compensate for fabric pull.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

221

If the design was originally created in ES Designer, or has been


converted to EMB format, enter a pull compensation value which will be
applied to all objects in the design. See also Compensating for fabric
stretch.

Program Split

Tatami stitch spacing reduced


(density increased)

Tatami stitches

Program Split stitch spacing


reduced (density increased)

Click Apply.
Note Like the Object Properties dialog, the Process dialog lets you
specify design dimensions precisely.

Removing small stitches automatically


Use Small Stitches (Stitch menu) to remove unwanted small stitches automatically.
Very small stitches can damage the fabric and cause thread or needle
breakage. Before you stitch out a design, you can remove unwanted small
stitches automatically. See also Filtering stitches by stitch length.
Tip For small stitches to be removed automatically whenever you output
the design, select the Run Small Stitch Filter on Output checkbox in the
Options dialog. See Setting other options for details.

To remove small stitches automatically


1

ES 2006

Select Stitch > Small Stitches.

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

222

The Small Stitches dialog opens.

Enter minimum stitch


length to keep

Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep.

Click Ok.
All stitches shorter than the specified length will be removed from the
design.
Tip If the new value is smaller than the previous value, regenerate
stitches for the object before you stitch out. Check the Status bar for
the new stitch count.

Setting automatic start and end points


Use Auto Start and End (Generate toolbar) to toggle the Auto Start and End
function on/off according to the current settings. Right-click to open the Auto
Start and End dialog.
Before stitching, some embroidery machines require you to position the
starting needle exactly above the first needle penetration point. Use Auto
Start and End to connect the first and last stitches in the design. This
makes it easy to position the needle before stitching, and reduces the
chance of the needle hitting the side of the frame.

To set automatic start and end points


1

ES 2006

Select Stitch > Auto Start and End.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

223

The Auto Start and End dialog opens.

Select Use Auto


Start and End
Select centering
method

Select preset end


point

Click to enter
separate start and
end points
Specify how to
match connecting
stitches
Specify the
connector type

Select the Use Auto Start and End checkbox to connect the first and
last stitches in the design.

Select the Maintain Automatically checkbox to maintain the design


center after modifying the design.

Select a centering method.

 Auto Start and End: by default, connecting stitches are created


from the start and end points to the center of the design. Select one
of the nine preset end points.

 Return to Start Point: creates a connecting stitch from the end


point to the start point.

 Digitize Auto Start/End Point: creates connecting stitches from


the start and end points to a point you define. If you select this, you
are prompted to select the point after you click OK. Click the
Separately checkbox to enter separate start and end points.

ES 2006

Chapter 9

Improving Stitch Quality

224

Select to match connecting stitches on the Horizontal plane, Vertical


plane or both in the Match On panel.

Match on vertical

Match on horizontal

Match on both

Select the type and length of the connecting stitches in the Connectors
panel. See Connecting Embroidery Objects for details.

Click OK.
Connecting stitches will be inserted as required before the first and after
the last stitch of the design.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

225

PART III

DIGITIZING WITH
ARTWORK
There are two broad categories of artwork file, both of which can be
imported into ES Designer for use as digitizing backdropsvector and
bitmap. To create good quality embroidery, you need to choose or create
suitable artwork of either format. See Digitizing with Vector Images for
details.

Digitizing with vector drawings


This section describes how to create drawing objects using the drawing tools
as well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains
how to merge, trim and split overlapping drawing or embroidery objects
using the Shaping tools. See Digitizing with Vector Images for details.

Digitizing with bitmap images


This section describes how to choose suitable artwork for digitizing purposes
as well as how to scan it into ES Designer and edit it before use. It also
describes how to insert and save bitmap images into ES Designer, as well
as how to show and hide them as you digitize. See Preparing Images for
Automatic Digitizing for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

226

Preparing images for automatic digitizing


This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It
explains how to crop images for digitizing as well as how to prepare both
outlined and non-outlined images. See Preparing Images for Automatic
Digitizing for details.

Automatic digitizing
This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to
embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create
embroidery from grayscale images. See Automatic Digitizing for details.

ES 2006

Digitizing with Artwork

227

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

ES Designer provides tools to draw shapes and outlines directly on screen.


Alternatively, insert or paste vector images created in third-party graphics
packages for use as digitizing backdrops. Scale and transform them in the
same way as embroidery objects. You can also select colors for vector object
outlines and fills. When working with overlapping vector or embroidery
objects, merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools.

Tip Vector images have the advantage over bitmap images that they can
be converted directly to embroidery objects using a variety of input
methods. This allows you to concentrate on design shapes without having
to think about stitch properties and sequence. See also Converting between
object types.
This section describes how to create vector objects using the drawing tools
as well as how to import them from third-party applications. It also explains
how to merge, trim and split overlapping vector or embroidery objects using
the Shaping tools.

Creating vector outlines


ES Designer drawing tools let you draft shapes and outlines on screen.
Vector objects can then be converted to embroidery objects with the

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

228

application of manual input methods and stitch types. See Converting vector
objects to embroidery for details.
Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills.
These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See
Coloring vector objects for details.

Drawing straight lines


Use Line (Image toolbar) to create straight line vector objects.
Draw straight lines in your design using the
Line drawing tool.
Note You can convert line vector objects to
embroidery objects using an outline input
methode.g. Run, Triple Run, or
Motif Runor Input C. See Converting vector
objects to embroidery for details.

To draw straight lines


1

Click the Line icon.

Click the start point of the line.

Click the end point.


Tip To constrain the line vertically, horizontally or in 15 angles, press
Ctrl as you mark the end point.

Drawing open shapes


Use Polyline (Image toolbar) to create open-ended vector objects.
Draw lines of any shape using the Polyline tool. Enter
reference points to create the shape you want.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

229

Note You can convert polyline vector objects to embroidery objects using
Input C or an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run,
Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for
details.

To draw open shapes


1

Click the Polyline icon.

Mark reference points to draw the shape of the line.

 Click to enter a corner point.


 Right-click to enter a curve point.
curve point

corner point

Press Enter.
Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills.
These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See
Coloring vector objects for details.

Drawing polygons
Use Polygon (Image toolbar) to create closed vector objects.
Draw closed shapes using the Polygon tool. Enter
reference points to create the shape you want.
Note You can convert polygon vector objects to
embroidery objects using Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion
Fill, or an outline input methode.g. Run, Triple Run,
Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting
vector objects to embroidery for details.

To draw polygons

ES 2006

Click the Polygon icon.

Digitize the shape by marking reference points on screen.

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

230

 Click to enter a corner point.


 Right-click to enter a curve point.

curve point
corner point

Tip To constrain the line between two points to 15 increments, press


Ctrl as you mark the second point.
3

Press Enter to close the shape.


Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills.
These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See
Coloring vector objects for details.

Drawing rectangles and squares


Use Rectangle (Image toolbar) to create rectangular or square vector
objects.
Draw rectangles and squares using the
Rectangle tool.
Note You can convert rectangle vector
objects to embroidery objects using Input C,
Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline input
methode.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run,
Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector objects to embroidery for
details.

To draw rectangles and squares


1

Click the Rectangle icon.

Click to mark the corner of the rectangle.


An outline attaches to the mouse pointer.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

231

Move the pointer until the outline is the size and shape you require, then
click again.
Click to enter
corner point
Drag pointer,
click again

Note To draw a square, hold down Ctrl as you move the pointer.

Drawing circles and ellipses


Use Ellipse (Image toolbar) to create circular or elliptical vector objects.
Draw circles and ellipses using the Ellipse tool.

Note You can convert ellipse vector objects to embroidery objects using
Input C, Complex Fill, Fusion Fill, or an outline input methode.g. Run,
Triple Run, Motif Run, Backstitch, or Stemstitch. See Converting vector
objects to embroidery for details.

To draw circles and ellipses


1

Click the Ellipse icon.

Click to mark the center of the circle or ellipse.


The outline of a circle attaches to the mouse pointer.

Move the pointer until the outline is the diameter you require, then click
again.

 To draw a perfect circle, press Enter.

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

232

 To draw an ellipse, move the pointer again, then mark a second


radius point when the outline is the required size. Press Enter.

Click to enter
center point

Drag pointer

Press Enter for circle


OR
Mark a point for ellipse

Tip ES Designer lets you select colors for vector object outlines and fills.
These can be different to the corresponding embroidery objects. See
Coloring vector objects for details.

Importing and exporting vector images


You can insert or paste vector images created in third-party drawing
packages for use as digitizing backdrops. You can then convert these to
embroidery objects using a variety of input methods or with the Point &
Stitch tools. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery and Digitizing
shapes with Point & Stitch.
Note The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector
objects. See Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace for details.

Inserting vector images


Use Insert File (Image menu) to insert a vector image for use as a backdrop.
Images from third-party applications can be inserted into ES Designer in a
variety of native and interchange vector formats. You can choose to remove
overlapping objects in vector images by flattening them. This eliminates
overlapping areas of stitching when vector objects are converted to
embroidery objects. You can also import vector images (not DXF) as
bitmaps. See also Supported image formats.
Tip You can also paste vectors directly into ES Designer through the
Windows clipboard. See Pasting vector images for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

233

To insert a vector image


1

Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you
want to insert the vector image.

Select Image > Insert File.


The Open dialog opens.

Select to
insert as
bitmap rather
than vector
Select to
remove
overlapping
objects

From the Look In list, select the folder where you keep your vector files.

From the Files of Type list, select a suitable vector image format and
select the file you want to insert.

If you are working with DXF files:

 Click Options.
The DXF File Options dialog opens.

 Select Inches or Millimeters from the Units of Measurement list


and click OK.
If this information is not specified, the vector image may not display
at the correct size.

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

234

Select the As Bitmap checkbox to insert the vector image as a bitmap


image.

imported as vector
imageindividual objects can be
selected

imported as bitmap imageindividual


objects cannot be selected

Note DXF files cannot be imported as bitmaps.


7

Select the Flatten checkbox to remove any overlapping areas from the
vector image.

hidden areas
removed

vector objects flattened

hidden areas
preserved

vector objects not flattened

Note If a vector image is imported as a bitmap, it is flattened


automatically.
8

Select the Preview checkbox to see a preview of the vector image.

Click Open to insert the vector image into the design window.
Note To work with individual vector objects, you need to ungroup them
first. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details.

Exporting vector images


You can export vector images and embroidery designs from ES Designer in
various vector formats for use in third party programs. This can be useful,
for example, for screen printing. See Supported image formats for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

235

To export a vector image


1

Select the vector image or embroidery design.

Select File > Export As.


The Save Image As dialog opens.

Select folder

Enter file name


Select required
format

Select a folder in the Save In field.

Select a format from the Save as type list.

Enter a new file name in the File name field and click Save.

Pasting vector images


Use Paste Drawing > As Vector (Edit menu) to paste a vector image for use as a
digitizing backdrop.
You can insert a vector image into ES Designer by copying it from another
embroidery design or graphics application, and pasting it into your design.

To paste a vector image

ES 2006

Select the vector image or embroidery design you want to copy and
paste.

Copy it to the Windows clipboard.

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

236

Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you
want to insert the vector image.

Select Edit > Paste Vector > As Vector.


The vector image is pasted into the design.

Note You cannot flatten vectors using Paste.

Manipulating vector images


Vector images may consist of grouped vector objects. You can ungroup
these to work with them individually. ES Designer lets you remove
unnecessary reshape nodes by applying smoothing to individual ungrouped
objects. You can select colors for outlines as well as fills. The Make Complex
Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector curves into a single
complex shapei.e. a shape with holes in it. You can also show or hide
vector images in the design.
Tip You can scale and transform vector images in the same way as
embroidery objects. Unlike bitmap images, any changes you make to vector
objects are updated and saved with the design file. See also Arranging and
Transforming Objects.

Smoothing vector objects


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) in combination with Image > Smooth
Vector Curves to remove unnecessary reshape nodes from vector image
objects.
When you insert a vector image into a design, reshape nodesthe same as
for embroidery objectsare added to the outline. On shapes where the
angle changes constantly, the software may insert hundreds of reshape

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

237

nodes, making reshaping difficult. To remove unnecessary reshape nodes,


ungroup the vector image, and apply smoothing to the vector objects.
Precision:
0.1 mm

Precision:
0.5 mm

without
smoothing

To smooth a vector object


1

Select the vector object (or objects) to smooth.


Note You can only smooth vector objects that have been ungrouped
and selected. However, you can select multiple objects.

Click the Reshape Object icon.


Reshape nodes display around the vector image object.

Select Image > Smooth Vector Curves.


The Smooth Vector Curves dialog opens.

Enter smoothing
precision value

In the Precision field, enter the smoothing precision value.


This value controls how closely the smoothed outline follows the original.
The larger the precision value, the fewer the reshape nodes.

Click OK.

Coloring vector objects


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off. Use it to select colors for vector outlines and fills.
Vector images may be composed of outlines only. ES Designer lets you
select colors for outlines as well as fills. These can be different to the

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

238

embroidery objects you may create. Coloring makes vector objects easier to
interpret. For example, a solid fill color might suggest Satin or Tatami, while
a fill pattern may be interpreted as Motif Fill or Program Split.
Tip Colored vector outlines are also important for appliqu cutting. If
appliqu objects are digitized in ES Designer, they can be ungrouped,
duplicated, and sent to the laser or other type of cutter. Some can cut
several layers of fabric at the same time. The cutting depth is controlled by
object colors. These can be set within ES Designer without having to export
the shapes to a graphics package. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.

To color a vector object


1

Insert a vector image into the design file. See Inserting vector images
for details.

inserted vector
image

Ungroup the vector objects as necessary.

Select a vector object, right-click and select Properties from the popup
menu.

To change the outline color of the selected object, adjust the settings in
the Line panel:

The Object Properties > Special > Vector dialog opens.

 Select an outline style from the Style list.


 Select an outline width from the Width field.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

239

 Click Color and select an outline color from the Color dialog.

Select outline style


Select outline width
Select outline color
No fill currently
selected

To fill the selected object with a solid color, select the Solid Fill icon and
click the Color button to access the Color dialog.

Select solid fill


Click to
choose color

To fill the selected object with a pattern fill, select the Pattern Fill icon
and adjust the settings:

 Select a pattern style from the dropdown list.


 Select a foreground color via the Front button.
 Make the background transparent as required or choose a color via
the Back button.

Select pattern fill


Select pattern style
Select colors for pattern
foreground and
background

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

240

To fill the selected object with a bitmape.g. a fabric textureselect the


Bitmap Fill icon and click the Load button to insert an image file via the
Open dialog.

Select bitmap fill


Click to load
image file

Click Apply.
Note To view the changes in the production worksheet, select File >
Print Preview. Then click Options and select the Drawings checkbox.

Combining vector curves into complex shapes


The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of vector
curves into a single complex shapei.e. a shape with holes in it. This can
then be converted directly to an embroidery object. See also Shaping vector
and embroidery objects.

Tip You can convert complex vector shapes directly to embroidery using a
number of different input methods. See Converting between object types for
details. See also Digitizing fills with Point & Stitch.

To combine vector curves in complex shapes


1

ES 2006

Insert a vector image or create one using the drawing tools.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

241

Select the objects you want to combine.

Tip Ungroup any imported vector object in order to select the required
component objects.
3

Select Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift+H.


The selected objects become a single Complex Shape vector object.

You can use the Offset Object feature to digitize the complex shape.
See Creating outlines and filling holes for details.

complex shape object


created and colored

Input C applied

Run applied

Motif Run applied

Tip You can select any number of curves. Different selections create
different complex shapes.

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

242

Tip By copying the original vector objects, you can also create borders
and filled holes. See also Creating outlines and filling holes.

Creating overlapped complex shapes


If vector objects are overlapping, Make Complex Shape selects the largest
area and clips off the remaining shape. Depending on the shapes you use,
you can create combined or clipped shapes. See also Shaping vector and
embroidery objects.

To create overlapped complex shapes


1

Insert a vector image or create one using the drawing tools.

Decide how you want to combine the shapes.

 If you want to combine the overlapping shapes, draw a box around


them and select all objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

243

 If you want to clip the overlapping shapes, simply select them.

Select Image > Make Complex Shape.


The selected objects become a single vector object. Make Complex
Shape selects the largest area and clips off the remaining shape. See
also Trimming vector and embroidery objects.

Shaping vector and embroidery objects


When working with overlapping vector or embroidery objects, you can
merge, trim or split them using the Shaping tools. All shaped embroidery
objects convert to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill. Vector objects remain as
vector objects unless combined with embroidery objects. You have the
option of preserving the source objects of shaping operations. You also have
the option of adding overlaps to objects resulting from Flatten or Divide
operations.

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

244

Shaping tools summary table


Source

ES 2006

Apply Tool

Result

Description

Weld

Selected objects are combined into a


single object. The resulting object
takes the propertiesstitch color and
type, etcof the topmost object.

Flatten

Only areas unique to each selected


object are retained. All overlapping
areas are removed.

Intersect

Only areas common to all selected


objects are retained. All
non-overlapping areas are removed.

Exclude

Areas where pairs of selected objects


overlap are removed, starting from the
topmost object.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

245

Source

Apply Tool

Result

Description

Front-Back

The topmost object is retained, but all


of the areas overlapping with other
selected objects are removed.

Back-Front

The bottommost object is retained, but


all of the areas overlapping with other
selected objects are removed.

Divide

The objects are split wherever


overlaps occur and all hidden areas
are removed.

Combine

Areas where pairs of selected objects


overlap are removed, starting from the
topmost object. All resulting objects
share the propertiesstitch color and
type, etcof the topmost object.

Tip The Make Complex Shape feature lets you combine any number of
vector curves into a single complex shape. This can then be converted to
an embroidery object. See Combining vector curves into complex shapes for
details.

Merging vector and embroidery objects


Use Weld (Shaping toolbar) to merge overlapping objects into a single
flattened object.
Use Combine (Shaping toolbar) to merge the properties of overlapping
objects and trim overlapping areas.

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

246

Merge selected objects using the Weld or Combine tools.

Combine

Weld

To merge vector and embroidery objects

 Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape.


 Click Weld to merge overlapping objects into a single flattened object.

Weld applied
(petals only)

Tip Make symmetrical shapes by digitizing one half, duplicating and


reflecting, then welding the duplicate shapes.

Weld
applied

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

247

 Click Combine to convert embroidery objects into multiple objects


sharing the propertiesstitch color and type, etcof the topmost
selected object.

Combine applied
(petals only)

If drawing tools are used as the input method, Combine converts vector
objects to a single complex shape.

Combine applied
(petals only)

If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when


Combine is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number,
the topmost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the
Exclude tool. See Trimming vector and embroidery objects for details.
Tip Cut objects in half by drawing a line through them and applying
Divide. Apply Combine to create closed objects or Weld to fuse two
objects.

Weld + Run
applied to
resulting objects

Divide
applied

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

Weld + Run +
Combine applied to
resulting objects

248

Trimming vector and embroidery objects


Use Intersect (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping areas so that only those
intersected by all selected objects remain.
Use Exclude (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects and preserve their
individual properties.
Use Front-Back (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects so that only
non-overlapped areas of the topmost object remain.
Use Back-Front (Shaping toolbar) to trim overlapping objects so that only
non-overlapped areas of the bottommost object remain.
Trim selected objects using the Intersect, Exclude, Front-Back or
Back-Front tools.

Intersect used

Exclude used

Front-Back used

Back-Front used

Note Use the Remove Overlaps feature to maintain shapes but remove
the underlying layer of stitching. See Removing underlying stitching for
details.

To trim vector and embroidery objects

 Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape.


 Click Intersect to trim overlapping areas so that only those intersected
by all selected objects remain.

Intersect
applied

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

249

 Click Exclude to trim overlapping objects and preserve their individual


properties. The result is similar to Combine except that object
properties are not merged.

Exclude applied
(petals only)

If overlapping areas comprise an even number, all are removed when


Exclude is applied. If the overlapping areas comprise an odd number,
the bottommost area remains. Compare this with the behavior of the
Combine tool. See Merging vector and embroidery objects for details.
Tip Use Exclude to cut holes in Complex Fill objects.

 Use Front-Back to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped


areas of the topmost object remain.

Front-Back
applied

Tip Use Image > Make Complex Shape or press Shift+H to trim
overlapping shapes in unfilled vector objects.

 Use Back-Front to trim overlapping objects so that only non-overlapped


areas of the bottommost object remain.

Back-Front
applied

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

250

Splitting vector and embroidery objects


Use Flatten (Shaping toolbar) to trim all overlaps while retaining the original
objects.
Use Divide (Shaping toolbar) to split selected objects into separate adjoining
objects wherever they intersect with other selected objects.
Split selected objects using the Flatten or Divide tools. These tools
preserve the outlines of the original shapes.

Flatten

Divide

To split vector and embroidery objects

 Select the vector or embroidery objects to shape.


 Click Flatten to trim all overlaps while retaining the original objects.

Flatten
applied

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

251

 Click Divide to split selected objects into separate adjoining objects. All
overlapped areas become discrete objects.

Divide applied
(petals only)

Preserving original objects


Use Keep Source Objects (Shaping toolbar) to keep the source objects after
shaping.
The Keep Source Objects is a toggle which affects the behavior of all the
other shaping tools. While it is active, all selected source objects of all
shaping operations are preserved. The resultant objects are inserted after
the last source object in the stitching sequence.

To preserve original objects

ES 2006

Select the source objects.

Click the Keep Source Objects icon.

Chapter 10

Digitizing with Vector Images

252

Apply a shaping operation to the selected objects.

All source objects of the shaping operation are preserved. The resultant
objects are inserted after the last source object in the stitching
sequence.

Overlapping shaped objects


Use Overlap (Shaping toolbar) to adjust the overlaps of objects
resulting from Flatten or Divide shaping operations.
Use Flatten (Shaping toolbar) to trim all overlaps while retaining the original
objects.
Use Divide (Shaping toolbar) to split selected objects into separate adjoining
objects wherever they intersect with other selected objects.
The Overlap feature allows you to add overlaps to the objects resulting from
Flatten or Divide shaping operations.

To overlap shaped objects

ES 2006

Select the source objects.

Adjust the overlap amount using the Overlap control on the Shaping
toolbar.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

253

Note The Overlap range is from 0.00 to 5.00 mm with increments of


0.01 mm. The default overlap is 0.50 mm.
3

Click Flatten or Divide to apply shaping to the selected objects.


The border of the uppermost objectthe last one in the stitching
orderis left unchanged. The border of the next object is extended
where it touches the uppermost fragment by the specified amount.

Source objects

Flatten: 0.00 mm

Flatten: 2.00 mm

The border of a third object in the stitching order is extended where it


touches the other two layers of objects. And so on.

Source objects

ES 2006

Chapter 10

Flatten: 0.00 mm

Digitizing with Vector Images

Flatten: 2.00 mm

254

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

Artwork can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use as


digitizing templates or backdrops.

Backdrops can help you to:

 Digitize shapes manually.


You trace shapes and lines over the artwork using the appropriate input
methods. Using a bitmap image in this way is like using an enlargement
drawing and digitizer tablet, except that everything is done on-screen.
See Digitizing Methods for details.

 Digitize shapes automatically with Point & Stitch.


The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes
in bitmap images and vector images automatically without using manual
input methods. See Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch for details.

 Digitize complete images automatically with Smart Design.


Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized
embroidery. See Automatic Digitizing for details.

 Digitize photographs with Photo Flash.


Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from
photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. See Creating
embroidery from photographs for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

255

From within ES Designer you can open images in MS Paint, Corel


PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are
automatically re-imported into ES Designer.
Tip Textured backgrounds can also be imported to show what a design will
look like on real fabric. Almost any artwork can be used photographs,
magazine pictures, clipart images, and even fabric samples. See also
Changing background colors and fabrics.
This section describes how to choose suitable artwork for digitizing purposes
as well as how to scan it into ES Designer and edit it before use. It also
describes how to insert and save bitmap images into ES Designer, as well
as how to show and hide them as you digitize.

Choosing suitable artwork


For both manual and automatic digitizing purposes, clean images,
sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Such images have a limited
number of solid colors which in turn have well-defined outlines. Ideally, they
are:

 well defined, where each shape is made up of pixels of the same color
 clearly blocked, where each shape is a stitchable size, at least 1 sq mm
 saved at a color depth of at least 256 colors (8 bit), or preferably millions
of colors (16 bit). (Images are automatically reduced to 256 colors or
less when loaded into ES Designer.)

clean image with well-defined


outlines

clean image with well-defined


color blocks

complex image, needs editing to


remove background and improve
outlines

ES Designer automatic digitizing techniques Smart Design and Point &


Stitch produce best results with images of the type found in clipart
libraries or created from scratch in a graphics package. Automatic digitizing
can work with images from other sources but they require some
preparation. This is because most commonly available images are not made

ES 2006

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

256

up of solid colors. Scanners introduce noise, while graphics packages


perform dithering and anti-aliasing to improve image print quality.
Automatic digitizing works least effectively with photographic images which
may contain many dithered colors and complex forms. With photographs,
however, you can pick out shapes that you want to embroider, leaving out
unnecessary detail. Alternatively, Photo Flash is available to create
embroidery designs from scanned grayscale photographs.

Scanned images
Images scanned from hardcopy drawings or
existing embroidery typically contain a lot of
introduced noise. While they can be used as
input to automatic digitizing, once again, best
results are achieved with relatively clean images
consisting of solid color blocks. Typically, logos
and simple drawings scanned from business
cards, letterheads, books, magazines, cards all
fall into this category.
Noisy images typically need to be prepared by
reducing the color count and sharpening the
outlines. See Image preparation techniques for
details.

image containing a lot of


scanner noise

Dithered images
Dithering is a software technique which combines existing colors in a
checkerboard arrangement of pixels. It is typically used to simulate colors
that are missing from an image palette.

dithered color blocks

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

257

Like noisy images, dithered images need to be color-reduced before use. Be


aware, however, that while the software is able to process dithered colors
within a defined outline, it does not work so well with non-outlined images.
See Image preparation techniques for details.

Anti-aliased images
Anti-aliasing is a software technique similar
to dithering which is used to soften hard
outlines where color blocks intersect. It
produces smoother outlines by blurring the
pixels where colors join.
Where anti-aliasing is deliberately used to
blur outlines, these need to be sharpened
before use with automatic digitizing. See
Image preparation techniques for details.

anti-aliased outlines

Scanning artwork into ES Designer


If you have existing artwork, you can scan it with a TWAIN-compatible
scanner using the ES Designer scanning function. It is important to scan
your artwork properly if you intend to use one of the automatic digitizing
techniques; the scanned image quality will affect the quality of the final
embroidered design.
Tip There are many graphics packages which can help you improve your
scanned images. At one end of the spectrum there is the simple MS Paint
program. This comes free with Windows but can handle few formats or color
conversions. At the other end, there are professional tools such as Corel
PHOTO-PAINT. Such programs can do almost anything but may be too
expensive for occasional use. A compromise is Paint Shop Pro which has
many of the features of the high-end tools but at a much lower cost. See
also Editing bitmaps in third-party applications.

Preparing artwork for scanning


With embroidery design, less is more. You do not need every detail in an
image to create a design. You use the structure of the image rather than
the fine details of texture and color.
To simplify artwork, you can cover it with tracing paper and draw only the
essential shapes and lines which will be filled with stitches. When scanning,
take away the original artwork and put white paper behind the tracing paper.

ES 2006

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

258

Shiny surfaces, such as glossy photographs, may not scan well. Cover them
with tracing paper. If the artwork has very light colors, highlight outlines
with a fine black felt-tip pen.

Scanning resolution
Most scanners require you to enter scanning resolution information.
Resolution determines the number of dots per inch (dpi) used to create an
image. Generally speaking, the smaller the source image and/or more detail
it contains, the higher the resolution needs to be. Use the following table as
a guide.
Type of artwork

Scanning resolution

Business cards, letter heads

150 - 300 dpi

Hand sketches

150 - 300 dpi

Photos and images

150 - 300 dpi

Commercial art, line drawing

72 - 150 dpi

Color mode
Most scanners also require you to enter color mode information. First decide
whether your image is line art (black and white drawing), sketch, color
picture, or black and white or color photograph, then choose an appropriate
mode. Black and white mode produces the smallest files. Color photograph
and grayscale modes generate 256 color images and produce similar sized
files. RGB, True Color or millions of colors modes generate 16.7 million
colors and produce the biggest files. Use the table below to decide which
mode is suitable for use with your image.
Source image
Line art

Example

Description

Recommended
color mode *

No. of colors in
scanned image

Two colors
usually black and
white

Black/white
drawing
Line art

2
2

* Different scanning software uses different terms for the same mode.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

259

Description

Recommended
color mode *

No. of colors in
scanned image

Drawing/sketch

Sketch or drawing
with shades of
gray

Grayscale
Line art

256
2

Black & white


photograph

Shades of gray

Black/white photo
Grayscale

256
256

Color photograph

Many colors

Color RGB
Color photo

16 million
256

Color picture

Two colors or
more

Color RGB
Millions of colors
Color drawing

16 million
16 million
2 - 256

Source image

Example

* Different scanning software uses different terms for the same mode.

Scanning tips
 Do not scan line art images in grayscale mode; grayscale scanning
produces fuzzy edges.

 Scan color images in RGB mode (millions of colors) rather than 256 color
mode. You may not notice any difference on screen. In fact the 256 color
image may look better than the RGB image. However, ES Designer

ES 2006

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

260

converts all images to 256 colors or less upon loading. It uses the extra
information to produce a better image than if it was originally scanned
at 256 colors.
scanned in 256 color
mode

scanned in RGB color mode


(millions of colors)

 Do not scan color images in CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black)
mode as this is only used for images that will be printed; the colors may
be different from RGB colors.

 If the image needs to be rotated, do so while scanning. Rotating


afterwards may distort the image.

Sharpening
Some scanning software lets you apply what is called sharpening as you
scan. Sharpening compensates for the slight blurring in a scanned image by
looking for any differences between colors in the image. Sharpening
accentuates these differences which makes the image edges more defined.
It does not increase the image details; it just makes them more obvious. In
general, use sharpening with images that have well-defined outlines. Do not
use it with non-outlined images.
scanned with
sharpening

scanned without
sharpening

Scanning bitmap images


Use Scan (File menu) to scan an image into ES Designer.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

261

You can scan images directly into ES Designer for use as digitizing
backdrops. You can also scan in your own textured background to see what
a design will look like on real fabric. Fabrics can be scanned to provide full,
centered, backgrounds to your design, or as small samples which can be
tiled to fill the screen. See also Changing background colors and fabrics.
The scanning feature in ES Designer allows you to use most
TWAIN-compatible scanners. You can use any scanning software provided
that it can save the image in one of the compatible formats.

To scan bitmap images


1

Set up your scanner. See Setting up scanners for details.

Prepare the artwork for scanning. See Preparing artwork for scanning for
details.

Create a new file or open a design you want to insert the image into.

Select File > Scan.


Your scanning program will open.

Choose a scanning mode and resolution. See Scanning resolution and


Color mode for details.
Tip If you are scanning a fabric background, set the scan to 256 colors,
100% and 72 dpi (dots per inch). These settings will give a small file
which will display well on your screen without taking up too much disk
space or memory.

Preview the image in the scanning program.

Select the area to be scanned and scan the image.

Save the scanned image in a compatible format image file to the Design
folder.

Scan the artwork.


Note Scanned images can be saved separately from the design file. See
Saving bitmap images as separate files for details.

Inserting and saving bitmap images


Bitmap images can be inserted, pasted or scanned into ES Designer for use
as digitizing backdrops. For both manual and automatic digitizing purposes,
clean images, sometimes referred to as cartoons, work best. Scanners
introduce noise, while graphics packages perform dithering and

ES 2006

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

262

anti-aliasing to improve image print quality. See also Image preparation


techniques.

partially digitized
bitmap

original bitmap

Inserting bitmap images


Use Insert File (Image menu) to insert an image for use as a backdrop.
You can insert bitmap images of various formats for use as digitizing
backdrops. See Supported image formats for details.
Note You can also insert vector image files. See Inserting vector images for
details.

To insert bitmap images


1

Select Image > Insert File.


The Open dialog opens.

Select folder

Select file

Select required
format

ES 2006

Select a folder from the Look In list.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

263

Select a file type from the Files of Type list (e.g. BMP).

Select the file you want to insert.


Tip Select the Preview checkbox to preview the selected file.

Click Open.

Pasting bitmap images


Use Paste Vector > As Bitmap (Edit menu) to insert an image for use as a backdrop.
You can insert a bitmap image into ES Designer by copying it from another
embroidery design or graphics application, and pasting it directly into your
design.

To paste bitmap images


1

Select the image you want to copy and paste.

Copy it to the Windows clipboard.

Create a new file in ES Designer or open the design file into which you
want to insert the image.

Select Edit > Paste Vector > As Bitmap.


The image is pasted into the design.

Saving bitmap images as separate files


Use Save Bitmap As (File menu) to save an image as a separate file.
When you save a design containing a backdrop, a reference to the image file
is saved together with information on its position in the design. When you
re-open the design, the image file is re-inserted. If you scale or transform a
backdrop, you need to save it as a separate file or the changes will be lost.
Note Images that are scanned from within ES Designer must be saved this
way or will be lost when the design is closed.

To save bitmap images as separate files


1

Select the backdrop.

Select File > Save Bitmap As.


Save Image As dialog opens.

ES 2006

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

264

In the Save In field, select a folder, then select a format from the Files
of Type list.

Enter a new file name and click Save.


When you save the design, the reference is updated to use the new
image file.

Editing bitmap images


ES Designer allows you to crop bitmap images prior to use. From within
ES Designer you can also open images directly in third-party graphics
packages. Images updated in this way are automatically re-imported into
ES Designer. Within ES Designer you can set general properties such as size
and position. You can also scale and transform bitmap images although it
may be best to do this during scanning. Scaling after scanning can distort
the image. However, ES Designer allows you to smooth an image before and
after scaling or transforming, making it easy to digitize. See also Arranging
and Transforming Objects.
Tip If you scale or transform a backdrop, you need to save it as a separate
file or the changes will be lost. See Saving bitmap images as separate files
for details.

Cropping images for digitizing


Use Crop Bitmap (Image menu) to crop a rectangular image.
Use Crop Bitmap with Polygon (Image menu) to crop a free form image.
Before using bitmap images for design purposes, crop them to remove
unnecessary detail and save processing time.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

265

To crop images for digitizing


1

Select the image. See also Inserting bitmap images.

Select a cropping tool.

 Select Image > Crop Bitmap to crop the image in rectangular


form.
Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image
you require.

 Select Image > Crop Bitmap With Polygon to crop the image in
free form.
Mark points to create a cropping shape around the part of the image
you require and press Enter.

Crop bitmap

Crop bitmap with polygon

Tip Use the prompt line to guide you.

ES 2006

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

266

ES Designer crops the area inside the cropping rectangle or polygon


selection. This process may take some time.
Bitmap cropped along
marked points

Bitmap cropped in
rectangular form

Editing bitmaps in third-party applications


Use Edit Bitmap Using (Image menu) to edit images in a graphics package.
Sometimes you need to edit bitmap images directly in a third-party graphics
package. You would normally do this in order to eliminate backgrounds,
flood-fill solid areas with color, add or reinforce outlines, or close gaps. From
within ES Designer you can open images directly in MS Paint, Corel
PHOTO-PAINT, or Paint Shop Pro. Images updated in this way are
automatically re-imported into ES Designer.

To edit bitmaps in a third-party application


1

Select the image. See also Inserting bitmap images.

background may be
cleaned and eyes
added

Select Image > Edit Bitmap Using and select a graphics package.
The image opens in the graphics package.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

267

Edit the image and save.

background cleaned

eyes added

Note If you return to ES Designer before closing the image in the


graphics package, it appears in ES Designer overlaid with stripes.

file still open in the


graphics package

Return to the graphics package and select either File > Close or File >
Exit & Return <Filename>. In ES Designer, the stripes will disappear.

Smoothing bitmap images


When you scale or transform backdrops, the quality is sometimes
reducede.g. thin straight lines become jagged or distorted. By smoothing
an image before and after scaling and transforming, you can preserve its
quality, making it easy to digitize.

To smooth a bitmap image


1

ES 2006

Select the image and double-click. See also Inserting bitmap images.

Chapter 11

Digitizing with Bitmap Images

268

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Select required
smoothing option

Select the required smoothing option, depending on whether the


majority of lines in the image are light or dark.

 None: turned off.


 Dark lines: dark lines on the image are smoothed.
 Light lines: light lines on the image are smoothed.
3

If required, set the scaling or transforming options in the General tab.


You can scale and transform objects both here and on-screen.

Click Apply.

no smoothing

light lines smoothed

dark lines smoothed

Note Scaling and transforming takes longer than usual when smoothing
is applied.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

269

Chapter 12

Preparing Images for Automatic


Digitizing

ES Designer supports the automatic and semi-automatic digitizing of both


bitmap images and vector images. The quality of the resulting designs
greatly depends on the type and quality of the original artwork. Generally
speaking, vector images preserve the picture quality when resized, whereas
bitmap images cause problems of pixilation and image degradation when
enlarged or scaled down. In order to make bitmap images more suitable for
automatic digitizing, ES Designer provides image processing capabilities
and links to graphics packages.

This section describes how to prepare images for automatic digitizing. It


explains how to crop images for digitizing as well as how to prepare both
outlined and non-outlined images.

Image preparation techniques


Before applying automatic digitizing, you frequently need to improve or
clean up artwork. To work effectively, both Smart Design and Point & Stitch
require solid color images as input. You can improve artwork both with
bitmap editing tools in graphics packages and/or the image processing tools
provided in ES Designer. In fact, the software will not let you apply Smart
Design until the image has been suitably processed.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

270

Outlined vs non-outlined images


Before preparing your image you need to know what type you are using. For
the purposes of automatic digitizing, there are two categoriesoutlined and
non-outlined. Outlined images ideally have a solid black outline around each
colored area. Non-outlined images ideally consist of solid areas of color.
Outlined and non-outlined images require different methods of preparation.

image with outlines

image without outlines

Image clean up
In practice, cleaning up scanned images may involve any one or a
combination of the following techniques:








reducing the number of colors


adding or emphasizing outlines
removing noise, dithering or anti-aliasing
eliminating unnecessary detail
cropping sections
eliminating backgrounds.

See also Choosing suitable artwork.

Color reduction
Sometimes an image looks clean but extra colors have been introduced
during scanning or in a graphics package. Color reduction means reducing
the actual number of image colors in order to eliminate unnecessary detail
and reduce each block to a single color. Color reduction also cleans the
image, removing noise and anti-aliasing if present. This in turn helps
minimize the number of trims and color changes required in the resulting
embroidery design. Reduce colors in a non-outlined image using the Reduce
Colors tool and in an outlined image using the Sharpen Edges tool.
Color reduction should only be applied if the loss of detail does not affect the
image shapes. Before color reduction, the colored areas in the image below

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

271

include many colors. After reduction, each area is reduced to a single color.
The detail is preserved.

image before color reduction

image after color reduction

If you are scanning images, make sure you scan them correctly for best
results. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer for details.
image scanned in RGB
color mode, then colors
reduced to 6

image scanned in 256


color mode, then colors
reduced to 6

Be aware that the Reduce Colors tool is good at removing noise and
anti-aliasing but not so good at processing dithering in non-outlined images.
By contrast, the Sharpen Edges tool is excellent at processing dithered

ES 2006

Chapter 12

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

272

colors as it averages all pixels within a defined outline. See also Choosing
suitable artwork.

Reduce Colors tool used with non-outlined


imagedithered color blocks not
completely cleaned, edges fuzzy

Sharpen Outline tool used with outlined


imagedithered color blocks cleaned,
edges sharp

Outline sharpening
Outline sharpening means more clearly defining the outlines bordering
distinct color blocks or shapes in the artwork. These may have been
indistinct in the original or made so by the scanning process. Outline
sharpening is important for automatic digitizing because it makes it easier
for the software to identify the distinct areas which become embroidery
objects in the resulting design.
Note Outline sharpening only works on images with black or dark outlines.
image before outline
sharpening

image after outline


sharpening

Some images have solid outlines but they may be indistinct or incomplete.
These need to be rectified with the ES Designer image preparation tools or
a graphics package. See Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for
details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

273

Noise filtering
Noise filtering means restoring the solid color blocks of the original artwork
in scanned images. This is achieved by merging different shades into one
solid color. Noise filtering is important for automatic digitizing because it
makes it easier for the software to identify solid color blocks which become
embroidery objects in the resulting design. It also cleans up blurred or
mottled areas of color.
image before noise
filtering, mottled
color

image after noise


filtering, single colors

Image preparation tools


Use the artwork preparation tools to prepare images for automatic
digitizing. Your choice of tool depends on the artwork. There are three tools:
Tool

Purpose

Capabilities

Edit Image

Link to a graphics
packagee.g. Paint Shop
Profor editing an image
outside ES Designer.

Lets you crop, sharpen, re-color, add outlines,


remove noise from an image.

Reduce Colors

Prepare any non-outlined


image.

Lets you reduce colors to a specified number. It


automatically:
reduces each block to a single color
removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering
removes colors smaller than specified area.

Sharpen Edges

Prepare outlined images.

Lets you adjust lightness or darkness of outlines. It


automatically:
blends each outlined block into a single color
removes anti-aliasing, noise and dithering
sharpens outlines.

ES 2006

Chapter 12

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

274

Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the
software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The
software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without
preliminary image-processing.

Using image preparation tools


It is important to use the correct preparation tools for your artwork. The
example below shows an image with indistinct outlines. If the Sharpen
Edges tool is used, outlines can be made darker and more distinct,
improving stitching. By contrast, using the Reduce Colors tool before
stitching produces a poorly stitched design.

Reduce Colors
usedoutlines not
sharpened, poor
stitching
image with
indistinct
outlines

Sharpen Edges
usedimproved
stitching

image with solid


outlines

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

275

Before using the Sharpen Edges tool, make sure that the image contains
solid outlines. If there are gaps, separate color areas will be blended into
one.

Sharpen Edges
used
image partially outlined, some
areas not closed

image colors blended

If you need to add outlines, close gaps, or reinforce an outline, you may
need to draw it in by hand before scanning. Or you might add it in a graphics
package after scanning. See Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for
details.

Sharpen Edges
used
image outline completed in
graphics package

outlines sharpened

Tip Try darkening the outlines using the Outline Appearance slider. See
Preparing outlined images for details.

Image preparation summary


Action

Outlined image

Non-outlined image

Photograph

Scan artwork

Scan in RGB mode


Use sharpening

Scan in RGB mode


No sharpening

Scan in RGB mode

Scan line vector

Scan in two color mode

Touching up in graphics
package

ES 2006

Chapter 12

Crop
Add or edit outlines
Edit colors
Remove noise

Crop
Edit image shapes
Edit colors
Remove noise

Crop
Convert to grayscale
Remove background
Lighten or darken
Adjust contrast

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

276

Action

Outlined image

Non-outlined image

Photograph

Use Sharpen Edges


tool in ES Designer

Sharpen outlines and


remove noise

Use Reduce Colors tool


in ES Designer

Reduce colors and


remove noise

Digitize

Manual
Point & Stitch
Smart Design

Manual
Point & Stitch
Smart Design

Photo Flash

Preparing non-outlined images


Use Reduce Colors (Image toolbar) to reduce the number of colors and
remove image noise in non-outlined images.
Use the Reduce Colors tool to prepare non-outlined images for automatic
digitizing. The tool automatically reduces color blocks in bitmap images to a
single color, removing anti-aliasing and noise. You can let the software
reduce the color count automatically or specify a precise number. The latter
is useful if you want to match design colors to an exact number of thread
colors.
Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch
it up manually before processing in ES Designer. You would normally do this
in order to eliminate backgrounds, or flood-fill solid areas with color. See
Editing bitmaps in third-party applications for details.

To prepare non-outlined images


1

ES 2006

Select Image > Insert File to load an image.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

277

Select the image.

image scanned in RGB color


modeconverted to 256 colors
upon loading

Click the Reduce Colors icon.


The Reduce Colors dialog opens.

Zoom in and out of


image preview

Set color
reduction options
Set noise filtering
options
Save Image after
processing

The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows
the number of image colors.

ES 2006

Click Zoom In to view the image more closely.

Set the color reduction options you require:

Chapter 12

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

278

 Select the By Number option to enter the number you require.


ES Designer suggests a number and shows how the image will look.
You can accept this number or change it.

 Select the Automatic Selection option if you want the software to


reduce the color count automatically.
The slider increases or decreases the effectmoving the slider
towards 100% gives you more colors, moving the other way gives
you fewer.

reduced to 13 colors

reduced to 6 colors

reduced to 3 colors

Check how many colors are in the image.


This is indicated by Color Count. If there appear to be too many, the
image probably contains noise.

Set the noise filtering options you require.

 Minimum color area: This defines the smallest area recognized in


the conversion. The default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight
pixels). Increase this value if your image has a lot of out-of-color
pixels. The minimum color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total
area.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

279

 Minimum line length: This defines the smallest line length


recognized as an object. The default is 2 mm. The minimum line
length should not exceed 25% of the smallest dimension.

Min. color area: 0.5 sq mm


Min. line length: 2 mm

Min. Color area: 1 sq mm


Min. line length: 5 mm

Click Save Image As to save changes.

Click OK to apply the changes.

Min. color area: 5 sq mm


Min. line length: 9 mm

Preparing outlined images


Use Sharpen Edges (Image toolbar) to sharpen outlines and reduce noise in
outlined images.
Use the Sharpen Edges tool to prepare outlined images for automatic
digitizing. The tool automatically sharpens outlines and reduces noise. Areas
enclosed by a black outline are reduced to a single color. Outline sharpening
makes it easier for the software to recognize distinct areas in the artwork.
These areas then become the embroidery objects of the finished design. Use
it particularly if the outlines are blurry, fuzzy or indistinct.
Tip Depending on the quality of the scanned image, you may need to touch
it up manually before processing in ES Designer. You would normally do this
in order to eliminate backgrounds, flood-fill solid areas with color, add or
reinforce outlines, or close gaps. See Editing bitmaps in third-party
applications for details.

To prepare outlined images


1

ES 2006

Select Image > Insert File to load an image.

Chapter 12

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

280

Select the image.

zoomed
area

Click the Sharpen Edges icon.


The Sharpen Outlines dialog opens.

Zoom in and out


of image preview

Set outline
appearance

Click to see
colored areas

Save image after


processing

The image appears in the preview panel. The Color Count field shows
the number of image colors.

ES 2006

Click Zoom In to view the image more closely.

Set the outline contrast tolerance by dragging the slider control.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

281

This produces a black and white preview of the detected outlines.

Set outline
appearance

Set the Noise reduction options you require.

 Minimum color area: This defines the smallest area recognized in


the conversion. The default is 0.5 by 0.5 square mm (about eight
pixels). Increase this value if your image has a lot of out-of-color
pixels. The minimum color area should not exceed 1/16 of the total
area.

 Minimum line length: This defines the smallest line length


recognized as an object. The default is 2 mm. The minimum line
length should not exceed 25% of the smallest dimension.
Tip Move the slider to the right until there is too much black, then move
it slowly back to the left. Stop when the image shows all the outlines you
need.
7

Click Show Color Areas to see the updated image.

Outlines not sharpened

ES 2006

Chapter 12

Slider control moved to left

Slider control moved to right

Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing

282

Click Save Image As to save changes.

Click OK to apply the changes.

Outlines sharpened
and noise reduced

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

283

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

ES Designer provides a variety of complementary tools and techniques for


automatically digitizing suitably prepared artwork.
Vector image

Converted to
Complex Fill

Converted to
Input C

Converted to
Run

 The Auto Trace feature lets you convert scanned artwork to vector
objects. You can then convert these to embroidery objects using a
variety of input methods.

 The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes
in bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods.

 The Smart Design feature automatic digitizing is intended for people


working at all levels of the embroidery industry. Smart Design
automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized embroidery.

 Photo Flash lets you create embroidery designs directly from


photographs and other grayscale bitmap images. The effect resembles
the output of a line printer.
This section describes how to automatically convert bitmap images to
embroidery objects and complete designs, as well as how to create
embroidery from grayscale images.

Converting bitmaps to outlines with Auto Trace


0

Use Auto Trace (Image toolbar) to convert artwork to vector objects for
conversion to embroidery objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

284

Use Auto Trace to create vector outlines from bitmap images. You can then
convert these to embroidery objects using a variety of input methods. Auto
Trace can find holes in shapesboth inside and outside boundaries are
detected. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery.
Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the
software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. See
Preparing Images for Automatic Digitizing for details.

To convert a bitmap to outlines with Auto Trace


1

Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer


or Inserting bitmap images for details.

Select the image and process it. See Image preparation techniques for
details.

Click the Auto Trace icon.


ES Designer will prompt you to click an image to select a single-colored
area.

Click the shape you want to digitize.

Press Enter.
The vector object is created and selected.

Select an input method then follow the prompts to enter start, end and
angle.

Click object

Press Enter

Select input method

At this point you can convert the created vector object directly into an
embroidery object. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery.

Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch


Use Turning Satin (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize narrow column shapes.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

285

Use Tatami Fill (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, preserving any
holes.
Use Tatami Fill without Holes (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas,
ignoring any holes.
Use Pickout Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize centerlines.
Use Outline Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize boundaries of shapes.
Use Match to Palette (Point & Stitch toolbar) to find the nearest match
between the selected image color and the color palette.
The Point & Stitch tools provide everything necessary to digitize shapes in
bitmap images automatically without using manual input methods. These
tools are useful for quickly creating embroidery objects from scanned
images that do not require particular artistic effects or embroidery-specific
knowledge. This in turn frees you to spend more time on the artistic or
inherently complicated areas of your designs.

Bitmap image

Embroidery design digitized


with Point & Stitch tools

Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be image-processed


before conversion. The software will not let you apply automatic digitizing
techniques without preliminary image-processing. See Preparing Images for
Automatic Digitizing for details.

Matching palette colors to an image


Use Match to Palette (Point & Stitch toolbar) to find the nearest match
between the selected image color and the color palette.
Use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest match between a selected
image color block and a palette color. If Match to Palette is not selected,
the color block is digitized in the current palette color.

ES 2006

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

286

Note If your artwork contains colors which are very different to those in the
colorway, you can use the Match Bitmap Color function to first add those
colors. See Matching image colors to threads for details.

To match palette colors to an image


1

Select the artwork:

 Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into


ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details.

 Insert or create a vector image. See Inserting vector images or


Creating vector outlines for details.
Note If you use a bitmap image as input, it will need to be
image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for
Automatic Digitizing for details.
2

Click the Match to Palette icon.

Select a Point & Stitch digitizing method.

Click the shape you want to digitize.


The object is digitized in the nearest palette color.

Original image

Matched to palette

Digitized in current color

Note If Match to Palette is not selected, the object is digitized in the


current palette color.

Digitizing fills with Point & Stitch


Use Turning Satin (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize narrow column shapes.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

287

Use Tatami Fill (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas, preserving any
holes.
Use Tatami Fill without Holes (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize large areas,
ignoring any holes.
Point & Stitch can be used to create closed Tatami fill objects, as well as
objects with turning Satin fills. Use Tatami Fill to digitize large areas in your
artwork with Tatami stitch, preserving any holes within them. If you are
using a vector image, it must include a fill color. If you want holes ignored,
use the Tatami Fill without Holes tool. Use Turning Satin to digitize
narrow column shapes with Satin stitch. Current properties are applied. You
can modify these as required before or after using the tools.

To digitize fills with Point & Stitch


1

Select the artwork:

 Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into


ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details.

 Insert or create a vector image. See Inserting vector images or


Creating vector outlines for details.
Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be
image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for
Automatic Digitizing for details.
2

Select a thread color from the color toolbar.


Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching
thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details.

ES 2006

Select the required Point & Stitch fill input method.

Click the shape you want to digitize.

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

288

The shape is immediately filled with stitches.

Original artwork

Turning Satinleaf and


stem filled with turning
stitches

Tatami Fillhole in
apple ignored

Tatami Fill without


Holeshole in apple
preserved

Note Stitches are generated according to current stitch settings. Jumps


may occur if stitch length exceeds the default setting. These can be
modified

Digitizing outlines with Point & Stitch


Use Pickout Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize centerlines.
Use Outline Run (Point & Stitch toolbar) to digitize boundaries of shapes.
Use Point & Stitch to digitize boundaries and details with run stitching. Use
Pickout Run to digitize centerlines in your artwork with run stitches. Use
Outline Run to digitize boundaries of shapes with run stitching. Current
properties are applied. You can modify these as required before or after
using the tools.

To digitize outlines with Point & Stitch


1

Select the artwork:

 Scan or insert a bitmap image. See Scanning artwork into


ES Designer or Inserting bitmap images for details.

 Insert or create a vector image. See Inserting vector images or


Creating vector outlines for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

289

Note If you are using a bitmap image as input, it will need to be


image-processed before conversion. See Preparing Images for
Automatic Digitizing for details.
2

Select a thread color from the color toolbar.


Alternatively, use the Match to Palette tool to find the nearest matching
thread color. See Matching palette colors to an image for details.

Select the required Point & Stitch outline input method.

Click the centerline or outline you want to digitize.


The line is traced with Run stitches.

Pickout lines
digitized

Outlines
digitized

Note Stitches are generated according to current stitch settings. These


can be modified.

Digitizing designs with Smart Design


Smart Design automatically converts bitmap images to fully digitized
embroidery. With Smart Design, novice embroiderers can create simple
designs quickly and easily. Similarly, experienced embroiderers can improve
productivity when working with simple designs. Sales people can estimate
stitches quickly and accurately for price quotations.
An extension of Point & Stitch technology, Smart Design recognizes shapes
in bitmap images and makes decisions about the most suitable input
methods and stitch types to use. It also determines the stitching sequence
based on closest join. Artwork is effectively batch processed to create the
many embroidery objects that make up a design.
Smart Design gives you some control over how an image is interpreted
during conversion. You can choose to omit selected colors as well as select
colors for stitching in front or behind. There are options to add image colors
to the color palette, or match them to the existing palette. You can choose
to ignore lines or shapes under a specified width. Once created, you can

ES 2006

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

290

always edit the final result using the available digitizing techniques. See also
Digitizing Methods.
Note Even if your artwork looks ready to stitch when inserted into the
software, it will need to be image-processed before conversion. The
software will not let you apply automatic digitizing techniques without
preliminary image-processing. See Preparing Images for Automatic
Digitizing for details.

Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design


Use Smart Design (Image toolbar) to create embroidery designs directly
from imported images.
In essence, creating an embroidery design with Smart Design is simply a
matter of selecting the image you want to convert, and clicking the Smart
Design tool. There are, however, many settings you can adjust to optimize
the conversion process for a particular image.
Note Only one image may be selected at a time. The command is disabled
if the selection contains anything other than an image. The display mode of
the imagefor example, dimmedwill not affect the embroidery object
colors.

To create embroidery designs with Smart Design

ES 2006

Scan or load an image. See Scanning artwork into ES Designer for


details.

Select the image and process it. See Preparing Images for Automatic
Digitizing for details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

291

Select the image and click the Smart Design icon.


The Smart Design dialog opens. Image colors are distributed among
the Omit, Fill, and Details fields depending on how the software
interprets the source image.

Select color
conversion
method

Click-and-drag
colors between
fields

Note Image information is given in the top panel, including width and
height values as well as the number of image colors.
4

Click-and-drag any colors you want to omit from automatic stitch


processing into the Omit column.

white
background
color omitted
all colors
omitted except
black

Similarly, click-and-drag or leave any colors you want to be treated as


filled areas in the Fill column.
fill color pink
only, the rest
omitted
fill colors pink
and yellow, the
rest omitted

Note You can adjust stitching styles and other settings for fill colors.
See Adjusting fill color settings for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

292

Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as detailsi.e. any


outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out lastinto the
Details column.

detail color
black only

detail color
green only

Note You can adjust stitching styles for detail colors. See Adjusting
detail colors settings for details.
7

Select a Thread Colors conversion method for image processing.

 By default, image colors are matched to the nearest thread colors in


the current colorway.

 Select the Add Colors to Palette option to add image colors to the
palette.
image colors added
to palette

image colors
matched to nearest
thread colors

Click OK.
Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and
generates stitches.
Note Click Save to save the dialog settings to the template.

Adjusting detail colors settings


Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for the colors of
anything in the design you identify as a detail. A detail may be an outline,

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

293

a border, a pickout run, or a small area of the design you want to be stitched
out last.
Tip If an image color is both a fill and a detail, you can either recolor the
fill color in a graphics package, or omit the color for later editing.

To adjust detail colors settings


1

Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon.


The Smart Design dialog opens.

Click-and-drag any colors you want to be treated as detailsi.e. any


outlines, borders or small areas you want to stitch out lastinto the
Details column. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for
details.

Select a stitching style for colors in the Details column.


Choose a suitable line
thickness for details

 Double Run: most suited for use with thin lines.


 Input C: suited for use with thicker lines of constant width.
 Satin: most suited for use with thicker lines or small shapes of
varying width.
4

Click OK.
Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and generates
stitches.

Details: black outlines


with Double Run

Details: black outlines


with Satin

Adjusting fill color settings


Smart Design lets you adjust object recognition settings for fill colors,
giving you control over stitch types, stitch angles, and sequencing settings.

To adjust fill color settings


1

ES 2006

Select a processed image and click the Smart Design icon.

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

294

The Smart Design dialog opens.


2

Click-and-drag or leave any colors you want to be treated as filled areas


in the Fill field. See Creating embroidery designs with Smart Design for
details.
Adjust fill color
settings

Click Values.
The Automatic Stitching Values dialog opens.

Select style to
apply to each
object type

Adjust max.
widths for
each object
type

Adjust settings
for automatic
object
sequencing

Adjust settings
for recognition
of Complex Fill
objects

Select the Detect lines in objects checkbox if you want areas defined
up to maximum width set to be interpreted as lines.
The sample below, for example, shows narrow linear shapes being
interpreted as Satin Input C rather than Tatami Complex Fill objects.

Original image

Yellow and green in Details Detect Lines selected, Satin Detect Lines not selected,
with Satinlarger areas
usedfills stitched in
default values usedmost
also stitched in Satin
Tatami, lines in Satin
objects stitched in Tatami

Adjust the maximum width for each object type.


These rows determine the way in which graphic elements of specified
thicknesses are to be interpreted.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

295

Note A value entered in the Maximum Width field becomes the


Minimum Width value for the next graphic element.
6

Select a style to apply to each objecte.g. Run , Satin, Tatami, etc.


Satin styles selected
with Auto Split

Tatami styles
selected

Adjust settings for the recognition of Complex Fill objects in the Object
Options panel.

stitch angle 90

stitch angle 0

Adjust settings for automatic object sequencing in the Object


Sequence panel. See Adjusting object sequencing settings for details.

Click OK.
Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and
generates stitches.

Adjusting object sequencing settings


Smart Design lets you adjust settings for the automatic object sequencing
of recognized embroidery objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

296

To adjust object sequencing settings


1

From the Smart Design dialog, access the Automatic Stitching


Values dialog. See Adjusting fill color settings for details.

Adjust settings for


automatic object
sequencing

Enter the length of the maximum travel run connector in the Maximum
travel path length field. You may enter a large value to avoid trims that
may cause production problems.

Enter the minimum width of foreground objects to overlap background


objects in the Stitch under objects below width field.

original image

below width: 1.5 mm

below width: 4.0 mm

Enter the minimum stitch length you want to keep in the Filter small
objects below width field. See Removing small stitches automatically
for details.

Click OK.
Smart Design converts the artwork to embroidery objects and
generates stitches.

Creating embroidery from photographs


Use Photo Flash (Insert menu) to create embroidery designs directly from
photographs.
Use Photo Flash to create embroidery from photographs or other images,
color or grayscale. Grayscale images are made up of different shades of gray

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

297

pixels. Color images are automatically converted to grayscale when you


apply Photo Flash.

Photo Flash designs consist of rows of stitches of varying spacing settings.


The effect resembles the output of a line printer. Adjust the angle of the rows
and/or the stitches themselves.
Tip For best results, use images with well-defined subjects or constantly
varying shades.

To create embroidery from photographs

ES 2006

Insert the bitmap image in your design and scale it to the required size.
See Inserting bitmap images for details.

With the bitmap still selected, select Insert > Photo Flash.

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

298

The Object Properties > Special > Photo Flash dialog opens.

Select resolution
option

Select background
option

Enter angle

In the Resolution panel, select a resolution optionCoarse, Medium, or


Fine.

fine resolution

medium resolution

coarse resolution

Note The coarser the resolution the more spacing between rows.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

299

In the Row panel, enter a new angle as required.

Row Angle: 90o

Row Angle: 0o

In the Background panel, select a background option:

 Light: applies the maximum row width value to the lightest part of
the image.

 Dark: applies the maximum row width to the darkest part of the
image.

Light background

Dark background

Tip The option you select usually depends on whether the fabric is light
or dark. The Dark option produces a negative of the image.

ES 2006

Chapter 13

Automatic Digitizing

300

Select the Fills tab and adjust the stitch spacing and skew angle as
required.

Adjust stitch
values

The Skew Angle determines the angle of the stitches. See Adjusting
Satin stitch spacing for details.

Skew Angle: 0o

Skew Angle: 45o

Click Apply.
You are prompted to select the part of the image you want to convert.

Click-and-drag a cropping rectangle around the part of the image you


require.
ES Designer generates stitches for the area within the cropping
rectangle. This process may take some time.
Tip Use TrueView for a more accurate representation of the stitching.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

301

PART IV

MODIFYING DESIGNS
After digitzing a design, you can modify it as a whole, edit individual objects
or even individual stitches.

Combining and resequencing objects


This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and
pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to
resequence objects by cut and paste, by color, with the Color-Object List,
and by number. Using Branching to sequence objects is also explained. See
Combining objects and designs for details.

Arranging and transforming objects


This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align
and space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects.
See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details.

Converting and reshaping objects


This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, reshape
circle, star and ring objects. It also describes how to convert object types,
adjust stitch angles, change entry and exit points, as well as keep or omit
the last stitch. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

302

Editing stitches and machine functions


This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting
selected stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting,
checking, editing and clearing manually-inserted functions. It also describes
how to edit stitches and functions using the Stitch List. See Editing Stitches
and Machine Functions for details.

ES 2006

Modifying Designs

303

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing


Objects

ES Designer provides techniques for combining and resequencing objects.


You can add to designs by duplicating and copying objects. Combine
designs. Split objects into smaller ones and remove overlaps between
objects.

The stitching sequence naturally occurs in the order in which the design was
digitized. The Color-Object List displays a sequential list of objects grouped
by object and color. It provides an easy way to group, cut, copy and paste,
and resequence selected objects and color blocks.
Group objects together to apply a change to them all at once. Better still,
apply Branching to join like-objects to form a single branched object.
Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, component objects
grouped, and stitches regenerated. Apply an underlay to all.
This section describes how to combine objects and designs by copying and
pasting, duplicating, and inserting techniques. It also describes how to
resequence objects by cut-and-paste, by color, with the Color-Object List,
and by number. Using Branching to sequence objects is also explained.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

304

Combining objects and designs


You can copy or cut a design or design objects to the Windows clipboard for
temporary storage. These can then be pasted any number of times to the
same or another design until replaced on the clipboard. You can also cut,
copy and paste lettering objects within and between designs.

Copying and pasting objects


Click Copy (Standard toolbar) to copy selected objects to the clipboard.
Click Paste (Standard toolbar) to paste copied objects in the design.
You can copy objects to create multiple, identical objects, or to insert
objects from other designs.
Tip ES Designer lets you click-and-drag objects between designs. To copy,
hold down the Ctrl key as you click-and-drag the object. To temporarily
deactivate Auto Scroll, hold down the Shift key.

Petals
copied and pasted

Note Cut-and-paste changes the stitching sequence in the design. See


Resequencing objects with cut-and-paste for details.

To copy and paste objects


1

Select the object (or objects) to copy.

Click the Copy icon.


The selected object is copied to the clipboard.

ES 2006

Select a color palette option as required. See Setting inserted


embroidery file options for details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

305

By default, when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current
color palette.

Colors added
to palette

Colors matched
to palette

Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to


paste the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.
Alternatively, use the Color-Object List to locate the required position in
the stitching sequence. See Selecting and viewing objects with the
Color-Object List for details.
Tip You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the
copied object within an object. See Nesting objects for details.

Click the Paste icon.


The object is pasted in the design, according to the current paste
options. Alternatively, use the popup menu to override the current paste
options.

Tip Change the default paste option as required. See Setting paste
position options for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

306

Make sure that there is only one copy of an object at any one position.
If an object is pasted twice into the same position, it will be stitched
twice.
Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly
until the next Copy or Cut command.

Duplicating objects
Select Duplicate (Edit menu) to duplicate selected objects.
Objects can be duplicated rather than copied. When an object is duplicated,
it is not copied to the clipboard. This leaves the clipboard free for you to cut
or copy other objects.

Tip The Mirror-Merge tools allow you to duplicate and transform selected
embroidery objects, and merge them into a single object. See Duplicating
and mirroring objects for details.

To duplicate objects
1

Select the object (or objects) to duplicate.

Travel to the position in the stitching sequence at which you want to


place the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.
You can place the duplicate between other objects in the sequence, or
nest it within an object. See Nesting objects for details.

Select Edit > Duplicate.


The duplicate object is placed directly on top of the original, in the
specified position in the stitching sequence.

ES 2006

Move the duplicate object to the required position.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

307

Cloning objects
Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to select and clone objects.
The Quick Clone feature lets you quickly duplicate selected objects by
right-clicking, dragging and releasing at a new position.

To clone objects
1

Select an object or objects.

Holding down the right mouse button, drag the object(s) to a new
position.
A black outline of the object appears. The cursor icon includes a plus
symbol.

Drag-and-drop
Right-click object

Object duplicated

Tip For more precise positioning, hold down the Ctrl key while
draggingmovement is thereby constrained to X or Y axes.
3

Release the mouse.


A duplicate object(s) is created at the release point.

Right-click, hold down Ctrl


key, and drag-and-drop
object

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

308

Tip Clone objects to another window by the same method. To


temporarily deactivate automatic scrolling, hold down the Shift key
while dragging. An identical copy of the selection is created at the same
coordinates as the first window, no matter where the mouse is released.

Deleting objects
Select Delete (Edit menu) to delete selected objects.
Various methods are available for deleting objects.

To delete objects

 Select the object (or objects) to delete, and do one of the following:
 Press Delete.
 Select Edit > Delete.
 Right-click and select Delete from the popup menu.
Nesting objects
ES Designer lets you nest one object inside another at an exact point of the
stitching sequence. This feature is particularly useful with motifs and other
designs where long connectors may be generated. It also helps reduce the
overall numbers of objects, minimizing trims and tie-offs.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

309

To nest objects
1

Travel through the first object until the needle position marker is
positioned where you want to insert the second object. See Traveling by
stitches for details.

Travel to insertion
point and paste object

Insert the second object. To do this, either digitize the object, or copy
and paste, or cut-and-paste it.
The second object is nested in the stitching sequence of the first object.
All required functions are automatically inserted for the second object.

Move the copied object into the required position.


Tip To view the connectors that are generated for the nested object,
click the Show Connectors icon.

Combining designs
ES Designer lets you insert one design into
another. The two (or more) designs can
then be saved as a combined design. When
you insert a design in another, the two
color palettes are combined. Colors with
the same RGB values are automatically
identified as having the same thread color.
If you want to preserve these as separate
colors, you need to change one or other
before merging. See Modifying colorways
for details.

To combine designs

ES 2006

Open the first design.

Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert
the design. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

310

You can insert a design between objects in the sequence, or nest the
design within an object. See Nesting objects for details.
3

Select a color palette option as required. See Setting inserted


embroidery file options for details.
By default, when you insert a design, colors are matched to the current
color palette.

Colors added
to palette

Colors matched
to palette

Select Insert > Embroidery File.

 To select a design from any available DOS drive, select DOS Disk.
 To select a design from an embroidery disk, select Embroidery
Disk.
The Open dialog opens.
5

From the Look In list, select the folder where the design you want to
insert is stored, and select the required format from the Files of type
list.
Select the design file to insert, and click Open.
The design is inserted at the current needle position.

Move the second design into the required position. See Positioning
objects for details.
Tip To ensure that all the objects in the inserted design stay together,
group the design while working with it. See Grouping and ungrouping
objects for details.

Save the combined design under the original or different name.


The designs you have inserted are now combined into one design.

Splitting objects
Use Split Object (Edit menu) to split selected objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

311

ES Designer lets you split embroidery objects into smaller objects. This is
useful, for example, when you want to split Manual objects up in order to
convert sections to outline objects with Stitch Processor. Use the Split
Object command to split embroidery objects created with the Input A,
Input B, and Input C tools together with Satin, Tatami, or Program Split as
the stitch type. Run objects may also be split but Complex Fill objects
cannot. See also Shaping vector and embroidery objects.

To split objects
1

Select an object to split.

Travel to the stitch where you want it to be split.


You can travel to a stitch inside a Satin, Tatami, Run or Manual object.
See Traveling by stitches for details.
Note You cannot split an object at the first stitch.

Select Edit > Split Object.


The object is split into two objects at the needle position marker.
Split object
deleted

Split object

Tip You can convert any split Manual objects to outline objects with
Stitch Processor. See Recognizing object/outlines after editing for
details.

Resequencing embroidery objects


The embroidery objects in a design form a stitching sequence. Initially,
objects are stitched in the order in which they were created. You can change

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

312

the position of a selected object by cutting it, then pasting it somewhere else
in the sequence, or by using the Resequence command. You can also
resequence objects by color or using the Color-Object List.

Resequencing objects with cut-and-paste


Click Cut (Standard toolbar) to cut a selected object or objects and place
them on the clipboard.
Click Paste (Standard toolbar) to paste copied objects in the design.
You can resequence objects by cutting an object from the design and pasting
it back at a different point in the sequence. This does not change the
physical location of the object. See also Nesting objects.

To resequence objects with cut-and-paste


1

Select the object (or objects) to resequence.

Click the Cut icon.


The selected object is removed from the design and moved to the
clipboard.

Completed
designcenter
stitched first

Object cut to
clipboard

Travel to the position in the stitching sequence where you want to paste
the object. See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.
You can paste between other objects in the sequence, or nest the cut
object within another object. See Nesting objects for details.
If you do not move the current needle position marker, the object is
pasted at the end of the sequence.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

313

Click the Paste icon.

Cursor inserted
at end of design

Object pasted

The object is pasted back in the design according to the current paste
options. See also Setting paste position options.
Note The object remains on the clipboard and can be pasted repeatedly
until the next Copy or Cut command.

Resequencing selected objects


Select Resequence By Selects (Edit menu) to resequence selected objects.
You can resequence objects by selecting them in the required stitching
order.

To resequence selected objects


1

Select the first object in the range you want to resequence.

Holding down Ctrl, select the subsequent objects to resequence.


Note Select each object in the order you want it to stitch out in.

With the objects still selected, select Edit > Resequence > By Selects.
The objects are resequenced in the order they were selected.

Resequencing objects by color


Select Resequence By Color (Edit menu) to resequence objects by color.
The Resequence By Color feature lets you resequence all objects by color.
This reduces the number of color changes in a design.

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

314

Note This technique resequences all color blocks of the same color in the
stitching sequence. If, for any reason, you want to maintain separate color
blocks, you should use the Color-Object List. See Resequencing colors and
objects with the Color-Object List for details.

To resequence objects by color


1

Select the objects to resequence.

Select Edit > Resequence > By Color.


The Sequence By Color dialog opens listing the colors used in the
selected objects.

Select color
block

Use buttons to
resequence

Select a color and click Move Up or Move Down to change its position in
the sequence.

Click OK.

Resequencing colors and objects with the Color-Object List


Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to resequence objects.
The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and
access their properties. You can resequence color blocks and objects easily
by changing their position in the Color-Object List.
Tip You can also use it to group and ungroup, lock and unlock, and show
and hide objects. Use it also to cut, copy and paste, as well as branch
objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying
and pasting objects, and Branching objects with the Color-Object List.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

315

To resequence objects with the Color-Object List


1

Click the Color-Object List icon.


The Color-Object List opens.

Click-and-drag object
to new position

Select the color block or object to resequence.

 To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you click.


 To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you click.
3

Click-and-drag selected objects to reposition them.


Note You cannot move an object between colors in a manual color
change. However, you can move an object between consecutive
members of a grouped object.

Drop object into new


position

Tip You may need to select allpress Ctrl+Athen regenerate


stitchespress Gto update the display.

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

316

Automatic branching
Click Branching (Standard toolbar) to automatically branch selected
embroidery objects.
The Branching feature lets you digitize like objectse.g. the fingers of a
hand, sections of a custom letterwithout having to think about the most
efficient stitching sequence and joins. Branching is designed for use with
shapes made up of objects that overlape.g. complicated letters, Asian
characters, etc. Apply Branching to join selected objects to form a single
branched object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized,
component objects grouped, and stitches regenerated. All component
objects are grouped and selectable as one. You can apply a single underlay
to all.

Properties of branched objects


Branching works with any combination of the following object typesRun,
Input A, Input B, Input C, Complex Fill and Fusion Fill. Objects with Motif
Run and Motif Fill cannot be used. Branched objects preserve their original
properties while sharing the color of the first object in the sequence.

Mixture of object types and


colors

Color shared but object types


preserved

Note When dissimilar objects are selected and branched, any which cannot
be branched are omitted.

Connections between branched objects


The component objects of a branched object are connected by the Closest
Join method used with custom alphabets. All objects are resequenced both
externally (in relation to each other) and internally (by automatic
segmentation). See also Digitizing custom letters.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

317

Editing branched objects


Branched objects remain editable. They can be reshaped. There is only one
entry and one exit point, but all component objects have individual reshape
points. The object properties of a branched object can be accessed via the
Object Properties dialog. Stitch types can also be re-assigned via the
toolbar.

Applying branching
Click Branching (Standard toolbar) to automatically branch selected
embroidery objects.
Apply Branching to selected objects. These become a single branched
object.

To apply branching
1

Select the objects.

Long connectors
between separate
objects

Note The function is only available if more than one object of any
suitable type is selected.

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

318

Click the Branching icon.


ES Designer will prompt you to digitize entry and exit points.

Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults.

Objects resequenced,
connectors minimized

Component objects are grouped and share the color of the first branched
object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, and stitches
regenerated.
4

Travel through the branched object to check stitching.


See Viewing the stitching sequence for details.

Branching objects with the Color-Object List


Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to branch objects in a design.
The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and
access their properties. You can use it to branch like objects in a design.
Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, group and
ungroup, lock and unlock, and show and hide objects, as well as resequence
objects. See also Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List, Copying
and pasting objects, and Resequencing colors and objects with the
Color-Object List.

To apply branching with the Color-Object List

ES 2006

Click the Color-Object List icon.

Select objects in the Color-Object List.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

319

Right-click and select Branching from the popup menu.

Long connectors
join objects

Branch selected
objects

Note The function is only available if more than one object of any
suitable type is selected.
4

Digitize entry and exit points, or press Enter twice to accept the defaults.
Component objects are grouped and share the color of the first branched
object. Objects are resequenced, connectors minimized, and stitches
regenerated.

Selected objects
grouped into single
branched object

Long connectors
eliminated

Applying automatic underlay to branched objects


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to select an underlay type to
apply to branched objects.
Because Branching combines objects to form a single branched object, you
can apply an underlay (single or double) to all.

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

320

To apply automatic underlay to branched objects


1

Select the branched object.

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.


The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select First
Underlay
Select underlay
type

Select the First Underlay checkbox and select an underlay type.

Click Apply.
Underlay stitches are automatically generated for the branched object.
Note If component objects are touching or overlapping, the underlay is
first stitched out for the whole branched object followed by the cover
stitch.
Cover stitched after
underlay

Whole underlay
stitched first

Applying two-layer run stitching with branching


With run stitching, digitizers frequently aim to have exactly two layers of
stitching on every segment while minimizing jumps and trims. This
technique effectively eliminates the need to have extra travel or jump
stitches to get from one part of the outline to another. It does so by using
the stitches themselves as travel stitches wherever possible, providing a
higher quality result in the process.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

321

To apply two-layer run stitching with branching


1

Select the objects.

One layer of run


outline stitches

Click Branching and digitize entry and exit points in the normal way.
See Applying branching for details.
Stitches are regenerated. Component objects are grouped and
connectors minimizedno jumps, no extra travels.

Combination of one
and two layers of run
stitches created

Travel through the branched object to check stitching. See Viewing the
stitching sequence for details.
Tip When the entry and exit point are the same, there are two layers
of outline stitching. If they are different, the path between the entry and
exit will have three layers. It is your choice whether to have the extra
travel layer or a trim connection to the next object instead.

ES 2006

Chapter 14

Combining and Resequencing Objects

322

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming


Objects

You can change the position, size and orientation of objects in a design by
moving, scaling and transforming them. Group objects together to apply
universal changes, or lock them to avoid unintentional modification. Modify
objects directly on-screen or using the Object Properties dialog. Access
commonly used functions via the Color-Object List.

Warning The scalability and stitching quality of a design ultimately depend


on its original source Native Design, Imported Outlines, Processed
Stitches, or Imported Stitches. Only EMB designs contain the complete
set of design information required for 100% perfect scaling and
transformation. See also Embroidery design formats.
This section describes how to position objects, how to lock and group, align
and space objects, as well as how to scale, rotate, skew, and mirror objects.

Positioning, aligning and distributing objects


Position objects in your design using the mouse to drag them to a new
position, nudging them with the arrow keys or by specifying the X:Y
coordinates in the General Properties bar. ES Designer lets you align
objects to position them relative to each other, or distribute them evenly in
your design.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

323

Positioning objects
The simplest way to move an object in your design is to click-and-drag it to
a new position. Use the arrow keys to nudge objects into position.
Note If no objects are selected, using the arrow keys moves the current
needle position.

To position objects

 Select the object/s to move and click-and-drag it to a new position.

Use cross-hair cursor


to center object

 For more accurate positioning, use the arrow keys to nudge the object
into the required position.

 For even more accurate positioning, enter the X:Y coordinates in the
General Properties bar.

Enter exact
coordinates

The object is centered above the coordinates you set.


Tip Zoom in to make small adjustments. The distance the object moves
depends on the current zoom factor. The greater the zoom factor, the
smaller the distance moved.

Aligning objects
Use Align Left (Arrange toolbar) to left-align selected objects.
Use Align Vertical Centers (Arrange toolbar) to align selected objects
through their vertical centers.

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

324

Use Align Right (Arrange toolbar) to right-align selected objects.


Use Align Top (Arrange toolbar) to top-align selected objects.
Use Align Horizontal Centers (Arrange toolbar) to align selected objects
through their horizontal centers.
Use Align Bottom (Arrange toolbar) to bottom-align selected objects.
You can align selected objects in a design to the left, right, top, bottom or
center of a specific object. The Arrange toolbar offers a set of buttons to
trigger functions of the same name found in the Arrange menu. The tools
all become enabled when two or more objects are selected.

To align objects
1

Select the objects you want to align.

Select the object you want to align with.

Click an alignment tool or select Arrange > Align > ...

Align center

Align left

3
Align bottom

Note Objects are aligned with the last object selected. When we select
all the objects in the design by using Ctrl+A all the objects are aligned
with the last object in the sequence.

Distributing objects evenly


Use Space Evenly Across (Arrange toolbar) to distribute selected objects
evenly across the screen.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

325

Use Space Evenly Down (Arrange toolbar) to distribute selected objects


evenly down the screen.
You can automatically distribute selected objects with even spacing between
them, both vertically or horizontally. The Arrange toolbar offers a set of
buttons to trigger functions of the same name found in the Arrange menu.
The tools all become enabled when three or more objects are selected.

To distribute objects evenly


1

Select the objects you want to space.

Click a spacing tool or select Arrange > Space Evenly > ...

Grouping and locking objects


ES Designer lets you group objects together for group modifications.
Ungroup whenever you need to work with the component objects. You can
also lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident.

Grouping and ungrouping objects


Click Group (Arrange toolbar) to group selected objects.
Click Ungroup (Arrange toolbar) to ungroup selected objects.
You can group selected objects, or an entire design, to keep them together
for moving, scaling and transforming actions. With grouped objects you can
also apply global changes, saving time and ensuring consistency. When you
have finished making changes to a group, you can ungroup and work with
the component objects.
Note You need to ungroup before you can set properties for any individual
object in the group.

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

326

To group or ungroup objects

 Select the objects and click the Group icon or press Ctrl+G.

Select, move, resize, or


transform grouped objects as
a single object

Selected objects are combined into a group. This can be selected,


moved, resized and transformed as a single object.

 To ungroup, select the grouped object and click the Ungroup icon or
press Ctrl+U.

ungrouped objects
are selected

Tip To select with a bounding outline, simply drag the outline over one
component object and the whole group will be selected. See also
Selecting objects with a bounding box.

Locking and unlocking objects


Click Lock (Arrange toolbar) to lock selected objects.
Click Unlock All (Arrange toolbar) to unlock all locked objects in a design.
Lock objects to prevent them from being moved or modified by accident. For
example, locking backdrop images holds them in place as you digitize,
transform or reshape the embroidery objects near them. Locked objects can
be unlocked for modification at any time.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

327

To lock or unlock objects

 Select the object/s to lock and click the Lock icon or press K.
The selection handles disappear, indicating that the object can no longer
be selected or modified.

 To unlock objects, click the Unlock All icon.


All locked objects in the design are unlocked.

Grouping and locking with the Color-Object List


Use Color-Object List (Standard toolbar) to group and/or lock objects.
The Color-Object List provides an easy way to select objects in designs and
access their properties. You can use it to group and ungroup, lock and
unlock, and show and hide objects.
Tip Use the Color-Object List also to cut, copy and paste, resequence, as
well as branch objects. See also Copying and pasting objects, Resequencing
colors and objects with the Color-Object List, and Branching objects with the
Color-Object List.

To group or lock with the Color-Object List


1

Click the Color-Object List icon.


The Color-Object List dialog opens.

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

328

Click a node to open or close a color block and see its component
objects.

Click to open
or close node

Group/Lock
objects

Select a color block or object/s and right-click to invoke the popup


menu.

Group and/or lock selected color blocks and objects via the popup menu.

Scaling objects
You can scale objects by dragging selection handles, specifying the exact
dimensions in the General Properties bar, or by setting the distance
between reference points on the design. As an object is scaled, the stitch
count changes to preserve the current stitch spacing.
Note Only EMB designs contain the complete set of design information
required for 100% perfect scaling and transformation.

Scaling objects using click-and-drag


You can change the height and width of an object, or scale it proportionally
using selection handles. Scale objects individually, or select multiple objects
and scale them together.

To scale objects using click-and-drag


1

Select the object/s to scale.


Eight selection handles appear around the object.

ES 2006

Click-and-drag a selection handle to resize the object.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

329

 To scale height and width proportionally, use a corner handle.

Scale proportionally

Drag

Scale freely in both


directions

Ctrl + drag

Tip By default, objects scale proportionally. To scale freely in vertical


and horizontal planes, hold down Ctrl as you drag.

 To change the height, use the handles at the center-top or


center-bottom.
Drag

Drag
Scale vertically

Scale vertically

 To change the width, use the handles at the center-sides.

Drag
Scale horizontally

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Scale horizontally

Arranging and Transforming Objects

330

 To resize proportionally around a central anchor point, hold down


Shift as you drag.

Shift + drag
Scale horizontally in
both directions

Scale proportionally
about center

Shift + drag

Scaling objects by an exact amount


You can scale artwork, selected objects or a whole design using their
properties. With normal outline (EMB) files, this allows stitches to be
regenerated while preserving the original stitch density. See also Adjusting
stitch density.
Warning If you scale a stitch design by more than 5%, changes to stitch
density will affect the design quality. See also Embroidery design formats.

To scale objects by an exact amount


1

Select the object/s to scale.

In the General Properties bar, either:

 Enter exact height and width values.


 Enter the new height and width as a percentage of the current
dimensions.
Enter dimensions as exact
values or as a percentage
Click Apply

Tip To preserve aspect ratio, copy the calculated percentage from one
field to the other.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

331

Click the Apply button.

vase scaled
Width: 120% Height: 140%

shadow scaled
Width: 140% Height: 120%

Note After scaling, the new object size is reset to 100%.

Scaling objects using reference points


Select Transform (Edit menu) to scale an object or design using reference points.
You can scale an object or design by marking reference points and specifying
the required length of the line between them. For example, to resize a
design to a specific width, select all objects, then mark the reference points
across the width of the design.

To scale objects using reference points


1

Select the object/s to scale.

Select Edit > Transform.


The Transform dialog opens.

Select Size
checkbox

ES 2006

Specify size

Select the Size checkbox, and enter the required distance between the
reference points.

Click OK.

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

332

You are prompted to enter the start and end points of the reference line.
You will have already decided which two points in the object or design
will form the reference line.

Click to mark the


reference points

Click to mark the reference points on the design.


The object is scaled so that the distance between the points is the value
you entered in the dialog.
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press
Enter twice to use the default reference line.

Making objects the same size


Click Make Same Width (Arrange toolbar) to scale an object or design to the
same width as a reference object.
Click Make Same Height (Arrange toolbar) to scale an object or design to the
same height as a reference object.
Click Make Same Width and Height (Arrange toolbar) to scale an object or
design to the same size as a reference object.
You can scale objects to the same size as a reference object. Resize the
height or width separately or both.

To make objects the same size

ES 2006

Select the object/s to resize.

Select the object that is the size you require.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

333

Click a sizing tool or select Arrange > Make Same Size > ...

Make same width


1

3
2

Make same height

Make same width and height

Note Objects are resized according to the last object selected.

Rotating objects
You can rotate objects directly on-screen or by setting an exact rotation
angle.

Rotating objects using click-and-drag


When you select an object, selection handles display at its extremities. If
you click the object again, the handles change to rotation handles.

To rotate objects using click-and-drag

ES 2006

Select the object/s to rotate.

Click the object a second time.

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

334

Rotation handles appear at the corners and an anchor point at the


center.
rotation
handle
anchor
point

First click displays


selection handles

skew handle

Second click displays


rotation handles

Note If you click too quickly, the Object Properties dialog opens.
3

Drag the anchor point to any position required.

Drag a corner to rotate


about the anchor point

Anchor point
repositioned

Drag a corner to rotate


about the anchor point

Click a rotation handle, and drag it clockwise or anti-clockwise.


An outline displays as you rotate.

Rotating objects by an exact amount


Click Rotate 45 CW (Transform toolbar) to rotate selected objects by 45 in
a clockwise direction.
Click Rotate 45 CCW (Transform toolbar) to rotate selected objects by 45 in
a counter-clockwise direction.
Use Rotate (Transform toolbar) to rotate selected objects by an exact
amount (in degrees).
You can rotate selected objects in 45 increments or by entering an exact
value using the Transform toolbar.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

335

To rotate objects by an exact amount


1

Select the object/s to rotate.

To rotate in 45 increments, click one of the Rotate 45 icons.

To rotate by an exact amount, enter the angle in the Rotate field and
press Enter.

Rotating objects by reference line


Select Transform Special (Edit menu) to rotate an object using reference points.
The Transform Special tool lets you rotate selected objects with the aid of
reference points alone. It can be used both with embroidery and vector
objects.
Tip This technique is particularly useful to duplicate and rotate objects
around an anchor pointe.g. the petals of a flower.

To rotate objects by reference line


1

Select the object/s to rotate.

Select Edit > Transform Special.

Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:

 Click the first reference point. This will become the anchor point for
the rotation.

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

336

 Click a second reference point. An outline attaches to the pointer.

Move the pointer

Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments.

 Click the anchor point. The pointer then aligns itself with the second
reference point.

 Click a guide point for the required rotation position. Use the
coordinates on the Status bar for exact alignment.

Rotating objects by reference line and angle


Select Transform (Edit menu) to scale an object or design using reference points and
specified angle.
The Transform tool provides another method for transforming selected
objects using a combination of reference points and numeric values. This
provides a very accurate technique for rotating selected objects. It can be
used with embroidery objects, vector images or bitmap images. The
technique is particularly useful when you want to align objects precisely with
a common reference line.

To rotate objects by reference line and angle

ES 2006

Select the object/s to rotate.

Decide which two points in the object or design will form the reference
line. This should be a significant linee.g. one which must be perfectly
horizontal or vertical in the final design.

Select Edit > Transform.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

337

The Transform dialog opens.

Enter absolute
rotation angle in
degrees

Select Angle

Select the Angle checkbox, and enter the rotation angle of the reference
line.
For example, to rotate the image so that it aligns with the horizontal
axis, enter a value of 0.

Select rotation
anglee.g. 0

Digitize reference linealign


with base of object

reference line set to angle


specified in dialog

Click OK.

Click to mark the start and end points of the reference line.
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. Press
Enter twice to use a horizontal reference line by default.

Skewing objects
You can skew objects directly on-screen or by setting an exact skew angle.

Skewing objects using click-and-drag


You can skew objects along the horizontal plane by clicking skew handles
and dragging to the required angle.

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

338

To skew objects using click-and-drag


1

Select the object/s to skew.

Click the object a second time.


Rotation and skew handles appear around the object. Skew handles are
diamond-shaped and appear at the center-top and bottom of the object.

Drag the skew handles left or right.


The object skews along the horizontal plane.

Drag skew handle left


or right

Skewing objects by an exact amount


Use Skew (Transform toolbar) to skew selected objects by an exact
amount (in degrees).
You can skew selected objects by entering an exact angle in the Skew field.

To skew objects by an exact amount


1

Select the object/s to skew.

In the Skew field of the Transform toolbar, enter the skew angle you
require.

Press Enter.

Duplicating and mirroring objects


You can mirror objects horizontally or vertically by means of the Transform
toolbar. You can also mirror around a defined axis using a reference line. The

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

339

Mirror-Merge tool allows you to duplicate and transform selected


embroidery objects, as well as merge them into a single object.

Mirroring objects horizontally and vertically


Click Mirror Horizontally (Transform toolbar) to flip selected objects in the
horizontal plane.
Click Mirror Vertically (Transform toolbar) to flip selected objects in the
vertical plane.
You can mirror selected objects horizontally or vertically using the
Transform toolbar.

To mirror objects horizontally or vertically


1

Select the object/s to mirror.

Click one (or both) of the Mirror icons.


mirrored in X

mirrored in X & Y

starting object

mirrored in Y

Mirroring objects about a specified axis


Select Transform (Edit menu) to mirror objects about a specified axis.
You can mirror objects around a defined axis using a reference line. Using
this method you mark the start and end points of the line around which the
object mirrors.

To mirror objects about a specified axis


1

ES 2006

Select the object/s to mirror.

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

340

Select Edit > Transform.


The Transform dialog opens.

Select Mirror

Select the Mirror checkbox.

Click OK.

starting object

mirrored

Click to mark the reference points of the mirror axis.


After the second click, the selected object is mirrored in the reference
line.
Tip Press Ctrl to constrain the angle of the axis to 15 increments. If
you just want to mirror your selection around a horizontal axis, press
Enter twice. The mirror axis defaults to zero.

Reflecting designs with Mirror-Merge


Use Reflect (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate and mirror objects or
designs.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

341

Use the Mirror-Merge Reflect tool to duplicate and mirror designs


simultaneously. You can use it to quickly create borders. You can also use it
merge duplicates into a perfectly symmetrical object such as a face or heart.

To reflect designs with Mirror-Merge


1

Select the object or design.

Click the Reflect icon.


The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the
duplicate outlines move accordingly.
Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge.

Set the number of columns and rows you require.

Set no. of rows

ES 2006

Set no. of columns

Move the reference line to position the duplicates.

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

342

For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings.

Set precise row spacing

Set precise column spacing

Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm.
6

Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm.


The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point.
Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge
objects. Use this feature to merge duplicates into a perfectly
symmetrical object such as a face or heart.

object reflected

reflected objects merged

Creating wreaths with Mirror-Merge


Use Wreath (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate objects around a center point.
Use Kaleidoscope (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate and mirror objects
around a center point.
Use the Mirror-Merge Wreath tool to duplicate objects around a center
point. The Kaleidoscope tool works like Wreath but mirrors objects as well.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

343

Because objects are mirrored, Kaleidoscope works best with an even


number.

six-point wreath

eight-point kaleidoscope

five-point wreath

To create wreaths with Mirror-Merge


1

Select the object or design.

Click the Wreath or Kaleidoscope icon.


The pointer attaches to the center point. As you move it around, the
duplicate outlines move accordingly.

Enter the number of Wreath points.

Enter no. of wreath points

Note Enter an even number for a kaleidoscope effect.


4

Move the reference line to position the duplicates.

five-point wreath

six-point kaleidoscope

Tip Hold down Ctrl to constrain the reference line to 45o increments.

ES 2006

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

344

For more precise positioning, adjust the Distance and Angle settings.
Distance and angle are measured from the center of the original to the
center of the wreath or kaleidoscope.

Set precise distance

Set precise angle

Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm.
6

Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm.


The design is duplicated and distributed around the center point.

five-point wreath

six-point kaleidoscope

Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge
objects.

Duplicating designs with Mirror-Merge


Use Array (Mirror-Merge toolbar) to duplicate objects or designs.
Use the Mirror-Merge Array tool to create multiple copies of designs, such
as badges, spaced in rows and columns for faster stitchouts. Mirror-Merge

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

345

automatically sequences each color block to eliminate unnecessary machine


color changes.

To duplicate designs with mirror-merge


1

Select the object or design.

Click the Array icon.


The pointer attaches to a reference line. As you move it around, the
duplicate outlines move accordingly.
Tip Press Shift to disable Auto-Scroll while using Mirror-Merge.

Set the number of columns and rows you require.

Set no. of rows

ES 2006

Set no. of columns

Move the reference line to position the duplicates.

Chapter 15

Arranging and Transforming Objects

346

For more precise positioning, adjust spacing settings.

Set precise row spacing

Set precise column spacing

Tip Tab from field to field to enter values. Press Enter to confirm.
6

Click to mark the anchor point or press Enter to confirm.


The design is duplicated and distributed around the reference lines.
Note If the duplicates overlap the original, you are prompted to merge
objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

347

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping


Objects

ES Designer also lets you convert among vector and embroidery objects of
different types at all stages of the design. For example, you can convert
vector images directly to embroidery objects. Similarly, you can convert
embroidery designs or objects to vector images. These can then be
converted to any kind of embroidery object. You can also convert between
embroidery object types.

The reference points you mark when digitizing a shape become its control
points. These vary slightly with the object type. Use them to edit or
transform objectse.g. reshaping, scaling, letter spacing, changing entry
and exit points. Modify stitch angles of selected objects. Add multiple stitch
angles as required.
Key to control points

entry point

= entry point
= exit point
stitch angle
line

= corner point
= curve point

corner point

exit point

= stitch angle points

Most control points can be added, deleted, moved or changed to corner or


curve points. Some control points have a specific function and cannot be
deleted, for example, the entry point.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

348

Tip Before modifying any design, a good practice is to save a copy under a
new name and keep the original in case you want to discard your changes
and start again.
This section describes how to reshape objects with control points, reshape
circle, star and ring objects. It also describes how to convert object types,
adjust stitch angles, change entry and exit points, as well as keep or omit
the last stitch.

Converting between object types


ES Designer lets you convert vector images directly to embroidery objects
using a variety of input methods. Similarly, you can convert embroidery
designs or objects to vector images. These can then be converted to any
kind of embroidery object. You can also convert between different run
objects as well as Input C objects. This is useful when scaling designse.g.
for creating thicker or thinner columns and borders, or converting between
Complex Fill and Input A or Input B objects. See also Object
interconversion.
Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by
applying stitch angles directly to vector objects. You can also add turning
stitches to Complex Fill objects with the Stitch Angles tool. See Adding stitch
angles in Stitch Angles mode for details.

Converting vector objects to embroidery


Use Convert > Stitch Angles (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Fusion Fill objects.
Use Convert > Complex Fill (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Complex Fill objects.
Use Convert > Input C (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Input C
objects.
Use Convert > Fusion Fill (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Fusion Fill objects.
Use Convert > Auto Appliqu (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Appliqu objects.
Use Convert > Run (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Run objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

349

Use Convert > Triple Run (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Triple
Run objects.
Use Convert > Motif Run (popup menu) to convert vector objects to Motif
Run objects.
Use Convert > Backstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Backstitch objects.
Use Convert > Stemstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Stemstitch objects.
You can convert vector objects to embroidery objects using Complex Fill,
Input C, or an outline input method. The resulting object takes the current
stitch type, color and object properties set for that input method. Vector
objects can be converted to appliqu. You can even send them directly to a
laser cutter. See also Cutting appliqu shapes.

Vector object

Complex fill object

Motif run object

Fusion Fill object

Tip You can also create embroidery objects with turning stitches by
applying stitch angles directly to vector objects. See Adding stitch angles in
Stitch Angles mode for details.

To convert vector objects to embroidery


1

Select a thread color from the color palette.

Select the vector object to convert.


Note If you select Complex Fill as the input method, you can select
several vector objects to create an object with multiple boundaries.

Select an input method from the Input toolbar.


Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu.
Tip Before you apply an input method, select the correct properties. For
Complex Fill and Input C, select a stitch type and set the desired effects,
otherwise the last selected stitch types and properties are used.

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

350

 For open shapes and outlines, select Run, Triple Run, Motif Run or
Input C. You can apply these input methods to closed shapes as well
if you want to stitch their outlines.

 For closed, filled shapes, use Complex Fill.


Tip You can also create objects with turning stitches by adding stitch
angles directly to vector objects. See Adjusting and adding stitch angles
in Reshape mode for details.
4

Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:

 For Complex Fill objects, enter stitch entry and exit points and the
stitch angle points.

 For Input C objects, enter width point1 and width point2.


 For Auto Appliqu objects, enter stitch entry and exit points, and
follow other details as prompted. See Creating appliqu objects for
details.

 For other Run objects, enter the entry point. Motif Run is converted
automatically.
Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results
at any stage.
5

Press Enter.
Stitches are generated according to the current properties of the
selected input method. For fill input methods, the current properties
include the stitch type as well.
Tip The Point & Stitch tools can also be used with vector images created
either in a graphics package or with the ES Designer drawing tools. See
Digitizing shapes with Point & Stitch for details.

Converting embroidery objects to vector objects


Use Convert > Drawing (popup menu) to convert embroidery objects to
vector objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

351

You can convert embroidery designs or objects to vector images at any time.
These can in turn be re-converted to any kind of embroidery object. See also
Pasting vector images.

run object

vector object

appliqu object

To convert an embroidery object to a vector object


1

Select an embroidery object or design.

Right-click it and select Convert > Drawing from the popup list.
The selected embroidery objects are converted to vector objects.

Convert selected vector objects to embroidery objects as required. See


Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

Converting between run objects


Use Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to Triple
Run or Input C.
Use Triple Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to
Run or Input C.
Use Motif Run (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to
Run or Input C.
Use Convert > Backstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Backstitch objects.
Use Convert > Stemstitch (popup menu) to convert vector objects to
Stemstitch objects.
Use Input C (Input toolbar or popup menu) to digitize and then convert to
Run or Triple Run.

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

352

You can quickly inter-convert objects digitized with Run, Triple Run, Motif
Run, Backstitch, Stemstitch, or Input C. This is useful for creating thicker or
thinner columns and borders when scaling.

Tip You can convert vector objects to embroidery objects (and vice versa)
in the same way. See also Converting vector objects to embroidery.

To convert between run objects


1

Select a run objecte.g. Run, Triple Run, Motif Run, Stemstitch,


Backstitch, or Input C.

Run object

Click a run stitch icon.


Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > from the popup menu

Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:

 Motif Run is converted automatically.


 For Input C, enter width point1 and width point2.
 For other run stitches, enter the entry point.
Tip Press Enter to accept defaults at each step. You can edit the results
at any stage.
The object is converted.

Enter width point1 and point2

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Converted to Input C object

353

Note You can convert between any of these object types in the same
way.

Converting Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill


Use Fusion Fill (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Input
A or B to Fusion Fill.
Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from Input
A or B to Complex Fill.
You can easily convert objects from Input A or Input B to Complex Fill or
Fusion Fill. This is useful for editing. For example, as curved fill effects can
only be used with Complex Fill objects, you can add them to Input A or B
shapes by first converting to Complex Fill. Also when scaling designs, an
Input A or B shape may become too big for Turning Satin. By converting to
Complex Fill or Fusion Fill, you can apply fixed or turning Tatami or some
other fill stitch type. If the original object has overlapping areas, these are
removed. See also Object interconversion.

Converted to Complex Fill

Motif fill applied

Curve effect applied

Tip You can also convert Complex Fill objects to turning stitches using the
Stitch Angles tool. You can even convert vector objects to embroidery in
the same way. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode and
Converting vector objects to embroidery for details.

To convert Input A or B to Complex Fill or Fusion Fill


1

Select the Input A or Input B object.

Click the Complex Fill or Fusion Fill icon.


Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Complex Fill or Fusion
Fill from the popup menu.

ES 2006

Follow the instruction in the prompt line:

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

354

 For Complex Fill objects, enter angle points 1 and 2.


 For Fusion Fill objects, enter more than one stitch angle line and
press Enter.

Enter angle
points

Press Enter

Note If the Input A or B object stitch type is not applicable to Complex


Fille.g. contour stitchSatin will be substituted. If the underlay type
is not applicablee.g. Center RunZigzag will be used.
4

Adjust reshape nodes and add effects as required.


Tip You can change an Auto Appliqu or vector object to a Complex Fill
object in the same way. You can also convert Complex Fill to Fusion
Fill.

Converting Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu


Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar or popup menu) to convert objects from
Complex Fill to Auto Appliqu.
You can convert objects from Complex Fill to
Auto Appliqu with the Auto Appliqu tool.
By adding entry, exit points and frame-out
position, the object is converted to an
appliqu object. See also Cutting appliqu
shapes.

To convert Complex Fill to Auto


Appliqu

ES 2006

Select the Complex Fill object.

Click the Auto Appliqu icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

355

Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Auto Appliqu from the
popup menu.

Frame-out position
Complex Fill object
Entry and exit points

Follow the instruction in the prompt bar:

 Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter
to accept the defaults.

 Mark the frame-out position if you are prompted or press Enter to


use the current frame-out values. See also Adjusting the default
frame-out position.
The object is converted to an appliqu object.
Note You can convert a vector object to an Auto Appliqu object in the
same way.

Reshaping embroidery objects


The Reshape Object tool is an important tool in ES Designer. Use it to add,
delete, or move reshape nodes on the object outline. For some objects, you
can also change corner points to curves. ES Designer lets you select a range
of reshape nodes in open and closed objects, making reshaping operations
quick and simple.

Viewing control points


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects, edit stitch
angles, and adjust entry/exit points.
Use Show Reshape Nodes (Reshape toolbar) to toggle reshape node
display when using the Reshape Object tool.
Use Show Stitch Angles (Reshape toolbar) to toggle stitch angle display
when using the Reshape Object tool.

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

356

Use Show Start/End (Reshape toolbar) to toggle entry/exit point display


when using the Reshape Object tool.
The Reshape Object tool is an important tool in ES Designer. It invokes its
own Reshape toolbar which allows you to selectively view reshape nodes,
stitch angles, and entry/exit points. Use the Reshape Object tool whenever
you want to change object shapes by adding, deleting, or moving reshape
nodes on the object outline. Edit stitch angles as well as entry and exit
points in Reshape mode.

To view control points

 Select the object and click the Reshape Object icon.


Control points appear around the object and the Reshape toolbar
appears. By default, reshape nodes, stitch angles and entry/exit points
display together.
entry point
curve reshape
node

curve reshape
node

stitch angle line


stitch angle
point

corner reshape node

stitch angle
point

exit point

Note When editing an Input A object in Reshape Mode, turning off the
Show Reshape Nodes button also disables the Show Stitch Angles
button. When editing an Input C object or any outline object, the Show
Stitch Angles button is always disabled.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

357

 Click icons on the Reshape toolbar to selectively display control points


depending on what you want to edit.

Show Reshape Nodes

Show Stitch Angles

Show Entry/Exit

 Use Show Reshape Nodes to toggle reshape node display. See


Reshaping objects with reshape nodes for details.

 Use Show Stitch Angles to toggle stitch angle display. See Adjusting
stitch angles for details.

 Use Show Start/End to toggle entry/exit point display. See Changing


entry and exit points for details.
Tip The Show Reshape Nodes button can be toggled using the hotkey
combination Alt+N. The Show Stitch Angles button can be toggled
using the hotkey combination Alt+A.

 To view the next or previous objects, press Tab or Shift+Tab keys.

Shift + Tab

Tab

Note Pressing Tab or Shift+Tab also causes all changes to the object to
be accepted.

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

358

Reshaping objects with reshape nodes


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects by means
of control points.
Use Show Reshape Nodes (Reshape toolbar) to toggle reshape node
display when using the Reshape Object tool.
Change object shapes with the Reshape Object tool. Use it to add, delete,
or move reshape nodes on the object outline. For some objects, you can also
change corner points to curves.
Note The Reshape Object tool lets you modify shapes without affecting
the stitch angles and the entry and exit points.

To reshape objects with reshape nodes


1

Select the object to reshape.

Click the Reshape Object icon.


Control points appear around the object and the Reshape toolbar
appears.

Click Show Reshape Nodes to view only these control points.

To add extra nodes on the outline:

 Left-click to add a corner point.


 Right-click to add a curve point.
Right-click

Left-click

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

359

Select reshape nodes as required:

OR

Click to selecthold
down Ctrl to select
multiple nodes

Drag bounding box


around reshape
nodes to select

Hold down Shift and right or


left-click to select range of nodes

 Click to select a single reshape nodes.


 Use the Ctrl key to select multiple reshape nodes.
 Click-and-drag a bounding box around a group of reshape nodes to
select.

 Use the Shift key to select a range of reshape nodes. Left-clicking or


right-clicking in closed shapes changes the direction of the selection.
6

Adjust the position of selected reshape nodes by dragging them along


the outline as required and press Enter.

Drag reshape
nodes

Press Enter

Tip Use the arrow keys to nudge selected reshape nodes.

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

360

Press Delete to delete unwanted reshape nodes and press Enter.

Delete reshape
nodes

Press Enter

If the object only has two reshape nodesor two pairs of reshape nodes
as in the case of Input A objectsdeleting one deletes the whole object.
8

Press Spacebar to toggle between selected corner and curve reshape


nodes and press Enter.
Tip If you make a mistake, press Esc to remove the changes, press Esc
again to exit Reshape mode.

Select reshape
nodes and press
spacebar

Press Enter

Note You can also adjust stitch angles as required, as well as change
entry and exit points. See Adjusting stitch angles and Adjusting
entry/exit points and last stitches for details.

Reshaping circle, star and ring objects


For objects created with the Circle/Star or Ring tools, you reshape using
the existing control points only. You cannot add, change or delete control
points in these objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

361

Reshaping circle/star objects


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape circle and star objects.
You can change circle/star objects from circles to ovals using the Reshape
Object tool. The Show Stitch Angles icon is disabled. Circle/star objects
have two reshape nodes (used to change the radius and orientation of the
object), a center point (used to reposition it), and an entry point.

Tip To scale a circle without changing it to an oval, select it with the Select
Object tool, and use the selection handles to scale it.

To reshape circle/star objects


1
2

Select the circle/star object.


Click the Reshape Object icon.
The Reshape toolbar appears.
Entry point

90
Center point

Reshape node
Stitch angle

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

362

Click a reshape node on the circumference of the circle, and drag it to


reshape the outline.

Click-and-drag
reshape node

Press Enter

 To reshape without changing the orientation, use the reshape node


at the top of the object.

 To reshape and spin the object around its center point, use the
reshape node at the side.
4

To move the circle, click the center point and drag it to a new position.

Press Enter.

Reshaping ring objects


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape ring objects.
You can reshape the inner and outer boundaries of ring objects with the
Reshape Object tool. Reshaping rings is similar to reshaping circle/star
objects except that you reshape each boundary individually. Each boundary
has two reshape nodes for changing radius and orientation, as well as a
center point for moving the boundary. The object has a single entry point.

To reshape ring objects

ES 2006

Select the ring object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

363

The Reshape toolbar appears.

Entry point

Reshape node

Center point may


not be visible

Click a reshape node on either boundary, drag it to change the outline,


and press Enter.

Click-and-drag
reshape node

Press Enter

 To reshape without changing the orientation, use the reshape node


at the top of the boundary.

 To reshape and spin the boundary around its center, use the reshape
node at the side.
4

To offset the boundaries, select the center point of a boundary, drag it


to a new position, and press Enter.

Click-and-drag
center point

Press Enter

Note The center points are generally on top of each other to begin with,
and may not be visible.

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

364

Adjusting stitch angles


Stitch angle adjustments depend on the type of object you are working with.
With Complex Fill objects you can set a single stitch angle for the entire
object. You can add multiple stitch angles to objects with the Stitch Angles
tool. You can also adjust stitch angles with the Reshape Object tool.
Note You cannot change the stitch angle of Star, Ring and Input C objects
as the stitches automatically turn to follow the shape. You can, however,
change the stitch angle of Circle objects by moving the entry point. See
Reshaping circle, star and ring objects for details.

Adjusting and adding stitch angles in Reshape mode


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to add stitch angles to selected Input
A and B objects.
Use Show Stitch Angles (Reshape toolbar) to toggle stitch angle display
when using the Reshape Object tool.
You can adjust the stitch angle of embroidery objects interactively using the
Reshape Object tool. ES Designer also lets you add stitch angles to
Input A, Input B or Fusion Fill objects while in Reshape Object mode.
Input A objects thereby convert to Input B. See also Converting between
object types.

You can also use the Reshape Object tool to add individual reshape nodes
on either side of Input A and B objects, modifying the shape without
affecting the stitch angles. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Tip You can change the stitch angle of Complex Fill objects using object
properties. See Adjusting stitch angles using object properties for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

365

To adjust and add stitch angles in Reshape mode


1

Select the object.

Input A object

Input B object

Complex Fill object

Click the Reshape Object icon and click Show Stitch Angles to view
only these control points.

Click-and-drag stitch angle points to their required positions.

Select and adjust the end points as required.

Input A object

Input B object

Complex Fill object

Note You cannot add stitch angles to Complex Fill objects in Reshape
mode. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode for details.
5

Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to place
a stitch angle line.

Input A object
converted to Input B

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Input B object with stitch


angle added

Converting and Reshaping Objects

Fusion Fill object with


stitch angle added

366

Tip Input A objects automatically convert to Input B as soon as you add


or adjust a stitch angle. See Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode
for details.
6

Press Enter.
The stitch angles change accordingly.
Tip You need to convert Input B objects to Input A in order to apply
Smart Corners. To do this, you need to edit the reshape nodes to create
reshape node pairs. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.

Adding stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode


Use Stitch Angles (Pointer toolbar or popup menu) to add stitch angles to
selected Complex Fill objects.
Modify the stitch angles of Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects with the
Stitch Angles tool. You can also create objects with turning stitches by
adding stitch angles directly to vector objects. Adding stitch angles to
Complex Fill or vector objects converts them to Fusion Fill. See also
Converting between object types.
Complex Fill objectone
stitch angle

Complex Fill converted


to Fusion Fill

To add stitch angles in Stitch Angles mode

ES 2006

Select an object.

Click the Stitch Angles icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

367

Alternatively, right-click and select Convert > Stitch Angles from the
dropdown menu. You are prompted to enter stitch angles.

Complex Fill object

Stitch angles added

Digitize stitch angles so that they intersect two sides of the object.
Make sure that they do not intersect each other.

Press Enter.
The object is re-generated with the new angles.

Adjusting entry/exit points and last stitches


ES Designer lets you change the entry and exit points of individual objects.
You can also keep or omit the last stitch in a column of stitches.

Changing entry and exit points


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust the entry and exit points of
selected objects.
Use Show Start/End (Reshape toolbar) to toggle entry/exit point display
when using the Reshape Object tool.
You can change the entry and exit points of individual objects. Aim to place
the end point next to adjoining objects for smaller connecting stitches, or to
reduce the number of travel runs.

To change entry and exit points

ES 2006

Select the object to change.

Click the Reshape Object icon and click Show Start/End to view only the
entry and exit points.

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

368

Select the entry or exit point as required, and drag it to a different


position on the object outline.
entry point

exit point

exit point

entry point

entry point

exit point

Tip To view the next or previous objects, press Tab or Shift+Tab keys.
Pressing these keys also causes all changes to the object to be accepted.
4

Press Enter.
Note In circle/star or ring objects, only the entry point appears. In
circle objects, the stitch angle is perpendicular to the line connecting the
entry point to the circle center point. Thus, changing the stitch entry
point changes its stitch angle.

Keeping or omitting the last stitch


Click Keep Last Stitch (Pointer toolbar) to keep the last stitch in a column.
Right-click to omit the last stitch in a column.
If you are digitizing adjoining columns, you can keep or omit the last stitch
in the first column to achieve a smoother join or shorter connecting stitches.

columns smoothly
joined

columns with
unwanted space

Note This feature only applies when the exit point is at the end of the
columni.e. the default exit point. Moving the exit point using the Reshape
Object tool overrides the Keep Last Stitch/Omit Last Stitch command.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

369

To keep or omit the last stitch

 To keep the last stitch, select the object and click the Keep Last
Stitch/Omit Last Stitch icon.

 To omit the last stitch, select the object and right-click the Keep Last
Stitch/Omit Last Stitch icon.
last stitches kept
columns
smoothly joined

last stitches omitted

Tip Alternatively press Spacebar to omit the last stitch or Enter keep it.
Press Spacebarlast
stitch omitted

Press Enterlast
stitch kept

ES 2006

Chapter 16

Converting and Reshaping Objects

370

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine


Functions

ES Designer automatically generates stitches from design outlines and


properties. This means you can scale, transform, and reshape native
designs without affecting stitch density or quality.
However, ES Designer also lets you edit
individual stitches. You simply select them like
any other object and move the needlepoint
position as required. You may need to do this,
for example, when working with stitch files
which do not contain design outline data. See
Embroidery design formats for details.
Like stitches, most machine functions are
inserted automatically whenever you select
commands or specify object properties. They
are stored with the embroidery object and
updated whenever the object is modified. However, ES Designer also lets
you manually insert machine functions and modify them. This flexibility
allows you to adapt designs to almost any machine requirement.
Warning Stitches or machine functions which are manually inserted into
non-manual objectse.g. Input A, Complex Fill, etcneed to be maintained
manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, stitch edits
are lost. Machine functions may be moved to another point in the stitch
sequence. For this reason, only insert functions manually if they cannot be
added automatically.
This section deals with selecting and editing stitches, and converting
selected stitches to objects. It also includes instructions for inserting,
checking, editing and clearing manually-inserted functions. It also describes
how to edit stitches and functions using the Stitch List.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

371

Selecting and deselecting stitches


The Stitch Edit tool lets you select single stitches, several stitches, or a
range of stitches by selecting their needle points, or dragging a bounding
box around them. You can select all stitches in a design, cancel all
selections, or remove individual stitches from a selected group. Selected
stitches are highlighted in a different color. You can also select individual
stitches in your design using the Stitch List.

Selecting stitches by needle point


Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing.
You can select individual stitches in Stitch Edit mode by selecting their
needle points.
Tip Zoom in and display the needle points for easier selection.

To select stitches by needle point


1

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

Click a needle point.


The needle point changes color and the needle position marker moves
to the selected stitch. All stitches after the needle position marker in the
stitching sequence appear in black.

Selected
stitch

Hold down
Shift to select
a range of
stitches

 To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select.


 To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select.

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

372

Selecting stitches with a bounding box


Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select stitches with a bounding box.
With the Stitch Edit tool activated, you can select stitches by dragging a
bounding box around them.

To select stitches with a bounding box


1

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

Drag a bounding box around the stitches you want to select.


Stitches are selected when you release the mouse button.

stitches
selected

bounding
box

Selecting stitches with the Stitch List


Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on and off. Use
it to select individual stitches.
You can view and select individual stitches in your design by means of the
Stitch List. See also Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List.

To select stitches with the Stitch List


1

ES 2006

Click the Stitch List icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

373

The Stitch List opens. It shows stitch position coordinates and function
informatione.g. whether the stitch is a jump. It also shows the length
of every stitch in the design.

Stitch List shows position


coordinates, function
information, and individual stitch
lengths
Change Stitch List
text and background
colors

Tip To display the text in black, select Black Text from the popup menu
(right-click). To display the text in the associated stitch color, select
MultiColored Text. To change the background color of the Stitch List,
select Background Color and edit to suit stitch colors.
2

Click a stitch in the Stitch List to select it.


Stitches selected in the Stitch List are also selected in the design, and
vice versa.

 To select a range of stitches, hold down Shift as you select.


 To select multiple stitches, hold down Ctrl as you select.

Selected
stitches

Tip Right-click inside the Stitch List to access the popup menu options.
For example, you can select to display the Stitch List in black and white,
or open the Stitch Edit dialog. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch
List for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

374

Selecting a range of stitches


Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing.
Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of stitches.
You can select a range of stitches with Selects On activated. The Selects
On tool adds stitches to the selection.

To select a range of stitches with Selects On


1

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

With the Selects On tool off, travel through the design, stopping just
before the first stitch to select.

Stop before the first


stitch

Click the Selects On icon.

Click the last stitch in the range.


The stitches between the needle marker and this stitch are selected.

Click the last stitch in


the range

Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.

Selecting stitches while traveling through a design


Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for editing.
Click Selects On (Standard toolbar) to select a range of stitches as you travel
through the design.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

375

You can select a range of stitches by traveling by stitch with Selects On


activated. The Selects On tool adds stitches to the selection as you travel
through the stitching sequence.

To select stitches while traveling through a design


1

With the Selects On tool off, travel to the required stitch or select an
individual stitch.

Travel to the first


stitch

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

Click the Selects On icon.

Travel through the design. See Traveling by stitches for details.

Note If the Stitch Edit tool is not selected, Selects On has no effect.
As you travel, stitches are added to the selection.

Travel 10 Stitches
tool used

Note If a stitch is already selected, it is deselected when you travel


through it.

Deselecting stitches
You can deselect individual stitches from a group of selected stitches or
cancel all selections in the design.

To deselect stitches

 Deselect individual stitches using the following method.


 Travel backwards by one stitch.
Note The Stitch Edit and Selects On must be selected.

 Deselect all stitches using any of the following methods.

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

376

 Press Esc.
 Deselect Selects On, then select another stitch.
 Select Edit > Deselect All.

Editing stitches
You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. You can move or delete
individual or clusters of selected stitches.
Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch
editing functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather
than individual stitches.

Inserting stitches
Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to insert stitches in an object.
You can insert stitches in an object to fill gaps. Inserted stitches are
considered part of the object (rather than independent objects). They will,
however, be lost if the objects stitches are regenerated. Where possible,
edit the object properties rather than individual stitches. For example, to
increase stitch density, reduce spacing rather than insert stitches.
Note Inserting stitches is different from creating stitches using the Manual
input method. Using the Manual tool you create a separate object, with its
own properties and connectors. See Digitizing individual stitches for details.

To insert stitches

ES 2006

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

Zoom into the area you want to edit.

Select a needlepoint.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

377

The stitch changes color and the needle position marker moves to the
selected stitch.
4

Move the mouse pointer where you want to insert the new stitch, and
right-click.

Right-click

Move the mouse to where you want to insert the next stitch, and
right-click.

Right-click

Continue right-clicking as required.

Moving stitches
Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for moving.
You can move individual or groups of selected stitches.
Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch
editing functions are lost. Where possible, reshape the object rather than
move individual stitches. See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.

To move stitches

ES 2006

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

Select stitches and drag them to a new position.

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

378

The stitch shadow outline shows the new position.

shadow outline

Drag selected
stitch to new
position

Press Enter.

Deleting stitches
Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) to select individual stitches for deletion.
You can delete individual or groups of selected stitches.
Warning If an objects stitches are regenerated for any reason, all stitch
editing functions are lost. Where possible, edit the object properties rather
than individual stitches. See Adjusting Satin stitch spacing, Adjusting Tatami
stitch spacing and length and Adjusting stitch density for details.

To delete stitches
1

Click the Stitch Edit icon.

Select a stitch or stitches.

Press Delete.

Select
stitches
Press
Delete

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

379

Converting selected stitches to objects


Use Stitch Edit (Pointer toolbar) together with Recognize Object/Outline to
turn selected stitches into an embroidery object.
New or revised object outlines can be recognized after stitch edits have been
made. This capability is particularly useful with stitch files which have been
opened without Object/Outline recognition. You may do this to preserve
the original stitching in most of the design, while modifying a single section
of it. You may also want to turn edited stitches into an embroidery object in
order to preserve the edits. See also Recognizing object/outlines after
editing.

To convert selected stitches to objects


1

Click the Stitch Edit icon and select the individual stitches you want to
process. See Selecting and deselecting stitches for details.

Stitches selected

Select Edit > Recognize Object/Outline.


The selected stitches are converted to objects.

Objects and
outlines
created

Editing machine functions


Most machine functions are inserted automatically whenever you select
commands or specify object properties. They are stored with the embroidery
object and updated whenever the object is modified. However, ES Designer
lets you insert machine functions manually. Depending on your machine,
different machine functions are available. The most common types are
described below. See your machine manual for further details.

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

380

Warning When you insert stitches or machine functions manually, you


must maintain them manually. If an objects stitches are regenerated for
any reason, all stitch editing and machine functions are lost. For this reason,
only insert manual functions if they cannot be added automatically.

Machine function types


ES Designer lets you manually insert color changes, thread trims, jumps,
machine stops, needles in and out, and boring functions, depending on the
selected machine format.

Color Change functions


Color Change functions tell the machine to use the next thread color in the
design. They are automatically inserted when you select a new color from
the color palette. See Changing thread colors for details.
You only need to insert manual color change functions if you cannot recolor
using the standard methods, for example, when using multiple colors within
a single object. See Editing machine functions for details.

Trim functions
Trim functions instruct machines with trimmers to cut connecting threads
before moving to the next object. You insert trims automatically by setting
connector values or using the Trim tool. See Adjusting automatic trim after
settings and Adding trims for details.
If you need additional trims, you can insert the functions manually. See
Editing machine functions for details.
Note If a machine does not have a trimmer, the Trim function is ignored.
Depending on the machine format, the Trim function may be a code or a
sequence of jumps. See Setting trim functions for details.

Stop functions
If you want the embroidery machine to stop for any special reason during
stitching, you need to manually insert a Stop function in the stitching
sequence. See Editing machine functions for details.
Tip Because a Stop function may be inserted for various reasons, you
should record the purpose of the stop on the production worksheet to assist
the machine operator.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

381

Jump functions
Jump functions cause frame movements without needle penetrations and
are used to move smoothly from one part of a design to another. There are
various methods for automatically entering Jump functions.

 Apply Auto Jump to preserve long stitches. See Preserving long stitches
with Auto Jump for details.

 Digitize individual jumps by right-clicking the Manual icon. See


Digitizing individual stitches for details.

 Select jumps as connectors. See Using jumps as connectors for details.


 Create jump connectors manually by digitizing with Penetrations
deselected. See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.
If you need additional jumps, you can insert the functions manually. See
Editing machine functions for details.

Begin/End Jump functions


The Begin/End Jump functions (formerly known as Needle Out/In) instruct
the machine whether or not to use needle penetrations. You insert these
functions automatically using the Penetrations tool (formerly known as
Needles In). See Adding jumps with penetrations off for details.
If you need additional Begin/End Jump functions, you can insert them
manually. See Editing machine functions for details.
Note Remember to insert a End Jump function to instruct the machine to
resume normal stitching.

Borer In/Out functions


Borer In/Out functions are available for embroidery machines equipped with
a borer. They instruct the machine when to use the boring knife or tool
instead of a needle. You insert these functions automatically using the
Borers tool (formerly known as Borers In). See Digitizing boring holes for
details.
If you need additional Borer In or Out functions, you can insert them
manually. See Editing machine functions for details.

Sequin On/Off functions


Sequin On and Sequin Off functions are available for embroidery machines
that are equipped with a sequin dispenser. The Sequin On function generally
instructs the machine to physically lower the sequin dispenser into position
for sequins to be placed (fed and cut). These functions are automatically

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

382

inserted when using the Sequin Mode tool. See Sequins and Boring for
details.
If you need additional Sequin On or Sequin Off functions, you can insert
them manually. See Editing machine functions for details.
Some machines, notably Schiffli, use only explicit Drop Sequin functions.
These instruct the machine to drop a sequin on the fabric for stitching.
Schiffli machines, for example, do not require Sequin On/Off functions. See
the ES Schiffli User Manual Supplement for details.

Inserting machine functions manually


Use Insert Function (Machine menu) to insert machine functions manually in your
design.
You can insert machine functions manually by means of the Insert Function
dialog. Depending on your machines requirements, you will either add the
function to the current stitch, or insert it on an empty stitch or empty jump.
For some machines you will also need to add empty stitches or empty jumps
on either side of some functions. See your machine manual for details.
Note The available functions and their options depend on the selected
machine format. See also Selecting machine formats.

To insert machine functions manually


1

Travel to the position in the design where you want to insert a machine
function. See Traveling by stitches for details.

Select Machine > Insert Function.


The Insert Function dialog opens.

Select from functions


available for selected
machine format

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

383

Tip It is faster to digitize individual jumpsJump(M)by right-clicking


with the Manual input method selected. If you want the whole object to
consist of jumps, deselect the Penetrations icon. See Adding jumps
with penetrations off for details.
3

From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to
insert.
With some functions you can choose whether to insert on the current
stitch or on an empty stitch.

If available, choose the insertion method:

 Insert on Empty Stitch: inserts the selected function on an empty


stitch.

 Add to Current stitch: inserts the selected function on the current


stitch.
Depending on your machine, you may need to insert additional empty
stitches or empty jumps before or after the selected function. For
example, before a particular Stop function, you may want to insert a
number of empty jumps. See your machine manual for details.
5

To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other


in the Component field.

 Select Insert Before if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the
selected function.

 Select Insert After if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the
selected function.
To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add.

Additional empty
stitches inserted
before and after
selected function

The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or


jumps, appears in the Sequence panel.
6

ES 2006

Click OK.

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

384

The selected function, together with any additional empty stitches or


jumps, is added at the current needle position.

Additional empty jumps


inserted before and after
selected function

Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for inserting machine
functions manually. See Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List for
details.

Adding empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions


Use Edit Function (Machine menu) to add empty stitches/empty jumps to machine
functions.
You can edit the encoding of machine functions by changing the number or
sequence of empty stitches or empty jumps that appear around them. Some
machines require a specific number of empty stitches or empty jumps in
combination with a function in order to interpret it correctly. You may need
to edit functions if they were inserted incorrectly or the machine format has
changed.
Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions.
Functions added by ES Designer are automatically updated if the machine
format changes.

To add empty stitches/empty jumps to machine functions


1

Travel to the function you want to edit. See Traveling by machine


function for details.
When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt line.

ES 2006

Select Machine > Edit Function.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

385

The Edit Function dialog opens.

Insert empty
stitch/jump before or
after the machine
function

Select empty stitch or


empty jump

The Sequence panel shows the current format of the selected function.
3

To insert additional empty stitches or empty jumps, select one or other


in the Component field.

 Select Insert Before if you want the empty stitch/jump to precede the
selected function.

 Select Insert After if you want the empty stitch/jump to follow the
selected function.
4

To insert multiple empty stitches or jumps, click Add.

To delete an empty stitch or empty jump from the sequence, select it,
then click Remove.

Click OK.
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine
functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for
details.

Clearing machine functions


Use Clear Function (Machine menu) to clear a manually inserted machine function
from your design.
Manually inserted machine functions are not automatically removed or
updated when an object is modified. If a function is no longer required, it
must be manually cleared from the design. Both automatic and
manually-inserted functions can be removed.

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

386

Tip Check the Prompt line for the functions name to ensure you clear the
correct one.

To clear machine functions


1

Travel to the function you want to remove. See Traveling by machine


function for details.
When you reach the function, its name appears in the Prompt line.

Select Machine > Clear Function.


The function is removed.
Tip The Stitch List provides an alternative means for editing machine
functions manually. See Editing machine functions with Stitch List for
details.

Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List


You can use the Stitch List to help locate stitches and machine functions for
editing. The Stitch List displays stitch number, stitch coordinates, stitch
length, stitch function, stitch color. When you select a stitch in the list, it is
simultaneously selected in your design.

Editing stitch coordinates with Stitch List


Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to
edit coordinates of individual stitches.
Use the Stitch List to edit the coordinates, and therefore position, of
individual stitches.
Note Changes to stitch coordinates are stitch edits and will be lost if the
objects stitches are regenerated.

To edit stitch coordinates with Stitch List

ES 2006

Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for
details.

Double-click the stitch you want to edit.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

387

The Move Stitch dialog opens.

Enter new
coordinates

Enter the new coordinates in the X and Y fields.


Note The specified coordinates will change the location of the stitch end
point.

Click OK.
The stitch is regenerated in the new position and the Stitch List
information is updated.

Inserting machine functions with Stitch List


Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to
insert machine functions directly into the stitching sequence.
You can use the Stitch List to access the Insert Function dialog. This
provides a convenient means for inserting machine functions manually into
the stitching sequence.
Warning When you insert machine functions manually, you must maintain
them manually. For this reason, only insert manual functions if they cannot
be added automatically.

To insert machine functions with Stitch List


1

ES 2006

Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for
details.

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

388

Locate the position in the stitching sequence where you want to insert
the machine function.

Insert machine
functions directly

Right-click the stitch in the Stitch List and select Insert Function from
the popup menu.

From the Available Functions list, select the function you want to
insert. See Inserting machine functions manually for details.

Click OK.
The name of the inserted function appears in the Prompt line.

Editing machine functions with Stitch List


Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to
edit machine function encoding and to clear machine functions.
You can use the Stitch List to access the Edit Function dialog. This provides
a convenient means for editing existing machine functions. The Stitch List
also lets you clear machine functions from the stitching sequence.
Note You generally only need to edit manually inserted machine functions.
Functions added by ES Designer are automatically updated if the machine
format changes.

To edit machine functions with Stitch List


1

ES 2006

Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for
details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

389

Locate the function you want to edit.

Edit selected
machine function

Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Edit Function from the
popup menu.
The Edit Function dialog opens.

Edit the function as required. See Editing machine functions for details.

To remove the function altogether from the stitching sequence, select


Clear Function from the popup menu.

Filtering stitches by function


Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to
display stitches associated with specific functions.
You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches associated with
specific functions appear in the list.

To filter stitches by function

ES 2006

Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for
details.

Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Functions from
the popup menu.

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

390

The Show Functions dialog opens.

Select functions
to show

Select the functions you want to show.


Tip Click Select All to show all function types. To select multiple function
types, hold down Ctrl as you select. To select a range, click the first type
in the range, then hold down Shift and click the last type in the range.

Click OK.
Only the selected functions are displayed in the list.

Only selected functions


are displayed

Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select


MultiColored Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black,
select Black Text.
5

To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show
All from the popup menu.

Filtering stitches by stitch length


Use Stitch List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Stitch List display on/off. Use it to
display only stitches of a certain length.
You can apply a filter to the Stitch List so that only stitches of a certain
length appear in the list. The main use of this feature is to find stitches which
cause production problems, such as short stitches (e.g. < 1.0 mm). See also
Removing small stitches automatically.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

391

To filter stitches by stitch length


1

Open the Stitch List. See Selecting stitches with the Stitch List for
details.

Show specified
stitches

Right-click any stitch in the Stitch List and select Show Stitches from
the popup menu.
The Show Stitches dialog opens.

Select stitch
range to show

Select the range of stitch lengths you want to show.

 Radial corresponds to the actual stitch length.


 Axial X,Y corresponds to the horizontal and vertical frame
movements.
See Adjusting Auto Jump settings for details.
4

Click OK.
Only the selected stitches are displayed in the list.

Only selected stitches


are displayed

ES 2006

Chapter 17

Editing Stitches and Machine Functions

392

Tip To display the text in the associated stitch color, select


MultiColored Text from the popup menu. To display the text in black,
select Black Text.
5

ES 2006

To show all stitches again, right-click in the Stitch List and select Show
All from the popup menu.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

393

PART V

ADVANCED DIGITIZING
ES Designer provides specialized productivity features as well as special
effects and digitizing techniques.

Object properties, styles and templates


This section explains how to change the property settings in your design, as
well as how to apply, create and maintain styles and templates in
ES Designer. See Object Properties, Styles and Templates for details.

Specialized digitizing techniques


This section describes how to reinforce outlines. It also describes how to
digitize circles, stars and rings. Creating smooth joins, as well as borders
and filled holes are covered. You can also find instructions for specialist
digitizing with appliqu, sequins and boring. See Specialized Digitizing
Techniques for details.

Textured fills
This section describes how to apply textures to fills, and how to adjust their
settings to get the results you want. Details of Tatami offsets and partition
lines are explained, as well as how to create textures with Program Split and
Flexi Split. Adding details with User Defined Split is also covered. See
Textured Fills for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

394

Artistic stitch effects


This section describes how to create artistic effects with Jagged Edge,
Accordion Spacing, and Color Blending, and how to adjust their settings to
get the results you want. Creating contoured stitch effects with the Contour
feature is also covered, as well as how to create curved fills with Florentine
Effect and Liquid Effect. See Artistic Stitch Effects for details.

Motif runs and fills


This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to
rotate, mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including
how to create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to
create both motif runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to
motif fills. See Motif Runs and Fills for details.

Sequins and Boring


This section describes how to set up custom sequin palettes for the creation
of sequin designs. It also describes how to create sequin runs and digitize
individual sequins, as well as how to convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run.
Scaling and reshaping sequin runs is also explained as well as digitizing
boring holes. See Sequins and Boring for details.

ES 2006

Advanced Digitizing

395

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and


Templates

Every object you create in ES Designer has a unique set of properties that
are stored with it whenever you save the design. These properties define
general characteristics such as size and position, as well as
embroidery-specific characteristics such as stitch type and density. The
stitch properties determine how stitches will be regenerated when you
reshape, transform or scale the object.

Default property settings


Default or starting property settings are the ones stored with the design
template. These are automatically applied to any newly created objects in
the design.

Current property settings


Current property settings override the template defaults. Unless you
deliberately change them, these take the default values. You generally
change them to save time when digitizing. For example, you may preset
Tatami stitch spacing to use a specific density for all new Tatami objects you
create.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

396

Note When you close the design, the current settings are not automatically
saved. You can save them as the new default settings of the current
template or to another template altogether.

Object properties
Each object has its own unique set of properties stored with it. You can set
the properties of a selected object to be the current property settings. You
can also apply current property settings to existing objects.

Styles
A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can
save any combination of settings to a style. This makes it easy to apply
these settings to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply
a style to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any
properties not specified in the style, retain their current settings.

Templates
Templates are special files used to store styles and default property settings.
Use templates when digitizing frequently-used design types to save time
re-adjusting the current property settings.
This section explains how to change the property settings in your design, as
well as how to apply, create and maintain styles and templates in
ES Designer.

Working with object properties


When you create an embroidery object, you can simply accept the default
settings or apply new ones. Default property settings are stored with the
design template. You can also define current settings to influence all the
objects you create in the current design. You can change an objects
properties at any time without affecting those of any other object.
Alternatively, you can make any changes to the selected object current for
all new objects. Alternatively again, you can change all the current property
settings in the Object Properties dialog with no objects selected at all. You
can then apply current settings to any existing objects. You can also save
any modified settings to the current template as the new default property
settings.
Tip You can save any combination of settings to custom styles. See Working
with styles for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

397

Changing properties of existing objects


You can change an objects properties at any time without affecting those of
any other object not currently selected. Nor do such changes affect the
current or default settings. Some properties can be modified on-screenfor
example, you can change the size properties by scaling the object with the
selection handles. Other properties, such as stitch spacing or length, can
only be modified via the Object Properties dialog.
If you select more than one object, the Object Properties dialog will only
display tabs relevant to all selected objects. For example, if you select a
Complex Fill object and an Input C object, neither of these tabs will display
as the settings do not apply to both. If selected objects have different
values for the same settinge.g. stitch lengththe field will be blank. If you
enter a new value, it will apply to both objects.

To change properties of an existing object


1

Select an object and double-click.


The Object Properties dialog opens.
Select tab

Modify settings
as required

Click to access
another set of tabs

Click to apply
settings

Tabs display at the top of the Object Properties dialog. These provide
access to all possible object property settings.
2

ES 2006

Select a tab to view the object properties and adjust as required.

Click the FX button to access another set of tabs.

When you are finished, click Apply.

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

398

These settings are applied to the selected object. They do not affect
current settings or those newly created objects. See also Making
selected object properties current.
Tip Some properties, such as Auto Underlay, are applied by means of
toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools settings are
current.

Making selected object properties current


Click Make Properties Current (Styles toolbar) to make the properties of a
selected object current for the design.
You can make the properties of an existing object current for all newly
created objects.
Note Only the settings applicable to the selected object change. Other
settings retain their current values. For example, if you make the properties
of a selected Input C object current, settings specific to Complex Fill will not
change.

To make selected object properties current


1

Select the object on which you want to base the current properties.

Click the Make Properties Current icon.


The properties of the selected object become the current ones. You can
now create new objects with these settings or apply them to existing
objects.
Tip To check that the now current settings are as you intended, open
the Object Properties dialog.

Modifying current property settings


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off. Use it to set properties for the current design.
Whenever you change the current property settings, these will automatically
apply to any new objects you create. If you know which settings you require
before digitizing, you can preset them.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

399

Note Some object properties, such as Auto Underlay, are made current
by means of toolbar buttons. When the button is selected, that tools
settings are current.

To modify current property settings


1

With no objects selected, click the Object Properties icon.


The Object Properties dialog opens.
Select tab

Modify settings
as required

Click to access
another set of tabs

Click to apply
settings

Tabs display at the top of the Object Properties dialog. These provide
access to all possible object property settings.
2

Select a tab to view the current settings and adjust as required.

Click the FX button to access another set of tabs.

When you are finished, click Apply.


These settings are current for all newly created objects. You can apply
them to existing objects by means of the Apply Properties Current tool.
See Applying current settings to existing objects for details.

Applying current settings to existing objects


Use Apply Current Properties (Styles toolbar) to apply current settings to
selected objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

400

When you change the current property settings, these apply to all new
objects you create but not automatically to any existing objects. However,
you can apply them to selected objects as required.

To apply current settings to existing objects


1

Select the object (or objects) whose properties you want to change.

Click the Apply Current Properties icon.


The current values are immediately updated.

Changing default property settings


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to toggle the Object Properties
dialog on/off. Use it to set change default property settings for the current
template.
You can change default property settings at any time by saving the current
settings in the Object Properties dialog to the current template. If the
settings you are saving are based on a selected object, only these values
are updated in the template.
Note All changes affect any new designs created using this template. If you
only want the changes to apply to the design you are working in, change the
currentnot the defaultproperties. See Modifying current property
settings for details.

To change default property settings


1

ES 2006

With or without any objects selected, click the Object Properties icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

401

The Object Properties dialog opens.

Change settings
as required

Click to save to
template

Select the tab you want and change the settings as required.

Click Save.
The object properties are saved to the current template. These will
apply to any new objects in any design based on this template.
Tip You may wish to save your modified property settings to a custom
template for certain specialist purposes. See Working with design
templates for details.

Working with styles


A style is a group of property settings stored under a unique name. You can
save any combination of settings to your styles. This makes it easy to apply
them to selected embroidery and lettering objects. When you apply a style
to an object, the style settings replace its current properties. Any properties
not specified in the style, retain their current settings.
Styles are stored with the design template. The NORMAL template provides
a selection of preset styles for you to use. You can modify these as required
and save them back to the NORMAL template or to your own custom
templates. Each template may contain specific styles for different types of
embroidery. See also Working with design templates.

Styles toolbar

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

402

Use the Styles toolbar to quickly apply styles in your design. This toolbar
lets you:

 apply current settings to selected objects


 change current settings, and
 apply styles to selected objects.
The styles you select as favorites are each assigned a tool icon on the
toolbar.

Applying styles
Click Apply Style (Styles toolbar) to apply a style from the template to new or
selected objects.
Use the Styles toolbar to apply favorite styles to new or selected objects.
When you select a style, the settings overwrite the current property
settings. You can apply a style to current property settings before you
digitize, or to a selected object. See also Working with object properties.
Tip If you are using a digitizing tablet, you can quickly switch between
preset styles. Each button on the puck accesses the next preset style with
different spacing settings. For example, clicking Button 1 accesses
<PRESET_SATIN_1>.

To apply styles
1

Click the Apply Style icon.


The Use Object Style dialog opens.

My Style

Select style

Select a style from the dropdown list, then click OK.

 If an object is selected, the style settings are applied to it alone.


 If no object is selected, the style settings become the current
property settings, and apply to any new objects you create.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

403

Any settings that are not specified in the style will remain unchanged.

Style 1, E stitch spacing


0.75 mm

Style 2, E stitch spacing


1.25 mm

Style 3, E stitch spacing


1.75 mm

Tip To apply a favorite style, click the Favorite Style icon assigned to
it. See also Assigning favorite styles.

Defining new styles


Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to make the properties of a selected object current
for the design.
Define new styles for a template, either from scratch, or based on an
existing style or object. You can create styles in the Object Properties box
by specifying settings in any or all of the tabs. New styles are saved to the
current template.
Note The stitch type, settings and effects you specify for the new style do
not automatically change the current property settings. See also Applying
current settings to existing objects.

To define new styles


1

To base the new style on an existing object, select it now. To base it on


the current settings, make sure no objects are selected.

Select Stitch > Define Style.


The Organize Styles dialog opens.

My Style

ES 2006

Click to define new style

Click New.

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

404

The New Object Style dialog opens.

Enter name for


new style
Select style to
base it on

My New Style
My Style

Enter a name in the Style Name field.

To base the new style on an existing style, select it from the Based On
Style dropdown list.
Tip If you want the new style to be added to the Style toolbar, select
the Add to Favorites checkbox.

Click OK.
The Object Properties dialog opens. If you selected a style to base the
new style on, those settings will display.

Update the Object Properties tabs for the new style.


Note You do not have to enter values in all fields, only those you
specifically wish to store.

Click Apply and close the dialogs.


The new style is saved to the current template.

Assigning favorite styles


Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to assign a favorite style.
You can assign up to ten favorite styles to tool icons on the Styles toolbar.
To apply the style, you then simply select the tool.

To assign favorite styles


1

ES 2006

Select Stitch > Define Style.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

405

The Organize Styles dialog opens.

Select style

My New Style
My Style

Organize favorite styles

Click Favorites.
The Organize Favorites dialog opens.

Click Add

Click Add.
The Add To Favorites dialog opens.

My New Style

Select style

Select a style from the list.

Click OK.

Change the order in which the favorites will appear on the Styles toolbar
using Move Up and Move Down.

Click OK and then Close.


The styles are assigned in the order they appear in the Organize
Favorites box. The tool tip for each button shows the style name.

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

406

Merging styles
Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to merge style settings.
You can merge settings from one style to another. When you merge, the
settings from the second style overwrite the first.

To merge styles
1

Select Stitch > Define Style.


The Organize Styles dialog opens.

My New Style
My Style

Select style

Click to merge styles

Select a style to merge to.

Click Merge.
The Merge With Style dialog opens.

My Old Style

Select style

Select a style to merge from and click OK.

Close the dialogs.


The first selected style is updated and saved to the current template.

Modifying styles
Select Define Style (Stitch menu) to modify a style.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

407

You can modify all styles, including the preset styles in the NORMAL
template.
Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in
the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

To modify a style
1

Select Stitch > Define Style.


The Organize Styles dialog opens.

My New Style
My Style

Select style
Click to edit style

Select a style and click Edit.

Change the settings in the tabs as required. See Modifying current


property settings for details.

Click Apply.

The Object Properties dialog opens.

A warning message asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite the
existing style settings.
5

Close the dialogs.


The modified style is updated and saved to the current template.
Note Changes apply only to future uses of the style. Existing objects
based on the style are not affected.

Renaming styles
You can rename a style without affecting its settings.

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

408

Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in
the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

To rename a style
1

Select Stitch > Define Style.


The Organize Styles dialog opens.

Select style

My Style
My New Style

Click to rename style

Select a style to rename.

Click Rename.
The Rename Object Style dialog opens.

My Style 1

Enter a new style name and OK.

Close the dialogs.

Enter new style name

The style is renamed.

Deleting styles
You can remove any unwanted styles from a template.
Tip At some stage, you may want to revert to the original style settings in
the NORMAL template. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

409

To delete styles
1

Select Stitch > Define Style.


The Organize Styles dialog opens.

My Style 1
My New Style

Select style

Click to remove style

Select a style to delete and click Remove.


A warning message asks you to confirm the deletion.

Close the dialogs.


The style is deleted from the current template and removed from the list
of style names.
Note To remove all styles from a template click Remove All.

Working with design templates


Templates are special files used to store styles and default settings. Use
templates when digitizing frequently-used design types so that you do not
have to set the current property settings every time. For example, a
template may include standard objects and sample lettering. It may simply
have preferred stitch settings, lettering font and size, and colors set as
current settings. Or it may have special density, pull compensation or
underlay settings to suit different fabrics.

The NORMAL template


The NORMAL template is the default template supplied with ES Designer. It
contains current property settings as well as a selection of preset styles.
These styles include variations on the current property settings. For
example, <PRESET_SATIN_1> and <PRESET_SATIN_2> contains different

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

410

stitch spacing settings for Satin stitches. You can view and modify the
settings for these styles at any time. See Modifying styles for details.
Note If necessary, you can revert to the original NORMAL template after
modifying it. See Reverting to the NORMAL template for details.

Creating design templates


You create templates from designs containing the required objects and
property settings. Simply save the design, or elements of it, as a template.
Templates look the same as design files, but use the file extension EMT.
Note You cannot overwrite templates by accident. Each time you create a
new design from a template, ES Designer opens a duplicate. When you save
the design the first time, the Save As dialog opens so you can save the
template under a new name.

To create a design template


1

Start a new design or open an existing one.

Adjust the property settings, styles, and effects as required.

Add the objects and lettering you want to appear in the template.
Tip You can enter lettering baselines on their own but it helps to include
sample text. You can overtype the sample text when using the template.

Select File > Save As.


The Save As dialog opens.

Enter template name


Select Design
Templates (EMT)

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

411

Select Design Templates (EMT) from Save as type list.


ES Designer automatically opens the ESWin\Template folder. Design
templates must be saved here or they will not appear in the template
list when you start a new design.

Enter a name for the template in the File name field.

Click Save.

Using design templates


When you start a new design from the File > New menu, a list of the
available templates appears in the New dialog. See Creating new designs
with selected templates for details.
Note The template list only appears when you start a design from the File
menu. If you select the New tool on the Standard toolbar, the NORMAL
template is applied by default. See also Creating new designs with the
NORMAL template.

Modifying design templates


You can modify templates in the same way as a normal design.
Note Changes apply only to future uses of the template. Existing designs
based on the template are not affected.

To modify design templates


1

Select File > Open.


The Open dialog opens.

Navigate to the ESWin\Template folder, then select Templates (EMT)


from the Files of type list.
The available template files display.

Select the template you want to modify and click Open.

Modify property settings, styles and other settings as required.

Select File > Save As.

From the Save as type list, select Templates (EMT).

Enter the name of the template and click Save.

The Save As dialog opens.

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

412

Tip To create a new template based on the modified one, type a new
file name and click Save.
8

Click Yes to confirm.


The modified template is ready for use.

Saving current properties to a template


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to change current properties.
You can easily save current property settings to the current template. See
also Working with object properties.

To save current properties to a template


1

Access the Object Properties dialog.

 To use the current property settings, deselect all objects, then click
the Object Properties icon.

 To use the properties for a particular object, select the object, then
double-click it.
The Object Properties dialog opens.
Select tab

Modify settings
as required

Click to save to
current template

ES 2006

Change property settings as required. See Modifying current property


settings for details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

413

Click Save.
The modified settings are saved to the current template.
Note Only the current property settingsnot the objects or other
settings in the designare saved to the template.
Tip To save more than one set of property settings to the template, save
them as styles. See Defining new styles for details.

Reverting to the NORMAL template


If you modify the NORMAL template supplied with ES Designer, you can
revert to the original version. A factory copy is always maintained so that
the NORMAL template can be restored.

To revert to the NORMAL template


1

Close ES Designer.

Click the Windows Start button and select Programs > Wilcom ES>
Revert.
The Revert to Factory Template dialog opens.

Click OK

Select Templates

Select the Templates checkbox and click OK.


The original settings for the NORMAL template are restored.

ES 2006

Chapter 18

Object Properties, Styles and Templates

414

Deleting design templates


Delete templates in the same way as you would any other Windows file,
using Windows Explorer. Templates are located in the ESWin\Template
folder.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

415

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing
Techniques

ES Designer provides specialized digitizing


features to save time as you digitize, and for
special effects and machine functions. There are
input tools for digitizing circles, stars, rings and
appliqu objects, as well as methods for creating
repeated or backtracked duplicates, adding
borders or filling holes. If your machine type
supports boring or sequining, you can use
ES Designer to digitize these effects as well.
This section describes how to reinforce outlines. It
also describes how to digitize circles, stars and
rings. Creating smooth joins, as well as borders
and filled holes are covered. You can also find
instructions for specialist digitizing with appliqu, sequins and boring.

Digitizing circles, stars and rings


ES Designer provides special time-saving input tools for digitizing circles,
stars, rings. Use the Ring and Circle tools to digitize circles or rings and the
Star tool for smaller scale star effects. You can use any fill stitch type with
circles and ovals although Contour stitch only looks effective with long,
narrow ovals.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

416

Digitizing circles and ovals


Use Circle/Star (Input toolbar) to digitize filled circles and ovals.
Digitize filled circles and ovals with a few clicks. You can use any fill stitch
type with circles and ovals although Contour stitch looks most effective with
long, narrow ovals.

circle with
Program Split

oval with Contour

Tip To achieve a spiral contour fill effect for a circle, digitize the circle using
a different input methode.g. Ringleaving a small hole in the middle.

To digitize circles and ovals


1

Click the Circle/Star icon.

Digitize the circle or oval.

 Click to mark the center of the circle or oval. A circle outline attaches
to the pointer.

 Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to
mark the radius reference point.
This point becomes the entry point for the whole object. The stitch
angle will be perpendicular to the line connecting the center point
and the radius reference point.

 To create a circle, press Enter.


 To create an oval, click again to mark a second radius point, and
press Enter.
reference point
2
90

1 center

ES 2006

reference
point
3

Wilcom ES Online Manual

417

Digitizing stars
Use Circle/Star (Input toolbar) to digitize star shapes filled with Zigzag
stitching.
You can digitize circles and ovals which use turning Zigzag stitches to create
a Star or French dot.

Note Stars are only stitched using Zigzag. You cannot select a different
stitch type for this effect. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

To digitize stars
1

Right-click the Circle/Star icon.

Digitize the reference points for the star.

 Click to mark the center of the star. A circle outline attaches to the
pointer.

 Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, then click to
mark the radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point
for the whole object.

 To create a circular star, press Enter.


2

reference point

1
center

 To create an oval star, click again to mark the second radius point,
then press Enter.

Digitizing rings
Use Ring (Input toolbar) to digitize circle and oval-shaped rings.

ES 2006

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

418

Create rings by digitizing circles and ovals within each other. Use different
combinations of inner and outer boundary shapes to create different effects.

circle in oval

oval in circle

oval in oval

You can digitize rings with a variety of fill stitch types. Contour stitch is well
suited to rings, as it runs stitches around the ring in a spiral pattern. See
also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects.

ring with Satin

ring with Contour

ring with Tatami

Tip Digitize the inner circle first to ensure that the stitches push outwards.

To digitize rings
1

Click the Ring icon.

Digitize the inner boundary of the ring.

 Click once to mark the center of the inner boundary. A circle outline
attaches to the pointer.

 Move the pointer until the outline is the required size, and click to
mark the radius reference point. This point becomes the entry point
for the whole object.

 Press Enter to create a circle, or click again to mark a second radius


point for an oval.
The outline of the second boundary now attaches to the pointer.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

419

Digitize the outer boundary of the ring in the same way as the first, then
press Enter.
reference
4 point
reference
2 point

1 center

3
reference
point

Reinforcing outlines
Use Backtrack / Repeat (Pointer toolbar) to reinforce an outline, stitching it
in the same or opposite direction.
Use Backtrack and Repeat to reinforce outlines while specifying the
direction of the stitching. Backtrack stitches in reverse direction to the
original. It is typically used to make run stitch outlines thicker without
creating unwanted connecting stitches. Repeat duplicates the original stitch
direction and is typically used with closed shapes.

Use Backtrack for open shapes

Use Repeat for closed shapes

Note If you use Repeat for open shapes, a connecting stitch is inserted
from the end to the start of the object which will require trimming.

To reinforce outlines
1

Select the object (or objects) to reinforce an outline.

Click the Backtrack/Repeat icon to backtrack, right-click to repeat.


The object is duplicated and placed on top of the original. It is the same
color as the original and is positioned after it in the stitching sequence.

ES 2006

Check that the object has been duplicated by using one of the following
methods:

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

420

 Check the stitch count in the Status Line.


 Use Slow Redraw. See Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for
details.

 Travel through the stitches. See Viewing the stitching sequence for
details.

Removing underlying stitching


Use Remove Overlaps (Arrange menu) to remove overlapping stitches.
Use the Remove Overlaps command to remove the underlying layer of
stitching in overlapping objects. This helps to reduce the stitch count and
prevent a build-up of stitches where they are not needed. See also Shaping
vector and embroidery objects.

To remove underlying stitching


1

Select one or more cutters.

Select cutters

ES 2006

Select Arrange > Remove Overlaps.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

421

The Remove Overlaps dialog opens.

Set cutter values

Enter amount of overlap


Enter size of smallest
permissible object

In the Cutters panel, enter the minimum object width and the
maximum stitch spacing allowed.
These settings are useful if, for example, you choose an entire design as
a cutter and wish to exclude objects, such as borders or details, less
than a certain width. The Maximum Stitch Spacing setting allows you
to exclude background stitches of a certain density.

Select Accordion Allowed to include Accordion Spacing objects.


By default, the software treats Accordion Spacing objects as
backgrounds and excludes them from the cutting operation. This option
allows you to include them.

Enter the amount of overlap required in the Cutting Overlaps field.

Cutting Overlap: 0.5 mm

Cutting Overlap: 2.0 mm

Cutting Overlap: 3.5 mm

In the Minimum Fragments field, enter the size of the smallest object
that will be produced after cutting.
This eliminates the generation of small objects and unnecessary color
changes.

ES 2006

Click OK.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

422

The stitching overlap is removed.

Tip You can use an entire design as a cutter excluding objects, such as
borders or details, less than a certain width.

Splitting long stitches with Auto Split


Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Auto Split to new or selected
Satin objects.
If a Satin shape is wide, some stitches may exceed the maximum stitch the
particular embroidery machine can produce. When Auto Split is applied,
ES Designer breaks any long Satin stitches into shorter ones. It also
distributes needle penetrations in a random pattern so that they do not form
a line in the middle of the shape.

Auto Split OFF

Auto Split ON

While Auto Split is used primarily to prevent long stitches in wide columns,
it can also be used as an alternative to Tatami fill. Auto Split looks more
Satin-like and works well with turning stitches, creating soft lines and a little
more depth. By contrast, Tatami is flat and can show unwanted patterns
with tight curves.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

423

Note If you want to preserve the Satin effectfor example, if only a few
stitches are too longyou can use Auto Jump instead. Auto Split must be
turned off for Auto Jump to take effect. See Preserving long stitches with
Auto Jump for details.
If you do not apply either Auto Split or Auto Jump, the stitches are split into
smaller stitches of equal length. The line formed by the needle penetrations
will be visible in the final embroidery.

To split long stitches with Auto Split


1

Right-click the Satin icon.


The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Select Auto Split


Adjust max and min
stitch lengths

Select the Auto Split checkbox.

In the Length field, enter the maximum Satin stitch length to allow
before Auto Split is applied.
Stitches that exceed this value will be split into smaller stitches. This
value can be smaller than the maximum stitch generally used in the
design.

Length: 5 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

Length: 3 mm
Minimum Stitch: 0.4 mm

Tip Use a length of 7.00 mm to preserve the Satin effect.

ES 2006

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

424

In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the shortest stitch that can be
generated when using Auto Split.

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 5 mm

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 3 mm

Length: 4 mm
Minimum Stitch: 1 mm

Click Apply.
Tip As an alternative to Auto Split, try a textured Tatami fill or Program
Split. Or, use User Defined Split to manage split lines in Satin fills. See
Textured Fills for details.

with Tatami

with Program Split

with User Defined Split

Preserving long stitches with Auto Jump


Embroidery machines have a maximum possible stitch length which is
determined by the frame movement limitations of the machine itself. If a
stitch exceeds this, it is broken into smaller stitches. This can affect the
appearance of the embroidery, especially Satin fills. By applying Auto Jump,

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

425

you can preserve long stitches in an object by turning them into a series of
jumps.

Auto Jump OFF

Auto Jump ON

Note Auto Jump is applied by default to connectors. See also Using jumps
as connectors.
Auto Jump can be used, for example, with manually digitized underlays. It
can also be used to create quilted effects, for example, by applying it to
Satin areas that are over-stitched with Run stitch or Motif Fill.

To create a narrow column with more loft than normal Satin, apply Auto
Jump, in conjunction with a suitable underlay, with the maximum stitch
length set to a small valuee.g. 6 mm. If the cover stitches are short,
splitting them with a jump makes them looser and thus more effectively
raised off the fabric. See also Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic
underlays.
Note The maximum frame movement is defined in the software by the
machine format values. See Adjusting standard machine format settings for
details.

Applying Auto Jump


Use Auto Jump (Stitch Types toolbar) to preserve long stitches in new and
selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings.

ES 2006

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

426

Apply Auto Jump to objects with stitches that exceed the maximum stitch
length.
NO jump stitches
additional
needle
penetrations

jump
stitchesnot
trimmed

Note Many machines trim by jumps. Thus, to prevent the trimmers being
activated, usually only one or two jumps between needle penetrations may
be used. See also Setting trim functions.

To apply Auto Jump

 Click the Auto Jump icon with or without objects selected.


With no objects selected, Auto Jump is applied to all new objects. For
both new or selected objects, Auto Jump is based on current properties.

 Click again to turn off the effect.


Adjusting Auto Jump settings
Right-click Auto Jump (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
You can adjust Auto Jump settings to vary the length at which stitches are
converted to jumps, the length of the jumps themselves, and the method of
calculating stitch length.

To adjust Auto Jump settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Auto Jump icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

427

The Object Properties > Auto Jump dialog opens.

Select Auto Jump


Enter maximum stitch
and jump length
settings
Select calculation
method

Select the Auto Jump checkbox.

In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow.
Stitches exceeding this value will have Auto Jump applied.
Note This value must be smaller than or equal to the maximum stitch
length possible for the selected machine format. See Adjusting standard
machine format settings for details.

In the Jump Length field, enter the length of each jump.


Smaller jumps increase the time required to stitch out, but move the
frame more smoothly across the design.

In the Length Calculation panel, click the required method of


calculating stitch length.

 Along Radius: measures the distance between two consecutive


needle penetrations.

 Along Axis: measures either the horizontal or vertical movement


required for the stitch.
Y
measured along
radius

measured along
axis

maximum
stitch
maximum
stitch

X
maximum stitch

The option you select depends on the way your machine measures stitch
length. See your embroidery machines documentation for details.
6

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

428

Creating outlines and filling holes


ES Designer provides tools for quickly creating outlines and filled areas
based on existing boundaries. The Offset Object feature creates new
outlines (up to eight) from the outlines of selected objects with both fixed
and variable spacings. The Filled Holes feature creates filled objects from
the outlines of selected Complex Fill objects.

Creating offset objects with fixed spacings


Use Offset Object (Generate toolbar) to create accurate outlines for any filled
embroidery object or any closed vector object.
Use the Offset Object tool to quickly create new outlines from selected
objects. Any closed object can be used, including vector objects, runs, or
any of the input types. The generated outline is an independent object that
can be reshaped or modified as required. Use offset objects to highlight
design detailse.g. small Satin objectsor create seamless borders. You
can center generated objects over the original outline or offset them.
Various offset object types are availableRun, Triple Run, Motif Run or
Input C, Backstitch, Stemstitch, or vector objects. You can even create
offset Complex Fill and Fusion Fill objects.

Run outline

Stemstitch outline

Motif outline

Input C outline

To create offset objects with fixed spacings

ES 2006

Select the source object.

Click the Offset Object icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

429

The Offset Object dialog opens.

Select rounded
or squared
corners

Enter required offset


Enter offset count

Choose target
object type

Replace the
original object if
required

Select Fixed Offset and enter the required offset in millimeters.

Source object

Negative Offset

Zero Offset

Positive Offset

 To center the generated object over the original, accept the default
value of 0.00.

 To position the generated object outside the original, enter a positive


offset (e.g. 1.00).

 To position the generated object inside the original, enter a negative


offset (e.g. -1.00).
Note For Complex Fill objects, offset objects are created around all
boundaries. If necessary, select any unwanted objects, and press Delete.

ES 2006

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

430

In the Offset Count field, enter the required number of offset objects.

Source object

Offset Count: 1

Offset Count: 2

Offset Count: 3

Note If the Use Spiral checkbox is selected, the offsets are joined
together to create one or more spirals, according to the geometry of the
original outline. The Offset Count field needs to be set to 2 or more.

Spiral Offset
Object: 2

Spiral Offset
Object: 3

Spiral Offset
Object: 4

Select rounded or squared corners as required.

Squared

Squared
Angle limit: 20

Squared
Angle limit: 30

Rounded

Note The squared option allows you to adjust the angle limitfirst
select Cut Sharp Corners and set required angle value.
6

ES 2006

From the Object Type list, select an object type for the offset object(s).

Wilcom ES Online Manual

431

Note If you select Complex Fill as the outline object type, you get a
complete offset shape, not just an outline.
Tip If you are using Input C, set the column width in the Object
Properties dialog before you start as the default setting is generally too
wide.
7

Adjust the Approximation setting as required.


This controls the smoothness of the generated object outlinethe larger
the value, the smoother the curve. The smaller the value, the greater
the number of reshape points.

Approximation: 0 mm

Approximation: 0.3 mm

Approximation: 0.6 mm

Tip If the value is set to zero, there is no approximation and the


generated outline is unsmoothed. This is suitable for use with cutting
machines.
8

Choose to replace the original or source object with the offset object as
required.
If this option is selected, the offset object replaces the original in the
same position in the stitching order. The start and end points of the
resultant object will be as close as possible to those of the source object.

Click OK.
Warning If angle lines in the offset object cross, they are removed
one-by-one until the object can be generated. If this happens, you are
prompted to continue.

Creating offset objects with variable spacings


Use Offset Object (Generate toolbar) to create accurate outlines for any filled
embroidery object or any closed vector object.

ES 2006

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

432

The Offset List allows you to specify up to eight offsets with different
spacings. All objects are created by offsetting from the original selection.
Offsets are cumulative.

To create offset objects with variable spacings


1

Select the source object.

Click the Offset Object icon.


The Offset Object dialog opens.

Select rounded
or squared
corners
Select variable
offset
Choose a target
object type

Replace the
original object if
required

Select Use Offset List and click Offset List.


The Offset List dialog opens.

Specify offset
values

Select required
number of
offsets

ES 2006

Select the required number of offset objects using the checkboxes.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

433

Set the offset values for different spacings and click OK.
The Result column gives you the cumulative total of each offset.

Offset Object: 2

Offset Object: 3

Offset Object: 4

Select other options as required. See Creating offset objects with fixed
spacings for details.

Click OK.

Filling holes in objects


Use Filled Holes (Insert menu) to create new objects from object outlines.
Create new objects from boundaries in Complex Fill or Fusion Fill objects
using the Filled Holes feature. This lets you fill holes formed by existing
boundaries, without having to re-digitize the shape. When you fill a hole, a
new object is created using the current fill stitch type. You can choose to fill
the hole exactly or offset it.
positive offset-gap
between objects

negative offsetoverlapping objects

To fill holes in objects

ES 2006

Select the source object.

Select Insert > Filled Holes.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

434

The Holes dialog opens.

Enter required offset

In the Offset field, enter the offset value.

Source object

Offset: 0.00

Offset: 1.00

Offset: -1.00

 To cover holes exactly, accept the default value of 0.00.


 To leave a gap between the filled holes and the original object, enter
a positive offset (e.g. 1.00).

 To overlap the filled holes and the original object, enter a negative
offset (e.g. -1.00). Overlapping the objects prevents gaps
appearing between them.
4

Click OK.
All holes in the object are converted to Complex Fill objects and are filled
with the current fill stitch type and color.
You can modify the outlines and object properties of the filled holes in
the normal way.
Note If you do not want to fill all the holes, select the unwanted new
objects, and press Delete.

Adding borders to designs


Use Borders (Generate toolbar) to edit letters in envelopes on-screen.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

435

Add decorative borders such as rectangles, ovals, and shields to designs


using the Borders library. When you add a border, it is automatically sized
to fit the current design. Adjust border thickness and size as required.

To add borders to designs


1

Open the design.

Click the Borders icon.


The Select Border dialog opens.

Select border

Adjust border
width
Click to insert

Select a border and adjust the Border Width setting as required.


The default is 3.00 mm. This value can be adjusted after insertion in the
design.

ES 2006

Click Make Current.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

436

The Select Border dialog closes and the border is generated to include
all design elements in the design window.
5

Change the thread color as required.

Adjust border size as required. See Reshaping embroidery objects for


details.

Note Thread color defaults to the last object in the design.

Digitizing for appliqu


Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the Auto
Appliqu tool. When you digitize an object with Auto Appliqu, the guide
run, tacking and cover stitches are automatically generated using the
current Auto Appliqu settings. You can also extract appliqu shapes from a
design to output to a cutter or to a separate file. See Cutting appliqu
shapes for details.
Tip Apply Smart Corners to appliqu objects as required. See Controlling
corner stitching for details.
Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each
appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence. See
Printing appliqu patterns for details.

Creating appliqu objects


Use Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to digitize appliqu objects.
Use Auto Appliqu to produce the stitching
you require for appliqu objects. Appliqu
objects are digitized in the same way as
Complex Fill objects and may have multiple
boundaries.
Tip You can also convert Complex Fill and
vector objects to appliqu by selecting
them, then clicking the Auto Appliqu icon.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

437

To create appliqu objects


1

Click the Auto Appliqu icon.

Digitize the boundary of the appliqu, by marking reference points


around the outline of the shape.

 Click to create a corner point.


 Right-click to create a curve point.

Tip Follow the prompts in the Prompt Line to help you digitize. If you
make a mistake, press Backspace to delete the last reference point, then
continue digitizing.
3

Press Enter to close the shape.

Click the outline to set the stitch entry and exit points or press Enter to
accept the defaults.

If prompted to do so, mark the frame-out position.

 To use the current frame out values, press Enter. See also Adjusting
the default frame-out position.

 To specify a frame out position, click a point on the design.


frame out
position

Note If you select None as the Frame Out option in the Object
Properties > Auto Appliqu dialog for both guide and tack stitching,
you will not be prompted to enter a frame out position. See Adjusting
guide run settings or Adjusting tacking settings for details.
6

ES 2006

Press Enter.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

438

Up to four layers of stitchingguide run, cutting line, tack and


coverare generated for the appliqu object, depending on the current
Auto Appliqu values.
Tip When you stitch out an appliqu object, the machine stops between
layers. Before you start, lay the fabric over the design and start the
machine. When the guideline has been stitched, trim the excess
appliqu material and start the machine again for the tack and cover
stitch.

Adjusting guide run settings


Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu guide run
settings.
A guide run is a layer of run stitches around the outline of an appliqu
object. It is the first appliqu layer stitched and is used to position the
appliqu fabric on the background material. You can adjust the guide run
stitch length, offset and frame-out setting.

To adjust guide run settings


1

Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.


The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Adjust settings for


guide run stitching

ES 2006

Enter Stitch length and Offset values as required in the Guide Run
panel.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

439

A negative offset value moves the guide run within the outline, a positive
value moves it outside.

Offset: 1 mm

Offset: -1 mm

Offset: 0 mm

Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function


after the guide run.
Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not
be prompted to enter a frame-out position. See Creating appliqu
objects for details.

Click Apply.

Adjusting the default frame-out position


Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu frame out
settings.
When you stitch out appliqu objects, you can set a frame-out position. This
shifts the hoop out from under the needle, making it easier to place and trim
the appliqu shapes. The frame-out settings determine the distance and
direction of the hoop movement.

To adjust the default frame-out position


1

Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.


The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Set frame out


coordinates

ES 2006

In the Frame Out panel, set the frame-out coordinates.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

440

 X: enter a horizontal distance for the hoop to move.


 Y: enter a vertical distance for the hoop to move.
3

Click Apply.

Adjusting tacking settings


Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu tacking
settings.
Tacking is used to fix appliqu shapes to a background fabric before cover
stitching is applied. You can change the stitch type and settings used to
generate tacking, or choose to omit this layer altogether.

To adjust tacking settings


1

Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.


The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Select tack stitch type

Adjust settings for


tack stitching

In the Tack panel, select a tack stitch type.


If you do not require a tacking layer, select None.

tacking: E Stitch

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

tacking: Zigzag

441

Select the tack stitch settings. Depending on the selected stitch type,
you can set different stitch properties:







Stitch Length: stitch length value for Run stitch only.


Spacing: stitch spacing value for E Stitch and Zigzag.
Count: number of stitch repetitions for Zigzag only.
Width: column width value for Zigzag and E Stitch.
Offset: negative offset value moves the tack stitching within the
outline, a positive value moves it outside (Run stitch only).

 No. of Runs: number of runs between stitches for E Stitch only.


 Inside/Outside: offset value as a percentagethe sum of both
equals 100%.

inside: 25% outside: 75%

inside: 50% outside: 50%

inside: 75% outside: 25%

Select a Frame Out option to insert a Stop or Color Change function


after the tack stitching.
Note If you select None for both guide and tack stitching, you will not
be prompted to enter a frame-out position.

Click Apply.

Adjusting cover stitch settings


Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to adjust Auto Appliqu cover stitch
settings.
The cover stitch is the Satin border around the appliqu shape. You can
change the width of the cover stitch, and offset it to the inside or outside of
the digitized outline. An extra line of stitching can be added if you need to
trim the appliqu fabric in position. If the fabric has been pre-cut, this
cutting line is not needed.

To adjust cover stitch settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Auto Appliqu icon.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

442

The Object Properties > Special dialog opens.

Adjust cover
stitch settings

In the Cover panel, adjust the cover stitch settings.

 Width: enter the width of the Satin column.


 Inside/Outside: offset value as a percentagethe sum of both
equals 100%.

inside: 10% outside: 90%

inside: 90% outside: 10%

Select an appliqu cutting method.

 Pre-Cut: no cutting line.


 Trim in Place: creates a cutting line.

Select cutting
method

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

443

Tip A cutting line is only generated if Trim in Place is selected. Place


the fabric patch after the placement line has been stitched, then trim
after the cutting line has been stitched.
4

Click Apply.
Tip Ungroup the auto-appliqu object, then Select All and generate the
stitches. You now have a guide stitch, cutting line, tack down and cover
stitch that are separate objects. This allows you to edit them separately
or resequence by color. This technique is useful when you have multiple
auto-appliqu objects in the same design.

Creating partial cover appliqu objects


Right-click Auto Appliqu (Input toolbar) to digitize appliqu objects. Select
Partial Appliqu (Stitch menu) to create appliqu objects with partial cover
stitching.
You can create appliqu objects with partial cover
stitching to create an overlapping effect without
doubling-up borders.
Tip Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in
cutting out fabric pieces. Each appliqu pattern
piece is numbered according to the stitching
sequence. See Printing appliqu patterns for
details.

To create partial cover appliqu objects


1

ES 2006

Digitize appliqu shapes in the same way you digitize with Auto
Appliqu.

Chapter 19

Specialized Digitizing Techniques

444

Note If the appliqu has holes, digitize the shape in the same way as
Complex Fill with Holes so that the software can recognize the holes.

Select the appliqu shapes in the group and select Stitch > Partial
Appliqu.

partial cover

unstitched part of
boundary

Note The cover stitches are generated in a clockwise direction between


the start and end points, leaving the rest of the boundary unstitched.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

445

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

ES Designer provides special tools to


create textured effects from needle
penetrations. Use Stipple Run for
special stippled effects. Apply offset
fractions and partition lines to Tatami
fills to create split-line patterns.
Alternatively, apply Program Split or
Flexi Split to create decorative fills from
pre-defined patterns of needle
penetrations. Select from the library or
create your own. With User-Defined
Split, create your own split lines when
you want to add detail to filled objects.
This section describes how to apply
textures to fills, and how to adjust their settings to get the results you want.
Details of Tatami offsets and partition lines are explained, as well as how to
create textures with Program Split and Flexi Split. Adding details with
User-Defined Split is also covered.

Creating textures with stippling


Use Stipple Run (Generate toolbar) for special stippled effects.
Stippling is a method for creating textured fills of run stitching which
meanders more or less randomly within a border. It can be applied to closed
objects with a single stitch angle. You can control stitch density in Stipple

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

446

objects by adjusting stitch length and loop spacing. See Corresponding


object and stitch types for details.

Note When creating Stipple objects, you need to preset the stitch values.
You can, however, adjust the stitch settings of the generated Run object via
the Object Properties dialog.

To create a texture with stippling


1

Create a closed curve object of some kind and select it.

Click the Stipple icon.


The Stipple dialog opens.

Adjust stitch
settings

Choose whether to
replace original
object

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

447

Adjust the Stitch Length as required.

Stitch length: 0.25 mm

Min stitch length: 0.4 mm


Chord Gap: 0.03 mm

Min stitch length: 0.7 mm


Chord Gap: 0.05 mm

Adjust the Loop Spacing as required.

Loop Spacing: 1.0 mm

ES 2006

Stitch Length: 1.5 mm

Adjust Minimum Stitch Length and Chord Gap as required.

Min stitch length: 0.1 mm


Chord Gap: 0.01 mm

Stitch Length: 0.75 mm

Loop Spacing: 2.0 mm

Loop Spacing: 3.0 mm

Choose whether to preserve the original object or replace it with the


generated stipple object.

Click OK.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

448

Tip You can change run stitch settings of stipple objects in the Object
Properties dialog. You can even change run stitch typee.g. Triple Run,
Stemstitch, Backstitch, etc.

Stipple with Stemstitch

Stipple with Satin

Stipple with Backstitch

Creating textures with Tatami offsets


Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply to new or selected objects.
Right-click to adjust settings.
With Tatami fills you can specify how each row is offset in order to create
patterns formed by needle penetrations. You do this by adjusting either
offset fractions or partition lines. With only two offsets available, the number
of patterns is limited, but even with small offsets, visible lines are produced.
Partition lines, with up to eight offsets, can create more patterns. Using a
random factor you can eliminate patterns formed by regular needle
penetrations and distribute stitches randomly inside the shape.

Tatami Offset

Partition Lines

Random Factor

Tip Auto Split can be used to create special textures in Satin stitches as an
alternative to Tatami fill. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split for
details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

449

Setting Tatami offset fractions


Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami offset fractions.
The Tatami offset default settings are designed to create a needle
penetration pattern or texture in the stitched embroidery that is uniformly
flat and smooth. The texture is like a woven Tatami mat without obvious split
lines. By manipulating offset fractions, you can create textured fills where
the stitch penetrations are more clearly visible.

default offset values

textured fill

stitch penetrations visible

To control the patterns created by needle penetrations you set offset


fractions for both forward and backward rows. Offsets for each row are
defined as fractions of stitch lengthe.g. 0.3 = 30%.
Tip By adjusting the offsets, you can also improve the quality of turning
Tatami where the pattern may be disturbed by non-parallel stitches.
Changing the offsets can reduce this interference.

To set Tatami offset fractions


1

Right-click the Tatami icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Select Offset Fraction


Enter offset fraction values

ES 2006

Select the Offset Fraction option.

In the A: and B: fields, enter the offset fraction values you require.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

450

Different combinations of offset settings create different effects.

A=0.00, B=0.00

A=0.50, B=0.50

A=0.25, B=0.25

A=0.50, B=0.25

A=0.30, B=0.60

A=0.40, B=0.00

 Even stitching: set both fields to 0.25.


 Strong horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.00 or 1.00. The
distance between each line of needle penetrations is the stitch
length.

 Light horizontal lines: set both fields to 0.5. Lines are produced at
half stitch-length intervals.

offset: A=0.3, B=0.6


stitch length: 4 mm

offset: A=0.3, B=0.6


stitch length: 3 mm

offset: A=0.3, B=0.6


stitch length: 2 mm

 Diagonal lines: set both fields to any value other than 0.00, 0.50
and 1.00. Diagonal lines are less noticeable than horizontal or
vertical lines. Vary both values to change the angle of the lines and
the distance between them.

 Other: set one field to 0.00, and experiment with the other values
to place the needle penetrations on the forward and backward rows
close to each other, but with different effects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

451

Note If A-B offsets add up to 1.0, the lines will be horizontal. If the sum
is less than 1.0, the lines will slope down, more and they slope up. The
mirror image of A=0.3 and B=0.6 is A=0.7 and B=0.4. That is, the
mirror of A and B is 1.0-A and 1.0-B.

A=0.50, B=0.50

A=0.30, B=0.60

A=0.70, B=0.40

Click Apply.

Applying Tatami partition lines


Use Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami partition lines.
The Partition Line feature provides an alternative method for offsetting
needle penetrations in Tatami fills. Two parameters can be setSequence
and Angle.

Setting the sequence


Partition Line allows you to specify up to eight Tatami offsets. Each stitch
length is split into knots numbered anywhere from 0 up to 7. For example,

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

452

a typical partition sequence number might be 20143. This translates to the


following pattern.
stitch length
knot 2
row 1
knot 0

knot 0

row 2
knot 1

row 3

knot 4

row 4

knot 3

row 5

In this partition sequence (20143), there are five rows of stitches indicated
by the five digits. The stitch length is also divided into five knots numbered
0 to 4. (In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots
are determined by the number of digits in the sequence number.)
The first digit in the sequence, 2, is the knot number at which the needle
penetration will occur in the first row. The second digit, 0, is the knot
assigned to the second row. And so on. Thus, each row in a partition
sequence is assigned a digit which represents a particular knot.
Note Because Partition Line allows you to specify only up to eight Tatami
offsets (0 to 7), the software ignores digits 8 and 9 and nothing appears in
the entry field.

Setting the angle


If you imagine lines drawn through the rows and partition knots, they form
a grid, as seen above. You can skew the grid formed by the partition knots
to further vary the needle penetrations. For example, the partition sequence
20143 at a 45 angle produces the following stitch pattern:
row 1
row 2
row 3
row 4
row 5

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

453

To apply partition lines


1

Right-click the Tatami icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Select Partition Line


Enter partition sequence
and grid angle

Select the Partition Line option.

In the Sequence field, enter the partition sequence number.


In any pattern, both the number of rows and the number of knots are
determined by the number of digits in the sequence number. See Setting
the sequence for details.

Sequence: 11

Sequence: 012

Sequence: 01

In the Angle field, enter the grid angle you require. See Setting the
angle for details.
Sequence: 11
Angle: 135

Sequence: 11
Angle: 45

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

454

Applying random factors


Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply random factors and
eliminate split line patterns.
Using a random factor you can eliminate the split line patterns formed by
regular needle penetrations and distribute the stitches randomly inside the
shape. This can create interesting mottled effects.
Random factor: 50%

Random factor: 0%

To apply random factors


1

Right-click the Tatami icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Enter random factor

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

455

In the Random field, specify a random factor between 0% and 100%.

random factor: 10%


random factor: 50%
offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25 offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25

random factor: 100%


offset fraction A: 0.25, B: 0.25

Tip A value of around 50% generally gives good results.


3

Click Apply.

Creating textures with program splits


Use Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to create decorative fill stitches
where needle penetrations form a tiled pattern. Right-click to adjust settings.
Program Split is a decorative fill stitch in which the needle penetrations form
a tiled pattern. Select a pre-defined pattern or create your own.

Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.

Applying Program Split


Click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or
selected objects.
You can apply Program Split to a wide variety of objects. The current
Program Split values are set in the Object Properties > Fills dialog. You
can adjust these either before or after applying the effect. See also
Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects.

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

456

To apply Program Split

 Click the Program Split icon.


Program Split stitching is applied to new or selected objects, based on
the current Program Split settings.

Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the
Program Split effect.

Selecting and sizing program split patterns


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to select patterns.
You can select a wide variety of program split patterns from the Object
Properties dialog. Select the pattern either before or after digitizing the
object. Set the exact program split pattern size in the Object Properties
dialog.

Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Program Split Samples.

To select program split patterns


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Program Split icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

457

The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

pattern preview
Click to expand
pattern list

Click to select pattern

Select pattern
Enter pattern width
and height

Select a pattern from the dropdown list.


Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for
TrueView representations of patterns and select one.

In the Size X field, enter the required width of each fill pattern.

In the Size Y field, enter the required height of each fill pattern.

default values

Size X and Size Y


decreased

Size X increased

Click Apply.

Selecting Combination Split options


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to access Combination Split
options.
Standard program split consists of a Satin foreground and backgroundi.e.
Satin-in-Satin. In effect it is a Satin stitch with a complicated user-defined
split. If the patterns do not overlap you may get jump stitches occurring in
the background. In this case, you can select from different combinations of
Satin and Tatami stitches. There are two possible
combinationsSatin-in-Tatami and Tatami-in-Tatami. Tatami in

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

458

combination with Satin also offers a different, flatter look to standard


Satin-in-Satin.

Satin-in-Satin

Satin-in-Tatami

Tatami-in-Tatami

To select Combination Split options


1

Right-click the Program Split icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

Satin-in-Satin

Tatami-in-Tatami
Satin-in-Tatami

In the Combination Split panel, click the icon you require.

 Satin-in-Satin: The needle penetrates the fabric only where the


patterns intersect the stitch rows. This is the standard program split
stitch type, which produces the smallest number of stitches.

 Satin-in-Tatami: The foreground of the pattern uses Satin


stitching, while the background is filled with Tatami. Use this option
to avoid long stitches when the patterns are small but the column
and row spacings are wide.

 Tatami-in-Tatami: Both foreground and background use Tatami.


Select this option for large objects and patterns to avoid long
stitches.

Satin-in-Satin

ES 2006

Satin-in-Tatami

Tatami-in-Tatami

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

459

Adjusting column and row spacing settings


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to access column and row
spacing settings.
Set the exact row and column spacing in program split objects. Column and
row spacing settings determine the distance between grid lines. Patterns are
placed at intersection pointsthe center of each pattern coincides with an
intersection.

default spacing values

column spacing increased

row spacing decreased

The initial settings define a simple grid, where the spacing equals the
dimensions of the pattern. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and
rows are perpendicular.
Note Spacing is measured from the start of each pattern. Thus, to define
a new spacing setting, add the distance you require between patterns to the
original setting. Reducing it will cause the patterns to overlap.

To adjust column and row spacing settings


1

Right-click the Program Split icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

Set column spacing


and offset values

Set row spacing and


offset values

In the Column panel, set the spacing and offset settings for columns in
the pattern grid.

 Spacing: the distance between each vertical column of patterns.

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

460

 Offset: the distance by which to offset patterns in each column.


3

In the Row panel, set the spacing and offset settings for rows in the
same way as for columns.

default spacing values

column spacing increased

row spacing decreased

Click Apply.

Adjusting program split stitch settings


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust stitch settings.
Specify the stitch length, minimum stitch length and spacing settings for
program split objects, in the same way as for other fill stitch types.

To adjust program split stitch settings


1

Right-click the Program Split icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.
Adjust stitch spacing, length
and minimum length

In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required spacing.


For Tatami this is the distance between two forward rows of stitches, for
Satin, the distance between each forward stitch.

In the Length field, enter the stitch length.


This is the maximum stitch length to be generated in the fill.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

461

In the Min Len field, enter the length of the shortest stitch to be
generated.

default spacing values

stitch spacing increased

stitch spacing decreased

Click Apply.

Adjusting program split offset settings


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust row and column
offset settings.
With all three program split combinationsSatin-in-Satin,
Satin-in-Tatami and Tatami-in-Tatamiyou can vary the pattern by
applying offset settings to rows and/or columns. Using Tatami in
combination with Satin offers a different, flatter look to standard
Satin-in-Satin. With these combinations, you can also provide background
texture with Tatami stitch offsets.

Column and row offsets


The column and row offsets determine the angle of the grid lines by shifting
rows and/or columns relative to each other. If both offsets are set to 0, the
grid lines are perfectly vertical and horizontal. As a rule, it only makes sense
to use values between 0 and half the pattern size. For example, if the
pattern is 8 mm, select row and column offsets between 0 mm and 4 mm.

column and row offset: 0

row offset: 3

column offset: 3

column and row offset: 3

Tatami stitch offsets


When using Tatami stitch in the program split combinations Satin-in-Tatami
or Tatami-in-Tatami, you can also control Tatami stitch offsets. In effect,

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

462

Tatami stitch becomes the background pattern with the program split
superimposed. Tatami is mainly used to avoid long stitches, so it should not
have a distinct appearance which may obscure the program split pattern.
Therefore, typical offsets are in the range 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm. See also
Creating textures with Tatami offsets.

offset A: 0.25

offset A: 0

offset A: 0.4

offset A: 0.75

To adjust program split offset settings


1

Right-click the Program Split icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

Enter column
offset

Enter stitch
offset

Enter row offset

Enter an offset for each column of the pattern in the Column > Offset
field.

column offset: 1.00

column offset: 2.50

column offset: 4.00

Tip As a rule, it only makes sense to use values between 0 and half the
pattern size. For example, if the pattern is 8 mm, select row and column
offsets between 0 mm and 4 mm.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

463

Enter an offset for each row of the pattern in the Row > Offset field.

row offset: 1.00

row offset: 2.50

row offset: 4.00

Enter a stitch offset in the Stitch > Offset A field.


This offset controls where the needle penetrations line up for each row
of stitching.

offset A: 0.00

offset A: 0.25

offset A: 0.50

Click Apply.

Applying program split random factors


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust random factor
setting.
You can eliminate unwanted patterns and distribute stitches evenly within a
shape using a random factor. Apply random factors to program splits that
use combinations of Satin-in-Tatami or Tatami-in-Tatami.
Note The random factor does not affect the deliberate needle penetrations
that form the pattern.

To apply program split random factors


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Program Split icon.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

464

The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

Enter random factor value

Enter a value in the Random fieldspecify a factor between 0% and


100%.

random factor: 0%

random factor: 25%

random factor: 90%

Tip Values of around 50% generally give good results.


3

Click Apply.

Laying out program split patterns on-screen


Right-click Program Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust layout options.
You lay out program splits on-screen in a similar way to Motif Fills by using
guide patterns to scale, space, transform and offset the entire pattern fill.
There are three blue guide patterns. Other sample patterns appear in
yellow. Each guide pattern lets you change different elements of the layout.
When you change a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly.
See also Laying out motif fills on-screen.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

465

Tip Generally you define the layout of the fill before digitizing the object. If
it is important to align the patterns with the object boundary, digitize the
object using the current settings, and change the layout afterwards.

To lay out program split patterns on-screen


1

Right-click the Program Split icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

Select pattern
Click to change
pattern layout

Select a pattern from the dropdown list.


Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for
TrueView representations of patterns and select one.

Click Layout.
Sample and guide patterns appear in the design window. When you
change a guide pattern, all patterns in the fill change accordingly.
Use top guide pattern to change row
spacing, row offset, and to scale patterns
Use middle guide pattern to
move, rotate, skew, and
scale patterns

Use side guide pattern to


change column spacing, and to
scale patterns

Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide pattern.


4

Adjust the guide patterns to achieve the effect you require.

 Move patterns by selecting the middle guide pattern and dragging it


to a new position.

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

466

 Scale patterns by selecting a guide pattern and resizing it using the


selection handles.
Scale
proportionally

Scale
horizontally

Drag the
pattern

Scale vertically

 Rotate patterns by clicking the middle guide twice to display the


rotation handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.

 Skew patterns by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the
skew handles.

rotate
anchor

skew

 Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging it


left or right.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

467

 Change column offset by selecting the side guide and dragging it up


or down.

Change column
spacing

Change
offset

 Change row spacing and offsets in the same way as columns.

Change row
spacing

Change
offset

Press Esc to finish.


The size and layout settings you select become the current Program Split
settings.
Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility. See
Reverting to factory settings for details. Alternatively, enter the values
manually in the Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog and
click Save. See Program Split Samples for details.

ES 2006

Digitize the object outline as you normally would.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

468

Note Digitize the stitch angle carefully when creating objects filled with
program split. The needle penetrations are placed where the lines of the
pattern intersect the stitch rows. If the rows are parallel with the lines
of the pattern, they will rarely intersect, and the pattern may not be
visible. A 45 stitch angle is suitable for most patterns.

Making program split patterns


Make your own patterns to use in program split fills. Create patterns from
the outlines of embroidery objects or from drawing objects.
Note Patterns you create can also be used for Flexi Split effects.

To make program split patterns


1

Select the object (or objects) you want to use for the pattern.

Select Special > Make Program Split.


The Make Program Split dialog opens.

Enter pattern
name

A-My Program Split

Enter a name in the Make Program Split dialog.


You are prompted with a confirmation message.

Click OK.
The new pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

469

Editing program split patterns


Editing a pattern changes the actual pattern, not just the object layout. See
also Laying out program split patterns on-screen.

To edit program split patterns


1

Right-click the Program Split icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Program Split dialog opens.

Select pattern
Click to edit pattern

Select a pattern and click Edit.

Edit pattern

The pattern appears in the design window.


Tip Press Shift+0 to zoom in on the pattern.
3

Scale, transform or reshape the pattern as required.

 See Arranging and Transforming Objects for details.


 See Converting and Reshaping Objects for details.
4

Select Special > Make Program Split with the pattern selected.
The Make program Split dialog opens.

Enter pattern
name

ES 2006

A-My New Program Split

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

470

Enter a name for the pattern in the Make Program Split dialog.

 To create a pattern based on the old one, enter a new name.


 To overwrite the original pattern, enter the name of the original.
6

Click OK.
The pattern is automatically selected in the Pattern list.

Creating textures with Flexi Split


Flexi Split is a decorative effect where one or more
lines of a program split pattern are used in the
object fill. The pattern follows the stitch angle and
may be scaled to fit the width of the object. There
are four different Flexi Split effects. Use the existing
patterns for Flexi Split or create your own. See also
Making program split patterns.

Applying Flexi Split


Use Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply a decorative effect to new or
selected objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
You can apply Flexi Split to a wide variety of object and stitch types. It is
intended for use with objects with turning stitches or constantly changing
column width. You can adjust Flexi Split values either before or after
applying the effect. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and
effects.

To apply Flexi Split

 Select an object and click the Flexi Split icon.


The effect is applied based on the current Flexi Split settings.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

471

You can also activate the effect with no objects selected. It then applies
to all newly created objects.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to see the
effect of Flexi Split.

Selecting Flexi Split patterns and options


Right-click Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to select patterns and options.
You select Flexi Split patterns and options from the Object Properties >
Flexi Split dialog.

To select Flexi Split patterns and options


1

Right-click the Flexi Split icon.


The Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog opens.

Pattern preview
Select Flexi Split
Click to expand
pattern list

Click to select pattern

Select pattern

Select option

ES 2006

Select the Flexi Split checkbox.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

472

Select a pattern from the dropdown list.


Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for
TrueView representations of patterns and select one.

Select one of four Flexi Split options.

Adjust size and spacing settings as required. See Adjusting Flexi Split
settings for details.

Click Apply.

Adjusting Flexi Split settings


Right-click Flexi Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
You can adjust Flexi Split settings to vary size, shape indent, spacing and
pattern offsets.

To adjust Flexi Split settings


1

Right-click the Flexi Split icon.


The Object Properties > Flexi Split dialog opens.
Select Flexi Split
Select pattern

Select Flexi
Split option

Enter
dimensions of
largest pattern
Enter distance
between first pattern
and first stitch line
Enter spacing
and offsets

ES 2006

Select the Flexi Split checkbox.

Select a pattern from the dropdown list.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

473

Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the pattern list for
TrueView representations of patterns and select one. See also Selecting
Flexi Split patterns and options.
4

In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter the dimensions of the largest
pattern in the effect.

In the Indent field, enter the distance between the first pattern and the
first stitch line.

default indent values

Indent: 2 mm

Indent: 4 mm

In the Column panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required:

 Spacing: the distance between each column of patterns in the


effect.

 Offset: the distance by which each pattern repeat is offset.

default column values

column spacing
decreased

column offset value


changed

Note If you selected an option that uses more than one row of patterns,
the fields in the Row panel are available.
7

In the Row panel, enter spacing and offset settings as required.

default column and row


values

ES 2006

column and row spacing


decreased

row offset value changed

Click Apply.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

474

Creating user-defined splits


User-Defined Split lets you add detail to filled
objects by digitizing lines of needle
penetrations called split lines. Split lines are
stored as object properties. They are
preserved when stitches are regenerated
even if you apply a different stitch type.
Note Split lines are not part of the object outline and cannot be reshaped
with the rest of the object.

Creating new objects with User-Defined Split


Use User-Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to create your own split line
effects. Right-click to adjust settings.
Select User-Defined Split before digitizing to add split lines to new objects.
As you digitize, you are prompted to enter the split lines. You digitize them
in the same way as Run objects. You can define multiple splits if required.

Tip Satin is the most suitable stitch type for User-Defined Split as there are
no initial needle penetrations inside the shape.

To create new objects with User-Defined Split

ES 2006

Select a fill input method and stitch type.

Click the User-Defined Split icon.

Digitize the object boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle as
you normally would, following the prompts in the Prompt Line.

Digitize a split line over the object when prompted, then press Enter.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

475

Repeat this step for additional split lines.

Digitize object outline

Digitize split line

Generate stitches

Tip For best results, digitize split lines approximately perpendicular to


the stitch angle.
5

Press Enter.

Applying User-Defined Split to selected objects


Use User-Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to selected
objects. Right-click to adjust settings.
Add split lines to an existing object by
digitizing the required line over it, then
converting it to a split line. Digitize the
split line using an input methode.g.
Runor a vector drawing tool.

To apply User-Defined Split to selected objects


1

Select an input method or drawing tool to digitize the split line.


Tip Use any input methodincluding fill input methodsas only the
outlines are used to create the split lines.

ES 2006

Digitize a split line on top of the filled object, using left and right-clicks
to enter reference points, and press Enter.

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

476

To create more than one split line, repeat this step.


Tip To use existing objects to create split lines, simply move the object
on top of the filled object you are creating lines for.
3

Select the split line object (or objects).

Select Special > Make Lines For > User Defined Split.

Press Delete to remove the split line object (or objects).

Select the filled object on which you digitized split lines.

Click the User Defined Split icon.

Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the
effect.

Splitting alternate lines


Right-click User-Defined Split (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply split lines.
The User-Defined Split feature sometimes creates a split line which is too
hard for certain applications such as Schiffli design work. The Split
Alternate Stitch Lines setting softens the split line.

To split alternate lines


1

Select a user-defined split object.


user-defined
split

Right-click the User Defined Split icon.


The Object Properties > Decorative dialog opens.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

477

Select the Split Alternate Stitch Lines checkbox.

Select to soften split line

Click Apply.
Split lines are softened.
split lines
applied

ES 2006

Chapter 20

Textured Fills

478

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

ES Designer provides many


artistic effects and stitch types to
create textured and contoured fill
stitching.
Use Jagged Edge to create rough
edges, shading effects, or imitate
fur and other fluffy textures.
Apply Trapunto effect to move
underlying travel runs to the edges
of an object so that they cant be
seen through open stitching.
Accordion Spacing varies stitch
spacing between dense and open
fill, producing shading and color
effects which are difficult to
achieve manually. The Color Blending effect creates interesting
perspective, shading and color effects by blending two colored layers. The
colors are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense
and open fill.
Create interesting chiaroscuro effects with Contour. Choose between
Standard and Spiral. For another type of curved effect, use Florentine Effect
to curve needle penetrations along a digitized line. Liquid Effect allows you
to enter twin guidelines.
This section describes how to create artistic effects with Jagged Edge,
Accordion Spacing, and Color Blending, and how to adjust their settings to
get the results you want. Creating contoured stitch effects with the Contour
feature is also covered, as well as how to create curved fills with Florentine
Effect and Liquid Effect.
Tip ES Designer also provides special tools to create patterns from needle
penetrations. These include Program Split, User Defined Split and Flexi
Split. See Textured Fills for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

479

Creating jagged edges


Use Jagged Edge to create rough edges, shading effects, or imitate fur and
other fluffy textures. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods,
and effects.

Note Jagged Edge does not work with Contour stitch.

Applying Jagged Edge


Click Jagged Edge (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or
selected objects.
Apply Jagged Edge to create a rough edge along one or more sides of an
object. Change settings before or after applying the effect. See Adjusting
Jagged Edge settings for details.

To apply Jagged Edge

 Click the Jagged Edge icon.


The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current
Jagged Edge settings.

side 1 jagged

side 2 jagged

both sides jagged

Tip For objects filled with Tatami, use Diagonal backstitch for the best
results. See Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

480

Adjusting Jagged Edge settings


Right-click Jagged Edge (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Jagged Edge
settings.
Adjust Jagged Edge settings to change the side of the object to which the
effect is applied. You can also set the range within which stitches will fall.

To adjust Jagged Edge settings


1

Right-click the Jagged Edge icon.


The Object Properties > Decorative dialog opens.

Select Jagged
Edge
Adjust Jagged
Edge settings

Select the Jagged checkbox.

Select the side to apply the effect toSide 1, Side 2, or Both Sides.

Side 2

ES 2006

Both Sides

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Side 1

481

In the Roughness field, enter a value between 1 and 10 to indicate the


required degree of jaggedness. The larger the value, the more variation
in the stitch length.

Roughness: 1
Range: 5

Roughness: 5
Range: 5

In the Range field, enter the margin within which you want the stitches
to fall.
Range: 1.5

Roughness: 10
Range: 5

Range: 4

Click Apply.

Creating open stitching with Trapunto


Use Trapunto (Stitch Types toolbar) to force underlying travel runs to the
edges of a selected object. Right-click to adjust Trapunto settings.
Trapunto traditionally refers to quilting in which a design is outlined with
two or more rows of running stitches and then padded from the underside
to achieve a raised effect. For a consistent puffed look, rows need to be
separated with fixed spacing. In ES Designer, the Trapunto effect is
typically used in combination with open stitching to fill backgrounds or for

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

482

shading effects where the absence of travels under the fill is more important
than exact spacing.

Complex Fill / Tatami


object without
Trapunto effect

Complex Fill / Tatami


object with Trapunto
effect

The Trapunto effect automatically moves underlying travel runs to the edges
of an object so they cant be seen. It also applies consistent row spacing and
prevents segments from overlapping, regardless of the Overlapping Rows
setting. Without it, travel runs, spacing variations and overlapping rows
between segments are visible and can spoil the effect of open stitching.
Another major use of Trapunto is with color blending which is created by a
combination of Trapunto and Accordion Spacing. Accordion Spacing extends
the usefulness of Trapunto by providing a simple way to produce variation
in a filled pattern and the illusion of depth in a design. Trapunto and
Accordion Spacing can also be combined with Liquid and Florentine effects
to produce curved color blending. See also Creating color blending effects
and Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect.
Note The Trapunto feature is only available with Complex Fill objects using
Tatami stitching.

To create open stitching with Trapunto


1

With or without a Complex Fill object selected, right-click the Tatami


icon.
The Object Properties > Fills > Tatami dialog opens.

Adjust stitch spacing

ES 2006

In the Stitch Spacing field, enter the required stitch spacing.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

483

The larger the value, the more open the spacing.


3

Click Apply.

With the Complex Fill object selected, click the Trapunto icon.
Travel runs and overlapping rows are removed and consistent row
spacing applied.

Spacing: 5 mm

Spacing: 3 mm

Note Trapunto effect overrides whatever Tatami Backstitch settings


currently apply. See also Selecting a Tatami backstitch.

Creating accordion spacing effects


Use Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to vary stitch spacing between
dense and open fill. Right-click to adjust settings.
Accordion Spacing varies the stitch spacing between dense and open fill,
producing shading and color effects which are difficult to achieve manually.
Eight different Accordion Spacing effects are available. When you use
Accordion Spacing, the current spacing settingsincluding Auto Spacing
and Fractional Spacingare ignored. However, other stitch effects will still
apply. See also Corresponding stitch types, input methods, and effects.

Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges of an
object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See Creating open
stitching with Trapunto for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

484

Applying Accordion Spacing


Click Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply the effect to new or
selected objects.
Use Accordion Spacing to create perspective effects and shading.
maximum
spacing

minimum
spacing

You can apply it using the current settings. These can be adjusted and the
type of Accordion Spacing changed either before or after you apply it.
Tip You cannot use Accordion Spacing with Contour stitch or Motif Fill.
However, you can also use Accordion Spacing over standard Tatami to create
interesting shading effects.

To apply Accordion Spacing

 Click the Accordion Spacing icon.


The effect is applied to new or selected objects, based on the current
Accordion Spacing settings.

Adjusting Accordion Spacing settings


Right-click Accordion Spacing (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
Use the Object Properties dialog to select the Accordion Spacing type and
set the minimum and maximum spacings.
Tip Because of the open stitch, Accordion Spacing is best used without
Auto Underlay.

To adjust Accordion Spacing settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Accordion Spacing icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

485

The Object Properties > Accordion dialog opens.

Select Accordion Spacing

Select spacing effect

Adjust spacing settings

Select the Accordion Spacing checkbox.

In the Profile panel, click an Accordion Spacing icon.

In the Values panel, enter new spacing values as required.

 Maximum Spacing: the largest spacing value to allow.

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

486

 Minimum Spacing: the smallest spacing value to allow.

max spacing: 3.5 mm

max spacing: 6 mm

min spacing: 1 mm

min spacing: 3 mm

Tip Apply Trapunto effect to force underlying travel runs to the edges
of an object so that they cant be seen through open stitching. See
Creating open stitching with Trapunto for details.
5

Click Apply.

Creating color blending effects


From sunsets to wood grains, the Color Blending effect creates interesting
perspective, shading and color effects by blending colored layers. Two colors
are merged smoothly from one to another using a mixture of dense and
open fill. The effect is created by duplicating the object, then applying
Accordion Spacing and Trapunto to both layers which are then grouped.
There are four Color Blending effectslinear stitch spacing, exponential
spacing, convex or concave spacing, and wavy spacing.

Color Blending can be applied to ungrouped objects filled with Satin, Tatami,
Zigzag, E Stitch, or Program Split stitch, or objects outlined with Satin or
E Stitch.

Applying Color Blending


Click Color Blending (Generate toolbar) to apply the effect to selected
objects.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

487

Use the Color Blending effect to create color blends, perspective effects
and shading. Select which type of Color Blending to use, and set the spacing
settings in the Color Blending dialog.

maximum
spacing

minimum
spacing

Note Color Blending cannot be applied to grouped objects. Ungroup, select


the object, then apply Color Blending.

To apply Color Blending


1

Select the object.

Click the Color Blending icon.


The Color Blending dialog opens.

Select first
Spacing effect
Select first color
Select first
spacing

Select second
Spacing effect
Select second color
Select second
spacing

ES 2006

In the Top Layer panel, select a profile and color, and set spacing
values.

Repeat this step with the Bottom Layer panel.

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

488

Click OK.

Top and Bottom Layer


Linear Profile

Top and Bottom Layer


Exponential Profile

Top and Bottom Layer


Convex Profile

Top and Bottom Layer


Wave Profile

Tip To prevent underlay stitching from showing through, deselect Auto


Underlay. Trapunto effect is applied by default. See also Strengthening
and stabilizing with automatic underlays and Creating open stitching
with Trapunto.

Adjusting Color Blending settings


Objects with Color Blending can be resized, rotated and skewed without
losing the color blending effect. However, reshaping the object is not
recommended. Editing a Color Blending object is limited. The two objects
must first be ungrouped and the separate objects edited according to
Accordion Spacing settings such as color, profile, and spacing. See
Creating accordion spacing effects for details.

To adjust Color Blending settings

ES 2006

Select the blended object and ungroup it.

Select one of the objects and change the color as required.

Double-click the object to open the Object Properties dialog.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

489

Click the FX button and select the Accordion tab.

Select spacing effect

Adjust spacing settings

Select a profile and adjust spacing settings as required.

Click Apply.

Repeat the process for the second object and re-group the objects.

Creating contoured stitch effects


Use Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved fills where stitches follow
the contours of the shape. Right-click to adjust Contour settings.
Contour is a curved fill stitch typestitches follow the contours of a shape,
creating a curved, light and shade effect. It only works on columnar shapes.
There are two typesStandard and Spiralboth of which can be applied
to a variety of objects. See also Corresponding object and stitch types.

Standard Contour
Standard Contour creates rows of stitches across the shape, perpendicular
to the digitized stitch angle. The number of stitch lines is constant, so the

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

490

stitching is denser where the shape is narrower, and more open where the
shape is wider.

Standard Contour

Spiral Contour
Spiral Contour creates a single, continuous line of stitching that spirals
around to fill the shape. Typically, it is used for rings and borders, but it is
also suitable for other closed shapes.

Spiral Contour

circle with Spiral Contour


created from a ring

Spiral Contour can only be used with closed shapes with two outlines such
as rings. If a shape is not properly closed, it will be filled with Standard
Contour instead. You cannot use Spiral Contour with Circle objects.
Tip To fill a solid shape with Spiral Contour, create a closed object with a
very small hole at the center. For example, to create a circle filled with Spiral
Contour, digitize a thick ring with a very small inner boundary.

Applying Contour stitch to fills


Click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Contour stitch to new or
selected objects.
Apply Contour to filled objects in the same way as other stitch typesby
selecting it from the toolbar either before or after digitizing.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

491

To apply Contour stitch to fills

 Click the Contour icon.


Contour stitch is applied to selected objects based on the settings in the
Object Properties dialog. See Adjusting Contour stitch settings for
details.
Tip When you digitize shapes with pointed endse.g. leaves,
diamonds, starscut the ends to prevent the stitches from bunching.
2

1
6

Input B
7
8
2

10
9

3
4
Input B

5
6

stitch bunching
at sharp ends

Selecting Contour stitch types


Right-click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to select Contour stitch types.
Apply Standard or Spiral Contour to new or existing objects in a design.

To select Contour stitch types


1

Right-click the Contour icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Contour dialog opens.

Select contour type

Select backstitch type

ES 2006

In the Type panel, click a contour type icon.

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

492

 Standard: lays rows of stitches back and forth along the shape.
 Spiral: fills the shape with a continuous spiral of stitches.
Standard

Spiral

In the Backstitch panel, click a backstitch type icon.

 Standard: creates backstitch rows that are slightly shorter than the
forward rows, reducing small stitches. Suitable for high density fills.

 Borderline: creates parallel backstitch rows to give a smooth,


well-defined edge. Suitable for lower density fills.
Standard

Borderline

Note If the spacing is small, Borderline backstitch will not be applied.


This is to prevent damage to the fabric from the large number of small
stitches that are generated.
4

If required, adjust the Contour stitch settings. See Adjusting Contour


stitch settings for details.

Click Apply.

Adjusting Contour stitch settings


Right-click Contour (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Contour stitch settings.
Set the stitch settings for Contour fills to adjust the stitch length, spacing
and offset fraction.

To adjust Contour stitch settings


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Contour icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

493

The Object Properties > Fills > Contour dialog opens.

Adjust stitch values

Adjust offset setting

Adjust variable
stitch settings

In the Length field, enter an approximate stitch length.


Each stitch is adjusted to distribute the stitches evenly throughout the
shape. See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length for details.
stitch length
3.6 mm

stitch length
1.5 mm

In the Spacing field, enter the maximum spacing value.


This value is used at the widest part of the shape. As the shape narrows,
the spacing decreases. See Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length
for details.
stitch spacing:
3.0 mm

stitch spacing:
1.5 mm

ES 2006

In the Offset Fraction field, enter the required offset value.

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

494

The offset fraction controls the pattern of needle penetrations to achieve


even distribution of stitches and prevent needle penetrations from
forming unwanted lines.

default offset: 0.25 mm,


stitches evenly distributed

In the Vary Stitch Length panel, set the variable stitch length values,
if required. See Setting variable run stitch lengths for details.

Variable Length selected,


stitch values vary

too big offset: 1 mm,


unwanted lines

Variable Length not selected,


stitch values fixed

Click Apply.

Creating curved fills with Florentine Effect


Florentine Effect can be applied to Complex Fill objects to create a flowing
stitch effect along a digitized line. The stitches follow the digitized line but
maintain uniform density and needle penetration patterns. The digitizing
method varies, depending whether you are applying the effect to new or
existing objects. See also Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect.
Note For all other object types, use Standard Contour to achieve curved
stitching.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

495

Creating new objects with Florentine Effect


Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an embroidery object.
Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to create user-defined curved
stitching.
To apply the effect to new Complex Fill objects, select Florentine Effect
before starting.

Tip For best results, use smaller stitch lengthse.g. 4.00 mm or less.

To create a new object with Florentine Effect

ES 2006

Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch.

Click the Florentine Effect icon.

Digitize the boundaries, and entry and exit points of the Complex Fill
object following the prompts.

Digitize the guideline you want the stitches to follow.

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

496

The guideline must intersect both sides of the object, have at least three
points, and must not overlap itself. Curves generally give better results
than sharp corners.

Press Enter.
Tip Use the Reshape Object tool to change the shape of the curve. See
Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects for details.

Applying Florentine Effect to existing objects


Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply curve stitching to
existing objects.
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust control points of the
guideline.
Apply Florentine Effect to existing Complex Fill objects in a design. Then
use the Reshape Object tool to adjust the guideline.

To apply Florentine Effect to existing objects


1

Select an object.
Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill
objects using a suitable stitch type.

ES 2006

Click the Florentine Effect icon.

With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

497

A default guideline with three corner control points appears.

Reshape the guideline by moving, adding, changing or deleting


reference points.

Press Enter.
ES Designer regenerates the stitches along the new curve.
Tip Turn on TrueView or click the Show Needle Points icon to view the
results.

Applying Florentine Effect to multiple objects


Use Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply curve stitching to
multiple objects.
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to adjust control points of the
guideline.
Click Make Properties Current (Styles toolbar) to make the properties of a
selected object current for the design.
Use Apply Current Properties (Styles toolbar) to apply current settings to
selected objects.
You can apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects in a design by copying
the properties of the first object and applying them to other objects.

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

498

To apply Florentine Effect to multiple objects


1

Select an object.
Note The Florentine Effect icon is only available with Complex Fill
objects using a suitable stitch type.

Click the Florentine Effect icon.

With the object still selected, click the Reshape Object icon.
A default guideline with three corner control points appears.

Reshape the guideline so that it overlaps the objects you want to


include.

Press Enter.
ES Designer regenerates the stitches of the first selected object along
the curve.

With the first object selected, click the Make Properties Current icon.
The stitch properties of the first object, including the florentine effect,
now become the current settings. See Making selected object properties
current for details.

Apply the current settings to each of the other objects with the Apply
Current Properties tool. See Applying current settings to existing
objects for details.

Apply current
settings to selected
object

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

499

Tip Turn on TrueView or use the Show Needle Points tool to view the
results.


Adjusting Florentine Effect settings
Right-click Florentine Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
In a Florentine Effect fill, stitch lengths vary to adjust the needle point
pattern to the curve of the digitized line. You can specify how ES Designer
calculates the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum.
The Nominal setting generates roughly the same number of fill stitches as
with normal stitching. The Maximum setting generally produces smoother
curves than Nominal, but the stitch count is higher.
Tip Use Maximum when the curve is tight with respect to the stitch length.

To adjust Florentine Effect settings


1

Right-click the Florentine Effect icon.


The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens.

Select Florentine Effect

Select the Florentine Effect checkbox.

Select the required stitch length calculation option:

 Nominal: the average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch
Length setting.

ES 2006

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

500

 Maximum: the longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.


nominal

maximum

Click Apply.

Creating curved fills with Liquid Effect


Liquid Effect is similar to Florentine Effect except that you enter twin
guidelines for stitches to follow in Complex Fill objects. This means that
stitches at the top of a shape can follow a different guideline to those at the
bottom. The change between the two guidelines is distributed evenly to
produce smooth stitching.

Creating new objects with Liquid Effect


Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an embroidery object.
Use Liquid Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to create curved stitch effects with
two guidelines.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

501

Unlike Florentine Effect, Liquid Effect guidelines are digitized outside the
object, rather than over it. If any part of a guideline crosses the object
boundary, an error message appears.

Tip You can also apply the Liquid Effect to existing objects. To get the
required shapes, select the object and adjust the guidelines using Reshape
Object icon.

To create new objects with Liquid Effect


1

Click the Complex Fill icon and select Tatami stitch.

Click the Liquid Effect icon.


You are prompted to enter the first point of boundary 1 of the object.

Digitize the boundaries, entry and exit points and stitch angle of the
Complex Fill object following the prompts.
Note You are not prompted to digitize the stitch angle.

Digitize the first guideline around the outside of the object.


You must enter at least three reference points.

guideline 1

ES 2006

Press Enter.

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

502

You are prompted to enter the second guideline. Notice that the pointer
has elastic lines attached to it. These lines join each side of the guideline
shape.
6

Digitize the second guideline in the same direction of the first, marking
at least three reference points.
Note The two guidelines must not overlap or intersect the object
outline.

Press Enter.
guideline 2

guideline 1

Tip To modify the guidelines, select the object and then the Reshape
Object icon. Click-and-drag the guidelines into the required shapes, and
press Enter.

Adjusting Liquid Effect settings


Right-click Liquid Effect (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust settings.
As with Florentine Effect fill, you can specify how ES Designer calculates
the stitch length by choosing between Nominal and Maximum.
Tip Use Maximum when the guideline is tight with respect to the stitch
length.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

503

To adjust Liquid Effect settings


1

Right-click the Liquid Effect icon.


The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens.

Select Liquid
Effect

Select the Liquid Effect checkbox.

Select the required stitch length calculation option:

 Nominal: the average length of the fill stitches matches the Stitch
Length setting.

 Maximum: the longest stitch matches the Stitch Length setting.

Nominal

ES 2006

Maximum

Click Apply.

Chapter 21

Artistic Stitch Effects

504

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

Motifs are pre-defined design elements, such as hearts, leaves or border


patterns. They generally consist of one or more simple objects, and are
stored in a special motif set.

With Motif Run and Motif Fill you can use simple motifs such as hearts,
leaves or border patterns to create ornamental runs and textured fills.
Create your own motifs or use the ones provided with the software. Motifs
can be scaled, rotated and mirrored in the same way as other objects. Using
3D Warp with motif fills, you can also create interesting three dimensional
effects.
This section describes how to insert motifs into your design, and how to
rotate, mirror and scale them. It explains how to manage motifs, including
how to create your own motifs and motif sets. It also describes how to
create both motif runs and motif fills, as well as how to apply 3D effects to
motif fills.

Creating motif runs


Motif Run is an input method that creates motif repeats along a digitized
line. You can create decorative outlines using any motif from the selection

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

505

list. You can modify the rotation angle, orientation and scale, and vary the
space between motifs.

Creating Motif Run objects


Use Motif Run (Input toolbar) to create a string of motifs along a digitized line.
Use the Motif Run tool to create a string of motifs along a digitized line. You
can select motifs in the Object Properties dialog before or after digitizing.
You can also adjust scale and spacing settings.
Tip You can also apply Motif Run to other selected run objects such as Run,
Stemstitch, etc. See Converting between run objects for details.

To create a Motif Run object


1

Click the Motif Run icon.

Digitize the line along which you want the motif to appear by entering
reference points.

 Click to add a corner point


 Right-click to add a curve point.
3

When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter.


An outline of the current motif attaches to your cursor.

Resize motif
outline to scale

 To use the original size and orientation of the motif press Enter.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

506

 To scale the motif, move the pointer until the motif is the required
size, click, then press Enter.

 To mirror the motif, right-click then press Enter.

Tip You can combine scaling and mirroring.

Selecting motifs for motif runs


Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select motifs to use with Motif Run.
You can select motifs to use before or after digitizing a motif run. If you use
Motif Run without selecting a motif, a default will be used. To change a
motif after digitizing, use the Object Properties dialog as described here.
See also Selecting and inserting single motifs.

Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To select a motif for motif runs

ES 2006

Select a Motif Run object.

Right-click the Motif Run icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

507

The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens.

Select motif set


Select motif

Select a motif set from the Set list.


There are two pre-defined setsSingle Motifs and Two-Part Motifs.
Two-Part Motifs are more appropriate to motif fills but can be used for
motif runs as well. You can also define your own motif sets. See Creating
motif sets for details.

Select a pattern from the dropdown list.


Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView
representations of motifs and select one.

Motif preview

Click to expand
motif list

Select motif

Click Apply.
The selected Motif Run object is updated according to the motif selected.
Tip Select a motif with no object selected and click Apply to make the
selection current.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

508

Scaling motifs in motif runs to an exact size


Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to scale motifs in Motif Run.
You can set the exact size of motifs in a Motif Run by entering the
dimensions in the Object Properties dialog.
Note You can enter motif dimensions before or after digitizing the object.

To scale motifs in a motif run to an exact size


1

Select a Motif Run object.

Right-click the Motif Run icon.


The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens.

Enter horizontal and


vertical dimensions

In the Size X and Size Y fields, enter horizontal and vertical dimensions
for the motifs.

Original run

Scaled in X

Scaled in Y

Click Apply.
Tip You can also scale motifs as you digitize Motif Run objects. See
Creating Motif Run objects for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

509

Adjusting Motif Run spacing


Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to adjust Motif Run spacing.
Adjust the spacing between each motif in a Motif Run before or after
digitizing. See Saving motifs for details.

Original spacing

Spacing increased

Spacing decreased

To adjust Motif Run spacing


1

Select a Motif Run object.

Right-click the Motif Run icon.


The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens.

Enter distance between


motif repetitions

In the Spacing field, enter the distance between each repetition of the
motif.

spacing

initial spacing

If they do not fit the baseline exactly, ES Designer adjusts the spacing
to make them fit:

 If the space remaining at the end of the baseline is less than half a
motif, the extra space is spread evenly between the motifs.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

510

 If the space is larger than half a motif, ES Designer inserts an extra


motif, and slightly overlaps the motifs to distribute them evenly
along the baseline.
Tip You can reshape the baseline to achieve the exact spacing you
require. See Reshaping Motif Run objects for details.

Keeping or omitting motifs


Right-click Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select whether to keep or omit first
and last motifs.
If you are digitizing adjoining lines with Motif Run, you can omit the last
motif of the current objector the first motif of the next objectto avoid an
overlap where the lines join.

First and last


motifs kept

First motif kept,


last motif omitted

Note You can adjust these settings either before or after digitizing the
object.

To keep or omit motifs

ES 2006

Select a Motif Run object.

Right-click the Motif Run icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

511

The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens.

Choose whether to keep or


omit first and last motifs

Choose whether to keep or omit first and last motifs.

Click Apply.

Reshaping Motif Run objects


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected Motif Run objects.
Reshape Motif Run objects in the same way as you reshape lettering objects.
See also Special Lettering Features.

To reshape Motif Run objects


1

Select a Motif Run object and click the Reshape icon.


Control points appear around the motifs.

Adjust the outline and motif spacings as required:

 Reposition and/or change reshape nodes from corner to curve.


 Add or delete reshape nodes.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

512

 Click-and-drag individual motifs to adjust spacing.


Drag to scale
object height

Select and press


Spacebar to toggle
between corner and
curve reshape nodes

Drag to shift
motif

Drag to scale
object
proportionately
Drag to scale
object width

Right/left-click
to add reshape
node

Adjust the size of the whole object as required:

 Drag the vertical resize handle to scale the height of the object.
 Drag the horizontal resize handle to scale the width of the object.
 Drag the proportional resize handle to scale the object
proportionally.
4

Click the diamond control point of the motif to activate reshape nodes:

 Drag resize handles to scale the motif.


 Drag the skew handle to skew the motif.
 Drag the rotate handle to rotate the motif.

Click to activate
reshape nodes

Drag to resize motif

Drag to
skew motif

Drag to
rotate motif

ES 2006

Press Esc to finish.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

513

Creating motif fills


Motif Fill is a decorative stitch used for filling Complex Fill objects. This
feature repeats motifs in parallel rows to fill the shape. You can select
different motifs for forward and backward rows. You can design the motif
layout on-screen, or by adjusting settings in the Object Properties dialog.

Creating Motif Fill objects


Use Complex Fill (Input toolbar) to create an object to apply Motif Fill to.
Use Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Motif Fill to objects using current
settings. Right-click to change settings.
Digitize Complex Fill objects with Motif Fill or apply it to existing Complex
Fill objects to create decorative fill stitching using current settings. You can
select motifs in the Object Properties dialog before or after digitizing. You
can also adjust scale and spacing settings.

Note The stitch angle has no effect on motif layout.

To create a Motif Fill object

ES 2006

Click the Complex Fill and Motif Fill icons.

Digitize an object.

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

514

As soon as the entry and exit points are entered the Motif Fill stitches
are generated using current settings. See Digitizing complex shapes for
details.
Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object
and selecting a different color. For example, after filling a shape with
circles, you can create a second layer, apply a different color and motif,
and offset it from the first. You can even apply effects such as Globe Out
to the whole motif fill. See also Applying 3D effects to motif fills.

Selecting motifs for motif fills


t

Use Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply Motif Fill to objects using current
settings. Right-click to change settings.
Select from a wide range of motifs in the Object Properties dialog. You can
mix and match different motifs for forward and backward rows, or use the
same motif for each. See also Using two-part motifs in motif fills.

Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To select a motif for motif fills


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Motif Fill icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

515

The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.

Select motif for


forward row

Select motif for


backward row

Select motif set to


select from for
forward row

Select motif set to


select from for
backward row

In the Motif 1 panel, select a motif set to choose from and select a motif
from the dropdown list.
Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView
representations of motifs and select one. See also Selecting motifs for
motif runs.

If you want different motifs for forward and backward rows, select the
Motif 2 checkbox.

In the Motif 2 panel, select the motif to use in the backward row fill
using the same method.
Same motif selected for
forward and backward
rows

Different motif
selected for
backward row

Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See
Scaling motifs to an exact size for details.
5

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

516

Using two-part motifs in motif fills


Click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to select the current motif. Select the
Motif Fill object, and click Properties to change the properties of Motif Fill
objects.
ES Designer provides two pre-defined motif sets. One contains single motifs
for fills which use the same pattern in both forward and backward rows. The
other set is intended for use with two-part motifs which use complementary
patterns for forward and backward rows.

Note For a complete catalog of samples, see Motif Samples.

To use two-part motifs in motif fills


1

Right-click the Motif Fill icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.

Select motif for


forward row

Select complementary
motif for backward row

ES 2006

Select two-part motif


set to select from for
forward row

Select two-part motif


set to select from for
backward row

In the Motif 1 panel, select the two-part motif set and select a motif
from the dropdown list.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

517

Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView
representations of motifs and select one. See also Selecting motifs for
motif runs.
3

Select the Motif 2 checkbox to add a complementary backward row and


again select the two-part motif set from the dropdown list.

In the Motif 2 panel, select a complementary motif to use in the


backward row.
The pre-defined two-part motif set is specially designed to provide
complementary motifs for forward and backward rowse.g. Duet01a
and Duet01b.

Note You can scale Motif 1 and Motif 2 motifs independently. See
Scaling motifs to an exact size for details.
5

Click Apply.

Adjusting Motif Fill spacing and offset settings


Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust the exact row, column
and spacing settings.
You can adjust the exact row, column and spacing settings for motif fills. The
default settings define a simple grid where the spacing equals the motif
dimensions. The row offset is set to 0.00 mm so columns and rows are
perpendicular.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

518

Note Spacing is measured from the start of each motif. So to define new
spacing settings, add a distance between motifs to the original spacing.
Reducing the original setting causes motifs to overlap.

To adjust spacing and offset settings


1

Right-click the Motif Fill icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.

Enter column
spacing

Scale and clip


motifs to fit
shape

Enter row
spacing and
offset

Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for
details.

Enter column spacing in the Column > Spacing field.

Enter row spacing in the Row > Spacing field.

Enter row offset in the Row > Offset field.

offset
changed

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

row spacing
changed

519

Select the Scale motifs to fit grid checkbox to scale motifs to exactly
fit the grid squares.
Scale motifs to
fit grid ON

Scale motifs to
fit grid OFF

Select the Clip motifs to fit shape checkbox to clip motifs that do not
fit the shape.
Clip motifs to fit
shape ON

Clip motifs to fit


shape OFF

Note If more than half a motif is outside the boundary, it will be


omitted.
8

Click Apply.

Scaling motifs to an exact size


Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to scale motifs to an exact size.
You can set the exact size of motifs in a fill. You can also scale Motif 1 and
Motif 2 motifs independently to create special effects.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

520

To scale motifs to an exact size


1

Right-click the Motif Fill icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.

Enter motif width and


height of forward rows

Enter motif width and


height of backward rows

Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for
details.

In both panels, enter the dimensions of motif 1 and 2 for the forward
and backward rows:

 Size X: Enter motif width.


 Size Y: Enter motif height.

Motif 1: default size


Motif 2: default size

Motif 1: size adjusted


Motif 2: default size

Motif 1: default size


Motif 2: size adjusted

Note If you want the same motifs for forward and backward rows,
deselect the Motif 2 checkbox.
4

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

521

Rotating motif fills by an exact amount


t

Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to rotate motifs by an exact


amount.
The rotation angle defines the orientation of the entire motif fill pattern. It
overrides the stitch angle you set when digitizing the shape with Complex
Fill.

To rotate a motif fill by an exact amount


1

Right-click the Motif Fill icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.

Enter rotation
angle

Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for
details.

In the Rotation field, enter the rotation angle of the fill.

Rotation: 0

ES 2006

Rotation: 30

Rotation: 90

Click Apply.

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

522

Laying out motif fills on-screen


Right-click Motif Fill (Stitch Types toolbar) to access layout options.
Lay out motif fills on-screen in a similar way to program splits by using
guide motifs to scale, space, transform and offset the entire motif fill. There
are three blue guide motifs. Other sample motifs appear in yellow. Each
guide motif lets you change a different element of the layout. When you
change a guide motif, all other motifs change accordingly. See also Laying
out program split patterns on-screen.

Motif Fill does not have a column offset since motifs are connected along
each row. Instead you can rotate the layout to achieve a similar effect. See
Rotating motif fills by an exact amount for details.
Tip Generally you define the layout of the motif fill before digitizing the
object. If it is important to align motifs with the object boundary, digitize the
object using current settings, and change the layout afterwards.

To lay out Motif Fills on-screen


1

Right-click the Motif Fill icon.


The Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill dialog opens.

Click to lay out


selected motif

ES 2006

Select a motif set and motif. See Selecting motifs for motif fills for
details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

523

Click Layout.
Sample and guide motifs appear in the design window. When you
change a guide motif, all motifs in the fill change accordingly.
Use top guide motif to change row
spacing, row offset, and to scale motifs
Use middle guide motif to
move, rotate, skew, and
scale motifs

Use side guide motif to change


column spacing, and to scale
motifs

Tip Zoom in to select the correct guide motif.


4

Adjust the guide motifs to achieve the effect you require.

 Move motifs by selecting the middle guide motif and dragging it to a


new position.

 Scale motifs by selecting a guide motif and resizing it using the


selection handles.
Scale
proportionally

Scale
horizontally

Scale
vertically

 Rotate motifs by clicking the middle guide twice to display the


rotation handles. Click a corner handle and drag to rotate.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

524

 Skew motifs by clicking the middle guide twice, then dragging the
skew handles.
rotate
anchor

skew

 Change column spacing by selecting the side guide and dragging it


left or right.
Change
column
spacing

 Change row spacing by selecting the top guide and dragging it up or


down.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

525

 Change row offset by selecting the top guide and dragging it left or
right.

Change row
spacing

Change
offset

Press Esc to finish.


The size and layout settings you select become the current Motif Fill
settings.
Tip To revert to the original factory settings, run the Revert utility. See
Reverting to factory settings for details. Alternatively, enter the values
manually in the Object Properties > Fills > Motif Fill and click Save.
See Motif Samples for details.

Applying 3D effects to motif fills


Use the 3D Warp tool with motif fills to create three dimensional effects.
You can make shapes appear concave or convex using Globe In or Globe
Out. You can also create distance effects using Perspective. You can apply
3D Warp as you digitize, or apply it to existing motif fills.

Without 3D Warp

Globe In

Globe Out

Perspective

Tip Small stitches may be generated along the edge of objects using 3D
Warp. You can remove these automatically. See Removing small stitches
automatically for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

526

Applying and adjusting 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out


Click 3D Warp (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply 3D effects to selected motif
fills. Right-click to change settings.
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected 3D Warp objects.
Using Globe In with 3D Warp gives a concave effect by increasing the motif
size and spacing around a center point. Globe Out gives a convex effect by
decreasing motif size and spacing.

You can apply Globe In and Globe Out to an entire object, or to a specified
part of the fill. You can modify the effect by adjusting the guide frame.

To apply and adjust 3D Warp with Globe In/Globe Out


1

Select the Motif Fill object.


Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have
no objects selected.

Right-click the 3D Warp icon.


The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens.
Select 3D Warp
Select Globe In or
Globe Out

ES 2006

Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Globe In or Globe Out from
the list.

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

527

The Globe In or Out effect is applied to the selected object.

OR

Complex FIll object


with Motif Fill

Globe In applied

Globe Out applied

To make further adjustments, click the Reshape icon with the object
selected.
A guide frame appears around the object with three control points.

Adjust the control points to modify the effect as required:

 Top point: change frame height


 Side point: change frame width
 Center point: reposition frame.
Click-and-drag
control point

Click-and-drag
to reposition
frame

Press Enter.
Tip You can generate layers of colored motifs by duplicating an object
and selecting a different color. For example, after filling a shape with
circles, you can create a second layer, offset it, and apply a different
color. You can then apply effects such as Globe Out to the whole motif
fill.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

528

Applying and adjusting 3D Warp with Perspective


Click 3D Warp (Stitch Types toolbar) to apply 3D effects to selected motif
fills. Right-click to change settings.
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected 3D Warp objects.
Use Perspective with 3D Warp to create a perspective effect by
exaggerating relative sizes.

Note You need to adjust the guide frame for Perspective 3D Warp to
specify the direction in which to make motifs larger and smaller.

To apply and adjust 3D Warp with Perspective


1

Select the Motif Fill object.


Note To apply 3D Warp to newly created objects, make sure you have
no objects selected.

Right-click the 3D Warp icon.


The Object Properties > Curve dialog opens.
Select 3D Warp

Select Perspective

ES 2006

Select the 3D Warp checkbox, and select Perspective from the list.

Click Apply.

Click the Reshape icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

529

A guide frame appears around the object.


Select object
and click
Reshape

Adjust the frame to move the guidelines closer together or further apart.
Warning The guide frame must not cross the outer boundary of the
shape, and cannot be inside the shape.

Press Enter.
The perspective effect is applied.

Adjust frame and


Press Enter

Working with single motifs


You can add motifs to your design one-by-one. Rotate, scale, or mirror
motifs as you add them or edit them like any other object.

Selecting and inserting single motifs


Use Motif Run (Input toolbar) to select motifs for individual use.
Add motifs to your design by selecting them from the Object Properties
dialog.

ES 2006

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

530

Note If a motif is comprised of two or more objects, these will be


automatically grouped when inserted.

To select and insert a single motif


1

Right-click the Motif Run icon.


The Object Properties > Outlines > Motif Run dialog opens.

Select motif set


Select motif

Select a motif set from the Set list.

Select a pattern from the dropdown list.


Alternatively, click the arrow button to expand the motif list for TrueView
representations of motifs and select one.

Click Apply to make the selection current.

Select Special > Motif > Use.


The outline of the motif appears attached to the mouse pointer.

Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to
mark the anchor point.

Move the pointer until the motif is in the position you need, then click
again for a guide point.
Stitches are generated automatically. The outline of the motif appears
attached to the mouse pointer ready for the next motif.

Insert anchor
point

ES 2006

Insert guide
point

Wilcom ES Online Manual

Repeat if
required

531

You can rotate, scale and mirror motifs as you insert them. See Rotating,
mirroring and scaling motifs for details.
8

Repeat the steps to insert the motif again.

Press Esc to finish.

Tip Press Enter to accept the default position and settings.

Rotating, mirroring and scaling motifs


You can rotate, scale, or mirror motifs as you add them to your design using
the keyboard and mouse.

Tip If you find it easier to insert a motif at its original size and orientation,
you can scale, rotate and mirror it later just like any other object.

To rotate, mirror and scale motifs


1

Select a motif to insert.


See Selecting and inserting single motifs for details.

Move the pointer to the position you want to add the motif, and click to
mark the anchor point.
Click to mark
anchor point

The motif attaches to the mouse pointer. As you move the pointer, the
motif rotates around the anchor point you marked.
3

ES 2006

Rotate, scale, or mirror the motif with the mouse.

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

532

 To rotate the motif, move the pointer until the rotation angle is
correct, then click again.
Click to mark
guide point

motif rotated

 To mirror the motif, right-click.


Right-click to mark
guide point and
mirror motif

Motif rotated and


mirrored

 To scale the motif, press Shift. Move the pointer until the motif
outline shows the required size, then click again.
Hold down Shift to
resize the motif

Motif rotated and


scaled

Hold down Ctrl to constrain


rotation angles

Tip When mirroring and scaling, make sure the motif is at the required
rotation angle, before clicking or right-clicking.
4

Press Esc to finish.


Tip You can create motifs from patterns made in the cross stitch
program and use them to create a cross stitch sampler. See the Cross
Stitch User Manual Supplement for details.

motifs created in
Cross Stitch program

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

533

Managing motifs
ES Designer provides various ways to manage your motifs including making
motif sets, saving motifs, copying motifs between motif sets, and deleting
motifs.

Saving motifs
Use Motif > Make (Special menu) to save motifs.
The Make Motif function lets you save your own motifs for future use. Motifs
may be saved to different files or motif sets.

To save motifs
1

Select the embroidery object you want to save as a motif.

Select Special > Motif > Make.


The Make Motif dialog opens.

Select motif set


Enter motif name
Select to remove unwanted
machine functions

ES 2006

Select a Motif Set from the list. See also Creating motif sets.

Enter a name in the Motif Name field.

If you want to automatically remove machine functions from the motif,


select the Remove Functions checkbox.

Click OK.

Click to mark two reference points for the motif.

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

534

These determine the default motif orientation in motif runs and fills.
Reference points also determine the spacing between each motif.
Reference point 2

Reference point 1
rotation direction

Reference point 1

Reference point 2

Reference point 1 becomes the anchor point in the final motif. Reference
point 2 becomes the rotation point.
8

Click OK.
The motif is ready to use.

Creating motif sets


Use Motif > Make (Special menu) to create your own motif set.
The Make Motif function lets you create your own motif sets to organize
and classify your motifs.

To create motif sets

ES 2006

Select an embroidery object.

Select Special > Motif > Make.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

535

The Make Motif dialog opens.

Click New to create


new motif set

Click New.
The New Motif Set dialog opens.

My New Motif Set

Enter name for


motif set

Enter a name for the new motif set and click OK.
The Motif Set is ready for use.
Note Motif sets are stored in the C:\ESWin\Userletw folder. You can
delete or rename these motif sets as required.

Deleting motifs
Use Motif > Select (Special menu) to delete motifs from a set.
Delete any motifs you no longer want from a motif set.

To delete motifs
1

Select Special > Motif > Select.


The Select Motif dialog opens.

Select the motif to delete.

Click Delete.
A confirmation message appears.

ES 2006

Click Yes.

Chapter 22

Motif Runs and Fills

536

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

Some embroidery machines are equipped with a


sequin dispenser that drops sequins onto the
garment as it stitches. Some are also equipped
with a boring knife or needle to cut holes in the
fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. Often
the two techniques are used in combination.
ES Designer provides a dedicated set of Sequin
tools which allow you to digitize sequined designs
for compatible machines. There are also tools for
creating boring holes.
Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in
Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK embroidery machine
formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you
must select a machine format that supports it.
See Selecting machine formats for details. See
also Saving designs in ZSK-TC format.
You can set up a sequin palette for each design
from a library of pre-defined shapes and sizes.
Create sequin runs along digitized lines, either
placing sequins manually or letting the software
generate placement positions according to
current settings. You can change sequin shapes
and fixing stitch patterns at any stage.
The Sequin tools also allow you to digitize individual sequins for even
greater control. Artwork for sequin designs is frequently prepared in
third-party applications. Vector files can be imported into ES Designer and
converted directly to sequin runs. You have complete control over scaling
and reshaping Sequin Run objects.
If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you
can use the Borers tool to cut holes in the fabric, producing an effect similar
to lace. With Borers selected, each needle penetration point becomes a
borer hole, regardless of the selected stitch type. Borer holes are generally

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

537

stabilized with Zigzag to prevent fraying and movement, and bordered with
Satin stitches.
This section describes how to set up custom sequin palettes for the creation
of sequin designs. It also describes how to create sequin runs and digitize
individual sequins, as well as how to convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run.
Scaling and reshaping sequin runs is also explained as well as digitizing
boring holes.

Setting up custom sequin palettes


Use Sequin Palette (Sequin toolbar) to select from a
user-defined palette of sequin shapes for the current design.
Use Sequin Palette Editor (Sequin toolbar) to select sequin shapes from a
sequin library.
Set up a dedicated sequin palette from a library of pre-defined shapes and
sizes. The Sequin Palette dialog lets you prepare a palette of sequins to use
in your design. Adjust the color and size of each sequin. You can even adjust
the hole size.

To set up a custom sequin palette


1

Click the Sequin Palette Editor icon.


The Sequin Palette dialog opens.

Click to add sequin types

Click to mix colors of sequins

Adjust size and hole size

ES 2006

Click the Add button to add sequin types to the Sequin Palette.

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

538

The Select Sequin Type dialog opens.

Select sequin
to add

Click to add to
palette

Select a sequin from the list and click OK.

Adjust the sequin and hole size as required.


Note The number in the Name field adjusts automatically to correspond
to the Size field setting.

Select the color checkbox or Mix button in the Sequin Palette dialog.
The Color dialog opens.

Drag crosshairs to
adjust color

Drag arrow to
adjust brightness

Click to
select color

Enter exact values


if known
Add selected color
to Custom Colors

ES 2006

Select or mix a color and click OK.

Repeat as many times as necessary.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

539

Selected sequins are now available for use in the Sequin Palette.

Select sequin
to use

Creating sequin runs


Create sequin runs along digitized lines, either placing sequins manually or
letting the software generate placement positions according to current
settings. You have the choice of exact spacing, for open shapes, or even
spacing, for closed shapes. You can preset sequin type or change at any
stage. Similarly, you can preset fixing stitches or change them after
digitizing. There is an option to ensure that the stitch before the Drop Sequin
function is placed opposite the feeding direction, as recommended by
machine manufacturers.

Note The Backtrack/Repeat tool is enabled for Sequin Run objects. See
Reinforcing outlines for details.

Creating manual and automatic sequin runs


Use Sequin Run Auto (Sequin toolbar) to create a string of sequins along a
digitized line according to current settings.
Use Sequin Run Manual (Sequin toolbar) to manually digitize sequin-drops
along a digitized line.

ES 2006

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

540

Use Sequin Palette (Sequin toolbar) to select from a


user-defined palette of sequin shapes for the current design.
Use the Sequin Run input method to create a string of sequins along a
digitized line. You have the option of digitizing individual sequin drops with
the manual method, or letting the system automatically generate drops
along the line according to current settings. Digitize lines as you would motif
runs. Fixing stitches are generated automatically according to current
settings.
Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK
embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must
select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for
details.

To create manual and automatic sequin runs


1

Select the sequin type you want to use from the dropdown list in the
Sequin Palette. See Setting up custom sequin palettes for details.

Click the Sequin Run Auto icon.

Digitize the line along which you want the sequin run to appear by
entering reference pointsleft-click for corner points, right-click for
curve points.

Press Enter

Digitize outlineleft-click
corner points, right-click
curve points

When you have finished digitizing the line, press Enter.


Sequins of the selected type are automatically generated along the
digitized line along with their fixing stitches. Spacings can be individually
adjusted. See Scaling and reshaping sequin runs for details.

ES 2006

To add details or create special spacings, click the Sequin Run Manual
icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

541

Digitize individual sequinsagain, left-click for corner points, right-click


for curve points.
Connecting and fixing stitches are automatically generated. See
Changing sequin shapes and fixing stitches for details.

Press Enter

Digitize individual
sequinsleft-click corner
points, right-click curve points

Changing sequin shapes and fixing stitches


Use Sequin Palette (Sequin toolbar) to select from a
user-defined palette of sequin shapes for the current design.
You can select sequins before or after digitizing a sequin run. Similarly, you
can preset fixing stitches or change them at any stage.

Note Sequin Run stitch has potential as a decorative stitch in its own right.
For this purpose you can select None in the Sequin Palette. This option is
best used with the Sequin Drop Direction set to Any. See also Changing
sequin-drop direction.

To change sequin shapes and fixing stitches


1

ES 2006

To change shapes, select the object and select a different sequin type
from the Sequin Palette on the Sequin toolbar.

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

542

All sequins in the object are immediately substituted.

To change fixing stitches, double-click the object.


The Object Properties > Outlines > Sequin Run dialog opens.

Click to open
Fixing Type
Chooser

Click the Fixing Type Chooser button in the Type panel.


The Object Properties dialog extends to the Fixing Type Chooser.

Fixing stitch
preview

Select fixing
stitch type

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

543

Select a fixing stitch type.


A preview of the selected fixing stitch appears in the Preview Pane.

Click Apply.
Fixing stitches for the object are regenerated.

Note To close the Fixing Type Chooser, click the Fixing Type Chooser
button again.
6

To adjust the fixing stitch size, select one of the followings:


Adjust automatic or
manual settings

 Match Sequin: sets a margin around the sequin so that fixing


stitches dont punch too close to the sequin.

 Set Manually: sets the fixing stitch size for all sequins, regardless
of size.

Sequin size: 7 mm
Auto Margin: 0.50 mm

ES 2006

Sequin size: 7 mm
Manual Size: 5.00 mm

Sequin size: 7 mm
Manual Size: 10.00 mm

Click Apply.

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

544

Changing sequin-drop direction


There is an option to ensure that the
stitch before the Drop Sequin function is
placed opposite the feeding direction, as
recommended by machine
manufacturers. Otherwise, the sequin
may be deflected by the thread. If the
needle then misses the center of a
sequin because of incorrect placement,
the embroidery material, needles or
needle plates may be damaged. In
multihead machines, sequins are fed from the front or south which means
that the initial fixing stitch should be placed on the north side. In Schiffli
machines, the opposite is the case.

To change sequin-drop direction


1

Select a sequin run object and double-click.


The Object Properties dialog opens.

Select the Special tab and Sequin in the dropdown list.


Select
special tab
Select sequin
Select sequin
drop direction

Select to prevent
multiple penetrations

Select a required sequin drop stitch direction:

 From North: ensures that the initial fixing stitch is opposite the
feeding directionfront or southwhich is the case in multihead
machines.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

545

 From South: ensures that the initial fixing stitch is opposite the
feeding directionthe top or northwhich is the case in Schiffli
machines.

Drop direction From


North: initial fixing stitch
always placed above, and
sequin fed from south

Drop direction From


South: initial fixing stitch
always placed below, and
sequin fed from north

Warning With the Any option, direction is not important. This option
generates the least number of fixing stitches but may not be suitable for
your sequin device. It should be used by experienced digitizers only.
4

Enter an angle in the Max Angle field to specify an angular range within
which drop sequin stitch will fall.
You can set the value for either North or South fixing stitches. The
default is 90 but this can be increased or decreased depending on the
capabilities of your machine.
Drop stitch direction
set to North or South

Set maximum allowable


angle for placement of
fixing stitch

ES 2006

Select the Prevent multiple penetrations option as required.

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

546

This option is used to minimize penetrations at the same point, and to


generate Schiffli-compatible fixing stitching. If you select the Schiffli
template, the option is on by default. When set to off, some fixing
stitches will have multiple penetrations at the same point, both at the
sequin center and outer edge.

Prevent Multiple Penetrations on

Prevent Multiple Penetrations off

Select the Closest Point Join option as required.


By default, this option is off, meaning that the system connects the
predefined exit leg of the fixing stitch motif to the predefined entry leg
of the next fixing stitch motif. That is, unless the connector exceeds the
maximum sequin stitch. Choose the Closest Point Join option if you
want to always connect fixing stitch motifs from the leg closest to the
nearest leg of the next fixing stitch motif.

Click Apply.

Adjusting sequin run spacing and orientation


You can change the spacing in a sequin run at any stage. If you use the
manual method, you define the spacings between sequin-drops with every
click you make. If you use the automatic method, sequin-drops are
calculated according to the current spacing setting. You have the choice of
exact spacing, better for open shapes, or even spacing, better for closed
shapes. You can also manually fine-tune sequin spacings with the Reshape
tool.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

547

To adjust sequin run spacing and orientation


1

Select a sequin run objectmanual or automatic.

manual sequin
run

automatic
sequin run

Double-click the object.


The Object Properties > Outlines > Sequin Run dialog opens.

Select spacing
method

In the Positioning panel, select a spacing method:

 Exact: uses the specified Spacing exactly. This may result in an


uneven spacing at the end of the curve.

 Expand to fit: makes the spacing increase from the nominal value
until there is a sequin at the end of the path.

 Compact to fit: makes the spacing decrease from the nominal value
until there is a sequin at the end of the path.

Exact

Expand to fit

Compact to fit

Tip If you want the sequins irregular, digitize using the Sequin Run
Manual tool and for fine-tuning of individual sequin spacings, use the
Reshape tool. See also Scaling and reshaping sequin runs.

ES 2006

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

548

To adjust fixing stitch orientation to place the first stroke of the fixing
stitch, select one of the following:

Choose fixing stitch


orientationleft, right, vertical

 Left Orientation: to the left of the sequin run curve.


 Right Orientation: to the right.
 Vertical Orientation: always in the vertical planenot relevant to
one-stroke fixing stitch types.

Orientation: Left

Orientation: Right

Orientation: Vertical

Adjust the minimum, run and maximum stitch lengths when connecting
the fixing stitches, if required.

Adjust stitch lengths

Click Apply.

Digitizing individual sequins


Use Manual Sequin (Sequin toolbar) to digitize individual sequins.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

549

The Manual Sequin input method allows you


individual control over sequin placement and fixing
stitches. Create decorative outlines and patterns
manually using sequins from the selection list. To
add a sequin to the stitching sequence, simply
right-click to drop it onto the design, and secure it
with manual stitches. Manual sequin stitching is a
difficult digitizing skill to master and you need to
plan the stitching sequence carefully in order to
minimize unnecessary stitches. Experiment with
your machine and stitch width and spacing settings
to achieve the desired result. See also Sequin On/Off
functions.

Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK
embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must
select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for
details.

To digitize individual sequins


1

Click the Manual Sequin icon.

Right-click to add a sequin to the design.


A shape representing the sequin appears.

Left-click to digitize fixing stitches around the sequin to secure it.


Three stitches in the shape of a Y are generally used. The needle points
of each stitch must be placed precisely to ensure that sequins are not
pierced by the needle when stitching.

Right-click to drop a
sequin
Left-click to digitize
fixing stitches

Tip Zoom in for more accurate digitizing.


4

ES 2006

Press Enter.

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

550

Converting sequin artwork to Sequin Run


Use Vectors to Sequins (Sequin toolbar) to create a sequin run from a set of
sequin vector objects selected by intersecting line.
Frequently, artwork for sequin designs is independently created by a
specialist designer and supplied to the embroidery digitizer in vector file
format. The Vectors to Sequins tool is available for just this purpose. A
sequin run is automatically created from a set of vector objects representing
sequins selected by intersecting line. The order the line crosses the sequins
determines the sequin order. Fixing stitches are generated automatically
according to current Sequin Run settings.
Note Sequin Mode is currently only supported in Schiffli, Tajima, and ZSK
embroidery machine formats. Before you can use Sequin Mode, you must
select a machine format that supports it. See Selecting machine formats for
details.

To convert sequin artwork to Sequin Run


1

Insert the sequin artwork into the design.

Specially prepared
sequin artwork

Properly designed artwork will contain vector objects centered on the


exact locations required for sequins in the design.
2

Select the Vectors to Sequins icon.


You are prompted to Enter point 1 on the polyline on the Prompt
Message bar.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

551

Click the sequin graphic which will start the Sequin Run.

Digitize connecting
line passing through
all sequin graphics

Digitize a line connecting all sequins to be included in the Sequin Run.


The line only needs to touch the sequin object somewhere within its
boundary. Enter reference points by left-clicking for corner points and
right-clicking for curve points.

Press Enter.
A Sequin Run is generated with a curve that passes through the center
of each sequin graphic with sequin objects positioned at these centers.
Current properties are applied and the object is set to manual by
default.

Generated curve
contains reshape
node at each
sequin position

Note The generated curve contains a reshape node at each sequin


position.

ES 2006

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

552

Scaling and reshaping sequin runs


Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to resize objects using selection handles.
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected Sequin Run
objects.
Sequin editing often requires individual control over sequin positions.
Change sequin shapes and fixing stitch patterns at any stage. You have
complete control over scaling and reshaping Sequin Run objects. Scale and
reshape sequin run lines, as well as remove or add individual sequins. You
can also manually fine-tune sequin spacings. You can even edit individual
fixing stitches.
Note Performing manual edits to Sequin Run objects automatically
deselects all the options. If you set it back to Exact, Compact to fit, or
Expand to fit spacing, all manual edits are lost.

To scale and reshape a sequin run

 Scale Sequin Run objects in the normal way by clicking and dragging
selection handles, or by adjusting the general properties. See Scaling
objects for details.

 If the object is created with the Sequin Run Auto tool, the sequin
drops are automatically recalculated.

Sequin drops
regenerated according
to current settings

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

553

 If the object is created with the Sequin Run Manual tool, the original
number of sequin drops is preserved.

Original number of
sequin drops
preserved

 Reshape sequin run lines with the Reshape tool as you would any run
object. Add reshape nodes by left- or right-clicking the outline. See
Reshaping embroidery objects for details.
Note When a sequin run object is in the Reshape Mode, the Show
Stitch Angles icon is disabled.

 Fine-tune individual sequin spacings with the Reshape


toolclick-and-drag a spacing handle.
You can also select a range of or multiple spacing handles by using Shift
or Ctrl keys. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

554

Note The movement of sequin objects is contained on the sequin run


line.

Click-and-drag
spacing handle

 Delete selected sequins by pressing the Delete.


 Add sequins by holding down the Alt key and clicking the sequin run line.
 Rotate sequins and fixing stitches with the Reshape tool.

Click-and-drag
rotation handle

 Reshape individual fixing stitches with the Reshape tool. To view the
fixing stitch reshape nodes, click the sequin outline.

Click-and-drag
fixing stitch

Digitizing boring holes


Use Penetrations (Generate toolbar) together with Borers to digitize boring
holes.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

555

Use Run (Input toolbar) to digitize an outline around the shape you want to
bore.
Use Borers (Generate toolbar) to activate the boring function.
Use Manual (Input toolbar) to digitize boring holes.
Use Input A (Input toolbar) to digitize border stitching around the holes.
If your embroidery machine is equipped with a boring knife or needle, you
can use the Borers tool (formerly known as Borers In) to cut holes in the
fabric, producing an effect similar to lace. With Borers selected, each needle
penetration point becomes a borer hole, regardless of the selected stitch
type. Borer holes are generally stabilized with Zigzag to prevent fraying and
movement, and bordered with Satin stitches.
Tip Boring is a difficult digitizing skill to master. You may need to
experiment with your machine and stitch width and spacing settings to
achieve the effect you require.
With Tajima and Barudan
machines Borers inserts a Stop
function which allows the machine
to change to the needle position
that uses the boring attachment.
The machine must be correctly
programmed to use the correct
needle position.
Note The default setting for
Multihead borers is for a knife
attachment, where the cutting
position is offset 12 mm from the main needle line. This offset is only
expressed when you save your design to a stitch format like DST. If you are
using a boring needle, you need to change the offset value to 0. See Setting
borer functions for details.

To digitize boring holes


1

ES 2006

Ensure Penetrations is on.

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

556

Click the Run icon and digitize an outline around the shape you want to
bore.

Digitize outline
with Run stitch

This helps prevent the fabric from tearing.


3

Click the Borers icon.


A machine function is inserted to indicate the change from stitching to
boring.

Click the Manual icon and digitize individual stitches where you want a
boring knife to cut. See Digitizing individual stitches for details.
Each stitch you digitize becomes a boring hole. The borer penetration
points appear as diamonds, connected by dotted lines. These do not
appear in TrueView.

Digitize boring holes


with Manual or Run
stitch

Alternatively use Run to digitize lines for boring holes. See Digitizing
lines for details.

 For a round hole, digitize two intersecting lines.


 For an oval hole, digitize one line.
Tip Reduce the Run stitch lengthe.g. 1.0-1.5 mmto place the borer
penetrations closer together, thereby ensuring the fabric will be cut right
through. See Setting run stitch length for details.
5

ES 2006

Click Borers again to deselect it.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

557

This returns you to normal stitching. You now need to stabilize the fabric
and create borders by stitching around them with Zigzag and Satin cover
stitches.
6

Digitize around the hole with Input A together with Zigzag stitch.
Place the inside edge close to the center of the hole so it wraps the
fabric. See Digitizing columns of fixed width for details.

Digitize around hole


with Input A and
Zigzag

Digitize borders with


Input A and Satin

Digitize border stitching with Input A together with Satin stitch.


Place the inside edge of the object close to the center of the hole. If you
have used Zigzag stitches for reinforcement, ensure they are covered.
Warning You should not use Satin with a Zigzag underlay because a
run stitch is also generated (to return to the entry point). This can cause
thread breakage.

ES 2006

Chapter 23

Sequins and Boring

558

PART VI

EMBROIDERY LETTERING
Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large
range of scaleable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy
stitching alphabets to choose from.

Creating embroidery lettering


This section describes how to add and edit lettering, change formatting
settings, and adjust lettering size and spacing. See Creating Embroidery
Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering layout


This section describes how to adjust lettering objects as well as individual
letters. It also describes how to apply and adjust lettering baselines. See
Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.

Adjusting lettering stitch settings


This section describes changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects,
and adjusting lettering stitch angles. It also explains how to adjust the
lettering stitching sequence as well as lettering join method. See Adjusting
Lettering Stitch Settings for details.

Special lettering features


This section shows you how to add special characters and symbols. It
describes how to create special effects with envelopes. It also covers adding

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

559

borders to lettering, as well as setting up team lettering designs. See


Special Lettering Features for details.

Custom alphabets
This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts. It
also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets and
letters. Alphabet merging is also explained. See Custom Alphabets for
details.

ES 2006

Embroidery Lettering

560

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

Create top-quality lettering quickly and simply. ES Designer provides a large


range of scalable closest-join alphabet styles and multi-color and fancy
stitching alphabets to choose from. Add lettering directly to designs using
current settings or with the aid of the dialog. With object-based operation,
you can type and manipulate your text directly on-screen, changing the size
or spacings to fit. Apply formatting just like a word processor, including
italics, bolding, and right/left justification. Change values for the whole text
or for individual letters.

This section describes how to add and edit lettering, change formatting
settings, and adjust lettering size and spacing.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

561

Adding lettering to embroidery designs


You can add lettering to a design by typing it directly in the design window,
or entering it via the Object Properties dialog.

Tip The size of your lettering will determine the type of underlay you need
to apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft or to raise your
lettering off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have
underlay. Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied.
Lettering larger than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See
Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays for details.

Creating lettering on-screen


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add lettering directly on-screen.
Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or
selected objects.
If it is not essential to fit letters precisely to a certain area, you can type
them directly on-screen as with a word processor. Current lettering settings
are used. You can change these before or after you digitize. You can also
modify lettering objects directly on-screen to achieve various artistic effects.

To create lettering on-screen


1

Click the Lettering icon.

Select a color from the color palette.

Click where you want to insert the text and start typing.
Tip To start a new line, press Shift + Enter.

ES 2006

Press Enter to complete.

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

562

Click the Generate Stitches icon or press G.

Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object


Properties dialog. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in
a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line,
curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline.See
Working with lettering baselines for details.

Creating lettering with Object Properties


Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to enter text in the dialog and adjust
settings for embroidery lettering.
Use Generate Stitches (Generate toolbar) to generate stitches for new or
selected objects.
Using the Object Properties dialog, you can specify letter formatting before
adding it to the design. This is the more traditional method and is useful with
more complex designs.

To create lettering with Object Properties


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Lettering icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

563

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Enter text

Select
alphabet

Adjust
formatting

Select baseline
Click to apply

Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel.
To start a new line of lettering, press Enter.
Tip You can insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret
(^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette.

ES 2006

Select alphabet, formatting and baseline settings for the lettering. See
Selecting alphabets and Formatting lettering for details.

Click Apply.

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

564

Note Alternatively, click Create Text to create text on the screen when
the Apply button is deactivated.

Click to create text

apply button deactivated

Click where you want to place the lettering, or mark reference points for
the baseline you selected. See Working with lettering baselines for
details.

Select Generate Stitches icon or press G.

Note Appearance and layout depend on current settings in the Object


Properties dialog. Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in
a design. You can place lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line,
curve lettering around a circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline.See
Working with lettering baselines for details.

Selecting alphabets
Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select an alphabet for new or selected
lettering objects.
ES Designer provides an alphabet range suitable for many applications.
Select from the supplied alphabets, create your own, or convert TrueType
fonts. See also Custom Alphabets.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

565

Tip Once recorded, user-refined alphabet letters can be applied via the Use
saved version checkbox. See also Saving user-refined letters.

To select an alphabet
1

Right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select
alphabet

Select to preview alphabet


in dropdown list

Use user-refined
version

Click the Preview in Dropdown List checkbox to view preview of


alphabets.

Select an alphabet from the Alphabet list.

A sample character of the chosen alphabet appears in the preview


window. For samples of the complete selection of standard alphabets,
see Standard Alphabets.
Tip Consider letter size before you change alphabets. Some alphabets
look best in a smaller size. Others can be stitched at a larger size. See
also Adjusting letter height and width.
4

ES 2006

Click the Use saved version checkbox to use saved user-refined


lettering in preference to the default.

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

566

User-refined lettering lets you save multiple versions of the same letter
to the same alphabet. Each version can have a unique height range. See
User-refined alphabets for details.

User-refined letter
a used for
smaller sizes

Click Apply.
The lettering alphabet is set.

Working with lettering baselines


Baselines determine the shape of lettering objects in a design. You can place
lettering on a straight horizontal or vertical line, curve lettering around a
circle or arc, or digitize your own baseline. Different reference points are
needed depending on the baseline you use. You can digitize baselines
on-screen or, if you are working from an enlargement drawing, on a
digitizing tablet.

Baselines use default settings to determine their size, spacing and angles.
ES Designer gives you both interactive and precise numerical control over
many baseline settings. Techniques are available to modify baseline type,
length, radius and angle, as well as baseline position. You can numerically
define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the design
itself.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

567

Applying baselines
Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select baselines and adjust baseline
settings.
You can select different baselines through the Object Properties > Special
dialog. You can also adjust baseline settings. You can apply baselines to
existing objects or pre-set a baseline for new lettering objects.

To apply a baseline
1

Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select baseline

Select a baseline from the list.


The baseline you choose depends on the effect you want to achieve.
Options include:

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

568

 Horizontal (Free Line and Fixed Line): See Applying horizontal


baselines for details.

 Vertical (Free Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical): See Applying
vertical baselines for details.

 Arc (Arc CW and Arc CCW): See Applying arc baselines for details.

 Circle (Circle CW and Circle CCW): See Applying circular baselines


for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

569

 Custom (Any Shape): See Applying custom baselines for details.

 Predefined: See Using predefined baselines for details.

Adjust baseline settings in the Layout dialog. See Adjusting baselines


for details.

Click Apply.

Applying horizontal baselines


Free Line and Fixed Line baselines are straight, horizontal baselines. Free
Line does not have a fixed or pre-determined lengththe baseline extends
as long as you keep adding letters. Fixed Line has a fixed length which you
can digitize or specify numerically. If the text extends beyond the baseline,
letter spacing is reduced and letters may overlap. The letter width, however,
does not change.

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

570

To apply horizontal baselines


1

Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object


Properties for details.

Select the horizontal baseline you want to apply and click Apply.

For variable-length horizontal lines, enter your text in the Object


Properties dialog and select Free Line. Click the screen to establish the
start-point of the baseline.

Free LineClick on-screen to


mark start point

Fixed LineClick on-screen to


mark start and end points

 For fixed-length horizontal lines, enter your text in the Object


Properties dialog and select Fixed Line. Click the screen to
establish the start and end points of the baseline.
You can define any angle depending on where you mark the
reference points.
You can adjust baseline settings at any stage. See Adjusting straight
baseline settings for details.

Applying vertical baselines


Vertical baselines are effective for embroidering on sleeves, as a
decorative effect, and for Asian text. There are two typesFree
Line Vertical and Fixed Line Vertical. Free Line Vertical baselines do
not have a fixed length, and extend to fit the letters you enter.
Fixed Line Vertical baselines are a fixed length. Letter spacing may
be compressed to make the letters fit.
Line spacing is calculated horizontally while letter spacing is
calculated vertically. Letters, by default, are centered along vertical
lines. New lines are placed by default from right to left to suit Asian
languages.
Tip For Western languages, vertical lettering is best suited to
uppercase because descenders in lowercase letters are not
accommodated in the letter spacing.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

571

To apply a vertical baseline


1

Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object


Properties for details.

Select the vertical baseline you want to apply and click Apply:

 For variable-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object


Properties dialog and select Free Line Vertical. Click the screen to
establish the start-point of the baseline.

Free Line
Verticalclick the
screen to mark
mid-point

Fixed Line Verticalclick


the screen to mark start and
end points

 For fixed-length vertical lines, enter your text in the Object


Properties dialog and select Fixed Line Vertical. Click the screen
to establish the start and end points of the baseline.
You can define any angle depending on where you mark the
reference points.
Note You can adjust baseline settings at any stage. See Adjusting
straight baseline settings for details.

Applying arc baselines


Use Arc Clockwise (Arc CW) and Arc Counter-Clockwise (Arc CCW)
baselines to place lettering objects in a curved arc. You can place the
lettering clockwise (CW) or counter-clockwise (CCW) along the arc. By

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

572

default, letters are positioned above the Arc CW and below the Arc CCW
baseline. They are also centered by default.

To apply arc baselines


1

Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object


Properties for details.

Select Arc CW or Arc CCW as a baseline and click Apply.

Mark the start and end points of the arc.


Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments.

Move the pointer up or down to increase the radius of the arc.

Mark a third point above the first two points for Arc CW, and below them
for Arc CCW baseline.

arc clockwise

arc
counter-clockwise

Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches.


Depending on the order in which you mark the reference points, the text
will be placed left to right, or right to left.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

573

Applying circular baselines


Use Circle Clockwise (Circle CW) or Circle Counter-Clockwise (Circle
CCW) baseline to place letters around a full circle or oval.

To apply circular baselines


1

Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object


Properties for details.

Select Circle CW or Circle CCW as a baseline and click Apply.

Mark the center of the circle.

Mark a point on the circumference to define the radius.


Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments.

Mark a third point to define an ellipse or press Enter directly for a perfect
circle.
As soon as Enter is pressed, the letters of your text are distributed
around the circle. See also Setting letter justification.

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

574

Applying custom baselines


Use Any Shape baselines to shape lettering around elements in your
design. Digitize Any Shape baselines by marking reference points to form
the required line. The number of reference points and length of baseline are
practically unlimited.

Tip If the baseline has tight curves, or sharp corners, the letters may
overlap. For best results, only mark curve points, and digitize lines which
have shallow, gentle curves.

To apply custom baselines


1

Create a new lettering object. See Creating lettering with Object


Properties for details.

Select Any Shape as a baseline and click Apply.

Mark the baseline reference points.

 Mark curve points with the right mouse button.


 Mark corner points with the left mouse button.
3
1

ES 2006

Press Enter to complete and press G to generate stitches.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

575

Using predefined baselines


Use Predefined baselines to quickly create
three rows of lettering, or two rows
surrounding a design object. This technique
is typically used for creating logos.

To use a predefined baseline


1

With no objects selected, right-click the


Lettering icon.
The Object Properties > Special >
Lettering dialog opens.

Enter two or three


lines of text

Select options
and adjust
settings

Enter two or three lines of text in the text entry panel.


To start a new line of lettering, press Enter.
Tip If you want to insert a logo or design between the top and bottom
lines, leave the middle line of text blank.

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

576

Select the alphabet and adjust other settings you require. See Selecting
alphabets and Formatting lettering for details.

Select Predefined
baseline

Select Predefined from the baseline list.

Click OK.

Click where you want to place the lettering and drag the cursor
downward.
Tip Hold down the Ctrl key to constrain the line to 15 increments.

Click to enter a point on the circumference of the circle.

Mark another point if you want to create an oval, or press Enter for a
circular baseline.

Press G to generate stitches.


The lines of text are generated and dispersed around the baseline you
have defined. Each line of text becomes a separate lettering object.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

577

Formatting lettering
You can control the appearance of lettering by changing formatting settings
in the Object Properties dialog. Change current formatting settings before
or after adding lettering in the same way as other objects.

Making italic lettering


You can slant letters to the left or right for an italic effect. Enter the degree
of slant in the Angle field. The default angle is 0.

To make italic lettering


1

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Enter italic angle

Enter an angle in the Italic field.


The largest angle that the lettering can lean at is 45. (0 is equivalent
to no italics.)

italic angle 45

italic angle 0

italic angle -45

Click Apply.

Making bold lettering


You can create the effect of bold lettering either by increasing the pull
compensation settings for selected lettering objects, or adjusting the
column width setting. The difference is that the column width setting adjusts

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

578

the entire column, including underlay, while pull compensation adjusts only
cover stitching. See also Compensating for fabric stretch.

To make bold lettering


1

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select the Pull Comp tab.


Select Pull Comp tab

Increase pull compensation


or column width

Select Column Width or Pull Compensation as required. See


Compensating for fabric stretch and Adjusting column width for details.

Increase the values in the respective fields.

normal

ES 2006

pull comp: 0.3 mm

column width: 140%

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

579

Setting letter justification


Justification is the way that lettering aligns itself on a baseline. You can
justify lettering left or right, center it, or fully justify it. Full justification
spreads the letters out to fill the length of the baseline.

To set letter justification


1

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select a justification settingLeft, Centered, Right, or Justified.

left

centered

right

fully justified

Click Apply.

Adjusting letter spacing


Letter, word and line spacings can be determined before or after creating
lettering objects and placing them in your design. You can edit spacing
directly on-screen or via the dialog. Letter spacing is calculated

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

580

automatically according to justificationLeft, Centered, Right, or Full


Justified. See also Setting letter justification.

Note When the justification setting is Full, letters are evenly distributed
along the baseline. To change the spacing for fully justified lettering, simply
change the length of the baseline.

Adjusting overall letter spacing on-screen


Click Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change letter spacing.
The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of
the letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes,
however, you may want to change the overall letter spacing.

To adjust overall letter spacing on-screen


1

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.

Drag letter spacing


control point

ES 2006

Drag the letter spacing control point left or right to adjust the spacing of
all letters along the baseline.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

581

Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.

Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change individual letter spacing.
The spacing between letters is calculated automatically as a percentage of
letter height. In most cases the default spacing is adequate. Sometimes,
however, the spacing between certain letters may appear too large or too
small, depending on the shape of neighboring letters. To compensate for this
visual effect, you can move one or several selected letters closer or further
apart along the baseline to improve spacing. See also Automatic letter
kerning.

To adjust individual letter spacing on-screen


1

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.

Click the diamond control point in the centre of the letter.

Hold down Ctrl and click


diamond control points

Tip To select multiple or a range of letters, hold down Ctrl or Shift as you
select.
4

ES 2006

Drag selected letter/s along the baseline or use arrow keys to adjust the
spacing.

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

582

Tip Alternatively, to move multiple letters, right-click the diamond


control point of the first letter and drag. All letters to the end of the line
move as one.
5

Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.

Adjusting line spacing on-screen


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to change line spacing.
Change the space between lines in a multiple-line lettering object using the
Reshape Object tool.

To adjust line spacing on-screen


1

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.

Drag the line spacing control point up or down to change line spacing.

Drag line spacing


control point

ES 2006

Release the mouse button to complete and press Esc.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

583

Adjusting spacing settings


You can adjust letter, word and line spacings in lettering objects at any stage
via the Object Properties dialog.

To adjust spacing settings


1

Double-click a selected lettering object or right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Enter values as absolutes (mm)


or percentages

Enter Spacing values as absolute values (mm) or percentages of the


height.

 Letter Spacing: the space between letters.

 Word Spacing: the space between words.

 Line Spacing: the space between lines.

ES 2006

Chapter 24

Creating Embroidery Lettering

584

Note Whether you enter a percentage or absolute value, the other


updates automatically.
3

Click Apply.
Tip If you want to remove spacing between words, set Word Spacing
to 0%.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

585

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

ES Designer gives you interactive and precise numeric control over many
settings affecting lettering objects. Adjust both individual letters and
lettering objects as a whole. Apply horizontal, vertical, and curved
baselines. Modify baseline type, length, radius and angle, as well as
position. You can even define the rotation angle of letters relative to the
baseline or the design itself.

This section describes how to adjust lettering objects as well as individual


letters. It also describes how to apply and adjust lettering baselines.

Editing lettering text


When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make
changes to it directly on-screen or by adjusting object properties.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

586

Editing lettering text on-screen


Click Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit lettering on-screen.
With ES Designer you have the option of editing lettering directly on-screen.

To edit lettering text on-screen


1

Click the Lettering icon then click inside the lettering object.
An I-beam appears where you clicked.
I-beam

Edit the text as required.


Tip Press Shift + Enter to start a new line.

Press Enter to complete.

Editing lettering via object properties


When you have created a lettering object, you can select it and make
changes to it by adjusting object properties.

To edit lettering via object properties


1

Use one of the following techniques to select lettering objects:

 Select a single lettering object: Click the lettering object with the
left mouse button. The object changes color and eight selection
handles appear around it.

 Select a group of lettering objects: Select a lettering object then,


holding down the Ctrl key, click other objects as required.

 Select lettering objects with a bounding box: Click-and-drag a


bounding box around the lettering object/s and release the mouse.
2

ES 2006

Double-click the selected lettering object/s.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

587

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Edit text

Adjust settings

Click to save to
template

Edit the text in the text entry panel as required.

Make any other adjustments you require. See Formatting lettering for
details.

If you want to save settings to the template, click Save.

Click Apply.
Letters are filled with stitches according to current settings. See also
Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings.

Scaling lettering
When you first create lettering, it may be too big or too small. Size can be
adjusted in three ways:

 by scaling on-screen with the Select Object or Reshape Object tools


 by adjusting width and height settings in the Object Properties >
Special > Lettering dialog

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

588

 by adjusting width and height settings in the General Properties bar.

Tip The size of your lettering will determine the type of underlay you need
to apply. Apart from stabilizing, underlay helps give loft or to raise your
lettering off the fabric. Lettering with heights under 5 mm should not have
underlay. Letters 6 mm to 10 mm can have a center-run underlay applied.
Lettering larger than 10 mm is large enough for edge-run underlay. See
Strengthening and stabilizing with automatic underlays for details.

Scaling lettering with Select Object


Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to scale lettering objects on-screen.
You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and
proportionally with the Select Object tool. See also Transforming lettering
with Select Object.

To scale lettering with Select Object


1

Click the Select Object icon and select the lettering object.
Selection handles appear around the lettering object.
Drag to resize Vertically

Drag to resize
Proportionally

Drag to resize
Horizontally

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

589

Click-and-drag one of the selection handles to resize the object


horizontally, vertically or proportionally.

Drag

A shadow outline shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag.
3

Release the mouse to complete.

Scaling lettering with Reshape Object


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to scale lettering objects on-screen.
You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and
proportionally with the Reshape Object tool. See also Rotating lettering
with Reshape Object.

To scale lettering with Reshape Object


1

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.


Drag to resize Vertically

Drag to resize
Proportionally

Drag to resize
Horizontally

Click-and-drag one of the dark triangular control points to resize the


object horizontally, vertically or proportionally.

Drag

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

590

A bounding box shows the new size of the lettering object as you drag.
4

Release the mouse to complete.

Adjusting letter height and width


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust letter height and width.
You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and
proportionally via the Special tab of the Object Properties.

Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in


proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.

To adjust letter height and width


1

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.
Enter letter
height in mm

Enter width
percentage

In the Height field enter the height of your lettering object in


millimeters.
Note Letter height can be between 1 mm and 200 mm. For
recommended sizes, see Standard Alphabets.

Enter the width of your lettering object in the Width field as a


percentage of the height.

 For wide letters, increase the percentagee.g. 140%.


 For narrow letters, decrease the percentagee.g. 70%.

width 100%

ES 2006

width 70%

width 140%

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

591

Adjusting lettering dimensions


You can scale your lettering objects vertically, horizontally and
proportionally using the general properties.

Tip Change the appearance of an alphabet by changing the letter width in


proportion to the height. The original width value is 100%.

To adjust lettering dimensions


1

Select the lettering object.


The current dimensions of the selected object appear in the General
Properties bar.
Click Apply to
accept changes

Adjust width and


height settings

Adjust width and height settings either as absolute values (mm) or as a


percentage of the current settings.

original

width and height 125%

Click Apply.
Tip When you enter a value in either width or height field, the
percentage is automatically calculated. To resize proportionally, copy
this value to the other field and click Apply.

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

592

Transforming lettering objects


Apart from scaling, you can use the Select Object and Reshape Object
tools to skew and rotate lettering objects. See also Scaling lettering.

Transforming lettering with Select Object


Use Select Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform lettering objects on-screen.
You can transform lettering objects by manipulating control points
on-screen with the Select Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select
Object.

To transform lettering with Select Object


1

Click the Select Object icon and select the lettering object.
The selection handles appear. See also Scaling lettering with Select
Object.

Click the lettering object again.


Another set of control points appears. These let you rotate and skew the
lettering object.
Drag to skew

Drag to rotate

rotation point

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

593

Click-and-drag one of the diamond-shaped control points to skew the


lettering object horizontally.
Drag

A shadow outline shows the skewed lettering object as you drag.


4

Click-and-drag one of the hollow square control points to rotate the


lettering object.
rotation
point
Drag

A shadow outline shows the rotated lettering object as you drag.


Tip Click-and-drag the rotation point itself to a new position before
rotating.
5

Release the mouse to complete.

Rotating lettering with Reshape Object


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to rotate lettering objects on-screen.
You can rotate lettering objects by manipulating control points on-screen
with the Reshape Object tool. See also Scaling lettering with Select Object.

To rotate lettering with Reshape Object

ES 2006

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

594

Control points appear around the lettering object.


3

Click-and-drag one of the solid square control points on the baseline to


rotate the lettering object.

Click and drag to rotate


object

A baseline shows the rotated position of the lettering object as you drag.

Release the mouse to complete.

Adjusting individual letters


As well as scaling and rotating lettering
objects, the Reshape Object tool is used
to manipulate individual letters. You can
reposition letters in relation to each other,
scale, rotate and skew them, as well as
reshape them. You can also recolor letters
individually.

Repositioning letters on-screen


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reposition individual letters
on-screen.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

595

You can reposition individual letters in a lettering object using the Reshape
Object tool.

To reposition letters on-screen


1

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.

Click the diamond control point in the centre of the letter.


Click diamond control points

Tip To select multiple or a range of letters, hold down Ctrl or Shift as you
select.
4

Click-and-drag the letter to the new position:

 To move the letter horizontally, drag it along the baseline. See


Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen for details.

 To move the letter vertically, hold down Shift as you drag.

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

596

 To move the letter freely, hold down Ctrl as you drag.

Release the mouse button to complete.

Transforming individual letters on screen


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to transform individual letters
on-screen.
You can transform individual letters by manipulating control points
on-screen with the Reshape Object tool.

To transform individual letters on screen


1

Select the lettering object.

Click the Reshape Object icon.


Control points appear.

Select diamond
control point

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

597

Click the diamond control point of the letter to activate reshape nodes.
Drag to scale
letter height

Drag to scale letter proportionally

Drag to skew
Drag to scale letter width

Drag to rotate

Click-and-drag the special control points to transform individual letters.

Press Esc to finish.

Reshaping individual letters on-screen


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape individual letters
on-screen.
Create special lettering effects by reshaping letter outlines with the
Reshape Object tool.

To reshape individual letters on-screen


1
2

Select the lettering object.


Click the Reshape Object icon.
Control points appear around the lettering object.

ES 2006

Click the letter outline.

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

598

Control points appear around the outline. You can turn on or off reshape
nodes, stitch angles, and entry/exit points as required.

Click letter outline

Select reshape nodes by any of the following means:

 Drag a bounding box around the reshape nodes you require.


 Holding down Ctrl, select individual nodes.
 Holding down Shift, left- or right-click start and end nodes.

Draw bounding box to


select group of nodes

Hold down Ctrl and


click to select individual
nodes

Hold down Shift and


left- or right-click to
select range

Reshape the letter by adding, deleting and dragging the reshape nodes,
and press Enter. See Reshaping embroidery objects for details.

Reshape by adding,
deleting and dragging
reshape nodes

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

599

Adjust the stitch angles as required and press Enter. See Adjusting stitch
angles for details.

Tip Holding down the Ctrl key, click the outline wherever you want to
place an additional stitch angle line.
7

Adjust the entry/exit points as required and press Enter. See Adjusting
entry/exit points and last stitches for details.

Adjust entry/exit
points

Tip You can select and delete multiple nodes on a single segment. If
there are fewer than four nodes remaining, the segment itself is deleted.
However, if the letter includes more than one segment, those remaining
are still viable.

ES 2006

Press Esc to finish.

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

600

Tip The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you add, delete,
or adjust stitch angles in lettering objects. See Adjusting stitch angles
for details.

Recoloring letters on-screen


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to recolor letters on-screen.
ES Designer lets you change the color of individual letters within a lettering
object.

Tip You can also insert a color change between two letters by keying a caret
(^) symbol. Subsequent letters default to the next color in the palette. See
Creating lettering with Object Properties for details.

To recolor letters on-screen


1

Click the Lettering icon then click within the lettering object.

Select a letter (or letters) by dragging the cursor over the letter.

Drag cursor over


letter to select

Click a color on the color palette.

Press Enter.

Adjusting baselines
Baselines can be modified after placement either directly on-screen or via
the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog. With the exception
of Free Line, baselines allow you to set the final length of the finished

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

601

lettering. Once you have placed a baseline, ES Designer attempts to fit all
the letters without altering the baseline length.
Tip As a baseline is filled with letters, letter spacing decreases. Eventually,
letters may overlap. If so, you can adjust the baseline length to
accommodate them, or change the lettering width in the Object Properties
> Special > Lettering dialog.

Reshaping baselines on-screen


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape lettering baselines.
Baselines can be adjusted on-screen after they have been placed in the
design with the Reshape Object tool. Depending on the baseline type you
are working with, you can adjust baseline angles, lengths, and sizes. You
can change curve radii and justification points. You can completely reshape
Any Shape baselines.

Tip For more precise numeric control over lettering layout, use the Layout
dialog. See Adjusting straight baseline settings and Adjusting curved
baseline settings for details.

To reshape a baseline on-screen

 Select the lettering object and click the Reshape Object icon

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

602

Different control points display for different baselines.

baseline control
points

Tip The large diamond and cross represent stitching start and end
points. You may need to move them to access baseline control points.
See Reshaping individual letters on-screen for details.

 Change angles of straight baselines by dragging the solid square control


points at either end.

Drag up or down to change


baseline angle

 Create an arc baseline from a circular one by dragging the hollow square
control point apart.

Drag left or right to change


circle baseline to arc

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

603

 Change lettering orientation of arc baselines by dragging the solid


square control points at either end.

Drag along circumference to


change baseline length

Tip The exact letter positions depend on the justificationleft, center,


right or justified. If the baseline becomes too short, letter spacing is
reduced, and letters may overlap.

 Change the radius of curved baselines by dragging the solid square


control point in the center of the circle.

Drag up or down
to change radius
of curve

 Alternatively, change the radius of curved baselines by dragging the


solid square control point in the center of the baseline.

Drag up or down
to change radius
of curve

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

604

 Adjust Any Shape baselines by adding, deleting, changing or moving


reference points like any embroidery object. See also Reshaping
embroidery objects.

Left or right-click on the


baseline to add

Drag any control


point up or down

 To reshape, left-click to bend the line at an angle, right-click to bend


into a curve.

 To re-position, drag any one of the baseline control points up or


down.

Drag to change curvature

 To delete, select a control point and press Delete.


 To change straight to curve, or curve to straight, select the control
point and press Spacebar.

 Press Esc to finish.


Adjusting straight baseline settings
Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust baseline settings.
A Free Line baseline does not have a fixed or pre-determined length; the
baseline extends as long as you keep adding letters. You can adjust baseline
angle numerically. A Fixed Line baseline has a fixed length which you can
digitize or specify numerically. Various options are available to handle text

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

605

that extends beyond the baseline. See also Applying horizontal baselines
and Applying vertical baselines.

To adjust straight baseline settings


1

Double-click a selected lettering object/s.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Click to lay out


baseline

Click Layout.
The Layout dialog opens. The baseline options depend on the type of
baseline selected.

Adjust length and


angle values
Select auto
frame style

ES 2006

Select a horizontal or vertical baseline, free or fixed, from the list.

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

606

Free Line baselines allow you to adjust the Line Angle value. Fixed Line
baselines also give you control over line length as well as options for
handling text which does not fit the baseline. This is particularly useful
for multiple team names. See Team lettering for details.
4

For fixed line baselines, select an auto-frame style:

 Spacing: Letter size and width stays the same and letters are
spaced evenly along the baseline. Letters may overlap if the text is
too wide.

 Width: The width of each letter is reduced and the original spacing
kept.

 Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width and height is reduced


proportionally but the original spacing remains.

 Spacing and Width: Letter width and spacing is reduced.

 Spacing and Size (Keep Proportions): Letter width, height and


spacing is reduced proportionally.

Adjust the Length and Line Angle values as required.

 Length: Enter the default length of fixed line baselines. For free line
baselines this is not available.

 Line Angle: Enter the exact angle of the baseline to the horizontal
axis.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

607

Select a baseline position.


baseline
below

baseline
centered

baseline
above

When creating lettering for a badge, for example:

 For lettering above the badge, select a baseline below.


 For lettering below the badge, select a baseline above.
 For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a
centered baseline.
7

Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting
spacing settings for details.

Select the letter orientation. See Changing letter orientation for details.

Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special and click Apply.

Adjusting curved baseline settings


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust baseline settings.
Adjust circle and arc baseline settings for more precise numeric control over
radius (X and Y), as well as tilt, justification, and arc angles.

Tip For interactive control over lettering layout, see Reshaping baselines
on-screen.

To adjust curved baseline settings


1

ES 2006

Double-click a selected lettering object/s.

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

608

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Click to lay out


baseline

Click Layout.
The Layout dialog opens. The baseline options depend on the type of
baseline selected.

Adjust Tilt, Radius X, Radius


Y, Justification and Arc Angle
values

Select a circle or arc baseline type from the list.


The Tilt, Radius X, Radius Y, Justification Angle and Arc Angle fields
are activated.

Adjust these values as required:

 Radius X: default radius of the baseline arc (X-axis).


 Radius Y: default radius of the baseline arc (Y-axis).
radius X: 50
radius Y: 50

radius X: 100
radius Y: 50

radius X: 50
radius Y: 100

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

609

 Tilt: angle of the baseline relative to the horizontal axis.

tilt angle 0
tilt angle 45

Note The Tilt field is activated when Radius X and Radius Y values are
different.

 Justification Angle: angle of the vertical axis through the lettering


object relative to the horizontal axis.

justification
angle 90
justification
angle 45

 Arc Angle: angle between radii connecting ends of baseline to


center of arc. This constrains the baseline so the text falls within the
arc specified.

arc angle 100

arc angle 70

Select a baseline position.


baseline
below

baseline
centered

baseline
above

When digitizing lettering for a badge, for example:

ES 2006

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

610

 For lettering above the badge, select a clockwise circle or arc with
baseline below.

 For lettering below the badge, select a counterclockwise circle or arc


with baseline above.

 For horizontal lettering through the middle of the badge, select a


fixed line with baseline centered.
6

Specify the letter, word and line spacing as required. See Adjusting letter
spacing for details.

Select the letter orientation. See Changing letter orientation for details.

Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special > Lettering and


click Apply.

Changing letter orientation


You can define the rotation angle of letters relative to the baseline or the
design itself. The latter lets you keep letters vertical regardless of baseline
angle in order to achieve a staircase effect.

To change letter orientation


1

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Click to lay out


baseline

ES 2006

Click Layout to open the Layout dialog.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

611

Select an Orientation setting.

Select orientation
relative to baseline
or design

Set orientation
angle

 Baseline: orients letters relative to the lettering baseline.


 Design: orients letters relative to the horizontal.
4

Enter an orientation angle.

Baseline angle: 0
Orientation: 10 to
baseline

ES 2006

Baseline angle: 0
Orientation: 60 to
design

Click OK to return to Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog


and click Apply.

Chapter 25

Editing Embroidery Lettering

612

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch


Settings

When it comes to stitching, you can fine-tune the density, add pull
compensation and underlay, or change to center-out stitching. Like all
embroidery objects, each lettering object has its own stitch properties.
Adjust settings at any stage. ES Designer also gives you precise control over
the stitch angles of individual letters. You can also specify the join method
and stitching sequence you prefer.

This section describes changing lettering stitch types in lettering objects,


and adjusting lettering stitch angles. It also explains how to adjust the
lettering stitching sequence as well as lettering join method.
Note For information about adjusting travel run length in lettering objects,
see Adjusting travel run stitch length. For information about adjusting
lettering connector values, see Using automatic connectors.

Changing lettering stitch types


By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. You can also apply
other basic fill stitch types, such as Tatami or Zigzag, as with other
embroidery objects. See Selecting stitch types for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

613

Note Lettering values are stored in the <PRESET_LETTERING> style in the


Normal template. Changing these does not affect the values of other
objects. Do not delete or rename this style. See Working with styles for
details.

Adjusting Satin stitch settings for lettering objects


Right-click Satin (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Satin values for lettering
objects.
By default, lettering objects are filled with Satin stitch. Where a letter is
narrow, stitches are tight, thus requiring fewer stitches to cover the fabric.
Where a column is very narrow, stitches need to be less dense because too
many needle penetrations can damage the fabric. See also Creating fills with
Satin stitch.

To adjust Satin stitch settings for lettering objects


1

Double-click a selected lettering object.

Select the Fills tab.

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.


Alternatively, right-click the Satin icon with the lettering object selected.

ES 2006

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings

614

Select Satin stitch from the Stitch Type list.

Select Satin

Adjust stitch
settings

Select the type of stitch spacing you want for your lettering.

 For Fixed Spacing, clear the Auto Spacing checkbox and select a
value (in millimeters) in the Stitch Spacing field. For more open
stitching, select a higher value for decreased stitch density. See
Adjusting Satin stitch spacing for details.

 For Auto Spacing, select the Auto Spacing checkbox and specify the
amount of adjustment to make to the spacings as a % value. See
Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch for details.

Auto Spacing ON

Auto Spacing OFF

If you want to use Auto Split, select the checkbox and specify the Auto
Split Length and Auto Split Minimum Stitch values.
Note The Auto Split and Auto Jump features help you to control long
Satin stitches. See Splitting long stitches with Auto Split and Preserving
long stitches with Auto Jump for details.

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

615

Adjusting Tatami stitch settings for lettering objects


Right-click Tatami (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Tatami values for lettering
objects.
You can fill lettering shapes with Tatami stitching. It is suitable for filling
large, irregular lettering shapes. See also Creating fills with Tatami stitch.

To adjust Tatami stitch settings for lettering objects


1

Double-click a selected lettering object.

Select the Fills tab.

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.


Alternatively, right-click the Tatami icon with the lettering object
selected.
3

Select Tatami stitch from the list.

Select Tatami
Adjust stitch values

Adjust offset settings

Select backstitch type

Enter random factor

ES 2006

Adjust stitch spacing to increase or decrease density.

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings

616

Adjust stitch length to increase or decrease needle penetrations. See


Adjusting Tatami stitch spacing and length for details.

Choose a backstitch typeStandard, Borderline, or Diagonal. See


Selecting a Tatami backstitch for details.

Select the Offset Fraction option to specify how each row is offset in
order to create special embroidery effects. See Setting Tatami offset
fractions for details.

Select the Partition Lines option as an alternative method for offsetting


needle penetrations in Tatami fills. See Applying Tatami partition lines
for details.

Specify a random factor to eliminate the split line patterns formed by


regular needle penetrations. See Applying random factors for details.

10 Click Apply.

Adjusting Zigzag stitch settings for lettering objects


Right-click Zigzag (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust Zigzag values for lettering
objects.
Zigzag stitch is similar to Satin in that the needle penetrates each side of
the column. But while Satin gives a straight line followed by a diagonal,
Zigzag produces two diagonal lines, thereby producing a more open stitch.
It is generally used for decorative effect or where fewer stitches are
required. The density is determined by the stitch spacing setting. See also
Creating outlines with Zigzag stitch.

To adjust Zigzag stitch settings for lettering objects


1

Double-click a selected lettering object.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select the Fills tab.


Alternatively, right-click the Zigzag icon with the lettering object
selected.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

617

Select Zigzag stitch from the Stitch Type list.

Select Zigzag
Adjust stitch
spacing

Enter a spacing value in the Stitch Spacing field.

stitch spacing: 1.0 mm

stitch spacing: 1.5 mm

Click Apply.

Adjusting stitching sequence and join method


You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize
registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. While the Closest
Join method is recommended in most cases to minimize trims, you may
sometimes want to use the As Digitized setting with alphabets which
include multiple colors, multiple stitch types, or special effects.

Adjusting letter sequencing


Click Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust the lettering stitching sequence.
You can specify the sequence in which letters are stitched to minimize
registration problems such as on caps or difficult fabrics. For example, the
Center Out option is especially useful when stitching on caps. There are
also options for multiple lines of lettering which are useful for machines
without trimmers.

To adjust letter sequencing


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings

618

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Click Sequence

Click Sequence.
The Sequence dialog opens.

Adjust single line


stitching sequence

Adjust multiple line


stitching sequence

Select a stitching sequence. Options include:

 In Line: Select whether you want the lettering to be stitched


left-to-right or right-to-left in each line.

stitched right-to-left

stitched left-to-right

 Center Out: Select this checkbox if you want the lettering stitched
from the center out. You can specify that one side of the center is
stitched followed by the other, or that each letter is stitched
alternatively on either side of the center.

right side stitched first

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

left side stitched first

619

 Line by Line: Choose whether you want multiple lines of lettering


to stitch top-to-bottom or bottom-to-top. You can also specify that
the first line should be stitched left-to-right, and the second
right-to-left.
stitched
top-to-bottom

stitched
bottom-to-top

Note You can combine both In Line and Line by Line sequencing
options.
4

Click OK to return to the Special tab.

Click Apply.
Tip Travel through your design to check the stitching sequence. See
Traveling by stitches for details.

Changing lettering join method


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to change the lettering join stitch method.
The lettering stitch method is preset to
give the best results for each alphabet. In
most cases, Closest Join is
recommended in order to minimize trims.
See Standard Alphabets for details.
The As Digitized setting is used with
alphabets which include multiple colors or
special effects. Such alphabets may include machine functions, as for
two-color alphabets, or run stitches as part of the cover stitching.
Lettering objects normally consist of one stitch type only. However, the As
Digitized join method together with Original Stitch Values setting can be
used with special fonts which combine several stitch typese.g. Satin with
Run, or Tatami, or Motifs.

To adjust lettering join method


1

ES 2006

Right-click the Lettering icon or double-click selected lettering object/s.

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings

620

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.


2

Click Sequence.
The Sequence dialog opens.

Select join method


Select Original Stitch
Values

Select a join method from the list:

 Bottom Join: Letters are joined along the baseline. Use it when
stitching on towellingjoins are hidden in the pile.

 Closest Join: Letters are joined at the closest point. Use it to


minimize trims.

 As Digitized: Letters are stitched out the same way they were
originally digitized. Use it with alphabets combining different fill
stitch types or special effects.

Bottom Join

Closest Join

As Digitized

Select the Original Stitch Values checkbox as required.


This setting is only available if the As Digitized join type is selected.
Select it when using special fonts which combine several stitch types. If
not selected, these letters will be stitched with a single stitch type.

Closest Join selected

As Digitized but Original


Stitch Values not selected

As Digitized and Original


Stitch Values selected

Tip For the recommended stitch and join methods, see Standard
Alphabets.

ES 2006

Click OK to return to the Special tab.

Click Apply.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

621

Adjusting lettering underlay settings


Right-click Auto Underlay (Stitch Types toolbar) to adjust lettering underlay
settings.
Lettering appearance and quality depends a lot on underlay which serves as
a foundation for the cover stitching. As well as stabilizing, underlay also
provides loft, raising cover stitches and preventing them from sinking into
soft fabrics. It can also prepare a napped fabric by flattening it. Most
lettering used in designs is 15 mm high or less. The columns at such sizes
are less than 3 mm wide for normalnot heavy or blockfonts. Such
objects are best served with a single Center Run or Edge Run underlay.
Center Run places a row of stitches along the center of a column. Edge Run
places stitches around the edge of each column. Large letters for jacket
backs and so on, can of course use a second layer of underlay.
Double-zigzag is sometimes used to give added loft. See also Strengthening
and stabilizing with automatic underlays.

Edge Run underlays for lettering and branched objects also provide a Weld
option. When activated, underlay is applied to the lettering object as a
whole, rather than segment-by-segment. This means there should be no
overlaps where segments join.

To adjust lettering underlay settings

ES 2006

Select a lettering object.

Right-click the Auto Underlay icon.

Chapter 26

Adjusting Lettering Stitch Settings

622

The Object Properties > Underlay dialog opens.

Select 1st underlay and


optionally select Weld
Select Edge Run
(or Center Run)
Adjust fixed or
variable run length

Select the First Underlay checkbox and select Center Run or Edge Run
as the First underlay type.
Tip If you select Edge Run, a further Weld option becomes available.
When activated, underlay is applied to the lettering object as a whole.
This means there is no duplication where two objects overlap.

Enter the required length values for each underlay type.


See Adjusting Center Run and Edge Run underlay settings for details.

Click Apply.

Tip Run Slow Redraw to see how the underlay will stitch out. See
Redrawing the stitching sequence slowly for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

623

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

Add special characters and symbols to


your lettering. Create interesting
distortions using lettering envelopes. Add
attractive borders such as rectangles,
ovals, and shields. Use the Team Names
feature to create designs with multiple
names. For example, use the same logo
with different names for sports teams or
corporate uniforms without having to
create multiple copies of the same design.
This section shows you how to add special
characters and symbols. It describes how to create special effects with
envelopes. It also covers adding borders to lettering, as well as setting up
team lettering designs.

Adding special characters and symbols


Embroidery and TrueType fonts generally contain many more characters
than are available via your keyboard. In ES Designer, you can add special
characters and symbols directly through the Select Symbols dialog or by
means of the Windows Character Map.

Inserting symbols
Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add special characters and symbols.
Right-click to select lettering options.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

624

You can quickly add special characters and symbols to your lettering
designs.

Tip If you know the keyboard shortcut for a symbol, add it to your lettering
by entering the combination on-screen or in the Object Properties >
Special > Lettering dialog.

To insert symbols
1

Right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Click Insert
Symbol

ES 2006

Click Insert Symbol.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

625

The Symbol Selection dialog opens.


Show characters
Show pictures

Show pictures and


characters

Select alphabet
or symbol set

Select
symbols

Selected symbols
displayed
Click to add
Click to close

Click to delete

Select an alphabet or symbol set from the Symbol Set list.

Select the symbols you want to use.


The selected symbols are displayed in the Selection field.

Click Make Current.


The selected symbols are displayed in the text entry panel of the Object
Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
Note Click Delete to remove symbols displayed in the Selection field
as required.

ES 2006

Click Apply.

Continue creating the lettering object in the normal way. See Creating
lettering with Object Properties for details.

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

626

Using the Character Map


Use the Windows Character Map to provide quick access to common
symbols and letters. The Character Map is usually installed as part of the
Windows setup. See your Windows documentation for more details.

To use the Character Map


1

Open the Windows Character Map.


By default, you will find it under Start > Programs > Accessories >
System Tools > Character Map.

Select font
Select symbols
or double-click

Click to
copy
Selected symbols
displayed

Click to
select

Select a font from the Font list.

Double-click a character, or select it and press Select.

Click Copy to copy the character to the clipboard.

Paste it into the text entry panel of the Object Properties > Special >
Lettering dialog.

The character/s appear in the Characters to copy field.

To do this, click inside the text entry panel and press Ctrl+V.
Tip You can also paste characters and symbols into an external graphics
program to use as the basis for creating your own custom characters.
See Digitizing custom letters for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

627

Creating special effects with envelopes


Apply Envelope effects to lettering objects to make them bulge or arch,
stretch or compress.

Bridge

Pennant

Perspective

Diamond

Distorting lettering objects


Use Envelope (Edit menu) to create special effects with envelopes.
Four types of Envelope effect are availableBridge, Pennant, Perspective
and Diamond.
Tip Envelopes are typically applied to lettering objects, but they can also
be applied to other types of embroidery object.

To distort lettering objects


1

Select the lettering object you want to distort.


Tip To apply an envelope to several objects, group them first, then
apply the envelope. See Grouping and ungrouping objects for details.

Select Edit > Envelope.

Select an envelope type from among the following alternatives:

Bridge

Pennant

Perspective

Diamond

Different handles display around the object outline depending on the


envelope type.
Bridge reshape
handles

ES 2006

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

628

Drag one or more handles up or down to distort the object.


Drag

 To move two handles in opposite directions, hold the Shift key down
while dragging a handle.
Shift + drag

 To move the handles in the same direction, hold down the Ctrl key
while dragging a handle.
Ctrl + drag

Press Esc to finish.

Editing text in envelopes


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit letters in envelopes on-screen.
You can edit the lettering text in envelopes on-screen in the same way as
normal lettering. When you click inside the lettering, a duplicate displays
below the envelope.

To edit text in envelopes


1

Click the Lettering icon with the lettering object in an envelope


selected.
Duplicate letters appear below the selected shape in their original form.
The cursor changes to an I-beam and appears after the last letter.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

629

Click inside the duplicate lettering object and edit text as required.

Add letters at
I-beam cursor

Press Enter

Press Enter to complete.


The lettering in the envelope is updated.

Removing envelopes
Use Envelope > Delete (Edit menu) return an object to its original shape by removing
the envelope.
Return an object to its original shape by removing the envelope.

To remove envelopes

 Select the lettering object.


 Select Edit > Envelope > Delete.
The envelope is removed and the letters return to their original shape.

Team lettering
The Team Names feature lets you create designs with multiple names. For
example, you can use the same logo with different names for sports teams
or corporate uniforms without having to create multiple copies of the same
design. When you use Team Names, you create a variable lettering object,

ES 2006

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

630

and associate names with it. Names are stored in lists that can be accessed
from any design. You can add to these lists, or remove names at any time.

Depending on how you want to stitch out, you can choose to save and stitch
the names and designs separately, or together.

Creating name groups


Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to create name groups.
Create a new name group to associate a list of names with Team Names
objects. Once you create a group, the names in it are available to all
designs.
Note Team Names groups are stored in the Namedrop.emn file in your
installations ...\res folder. If the file becomes corrupted, copy
ESWin\bin\namedrop.emn to ESWin\res\namedrop.emn. This will
restore Team Names groups to the default settings.

To create a name group


1

Click the Team Names icon.


The Team Names dialog opens.

Add new
group

ES 2006

Click Add in the Group panel.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

631

The Group Name dialog opens.

Enter group
name

Gaelic Football Club

Enter a name for the group and click OK.


The new group name appears in the Group list. The Group Members
panel remains empty until you add names to it.

new group

Gaelic Football Club

Add members to the group as required:

 See Adding individual members to name groups for details.


 See Adding multiple members to name groups for details.
5

Click OK.

Adding individual members to name groups


Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to add individual members to a group.
You can add members to a group one-by-one or as a entire group. See also
Adding multiple members to name groups.

To add individual members to a name group


1

ES 2006

Click the Team Names icon.

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

632

The Team Names dialog opens.


Select group

Gaelic Football Club

Add new
member

Select a group from the Group list, or create a new one. See Creating
name groups for details.

Click Add in the Group Members panel.


The Group Member Add/Edit dialog opens.

ES 2006

Michael

Add first name

Patrick

Add second name

Fitzpatrick

Add third name

Enter the first name of the member in the Name 1 field.

Optionally, enter second and third names as required.

Click OK.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

633

The name is added to the Group Members list.

Gaelic Football Club

name added

Michael

Patrick

Fitzpatrick

Adding multiple members to name groups


Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to add multiple members to a group.
You can add members to a group one-by-one or as a entire group. See also
Adding individual members to name groups.

To add multiple members to a name group


1

Click the Team Names icon.


The Team Names dialog opens.

Select group

Gaelic Football Club

Select Quick
Names

ES 2006

Select a group from the Group list, or create a new one. See Creating
name groups for details.

Click Quick Names.

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

634

The Quick Names dialog opens.

Michael,Patrick,Fitzpatrick
Patrick,Simon,Fitzsimons
Simon,Gerald,Fitzgerald
Gerald, Roy, Fitzroy
Roy,John, Fitzjohn
John, Maurice, Fitzmaurice
Maurice,Henry,Fitzhenry

Enter names

Enter the names in the format Name 1, Name 2, Name 3.


You can type the names, or paste them in from a text file. Each name
must be separated by a comma. Each complete name must be on a new
line.

Click OK.
The new names are added to the Group Members list.

Gaelic Football Club

names added

Add/edit/delete
names

Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice

Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Henry

Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry

Tip Edit the list by using Add, Delete and Edit.

Creating team name designs


Use Team Names (Input toolbar) to associate multiple names with a design.
To associate multiple names with a design, you create a variable Team
Names object. Names are stored together in groups. You can select names
from an existing group or create a new one.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

635

To create a team name design


1

Open the design you want to use.

Click the Team Names icon.


The Team Names dialog opens.

Select group

Add all or
selected names

Gaelic Football Club

Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice

Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Henry

Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry

Select a group from the Group list.


The names display in the Group Members list. See also Creating name
groups and Adding multiple members to name groups.

Select names to associate with the design from the Group Members
list.

 To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select.


 To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select.
5

Click Add to add them to the Team Members list.


Alternatively, to associate all names in the group, click Add All.
Selected names are copied to the Team Members list. The Naming
Order defaults to Name 1, Name 2, Name 3.
Tip When you click Add, names are appended to the Team Members
list. Clicking Add repeatedly means that a fresh copy of the selected
name or names is appended each time.

ES 2006

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

636

In the Team Members list, edit members as required.

 To sort team member names alphabetically, select a column by


clicking the button at the top of the column. To select multiple
columns, hold down Ctrl as you select.

 To change the stitching order, select a name and click Up or Down.


 To remove a name from the list, select it, and click Remove. To clear
all names from the Members Selected list, click Remove All.
7

Set Naming Order options as requirede.g.

 To stitch only first and third names, select Name 1 and Name 3 in
columns one and two.

 To stitch names in reverse order, select Name 3, Name 2, and


Name 1 in columns one, two and three.
Gaelic Football Club

Set naming
order options

Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice

Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice
Henry

Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry

Michael
Patrick
Simon
Gerald
Roy
John
Maurice

Fitzpatrick
Fitzsimons
Fitzgerald
Fitzroy
Fitzjohn
Fitzmaurice
Fitzhenry

Click to sort
names
alphabetically

Remove all or
selected names
Adjust lettering
format

To adjust lettering format settings, click Show Properties.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens. The text
entry panel is grayed out, indicating that you are entering lettering by a
different method to normal.
Text entry panel
grayed out

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

637

Tip You have the opportunity to change the settings after the names
are stitched, but it is quicker to set them at this stage. If the design
already contains Team Member objects, Show Properties is disabled.
9

Adjust the settings as required. See Creating lettering with Object


Properties for details.

10 Click Apply.
11 Click OK in the Team Names dialog.
Depending on your baseline selection, you may be prompted to enter
reference points. See Applying baselines for details.
ES Designer generates stitches for all names in the Team Members list.
The associated Team Members dialog opens automatically, the first
Team Member name in the list is selected and is visible in the design
window.

Simon
Patrick
Michael
Gerald
Maurice
John
Roy

Fitzgerald
Fitzsimons
Fitzpatrick
Fitzroy
Fitzhenry
Fitzmaurice
Fitzjohn

Select names to
view on-screen

12 Select names one-by-one from the Team List to view them together
with the design.

Viewing and modifying individual team names


Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Team Members display on/off.
Use it to view and edit individual team names.
You can preview individual team names in the design window as they will be
stitched out with the design. Set individual properties for each name.

ES 2006

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

638

To view and modify team names


1

Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team
name designs.

Click the Team List icon.


The Team Members dialog opens. By default all member names are
selected.

Simon
Patrick
Michael
Gerald
Maurice
John
Roy

Fitzgerald
Fitzsimons
Fitzpatrick
Fitzroy
Fitzhenry
Fitzmaurice
Fitzjohn

Click to select
column

Select name to
view on-screen

Simon
Patrick
Michael
Gerald
Maurice
John
Roy

Fitzgerald
Fitzsimons
Fitzpatrick
Fitzroy
Fitzhenry
Fitzmaurice
Fitzjohn

Click to sort
selected names
alphabetically

View properties of
selected names

Tip By default a space is inserted between Name 1 and Name 2. To


remove this space, set the Word Spacing value in the Layout dialog to
0%. See Adjusting letter spacing for details.
3

View team names in any of the following ways:

 Select a team member name. The selected name displays on-screen


with the current lettering properties.

 Use the arrows keys to scroll up and down the list to view each name
in turn.

 To sort team member names alphabetically, click the tab at the top
of a column to select, then click the Sort button.
4

ES 2006

To view and/or edit a selected team members object properties, select


a name then click Show Properties.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

639

The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Simon Fitzgerald

Edit text for


individual name

Adjust settings for


individual names

Adjust the settings as required and click Apply.


The lettering updates automatically. See Creating lettering with Object
Properties for details.

For additional reshaping on-screen, do one of the followings:

 Edit a selected name on-screen as you would any other lettering


object.
Team Names lets you do this without having to save the name as
separate design. Most important is the ability to manually adjust
lettering kerning. See Editing Embroidery Lettering for details.

 Adjust the lettering baseline as you would any other lettering object.
Most important is the ability to select an auto-frame style for fixed
line baselines. See Adjusting straight baseline settings for details.
7

To copy the object properties of one selected team member to all team
members, click Apply to All.

To add members to the list, click Add.


The Team Names dialog opens. You can add further names to the list
from the current Team Names group or any other group. See Creating
team name designs for details.

ES 2006

To delete members from the list, click Delete.

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

640

10 Click X in the top corner of the dialog to close.

All team member names


visibleonly the one on
top selected

Note When the Team Members dialog is closed, all team member
names become visible but the one on top is selected in the design
window.

Modifying team names by column


Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Team Members display on/off.
Use it to view and edit individual team names.
Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to edit lettering on-screen.
You can easily set properties, such as font, size or color for an entire column
of names. For example, you might want to highlight the given name in a
particular way.

To modify team names by column

ES 2006

Open the Team Names design you want to use. See also Creating team
name designs.

Click the Team List icon.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

641

The Team Members dialog opens. By default all member names are
selected.

Click to select
column

Simon
Patrick
Michael
Gerald
Maurice
John
Roy

Fitzgerald
Fitzsimons
Fitzpatrick
Fitzroy
Fitzhenry
Fitzmaurice
Fitzjohn

Click the tab at the top of a column and right-click the Lettering icon.
The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Text entry panel


grayed out

Select alphabet

Adjust settings for all


names in column

Adjust the settings as required and click Apply.


The lettering for the entire column updates automatically. See Creating
lettering with Object Properties for details.

ES 2006

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

642

Creating individual designs with team names


Use Team List (Standard toolbar) to toggle Team Members display on/off.
Use it to view and edit individual team names.
You can create individual designs from each name in a Team Names design.
The name will still be included in the original.

To create individual designs with team names


1

Open the Team Names design you want to use.

Click the Team List icon.

See also Creating team name designs.


The Team Members dialog opens. By default all member names are
selected.

Select names
to use

Simon
Patrick
Michael
Gerald
Maurice
John
Roy

Fitzgerald
Fitzsimons
Fitzpatrick
Fitzroy
Fitzhenry
Fitzmaurice
Fitzjohn

Click to create
individual designs

Select names you want to use.

 To select multiple names, hold down Ctrl as you select.


 To select a range of names, hold down Shift as you select.
 To select all names in the list, click Select All.
4

To create individual embroidery designs for each selected team member,


click Create Design(s).
A new design is created for each selected name. The name is now a
normal lettering object.

ES 2006

Click the Save icon to open the Save As dialog.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

643

Enter a new name for the design and click Save.

Creating a matrix of team name designs


The Team Names Matrix feature allows you to automatically create a
matrix for all names in a team name object together with their
corresponding design. You have the option to minimize the number of color
changes created by the matrix operation. The operation also attempts to
minimize the number of jumps. A team name object must be present in the
design to activate the feature.

To create a matrix of team name designs

ES 2006

Open the team name design you want to use. See also Creating team
name designs.

Select the entire design if you want to process the design together with
the team name object.

Select Arrange > Team Name Matrix.

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

644

The Team Names Matrix dialog opens.

Adjust row and


column settings

Adjust hoop width


and height

Calculated fields
based on hoop size,
and row and column
settings
Select to minimize
color changes

Select stitching
sequence

 The Team Names field derives from the actual number of names
included in the design.

 The Rows field is calculated from Hoop Height divided by Row


Height. Similarly the Columns field is calculated from Hoop Width
divided by Column Width.

 The Output Files field is calculated from the number of team names
divided by rows X columns, rounded up to the nearest whole
number.
Note All calculated fields are updated when you change any of the
height and width settings.
4

Set the hoop height and width to suit the requirements of the hoop you
are using.
These settings are remembered within a session but the defaults are
loaded whenever you launch ES Designer.

Set the row height and column width within the selected hoop settings.
These settings are based on the design height and width properties.
Increase them if you want to enlarge the gap between designs. Minimum
and maximum settings: 2.50 mm and 999.99 mm.

Select a Sequence option.


Each option indicates a possible stitch sequence for the entire matrix.
The red square indicates the starting point and the arrow shows the
direction of the stitching sequence.

ES 2006

Select the Minimize Color Changes checkbox as required.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

645

When selected, provided the team name object has more than one color,
the entire matrix is resequenced by color.

Click OK.
A new file is created containing the number of team names that will fit
into the specified hoopi.e. the number of rows multiplied by the
number of columns, or less. If the number of team names exceeds this
value, another file is created to accommodate the additional names. The
total number of files created is given by the Output Files field.

Outputting team name designs


When you output a Team Names design, you need to define how it is to be
generated as a stitch file. You can generate files that include:

 both the design and the names


 design in one file and names in another, or
 design and names in individual files.
You set these options whenever you save the file in stitch format or output
it to machine.

To output team name designs


1

Create a Team Names design or open an existing one.

Select File > Save As and select a stitch format from the Save As Type
list.

Click Options.
The Save Options > Team Names dialog opens.

ES 2006

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

646

Note Options is also available when you output designs. See also
Stitching designs with Stitch Manager.

Select a Save option:

 Design and Team Names with stops: creates a single stitch file
including one copy of the design and all names.
Stops are inserted after the design, and between the
namesi.e. Design Stop TeamMember1 Stop TeamMember2
Stop, etc.

 Repeated Design and Team Names with stops: creates a single


stitch file with multiple copies of the design, and all names.
Stops are inserted after each static design/name
combinatione.g. Design + TeamMember1 Stop
Design + TeamMember2 Stop.

 Create multiple output files: creates separate files for each name,
each of which includes a copy of the static part of the design.
When stitching to ES Machine Manager, each file is queued
separately.

 Design part only: creates a file containing only the static part of the
design.

 Team Names only with stops: creates a single file containing only
the names, separated by stops. This means that after each machine
stop, you can change frames.
If you have selected Team Names only with stops, you have a further
two options:

 Select Follow Auto Start/End Menu to set the start/end point for
each name.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

647

As with any design, the needle should return to a known position


before a frame change. This ensures that the next name is stitched
in the correct position. See Setting automatic start and end points
for details.

 Select Based on justification to set the start/end point for each


name according to its lettering justification, as follows:
Justification

Auto Start / End Point

Align Left

Bottom Left

Center

Bottom Middle

Align Right

Bottom Right

Justify

Bottom Left

Click OK to return to the Save As dialog.

Click Save.
You are prompted with a confirmation message.

ES 2006

Click OK.

Chapter 27

Special Lettering Features

648

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

Turn any TrueType font installed on your system into an embroidery


alphabet. Typically spacing between certain character pairs appears uneven
due to the optical illusion of having straight lines and curves side-by-side.
Automatic kerning is a user-defined option allowing you to customize
kerning. Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve
its appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. ES Designer lets
you save the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple
versions of the same letter within the same alphabet. You can even create
your own custom alphabets. Alternatively, modify an existing alphabet for
special applications. Merge letters from two or more alphabets with the
stand-alone alphabet merging utility.

This section describes how to create new alphabets from TrueType fonts.
Automatic letter kerning and user-refined alphabets are explained. The
section also describes how to create and modify your own custom alphabets
and letters. Alphabet merging is also explained.

Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets


The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any TrueType font
installed on your system to an embroidery alphabet. You can do this on the

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

649

fly or convert entire fonts for later use. This is an important feature for
Asian alphabets which may contain several thousands of characters.

The process is fully automatic. Lettering shapes are cut into Input A or
Input B embroidery objects. Overlaps and stroke order are detected and
stitch angles defined. The result is similar to manually digitized alphabets
although the quality may not be quite as high. The quality greatly depends
on the original shapes, narrower serif type alphabets producing better
results than blocked alphabets.

Converting individual TrueType letters


Use Lettering (Input toolbar) to add TrueType lettering directly on-screen.
Right-click to set the formatting values for new or selected lettering objects.
You can convert individual TrueType letters on the fly and add them directly
to a design through the Object Properties dialog.

To convert individual TrueType letters


1

Right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Enter text

Select TT font
Set conversion
values

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

650

Select a TrueType font from the Alphabet list.

Enter the text you want to embroider in the text entry panel.
Alternatively, type it directly on-screen after adjusting the conversion
settings.
Note The more letters you enter, the more time needed to convert
them.

Click TTF Conversion.


The Conversion Values dialog opens.

Select lettering
style
Select Turning
Strokes for variable
stitch angle

Select Complex Fill


for fixed stitch angle

Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select.
Values are automatically set according to the selected alphabet.
5

Select the lettering style you want to create from the Styles
listRegular, Bold, Bold Italic or Italic.
Note The Style panel is not available for some fonts.

ES 2006

If you want the stitching to follow the contours of the letters, select
Turning Strokes. Otherwise select Complex Fill.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

651

The Turning Strokes option has preset values adjusted for the
particular alphabet style. The Complex Fill option lets you adjust the
stitch angle.

Turning Strokes

Complex Fill
stitch angle 0

Complex Fill
stitch angle 30

Select the Match Ends checkbox to keep stitch angles parallel to the end
of the stroke.
Note This option will override any corner detection and corner fraction
where parallel stitching applies.

Match Ends OFF

Match Ends
ONstitches
parallel to baseline

Tip Stitch angles in strokes should normally be perpendicular to the


stroke, but the exceptions are letters like K, X, Y with short slanted
strokes. In these cases it is better to keep the stitch angle parallel to the
end of the stroke.
8

Select the Break Angle checkbox to apply a cap to sharp angles.


This effect is similar to Smart Cornersif the stroke bends sharply, like
the letter A or V, it will be split or capped.

Break Angle
OFFno split

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

Break Angle 87

652

Select the Create Overlaps checkbox to prevent gaps forming between


segments.
You can fine-tune the overlaps by setting values in the T junctions and
O junctions fields.

Create Overlaps
OFF

Create Overlaps
ON

10 Select the Separate Serifs checkbox if you are converting a serif font.

Separate Serifs
OFF

Separate Serifs
ON

Tip As the serifs are made into separate strokes, this option is better
used with larger lettering where serifs are greater than 0.8 mm in
breadth.
11 Fine-tune processing of corners with these settings:

 Corner Detection Angle specifies the angle which will identify a


corner in the letter. This is more important for getting well-defined
small letters. Note, however, that ES Designer automatically inserts
stitch angles where needed in order to obtain smooth turning
stitches. These generally occur at locations where the shape
changes significantly in direction or width.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

653

 Corner Fraction specifies fractional spacing at corners. It is used to


create smooth transitions of stitch angle at corners, shape ends, or
where a shape changes in width or curvature significantly.

Corner Detection Angle 150


Corner Fraction 0.6 mm

Corner Detection Angle 30


Corner Fraction 1.0 mm

12 Click OK to return to the Object Properties > Special > Lettering


dialog.
13 Click Apply.
14 Click the entry point.

 If you have already entered text in the Lettering dialog, lettering


outlines are created directly.

 If not, type the letters on-screen and press Enter to create the
lettering outlines.
15 Select Stitch > Generate Stitches or press G.

Converting complete TrueType fonts


Use Convert TrueType Font (Special menu) to convert a TrueType font into an
embroidery alphabet.
The Convert TrueType Font feature lets you convert any suitable TrueType
font installed on your system into an embroidery alphabet. Converted letters
can be filled with parallel or turning stitches.

Note The conversion usually only takes a few minutes, although Asian fonts
may take longer.

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

654

To convert a complete TrueType font


1

Select Special > Alphabet > Convert TrueType Font.


The Convert TrueType Font dialog opens.

Select font
Select font style

Set values

Enter font
name
Choose
character set

Select the font to be converted and font style.

Arial Regular

Arial Bold

Arial Italic

Click Conversion Values.


The Conversion Values dialog opens. See Converting individual
TrueType letters for details.
Tip Click Suggest Values if you are not sure which options to select.
Values are automatically set according to the selected alphabet.

Enter a Font Name if you want to overwrite the default.

Choose whether to convert standard or extended character sets.


The standard character set contains alphanumeric characters only. It
excludes punctuation marks and other special characters.

ES 2006

Click OK.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

655

When the font has been converted, the Convert TrueType Font dialog
confirms.
7

Click OK.

To check that the alphabet has been created, right-click the Lettering
icon to open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.
The newly converted TrueType font will be selected by default. You can
now use it in the same way as other embroidery alphabets.

Converting between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes


Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to convert between Complex Fill and
Turning Strokes.
When you convert TrueType fonts to embroidery lettering, the letters can be
filled with parallel or turning stitches. You can convert between Complex Fill
and Turning Strokes at any stage.

To convert between Complex Fill and Turning Strokes


1

Digitize a lettering object using Convert TrueType Font. See To convert


individual TrueType letters for details.

Select the lettering object.

Complex Fill with


stitch angle of 0

Right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

TrueType font appears


in Alphabet list
Set conversion
values

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

656

Click TTF Conversion.


The Conversion Values dialog opens.

Select Turning
Strokes for variable
stitch angle

Select Complex Fill


for fixed stitch angle

Specify whether the letters will be converted as Turning Strokes or


Complex Fill.

 If Turning Strokes is selected, select the required options.


 If Complex Fill is selected, enter the stitch angle.
See To convert individual TrueType letters for details.
6

Click OK to return to the Object Properties > Special > Lettering


dialog.

Click Apply.

letters converted to
Turning Strokes

Automatic letter kerning


The purpose of the automatic kerning feature is to improve lettering
appearance and legibility by fine-tuning spacings between letter pairs.
Typically spacing between certain pairs appears uneven due to the optical

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

657

illusion of having straight lines and curves side-by-side. Automatic kerning


is a user-defined option allowing you to customize kerning.

Applying automatic kerning


Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to adjust automatic kerning for selected
lettering objects.
The automatic kerning option is accessed by means of the Object
Properties dialog.

To apply automatic kerning


1

Double-click a lettering object.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select or deselect
auto kerning

Scroll down to the Spacing panel.


If a kerning table exists for the selected alphabet or TrueType font, the
Auto Kerning checkbox is enabled and selected by default.

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

658

Select or deselect Auto Kerning as required and click Apply.

Note If the Auto Kerning checkbox is disabled, no kerning table exists


for the selected alphabet or TrueType font, or all the kerning values are
set to zero. See Managing user-refined letters for details.

Managing kerning tables


Use Object Properties (Standard toolbar) to access kerning tables.
A kerning table is an array of kerning values for every possible pair of letters
in the alphabet. The Kerning Table command accesses a dialog used to
manage kerning tables. You can copy tables from one alphabet or TrueType
font to an embroidery alphabet or remove its kerning table altogether.
Note TrueType kerning tables cannot be replaced, added to, or modified in
any way. You can, however, convert a TrueType font to an embroidery
alphabet and add or modify a kerning table as required.

To manage kerning tables


1

Open the Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog.

Select alphabet
Click to access
kerning table

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

659

Select an alphabet from the dropdown list.

Scroll down to the Spacing panel and click the Kerning Table button.
The Kerning Table dialog opens with the current (target) embroidery
alphabet displayed.

Current (target)
alphabet

Choose similar
alphabet or font

Copy kerning
table to current
alphabet

The Choose Source dropdown list displays all alphabets and TrueType
fonts that contain kerning tables.
Note The Zero Table command is enabled if the current (target)
alphabet already has a kerning table. If you click this button, you are
prompted to confirm removal of kerning information.
4

Choose a suitable alphabet or TrueType font from the list and click Copy
Source to Table to load its kerning table to the current embroidery
alphabet.
If the current alphabet already contains a kerning table, you are
prompted to overwrite it.

Editing kerning values


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects, edit stitch
angles, and adjust start/end points.
You have created a lettering object which has Automatic Kerning toggled
ON.

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

660

To edit kerning values


1

Select a lettering object with automatic kerning and click the Reshape
icon.

Click the diamond control point in the centre of the letter.

Drag selected letter/s along the baseline or use arrow keys to adjust the
spacing. See Adjusting individual letter spacing on-screen for details.
Tip Alternatively, to move multiple letters, right-click the diamond
control point of the first letter and drag. All letters to the end of the line
move as one.

Repeat as many times as necessary to fine-tune all letter spacings in the


object.

Select one or more blocks of contiguous letters by Ctrl-clicking their


diamond control points or dragging a selection box around them.
Each block may contain two or more letters.

Select Special > Alphabet > Update Kerning Values.


You are prompted with a confirmation message box stating that the
operation will affect letter spacing of new lettering objects.

Click OK.
A new kerning value is generated for each contiguous pair of selected
letters of the same alphabet or font, and written to the associated
kerning table.

User-refined alphabets
Sometimes you find that you want to reshape a letter to improve its
appearance, perhaps to suit a particular lettering height. ES Designer lets
you save the letter as an alternative version. In fact you can save multiple
versions of the same letter within the same alphabet. Each version can have

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

661

a unique height range. When using the letter in a design, the height setting
will automatically determine which version is used. The feature thereby
allows you to permanently record fixes to particular lettering problems and
thereafter automatically apply them.
Note The software preserves all user-refined alphabet letters when a new
version is installed. Only factory default letters are overwritten. Similarly all
user-refined alphabets are preserved unchanged.

Saving user-refined letters


Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape selected objects, edit stitch
angles, and adjust start/end points.
User-refined letters are saved via the Save Letter option. This is enabled
only if an alphabet letter or converted and/or reshaped TrueType font letter
is currently highlighted in the design window or selected in Reshape mode.
One and only one letter may be saved at a time. In the example below, the
letter a tends to close over at reduced sizes. You may want to open it up.
By saving it as a user-refined letter, any changes made will be automatically
applied to new lettering objects using the alphabet in the specified size
range.

Default a too narrow at smaller size

Letter a opened up at
smaller size

To save a user-refined letter


1

ES 2006

Create a lettering object using the embroidery alphabet letters or a


TrueType font. See Creating Embroidery Lettering for details.

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

662

Size the lettering object and reshape the letter as required. See
Reshaping individual letters on-screen for details.

Select modified letter

Tip The Stitch Angle and Reshape Object tools let you add, delete,
or adjust stitch angles in lettering objects. See Adjusting stitch angles
for details.
3

With the letter selected (by clicking the diamond control point), select
Special > Alphabet > Save Letter.
The Save User-Refined Letter dialog opens.

Specify the
height range

Name the new


version

Set the height range for the letter:

 All: the letter will be used at all letter heights (effectively replacing
the factory default).

 Greater than: the letter will only be at heights greater than that
specified.

 Less than: the letter will only be at heights less than that specified.
5

ES 2006

Give the new letter a unique name that you can easily identifyby
default, the new version is given the name User 1.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

663

If the name has already been used for that letter, you will be prompted
to overwrite the existing saved letter. You can use the same name for
other letters.
6

Click OK.
A confirmation message appears when the letter has been saved. Note
that changes to the selected letter are not automatically applied to the
current lettering object.
default letter a

modified
letter a

Changes applied to
both letters

Select to use
user-refined letters

To apply changes to all the same letters in the selected object, select the
Use saved version checkbox in the Object Properties > Special >
Lettering dialog and click Apply. See also Selecting alphabets.

Managing user-refined letters


User-refined letters are managed via the Manage User-Refined Letters
option. This menu item is only enabled when a lettering object with an
alphabet containing user-refined letters is currently selected.

To manage user-refined letters


1

ES 2006

While the letter is selected, select Special > Alphabet > Manage
User-Refined Letters.

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

664

The Manage User-Refined Lettering dialog opens.

Scroll to next or
previous letter
Click and
rename version
as required

Swap height ranges


by moving selected
version up or down

Select letter version to


include in alphabet

Adjust height range for the


selected letter version

The name of the alphabet is shown at the top of the dialog. If the
alphabet is a TrueType font, the TT font symbol is shown before the
name.

 The original factory default letter is identified by the name Factory.


For converted TrueType font letters, the word Convert appears
instead of Factory. These labels cannot be edited.

 With embroidery alphabets generated entirely by you, the original


digitized letter is named User 1 by default. Every version of the
letter, including the original, is editable.
2

Use the left and right arrow buttons or dropdown list to select a
user-refined letter in the current alphabet.

Make any of the following modifications:

 Click and rename any of the versions, except Factory or Convert,


as required.

 Delete any selected version name except Factory by clicking Delete.


If the letter is a TrueType font conversion, all versions may be
deleted. If the letter is user-definedi.e. non-Wilcomyou can
delete all versions except one.

 Deselect the Use checkbox of any version if you dont want to


include it in the alphabet but dont want to delete it. When
deselected, the size range formerly occupied by the letter is
distributed evenly between the closest neighboring versions which
have their Use checkbox checked.
4

ES 2006

Adjust the height range for the selected version of the letter by moving
the slider bars.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

665

The height is shown in the current units set in the Regional Options of
your PC. These can only be changed via the Control Panel.
5

Swap height ranges of the selected version of the letter with the Move
Up and Move Down buttons.

Click OK to confirm changes.

Creating custom alphabets


You digitize letters for a custom alphabet just like other embroidery objects.
Custom letters can be made up of multiple objects, and may be letters,
numbers, symbols or pictures. You can use artwork from sources such as
calligraphy books to create alphabet letters.

Note You can also create new alphabets by converting TrueType fonts. See
also Converting TrueType fonts to embroidery alphabets.

Choosing artwork to create custom alphabets


You can use artwork to create alphabet letters in the same way you do other
objects. Before digitizing, however, establish whether the letter shapes are
suitable for embroidery, and determine reference height and baseline for the
alphabet.
Warning Because of copyright laws, you cannot simply select letters from
an existing embroidery alphabet and save them directly to another
alphabet.

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

666

Letter shapes
For best results, letter columns should be of similar width, without tight
curves or sharp corners, or very fine, very wide, or curved serifs.
differences in column
width too great

serifs too long and fine

corners too sharp

Reference height and baseline


Reference height is the maximum height of capital letters. Although there
may be subtle differences between upper and lower case letters, it is a
useful guide for digitizing. See also Saving custom alphabets.
Tip Place letters along a standard baseline to help digitize at a standard
height. Draw in the baseline if you are digitizing from artwork, or use a grid
line as your guide. Descenders in letters such as y or g generally fall below
the baseline.

letter height
baseline

Tip Use E or H as reference letters to determine the height and baseline for
the alphabet. These letters work well because they sit on the baseline and
do not extend above the standard cap-height.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

667

Letter spacing and width


Letter width varies with the letter shape and spacing. When you digitize
letters, you enter two reference points to mark the width, and a third to
mark the height.

letter width

letter width

spacing
increased

Default spacing affects kerning or spacing across all letters. Additional


width can be added as spacing around individual letters.
Tip For italic styles, you may need some overlap between letter extents.

Digitizing custom letters


You can digitize letters from backdrop images, convert vector objects, or
digitize freehand using any of the input method tools. You can also copy
characters and symbols from the Windows Character Map into an external
graphics program. Here you can modify them as you like, save them to a
graphics file, and use it as a design backdrop. See also Using the Character
Map.
Letter stitching sequence is based on the alphabet join type you select when
saving it. If you save using the Closest Join or Bottom Join methods,
ES Designer applies automatic branching to the letters. In this case, you
dont need to worry about the direction individual letter strokes will stitch
in. When branching is applied, ES Designer determines where each stroke
starts and ends, adding travel runs as necessary. However, it is good
discipline to digitize the strokes in the direction they are most likely to be
stitched in. It is also important to specify the stroke order as this is
maintained when sequencing is calculated. See also Saving custom
alphabets.
If you want to specify the stitching sequence and connectors yourself,
digitize the letter in sequence and manually digitize the connecting
stitching. You then need to select As Digitized as the alphabet join method.
See also Changing lettering join method.

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

668

To digitize custom letters


1

Select an input method.


If you are digitizing the sequence and connectors manually, use any
input method. If you want the letter to be automatically resequenced
with Closest Join or Bottom Join, use Input A, Input B, Input C and
Complex Fill objects.

Select the stitch type.


Tip Most letters use Satin or Tatami.

Digitize each section of the letter.

 Where one stroke butts up against the side or end of another, create
an underlap to bind the two strokes together. Underlaps should be
about a third of the stroke width or less, but may be half for thin
strokes.

underlaps

 Try to avoid having more than two strokes on top of each other as
this causes thread buildup and can lead to thread breaks.
Sometimes modifying the shape can improve it.

 Sometimes it is helpful to angle the ends of underlaps so that a few


stitches are caught by the overlapping stroke. This prevents a gap
appearing if the stitches of the top stroke pull back.

overlap / underlap

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

669

 Where a stroke crosses another stroke, such as in the letter t, one


stroke is commonly broken into two parts. For thin objects, you may
digitize the above stroke in one piece, crossing over or under the
other.

Adjust outlines using the Reshape Object tool if necessary.


When the letter is the correct shape, save it as a custom letter. See also
Saving custom letters.

Saving custom letters


Use Alphabet > Make Letter (Special menu) to create a new letter.
When you create a new letter, you need to select an alphabet for it, give it
a name, specify its height, and indicate whether to preserve any machine
functions. You also need to indicate its spacing settings by digitizing
reference points on-screen.
Warning Do not use the tilde (~) symbol when naming letters. This is a
special character for entering letters with multiple-character names. See
Selecting custom alphabets for details.

To save custom letters


1

Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them.
See Digitizing custom letters for details.

Select whole
character

ES 2006

Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

670

The Make Letter dialog opens.

Select alphabet
Enter letter name
Enter reference height
Select to set height on-screen
Deselect to include functions

Select an alphabet from the Alphabet Name list. See also Saving
custom alphabets.

Enter a name for the letter in the Letter field.


For example, if you digitized the letter H, enter H in the Letter field.
Tip You can create names with multiple characters to identify special
letterse.g. Star for a star symbol, or e-acute for . See also
Selecting custom alphabets.

In the Reference Height field, enter a height for the letter.


The letter is recorded at this height regardless of its original size. You
can also set height on-screen by selecting the Digitize Reference
Height checkbox. When you return to the design window, you are
prompted to digitize the height. If you select Digitize Reference
Height, the value in the Reference Height field is ignored.
Tip Letters are generally 20 to 40 mm in height. See also Standard
Alphabets.

Deselect Remove Functions only if you want to keep any machine


functions in the object.
The letter may, for example, include deliberate color changes or other
machine functions. Such letters require the As Digitized join type. See
also Changing lettering join method.

ES 2006

Click OK.

Click to mark two reference points for letter width and the baseline.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

671

The distance between reference points determines the letter width,


including any spacing either side of the letter. This then determines
standard spacing between letters. See also Letter spacing and width.

1
1

Note The reference points you digitize also determine where the letter
sits on the baseline.
9

If you selected Digitize Reference Height in the Make Letter dialog,


you are prompted to digitize a third reference point to mark letter
height. See also Reference height and baseline.
A message confirms that the letter has been saved to current alphabet.

10 Click OK.

Saving custom alphabets


Use custom alphabets to store any letters you create. To make a new
alphabet, you name it and set the default spacing and join type for adjacent
letters. You also specify the file type.

To save custom alphabets


1

Digitize the objects that make up the new letter, and select them.
See Digitizing custom letters for details.

Select whole letter

ES 2006

Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

672

The Make Letter dialog opens.

Click to create
new alphabet

Click New.
The New Alphabet dialog opens.

Enter alphabet name


Enter default spacing
Select join method

Enter a name for the alphabet in the Alphabet Name field.

Enter the default spacing in the Default Letter Spacing field.


Tip Use 8-10% for standard alphabets such as block and serif styles and
0% for script-style alphabets.

Select a default method of joining adjacent letters from the Default Join
Type list.

 As Digitized: preserves the original stitching sequence of each


letter as it was digitized, as well as any stitch types and machine
functions used in its creation.

 Closest Join: resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters


to join them at the closest point.

 Bottom Join: resequences entry and exit points in adjacent letters


to create a connector along the lettering baseline.
See also Changing lettering join method.
7

Click OK.

Enter additional values for the selected letter in the Make Letter dialog.
See Saving custom letters for details.

ES 2006

Click OK.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

673

Selecting custom alphabets


Right-click Lettering (Input toolbar) to select a custom alphabet.
To use a custom alphabet, select it like any other alphabet. If a letter has a
multi-character name, you can only access it from the Lettering dialog
using the special tilde (~) symbol.

To select custom alphabets


1

Right-click the Lettering icon.


The Object Properties > Special > Lettering dialog opens.

Select custom
alphabet

Select a custom alphabet from the Alphabet list.

Enter the names of the letters you want to use in the text box.

 If the letter name is a single charactere.g. Aenter that


character.

 If the letter name consists of more than one charactere.g.


Starenter a tilde (~) followed by the letter name.

ES 2006

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

674

Tip Combine letters that use single or multiple characters in their name
by prefacing the single character with two tildese.g. ~Star~~A~Star.
See also Saving custom letters.
4

Set the formatting values as you would for other lettering objects. See
Formatting lettering for details.

Click Apply.

Add the lettering to your design. See Adding lettering to embroidery


designs for details.

Modifying custom alphabets


You can modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter
spacings and join types. If an alphabet is no longer required you can delete
it. You can also rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.

Modifying alphabets
Use Alphabet > Modify Alphabet (Special menu) to modify custom alphabets.
Modify custom alphabets by changing names, default letter spacings and
join types. If an alphabet is no longer required, delete it.

To modify alphabets
1

Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet.


The Modify Alphabet dialog opens.

Click to rename
alphabet

Select
alphabet

ES 2006

Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

675

 To rename the alphabet, click Rename. Enter a new name in the


Rename Alphabet dialog and click OK.

Enter new name

 To delete an alphabet, click Delete. A message prompts you for


confirmation.

 To change default letter spacing, enter a new value in the Default


Letter Spacing field. See also Adjusting spacing settings.

 To change the default join type, select a new one from the Default
Join Type list. See also Adjusting stitching sequence and join
method.
3

Click OK.

Modifying custom letters


Use Alphabet > Modify Alphabet (Special menu) to rename, delete or reshape letters
within custom alphabets.
Rename, delete or reshape letters within custom alphabets.

To modify custom letters


1

Select Special > Alphabet > Modify Alphabet.


The Modify Alphabet dialog opens.

Select
alphabet

Select letter

ES 2006

Select an alphabet from the Alphabet > Name list.

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

676

Select a letter from the Letter > Name list.

 To delete a letter, click Delete. A message prompts you for


confirmation.

 To rename a letter, click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename


Letter dialog and click OK.

Enter new name

Tip You can use names with more than one character.
4

Click OK.

Reshaping custom letters


Use Ungroup (Standard toolbar) to ungroup a letter into its component
objects.
Use Reshape Object (Pointer toolbar) to reshape custom letters.
Use Alphabet > Make Letter (Special menu) to create a new letter.
To change the shape of letters in custom alphabets, ungroup them and
change their outlines and stitch angles using the Reshape Object tool.

Warning When you ungroup, the letter is converted back to objects, and
letter details such as alphabet and baseline are lost. When you have finished
reshaping, you have to enter these details again.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

677

To reshape custom letters


1

Select a letter and ungroup.

Click the Reshape Object icon and reshape the objects as required.

Reshape objects

When you have finished reshaping, select the objects.

Select Special > Alphabet > Make Letter.


The Make Letter dialog opens.

Select alphabet
Select letter name

Select the alphabet to which the letter belongs from the Alphabet
Name list.

Select the letter name from the Name list.


Note To save the letter under a different name, enter a new name.

ES 2006

Click OK.

Confirm you want to replace the old letter with the new.

Chapter 28

Custom Alphabets

678

Merging alphabets
You can merge letters from two or more alphabets with the stand-alone
alphabet merging utility. Files to be merged must be placed in the
ES Designer userletw folder of your installation.

To merge alphabets
1

Select Start > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt.

When the DOS prompt appears, change to the bin directory of your
ES Designer installation.
This is usually C:/ESWin/bin.

Choose whether to automatically overwrite or receive prompt.

 To automatically overwrite the letters in the first file with letters of


the same name from the other file(s), type:
alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA.

 To receive a prompt message before a letter is overwritten, type:


alphcat.exe file1.ESA file2.ESA file3.ESA /Y.
Press Y or N to confirm whether to overwrite.
4

ES 2006

Click Yes to merge.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

679

PART VII

DESIGN PROCESSING &


ENCODING
Design processing and encoding involve all the less glamorous, back-end
operations of embroidery design and manufacture. This is where you
actually output your designs to machine, disk, printer, cutter, and so on. For
this, you will need an understanding of embroidery file types as well as
different machine formats. Depending on your setup, you will also need an
understanding of traditional storage media including embroidery disks and
paper tapes.

Processing design files


This section describes how to select conversion options for opening and
saving different stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details
about the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as
well as reassigning colors to both stitch and Melco CND files. See Processing
Design Files for details.

Changing machine formats


This section describes how to select a machine format for a design, output
it using other formats, and customize machine formats to meet your
machines specific requirements. See Changing Machine Formats for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

680

Outputting designs
This section describes how to create production worksheets. It explains how
to send designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as
drawings and images. Cutting appliqu shapes is also covered, as well as
stitching designs with Stitch Manager. See Outputting Designs for details.

Embroidery disks and paper tapes


This section describes how to read from and write embroidery design files
to embroidery disk and paper tape. See Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes
for details.

ES 2006

Design Processing & Encoding

681

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

By default ES Designer saves to its native file format, EMB. This format
contains all information necessary both for stitching a design and for later
modification. When opening designs created or saved in other formats,
ES Designer converts the design internally to EMB format. You can then
modify it using the full range of ES Designer features. Depending on the file
type, you may need to provide additional information to assist ES Designer
in the conversion process.
This section describes how to select conversion options for opening and
saving different stitch and outline design formats. It also provides details
about the processing of Melco CND outline files, including color merging, as
well as reassigning colors to both stitch and Melco CND files.

Embroidery design formats


Embroidery designs are saved in one of two formatsoutline format or
stitch format.
Note For details of specific formats supported by ES Designer, see
Supported embroidery file formats.

Outline files
Outline or condensed files are high-level formats which contain object
outlines, object properties and stitch data. When you open an outline file in

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

682

ES Designer, corresponding stitch types, input methods and effects are


applied.

Complex
Fill object

Outline files can be scaled, transformed and reshaped without affecting


stitch density or quality. After modification, you can choose to save your
design to EMB format, or to a different format altogether.
Note Some outline files, such as Wilcom INP and Gunold PCH, contain
incomplete information. Old format ESD designs are somewhere between an
outline and a stitch file. They contain stitch data, information about selected
stitch types, densities, and machine functions. They do not, however,
contain information about shapes and lines. ESD files require object/outline
recognition if you want to perform object editing in ES Designer. See
Opening stitch files in ES Designer for details.

Stitch files
Different embroidery machines understand different languages. Each has its
own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can
stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be interpreted by the
machine. Stitch or expanded designs are low-level formats for direct use
by embroidery machines. They contain only stitch coordinates and machine
functions. They are generally created on the fly when sending designs to
machine. They can also be output to embroidery disk or paper tape. See
Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes for details. See also Supported Machine,
File and Disk Types.
When they are read into ES Designer, stitch files do not contain object
information such as outlines or stitch types, but present the design as a
collection of stitch blocks called Manual objects. Manual objects are created
wherever machine functionse.g. color changes or trimsare detected in

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

683

the design. They have only General and Connector properties. Manual
objects, in turn, consist of individual stitches, called Manual stitches.

Manual
object

Stitch designs are generally not suited to modification because stitches are
not regenerated. However, ES Designer patented Stitch Processor
technology can interpret object outlines, stitch types and spacing from stitch
data with some success. In this way, you can re-constitute old tape format
files and other stitch file format designs for modification in ES Designer.
These recognized designs can be scaled with stitches recalculated for the
new outlines. Processing is effective for most stitch designs but cannot
produce the same level of quality as original outlines and may not handle
some fancy stitches.
By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon opening
but you can also choose to open them without recognition. Designs opened
in this way can be output for stitching in another format. Or you can edit
stitches and add new elements. For such purposes, you do not need to
retrieve information about how the design was created.
You can scale stitch format designs which have been opened without
object/outline recognition. However, because the stitch count does not
change, the density increases or decreases with the design size. Thus you

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

684

should not scale stitch designs by more than 5% or some areas may be
too thickly or too thinly covered.
Original stitch
design

Scaled stitch design


opened without
object/outline
recognition

Alternatively, you can process the whole or selected parts of a design after
editing. You can even split larger manual objects into smaller objects, and
process them individually.
Note With or without object/outline recognition, stitch files can be saved in
EMB format once they are opened in ES Designer.

File sources
While embroidery files are broadly classified as outline (condensed) or
stitch (expanded), ES Designer internally tags files as belonging to one of
four typesNative Design, Imported Outlines, Processed Stitches, or
Imported Stitches.

ES 2006

File source

Description

Native Design

Designs created in ES Designer (or equivalent).

Imported Outlines

Designs read from non-EMB outlineCND or PCHwhere


stitches have been generated in ES Designer (or
equivalent) from original outlines and stitching data.

Processed Stitches

Designs read from stitch files where stitches have been


regenerated by processing.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

685

File source

Description

Imported Stitches

Designs read from stitch files, where outlines may or may


not have been recognized, but stitches have not been
regenerated through stitch processing.
Note, however, that if you change a stitch designe.g. add
a lettering objectthe status changes to Processed
Stitches even though the imported stitches may not have
been regenerated.

For information about the source of a design file, refer to the Design
Properties dialog. See Viewing design information in ES Designer for
details.

Opening stitch files in ES Designer


If you want to scale a design, edit an outline or change a stitch type, then
the design or selected elements must be converted into objects using Stitch
Processor. By default, stitch files are converted to outlines and objects upon
opening. If you do not want to scale the design by more than 5%, or only
want to make minor stitch edits, or output in another format, you can
choose to open the stitch file without object/outline recognition. The design
is then presented as a collection of manual objects. If you only want to
convert selected parts of a design, you can open the file without
object/outline recognition and process only the required stitch blocks.
Tip To ensure object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are
correct, it is always a good idea to check and edit designs after conversion.
To improve the quality of a stitch file, it is often better to edit stitches before
conversion.

Object/outline recognition
When you convert a stitch file to outline format, ES Designer reads stitch
data stitch-by-stitch according to the needle penetration points. It
recognizes stitch types, spacing and length values, stitch effects, and can
determine object outlines.
All filled areas in a design become Input A or Run objects with fill or outline
stitch properties as well as general and connector properties. Stitch types
are assigned as Satin, Tatami, or Program Split depending on the pattern of
needle penetrations. With Tatami, ES Designer recognizes stitch spacing
and length, and applies a random factor. If a design is converted from ESD

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

686

format, Zigzag and Triple Run objects are also recognized. If an object is not
recognized, it becomes (or remains) a manual object with general and
connector properties only. As such, it will not scale well.
Recognized object outlines and stitch values are stored as object properties
in ES Designer. This means you can scale and transform recognized designs
in the usual way. You can also change the stitch density of the whole or
selected parts of a design, and/or of certain stitch types.
Tip ES Designer Stitch Processor is intended primarily to enable the
re-use of stitch format designs, but it also provides a convenient method for
changing the object properties of EMB designs. You can change stitch
density as a percentage without having to select objects individually. See
Adjusting stitch density for details.

Recognition limitations
ES Designer cannot recognize the backstitch type for Tatami fills. Before
scaling a design, select the correct backstitch in the Object Properties
dialog. If a stitch type is not recognized accurately, the values in the Object
Properties dialog will not match the stitches. The stitches will remain the
same as in the original design, until you make changes and regenerate
them. If you change the design, stitches will be regenerated according to
the object properties.
Tip Designs converted from tape format files and expanded designs which
have non-standard stitch types may require editing in ES Designer to ensure
that the object outlines, stitch types, stitch density and colors are correct.

Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition


When you open stitch files with object/outline recognition, you can set open
options to determine how to convert the design. Options vary with the type
of stitch file you select.
Note Open options should reflect how the design was originally digitized,
not how you want it now. Experiment with the settings to get the best
results.

To open stitch files with object/outline recognition


1

ES 2006

Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery
disk.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

687

The Open dialog opens.

Select file

Select format

Click
Options

Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to
open.

Click Options.
The Open Options dialog opens.

Select machine
format
Enter number of
jumps as trims

Select output type


for stop codes

Select
Objects/Outlines

Note Depending on the file type selected, different options are


available.
4

Select the Objects/Outlines checkbox.

Select a different machine format from the Machine Type list as


required.

Enter the number of jumps to recognize as trims.


When ES Designer encounters this number of consecutive jumps, it will
convert them to a trim function.

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

688

Warning If this value is different from the original design, trim


functions will be not be inserted correctly.
7

Use the Stop Code as panel to select the output type for stop codes as
required.

 Color Change: Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color


commands. The next color is selected from the default color palette.

 Stops: Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stops. The machine


stops stitching.

 Custom: Lets you map thread colors to every stop code in the file.
This means you can color code stitch file designs which do not
contain needle addressing information, before opening the file. See
Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details.
8

Select or deselect the Automatic Connectors checkbox as required.

 Deselect to open designs with connectors recognized as Manual


objects. This avoids stitch editing problems caused by automatic
connectors. This is recommended for open fills.

 Select to open appropriate designs with automatic connectors


without having to use object/outline recognition.
9

Check the status of your embroidery machine as required, then select


the correct settingSpeed1 or Speed2from the list (if available).

Select required
speed

On some Barudan machines there is a speed switch. Depending on its


position, fast is assigned as either Speed1 or Speed2. For example, if
you select Speed1, each fast speed function will be translated into a
Speed1 command.
10 Click Advanced to set advanced recognition options. See Adjusting
advanced recognition settings for details.
11 Click OK.
12 Click Open.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

689

The selected design is processed and converted to Input A or Run


objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and
connector properties. If an object is not recognized, it becomes a
manual object with general and connector properties only.

Manual
object
Input A
object

Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but
does not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch density.

Opening stitch files without object/outline recognition


By opening a stitch file without object/outline recognition, you can output
the design without change, edit individual stitches, and perform minor
scaling and transforming actions without losing the original stitch
information. Alternatively, you can process the whole or selected parts of a
design after editing. See also Recognizing object/outlines after editing.

To open stitch files without object/outline recognition


1

Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery
disk.
The Open dialog opens.

ES 2006

Select a stitch format from the Files of Type list and select the file to
open.

Click Options.

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

690

The Open Options dialog opens.

Deselect
Objects/Outlines

Deselect the Objects/Outlines checkbox.

Set other open options as required.


Depending on the file type selected, different options are available. See
Opening stitch files with object/outline recognition for details.

Click OK.

Click Open.
The design opens as a collection of manual objects with only general and
connector properties.

Manual
object

Tip At this point, you can edit the stitches so that the Stitch Processor
can recognize the stitch types and object outlines more accurately:

 Eliminate Stitch Shortening and Jagged Edge effects for smooth,


accurate outlines.

 Remove small stitches from the design.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

691

 The exit point of a column may be on the same side as the entry
point. You may need to add an extra stitch at the end so that the
Stitch Processor can recognize the outline accurately.
See Editing Stitches and Machine Functions for details.

Recognizing object/outlines after editing


Use Process (Generate toolbar) to adjust stitch density of the whole or
selected parts of a design.
You can process a stitch file, or selected parts of it, to recognize objects and
outlines, or adjust its size and stitch density. Processing a stitch file is similar
to converting it to an outline file when opening except that you can process
only selected objects or stitches. You can also split larger manual objects
into smaller objects, and process them individually. See also Splitting
objects and Converting selected stitches to objects.
Tip You can also use the Process feature to change stitch count and density
for the whole design, or for objects of a particular stitch type only. See
Adjusting stitch density for details.

To recognize object/outlines after editing


1

Open a stitch file without object/outline recognition. See Opening stitch


files without object/outline recognition for details.

Edit parts of the design as required. See Editing Stitches and Machine
Functions for details.

Select the part of the design you want to process.


You can select the whole design or individual manual objects.

Manual object

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

692

Click the Process icon.


The Process dialog opens.

Enter target
stitch count
Click to access
advanced
recognition
options
Adjust stitch
densities

Adjust Pull
Compensation

In the Stitch Values panel, enter the number of Target Stitches as


either a percentage or absolute value (in millimeters).

Adjust the density for each stitch type as required.


You can change the density for selected objects and/or for specific stitch
types only. See also Adjusting stitch density of certain stitch types.
Note If a design contains objects created with other stitch types, the
target stitch count will not be achieved as these objects will not change.

ES 2006

Click Recognition to set advanced recognition options as required. See


Adjusting advanced recognition settings for details.

Click OK.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

693

The selected objects are processed and converted to Input A or Run


objects with fill or outline stitch properties as well as general and
connector properties. If an object is not recognized, it remains a manual
object with general and connector properties only. In this case, the
target stitch count may not be reached.

Manual object
converted to
Input A and Run
objects, or left as
Manual

Note Stitch Processor adds the missing information to the file, but does
not change the stitches. See also Adjusting stitch density.

Adjusting advanced recognition settings


You can fine-tune how ES Designer converts stitch files using the advanced
recognition settings. By default, ES Designer converts stitches as Tatami,
Satin, or Run stitches according to the settings in the Recognition Advanced Options dialog. You can change these values, or choose not to
convert a certain stitch type at all.
Generally, the default settings provide the best results for the most
frequently used fill stylesTatami and Satintheir propertiesstitch length
and spacingand edge effects, such as stitch shortening. Default settings,
however, cannot always guarantee the best results as the variety of
embroidery designs is virtually unlimited.

Original design
opened without stitch
recognition
Opened with stitch
recognition pattern splits recognized
as Tatami

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

694

Tip When using the advanced object/outline recognition options, select only
those options you want to be recognized. This will minimize the time taken
to process the design and ensure stitches are preserved.

To adjust advanced recognition settings


1

Access the Open Options dialog. See Opening stitch files with
object/outline recognition for details.

Click Advanced.
The Recognition - Advanced Options dialog opens.

Select to
recognize Tatami
stitches
Select to recognize
random needle
penetrations

Select to
recognize
Jagged Edges

Select to
recognize Satin
stitches

Select to
recognize
Splits

Select to
recognize Run
stitches

Select Segments
Resolution and
Merging Factors

Set space and


stitch length
rounding

In the Tatami panel, select Recognize Tatami in order to process


Tatami fills, and adjust conversion options as required:

 Stitch Spacing: enter spacing range to recognize. If the row


spacing falls outside this range it will not be converted to Tatami.

 Min Stitch Length: enter minimum stitch length to recognize as


Tatami.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

695

 Random Factor: select to allow for random needle penetrations.


Deselect the Recognize Splits checkbox to detect Random Factor
more accurately.
Tatami Spacing range 0.4 mm
to 1.5 mm, Random Factor not
selected
Tatami Spacing range
0.4 mm to 1.5 mm,
Random Factor selected

In the Satin panel, select Recognize Satin in order to process Satin


stitching, and adjust stitch spacings as requiredif the row spacing falls
outside the specified range it will not be converted to Satin.
Satin Spacing range
0.5 mm to 5.0 mm

Satin Spacing range


0.1 mm to 2.0 mm

In the Run panel, select Recognize Run in order to process Run


stitching, and adjust conversion options as required:

 Max Stitch Length: enter maximum stitch length to recognize.


 Length Variation: enter percentage by which stitch length can vary
in Run objects.
Run, Max Stitch Length
4 mm Length Variation 10%

Run, Max Stitch Length 4 mm


Length Variation 90%

In the Parameter Consistency panel, set options for Complex Fill


segment recognition.

 Spacing Rounding: enter rounding value for stitch


spacingssnaps spacing values in Tatami and Satin fills to specified
increments.

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

696

 Stitch Length Rounding: enter rounding value for stitch


lengthssnaps stitch length values in Tatami fills to specified
increments.
For example, if the Tatami minimum stitch length is 4 mm, and the
Stitch Length Rounding is 0.4 mm, stitches from 3.80 to 4.20 mm are
snapped to 4.0 mm, and recognized as Tatami.
Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm,
Spacing Rounding: 0.01 mm,
Stitch Length Rounding: 0.2 mm

Tatami Spacing range: 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm,


Spacing Rounding: 0.05 mm,
Stitch Length Rounding:0.5 mm

In the Effects panel, select Jagged in order to recognize the Jagged


Edge effect. Specify a minimum range in millimetersanything
variation greater than this value will be recognized as Jagged Edge.
Jagged NOT selected, border
object recognized as Manual

Jagged selected, border object


recognized as jagged edge

In the Splits panel, select Recognize Splits to recognize splits in Tatami


fills, and adjust conversion options as required.

 Program Splits as User Defined Splits: recognize split patterns as


user-defined splits. Note, however, that user-defined splits are
scaled when the design is scaled. This results in stitch lengths
getting longer as the design is enlarged, thus limiting scaling. With
native program splits, on the other hand, patternsshape, size and
spacingremain the same after objects are scaled. See also
Textured Fills.

 Recognize Auto Splits: recognize Auto Splits in Satin objects.


Otherwise, patterns created with Auto Split will be recognized as
Tatami. See also Splitting long stitches with Auto Split.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

697

 Recognition Level: restrict recognition of Program Splits by


increasing percentage. Decrease to increase recognition. A low
percentage number will detect more areas as Satin with User
Defined Split than Tatami.
User Defined Split

Auto Split

Tip Program splits are reliably recognized when patterns are not
overlapping.
Warning Split patterns can be complex, so the recognition process can
take up to five times longer with this option. Do not use it unless the
design contains Program Splits, User Defined Splits with Tatami or Satin,
or Auto Splits.
9

In the Segments Resolution/Merging Factors panel, enter values to


fine-tune the recognition of segments and objects.

 Spacing: this value expresses the ratio between stitch spacings in


adjacent stitch blockse.g. adjacent spacings of 0.6 mm and
1.0 mm gives a ratio of 1.67. A value of 2.0 in the Spacing field
means that these stitch blocks will be recognized as one segment or
object. A value of 1.5 means that they will not. The default value is
3.0. Normal Satin and Tatami stitching ranges in spacing from 0.3 to
0.6 mm, so most continuous sections of stitching of the same type
will not be split. To preserve spacing variations for color-blended
designs and more artistic designs, you may need to reduce the
spacing factor. In manually punched designs which include stitching
with irregular spacing, segment breaks can be reduced by increasing
the factor.

 Height: this value expresses the ratio between heights of stitch


blocks. It is important in recognizing Complex Fill shapes,
particularly with holes.
Tip Generally, the lower these values, the larger the number of
segments/objects likely to be identified. Normally you want to obtain
design information with a minimum number of identified

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

698

segments/objects. In practice there is always a compromise between


design recognition quality and the minimum number of correctly
identified segments/objects.
Spacing: 0.5 mm,
Height: 2 mm
Spacing: 3 mm,
Height: 4 mm

Recognized objects
shown in different colors

10 Click OK.
Tip To revert to the original conversion settings, click Reset.

Opening Melco CND outline files


Melco Condensed (CND) is the native file format of Melco embroidery
digitizing software. CND files store only digitized outlines and stitch values.
When you open CND designs in ES Designer, these outlines are scaled and
stitches recalculated to preserve density. ES Designer recognizes all Melco
machine functions and stitch types, including Partition Lines and Complex
Fill, and automatically converts them to EMB format. However, CND files do
not contain specialty features such as Pull Compensation or Auto Spacing,
nor do they include actual stitches, thread colors, or design icons.
There are several versions of CND, all of which can be read by ES Designer.
While these designs scale accurately, the number and placement of stitches
may differ somewhat from the original design. You may notice some
difference (5%) in the stitch counts between original and converted files.
This is because of differences in the software methods used to calculate
stitches. ES Designer cannot interpret certain specialty features of CND
design objects because there is no direct equivalent. However, stock designs
do not normally use these features and will generally convert without
problem.
Tip Before CND designs are stitched out, an EXP format file is created. The
EXP stores the actual stitches and can be stitched directly. This file too can
be opened in ES Designer. See Opening stitch files in ES Designer for
details.
When you open Melco CND files, the Melco stitch types used in the design
are converted to ES Designer stitch typesSatin, Run, Tatami, etc. You

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

699

can change conversion settings to adjust the spacing, stitch length, effects
and defaults applied to ES Designer stitch types. You can also set scaling
values to open the design at a different size to the original. See also Saving
designs in Melco CND format.
Note For details of how each CND stitch type is converted, see Conversion
of Melco CND format to Wilcom EMB.

To open a Melco CND outline file


1

Open the file from your hard disk, or read it from tape or embroidery
disk.
The Open dialog opens.

Select file

Select CND
format

ES 2006

Select Melco (CND) from the Files of Type list and select the file to
open.

Click Options.

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

700

The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens.

Select effects
to apply

Enter scale
values
Adjust stitch
values

Adjust default
values
Select Auto
Color Merge
option

In the Scale Factor panel, enter the scale at which you want to open
the design.
New dimensions are expressed as a ratio of the original design size. For
example, to scale to 120% of the original, enter a scale factor of 1.2 in
each field.

Scale Factor
X: 1.00
Y: 1.00

Scale Factor
X: 0.50
Y: 1.00

In the Adjust panel, enter the spacing and length values to apply to the
design as a percentage of the original values.
You can adjust Satin spacing, Run stitch length as well as Tatami
spacing and length.

ES 2006

In the Auto Color Merge panel, choose whether you want to read
thread color information from CND files.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

701

This ensures that stitches are displayed in the correct colors when
converted to EMB. See Color merging Melco CND files and Reassigning
colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details.
7

In the Effects panel, select the effects you want to apply to the design.
For information about these effects, see the relevant sections of the
manual:

 Auto Spacing: See Applying Auto Spacing to Satin stitch.


 Short Stitches: See Reducing stitch bunching with stitch
shortening.

 Fractional Spacing: See Reducing stitch bunching with fractional


spacing.
8

In the Default Values panel, adjust the default values for Satin
Spacing, Stitch Length and Maximum Stitch Length as required.
If the CND design was created with values different to the factory
settings, you can override them in these fields.

 To save new settings as defaults, click Save.


 To revert to the Melco factory settings, click Reset.
9

Click OK.

10 Click Open.
The selected design opens in the Design window. You can scale the
design directly on screen, or via the Object Properties dialog. You can
also rotate, mirror and skew the design. See Modifying Designs for
details.

Color merging Melco CND files


The Auto Color Merge feature reads thread color information for CND files
from an associated TXT file so that stitches are displayed in the correct
colors when they are converted to EMB.
Tip Your EMB and other design files can be converted to and from other file
formats using ES Design Explorer. Use it to batch process multiple CND
designs using Auto Color Merge. See Converting design files in folders for
details.

Setting up the color merge TXT file


Auto Color Merge reads and interprets a TXT file that contains color names
from a thread chart. You can create this text file manually with a text editor

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

702

such as MS Notepad. The text file must have the same file name as the CND
filee.g. Fish.TXT and Fish.CND. Both files must also reside in the same
folder. For the Auto Color Merge function to work correctly, information in
the text file must be entered in a certain format.

Example text file: Fish


A typical text file might look like this:
Fish
Uses curve effects
File: Fish
55.9mmW X 74.5mmH
ST: 6,780
Colors: 8
1. Tropical Sunset
2. Saffron
3. Pale powder Blue
4. Tropical Sunset
5. Pale powder Blue
Curve effect
6. Tropical White
7. Tropical Sunset
8. Pale powder Blue

Text file structure


All text files contain some or all of the following elements.
Text file element

Description

Example

Design name

This is the name of the design as it appears


in File > Information > Design
Properties > Subject.

Fish

Comments

Lines inserted here appear under File >


Information > Design Properties >
Comments.

Uses curve effects

File name

This is the file name of the CND design file.


The file extension should not be included.

File: Fish

Design size

Enter the expected design size for the


design. The actual design size is derived
from the software.

55.9mmW X
74.5mmH

Stitch count

Enter the expected stitch count for the


design. The actual stitch count is derived
from the software.

ST: 6,780

Number of colors

States the total number of colors in the


design.

Colors: 8

ES 2006

Mandatory

Wilcom ES Online Manual

703

Text file element

Mandatory

Description

Example

Thread name 1

Enter the first thread name. The name of


the thread is searched against the Thread
Chart. The thread name is shown in the File
> Design Properties > Stop Sequence
tab.

1. Tropical Sunset

Thread name 2

Enter the second thread name.

2. Saffron

Thread name 3

Enter the third thread name.

3. Pale Powder Blue

Thread name 4

Enter the fourth thread name.

4. Tropical Sunset

Thread name 5

Add any extra threads to this list.

5. Pale Powder Blue

Thread
comments

Place comments below the relevant thread


number.

Curve effect

Thread name 6

6. Tropical White

Thread name 7

7. Tropical Sunset

Thread name 8

8. Pale Powder Blue

Reading Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge


When opening a CND file which has a TXT file associated with it, you must
specify the thread chart used when the design was originally created in EDS
(or other design software). The thread colors nominated in the text file will
correspond to the selected thread chart. Alternatively, you can assign colors
manually to every Color Stop code in the file. See also Reassigning colors to
stitch and Melco CND files.

To read Melco CND files with Auto Color Merge


1

Select File > Open.


The Open dialog opens.

ES 2006

Select a CND design.

Click Options.

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

704

The Condensed File Input Values dialog opens.

Select thread
chart
Assign colors
manually

Select a color merge option from the Auto Color Merge panel.

 If you want to read thread color information for the selected CND file
from an associated TXT file, select From File and follow the steps
below.

 If you want to assign colors manually to every Color Stop code in the
file, select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence. See Reassigning
colors to stitch and Melco CND files for details.
5

If you have chosen to associate a text file with your CND file, select a
corresponding thread chart from the Auto Color Merge dropdown list.
Note Any thread color named in the text file must correspond to a color
in the selected thread chart. If not, it will default to black.

Click OK.

no chart selecteddefault
colors assigned

one color not correctly


matcheddefaults to black

original colors correctly


assigned from text file

The design opens, the stitches appear in the correct thread colors, and
the color palette displays the selected thread chart.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

705

Reassigning colors to stitch and Melco CND files


When you open a stitch file or CND file, a design without color code
assignment automatically uses the default color palette. You can, however,
map thread colors to every Color Stop code in the file. This means that
before opening the file you can color-code designs which do not contain
needle addressing information.
without color code
assignment

with color code


assignment

Note In order to assign colors correctly, you need to consult a production


worksheet for the necessary color sequence information.

To reassign colors to a stitch or Melco CND file


1

Select File > Open.


The Open dialog opens.

Select a stitch file or CND design and click Options.


If youve selected a stitch file, the Open Options dialog opens. If CND,
the Condensed File Input Values dialog opens. This procedure is the
same.

Stitch file
Select Define Stop
Sequence
CND file
Select Define Stop
Sequence

ES 2006

Select Custom and click Define Stop Sequence.

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

706

The Define Stop Sequence dialog opens. Initially the Building Stop
Sequence grid is empty.

Select thread
chart
Select color

Select a thread chart and first color.

Click to
assign color

Click Assign Color.


The color and the description are entered at the current Stop in the
Building Stop Sequence grid.
Note The selection moves to the next color in the thread chart. Two
consecutive same colors are not allowed and Assign Color is disabled.

ES 2006

Click Assign Stop to enter an explicit Stop code.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

707

Stop is entered in the Description field.

Click to
assign stop

Note A Stop Sequence Warning message displays if a redundant color


function is assigned. Press Delete to delete a selected entry in the stop
sequence. Click Reset to delete all the entries.
7

Use the Extra Stop codes as panel to select the output type for extra
stop codes.

 Color Changes: Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Next Color


commands. The next color is selected from the default color palette.

 Stops: Extra Stop codes are interpreted as Explicit Stops. The


machine stops stitching.

 Repeat Sequence: If you select fewer colors than the design


requires, the selected colors are repeated. For example, if your
design requires four colors and youve only selected two in the
Building Stop Sequence list, colors 3 & 4 will be the same as
original colors 1 & 2.

Choose how
extra stops are
to be interpreted

Repeat the operation as many times as indicated in the production


worksheet.

Click OK.
The design will have the desired colors and the correct number of Color
Changes.
Note You can convert color changes to an explicit Stop Code. You can
also remove Color Stops by assigning the same color number to
consecutive color blocks.

ES 2006

Chapter 29

Processing Design Files

708

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

Different embroidery machines speak different languages. They have their


own control commands for the various machine functions. Before you can
stitch a design, it must be in a format which can be understood by the
embroidery machine. When you select a machine format, ES Designer
translates the digitized design into machine functions that can be
understood by that machine. If required, you can customize machine
formats to meet specific machine requirements.

This section describes how to select a machine format for a design, output
it using other formats, and customize machine formats to meet your
machines specific requirements.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

709

Selecting machine formats


Use Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to change the machine format.
When you create a design, you need to select a format corresponding to the
embroidery machine you intend to use. You dont, however, need to change
the designs native machine format in order to output to a different
machine. See Outputting to different machine formats for details. For a
complete list of supported machine formats, see Supported machine types.
Note You can change the machine format if machine values are incorrect
for your particular machine. You can even change the machine format for a
particular design. You should only modify formats if you no longer require
the original values. Otherwise see Creating custom formats.

To select a machine format


1

Select Machine > Select Machine Format.


The Select Machine Format dialog opens.

Click to create
new format

Select machine
format

Click to adjust
format

From the Available Machine Formats list, select the required machine
format.

Adjust machine formats as required:

 To check or modify settings for the selected format, click Values. See
also Adjusting standard machine format settings.

 To create a new format based on the selected one, click Create. See
also Creating custom formats.
4

ES 2006

Click OK.

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

710

Note If a selected machine format does not support a particular


function in the designeither automatically or manually insertedit is
simply ignored.

Outputting to different machine formats


Use Stitch to Stitch Manager (Standard toolbar) to send a design to a
machine for stitching.
Use Save to Embroidery Disk (Standard toolbar) to save a design to an
embroidery disk.
Once a design is complete, you can stitch it out to any supported embroidery
machine without changing the original design format. If a selected machine
format does not support a particular function in the designeither
automatically or manually insertedit is simply ignored.
Note To change the original format, see Selecting machine formats.

To output to a different machine format

 Click the Stitch to Stitch Manager icon, then select a different format
from the Output as Machine Format list. See Stitching designs with
Stitch Manager for details.

Select machine
format

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

711

 Click the Save to Embroidery Disk icon, then select a different machine
format from the dropdown list. See Saving designs to embroidery disk
for details.

Select machine
format

 Select File > Paper Tape > Punch, then select a different machine
format from the dropdown list.

Select machine
format

Adjusting standard machine format settings


Different machines require different settings. When you select a machine
format, you only modify values relevant to that machine. Typical modifiable
values are stitch and jump length, trim functions and color change
functions. Use the Machine Format Values dialog to define values to allow
when outputting to a specific machine format.

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

712

Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats.
Use these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format.
See your embroidery machine manual for more information about machine
formats.

Setting stitch and jump length values


With some machines you can set the maximum frame movement, minimum
stitch length to recognize, and automatic jump length.

To set stitch and jump values


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.

Adjust stitch and


jump settings

In the Maximum Stitch field, enter the maximum stitch length to allow.
The value you enter depends on the tape code used by your machine:

 Binary coding system: 12.7 mme.g. Barudan machines


 Ternary coding system: 12.1 mme.g. Tajima machines
3

In the Minimum Stitch field, enter the minimum stitch length to allow.
This sets the default Small Stitches value. See Removing small stitches
automatically for details.
Tip Generally the minimum stitch length is increased for dense
materials and thick threads to prevent thread breakage.

In the Maximum Jump field, enter the maximum jump length to allow.
This sets the default Auto Jump value. See Adjusting Auto Jump settings
for details.
Tip Shorter jump values generally improve stitch quality and reduce
wear on the machine but may increase stitch-out time.

ES 2006

Click Save then Close.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

713

Setting trim functions


With some machine formats you can specify how to format and interpret
trim commands. Some machines understand specific trim codes. Other
machines interpret multiple jumps as a trim command. Machines without an
automatic trimmer may not know how to interpret trim commands, and may
even shift the design when a trim code is encountered. For these machines
you need to deselect the Output Trims checkbox so that trim functions are
ignored when the design is stitched.

To set trim functions


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.
Select to output
trim functions
Select trim
function format

In the Trim panel, select the Output Trims checkbox to include trim
functions when outputting to the selected machine format.
Note If you deselect the Output Trims checkbox, the trim functions
are not removed from the design but simply ignored for the selected
machine format.

Specify the trim function format to use:

 Jumps: for machines that interpret multiple jumps as trims. You


also need to enter the required number of jumps.

 Trim Code: for machines that require specific trim codes.


4

Click Save then Close.

Setting color change functions


Machines interpret the Color Change function differentlyeither as a
Needle Number or Stop command.

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

714

Needle number commands


Needle Number commands tell the machine to move to the next needle
whenever a Color Change function is encountered. Each color in the design
corresponds to a needle number in the order listed in the Colors list. See
Changing thread colors for details.
Note The machine must have the correct thread colors loaded for each
needle to stitch out correctly.
For needle addressing machines, you need to specify how many needles are
on the machine. This tells the machine how often it needs to stop for the
operator to change threads. For example, for a design with 25 colors to be
stitched out on a machine with five needles, it must stop after every five
color changes in order for the operator to change threads. Needle Number
commands are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate color
changes.

Stop commands
Stop commands allow the operator to manually change threads whenever a
Color Change function is encountered. They are generally used with
machines that only have one needle or do not support needle addressing.
Stop commands are sometimes combined with Jump commands to indicate
color changes.

To set color change functions


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.
Select method to interpret
color change functions
Enter number of needles
Select optional
functions as required

In the Color Change panel, select a method to use to interpret color


change functions.

 Needle No: converts color change functions to Needle Number


commands.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

715

 Stops: converts color change functions to Stop commands.


 Stop & Jump: converts color change functions to Stop and Jump
commands.

 Needle No and Jumps: converts color change functions to Needle


Number and Jump commands.
3

For needle-addressing machines, enter the number of needles on the


machine in the No of Needles field.

Select the Use Group Addressing checkbox as required.


Some machines can group two heads together so you can stitch a design
using needles from both heads. For example, if a machine has two heads
and nine needles per head, the machine moves the hoop from the first
head under the second head, which allows you to stitch 18 colors
without a manual change.
Note If this is the case, enter the combined number of needles on the
machine in the No of Needles field.

Select the First CC required checkbox as required.


Some machines require a First CC code to initialize the machine and
bring the head back to the first color change needle position.

Select the Return to Start checkbox as required.


This returns the needle to the start of the design, preparing the machine
for the next run of the same design.

Click Save then Close.

Setting borer functions


Some embroidery machines are equipped with a borer. The borer often
replaces one of the needles. You need to specify the needle position of the
borer and its offset value. Borers are often knife attachments where the
cutting position is offset 12 mm from the main needle. Before the machine
starts, the frame moves so that the borer is in the correct position. This
extra frame movement compensates for the borer offset. Some machines
automatically adjust for this offset when a Borer In function is encountered.
These machines should have an offset value of 0. Similarly, if you are using
a boring needle (instead of a knife), you do not need an offset value. See
your embroidery machines manual for details.

To set borer functions


1

ES 2006

Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

716

Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.

Enter borer offset


Enter needle number of
borer

In the Boring panel, enter the required borer offset.

 If your machine automatically inserts an offset when a Borer In


function is encountered, enter an offset of 0 mm.

 If your machine requires an offset value, enter an offset of 12.0 mm.


3

Enter the needle number to which the borer is attached.

Click Save then Close.

Setting end-of-design functions


Some machines require an explicit End of Design function code in order to
recognize when the end of the design has been reached. Some machines do
not understand the End of Design function code, requiring a Stop code
instead. For example, Tajima machines recognize the explicit End of Design
function code while Happy machines require a simple Stop. See also Setting
the Start of Design / End of Design sequence.

To set end-of-design functions


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Standard dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.

Select relevant
option

In the End of Design panel, select the appropriate option for your
machine:

 End of Design: some machines require an explicit End of Design


function codee.g. some Tajima machines.

 Stop: some machines require a Stop code insteade.g. Happy


machines.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

717

Click Save then Close.

Adjusting advanced machine format settings


The Advanced tab lets you set additional machine format options. Again,
the available settings depend on the selected machine format. You can set
the color change sequence, insert special codes for the start or end of a
design, and enter speed settings. There are also miscellaneous settings,
including whether to change the fabric tension during boring, and whether
to rewind tape when stitching is complete. Use the Machine Format Values
dialog to define values to allow when outputting to a specific machine
format.
Note Not all values described here are available for all machine formats.
Use these instructions to enter values that apply to your selected format.
See your embroidery machine manual for more information about machine
formats.
Warning Only change Advanced values if you are familiar with the codes
used by your embroidery machine.

Setting the color change sequence


Some machines cannot interpret Color Change commands unless they
form part of a color change sequence made up of empty stitches and empty
jumps before and after each Color Change command. Check the
requirements of your machine to determine whether you need to enter color
change sequence values. In the Advanced tab, the Color Change
Sequence panel reads from top to bottom, in the order the codes appear in
the sequence. The first two fields show the number of Empty Stitches and
Empty Jumps to insert before the Color Change command. The other

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

718

fields show the Empty Jumps and Empty Stitches to insert after the
command.

Color Change Sequence in Stitch List


matches sequence defined in Machine
Format Values Advanced tab

To set the color change sequence


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.
Enter number of Empty
Stitches and Jumps to insert
before Color Change
Enter number of Empty
Jumps and Stitches to insert
after Color Change

In the Color Change Sequence panel, enter the color change sequence.

 In the first 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert
before the Color Change.

 In the first 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to
insert before the Color Change.

 In the second 0:0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to
insert after the Color Change.

 In the second 0:0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert
after the Color Change.
3

ES 2006

Click Save then Close.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

719

Setting the Start of Design / End of Design sequence


In addition to any End of Design function, some machines require extra
more empty stitches and empty jumps in order to stitch the start and end
of a design. Other machines require a Stop function. Depending on the
machine type, you may also require commands to initialize the machine or
trigger the frame-out command after stitching.
Note Remember that these fields show the number of extra codes you
want to insert in addition to the default settings.

To set the Start of Design/End of Design sequence


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.
Enter number of Empty
Jumps and Stitches to insert
at start of design
Enter number of Empty
Stitches and Jumps to insert
at end of design

In the Start of Design panel, enter the start of design sequence.

 In the 0,0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert at
the start of the design.

 In the 0,0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert at the
start of the design.
3

In the End of Design panel, enter the end of design sequence.

 In the 0,0 field, enter the number of empty stitches to insert at the
end of the design.

 In the 0,0 Jump field, enter the number of empty jumps to insert at
the end of the design.
4

ES 2006

Select the Set Needle Number checkbox as required.

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

720

Where available, this option initializes the machine and brings the head
back to the first color change needle position.

Select to initialize machine


and bring head back to first
needle position

Select the Frame Out checkbox as required.


Where available, this option triggers the frame to exit after stitching the
design.

Select to trigger frame


to exit after stitch out

Click Save then Close.

Setting speed options


Some machines can stitch at different speeds. Depending on your machine,
you may then be able to select different speeds to use when you start
stitching or for when the borer is engaged. You need to first assign the
speeds as Speed 1 and Speed 2 in the Machine Format Values dialog.

To set speed options


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.

Select and adjust


speed options

In the Speed panel, select the Boring Auto Speed Changes checkbox
as required.
This option slows the machine automatically whenever the borer is
engaged.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

721

From the Start list, select the preferred starting speedFast or Slow.

From the Fast list, select the faster setting on your machineSpeed 1
or Speed 2. Check your machine manual for details.

Click Save then Close.

Setting miscellaneous advanced options


Depending on the selected machine format, you may also be able to select
whether to reduce the tension on the fabric while boring, and indicate
whether to rewind the tape when stitching is complete.

To set miscellaneous advanced options


1

Access the Machine Format Values > Advanced dialog. See Selecting
machine formats for details.
Note Only fields relevant to the selected machine format will appear.

Set miscellaneous
speed options

Select the Tension Control for Boring checkbox as required.


This option reduces the fabric tension when the borer is engaged.

Select the Stop before rewind at end checkbox as required.


This option stops the machine at the end of the design and rewinds the
tape.

Select the Rewind with jump at end checkbox as required.


This option inserts a jump at the end of the design and rewinds the tape.

Click Save then Close.

Creating custom formats


ES Designer provides standard formats for most machines. However, if your
machine is different, you may need to customize the machine format
settings. For example, if you have different models of the same type of
embroidery machine, different functions may require different values. There
are two ways to customize machine formats:

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

722

 Create a new format, based on the original, and make it available to all
designs. See Creating custom machine formats for details.

 Modify the format for a specific design, creating a custom format to use
only with that design. See Customizing machine formats for specific
designs for details.
Note If necessary, you can update the standard machine format itself.
However, you should only do this if the original values are no longer used.
See Adjusting standard machine format settings for details.

Creating custom machine formats


Use Select Machine Format (Machine menu) to change machine format settings.
You can create a new machine format based on a standard machine format,
and make it available to all designs.

To create a custom machine format


1

Select a machine format on which to base the new format. See Selecting
machine formats for details.

Click Create.
The Machine Format Values > Standard dialog opens.

Enter format
name

Adjust settings

In the Format Name field, enter a name for the new format.
The name of the format you based it on and a number appear as the
defaulte.g. Melco - 1.

ES 2006

In the Comment field, enter any information that will help you identify
the machine formate.g. No Trim.

Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard


machine format settings for details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

723

Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See
Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details.

Click Save then Close.


The new format appears in the Available Machine Formats list.

Customizing machine formats for specific designs


Use Machine Format Values (Machine menu) to customize machine formats for
specific designs.
You can create a custom machine format for use with the current design.
Use this feature if you need to modify machine format values for a design
without changing the original format. The custom format appears in the
selection list.
Note The custom format is based on the selected machine format for the
design. If you want to base it on a different machine format, select it from
the Select Machine Format dialog. See Selecting machine formats for
details.

To customize machine format for a specific design


1

Select Machine > Machine Format Values.


The Machine Format Values > Standard dialog opens.

Adjust settings

Adjust the machine format settings as required. See Adjusting standard


machine format settings for details.

Click the Advanced tab and adjust the settings as required. See
Adjusting advanced machine format settings for details.
Note You cannot change the Name or Comment fields. The custom
machine format is automatically named using the original machine
format and design namee.g. Melco - Design1.

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

724

Click OK.
A new machine format is created for the design. It appears in the Select
Machine Format dialog and is saved with the design.

Removing custom machine formats


You can remove custom machine formats from your system when they are
no longer required.

To remove custom machine formats


1

Access the Select Machine Format dialog and select a machine format
to remove. See Selecting machine formats for details.
Note You cannot remove machine formats that come with the software.
You can only remove a custom format which you created.

Click Remove.
A confirmation box appears.

Click Yes to confirm the deletion, then click OK.

Checking control commands


If you change the machine format of a design that contains manual machine
functions, you may need to check whether the functions are compatible with
the new format. Generally, functions that cannot be performed by the new
machine type are simply ignored. If an ignored function was inserted on an
empty stitch or empty jump, the stitch or jump is automatically removed.
Sometimes, however, functions may not be correctly translated. For
example, trim commands may be misinterpreted, as some machines use
trim codes, and others a sequence of jumps.
Note If a function is not available in the new machine format, the word
Ignored appears in brackets after the function name.

To check control commands

 Travel to the position of the machine function. See Traveling by machine


function for details.

 Alternatively, use the Stitch List to identify and select a given machine
function. See Editing stitches and functions with Stitch List for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

725

The machine function name appears in the Prompt line. Extra


information may appear in brackets after the function namee.g.
needle number.

Support for the Barudan FDR-II machine


ES Designer provides support for the Barudan FDR-II machine format which
is a backward-compatible extension of the older FDR format. The FDR-II
format supports all machine types that Barudan produce but is associated
with the control panel rather than a particular machine. Currently the BED*
machine series uses the new DR controller which supports the FDR-II
format. The new FDR-II format is required by Lockstitch machines with
sequin attachments, Chenille with programmable needle height, and
Chenille-combination machines. Older machines interpret the additional
information in FDR-II format as Stop codes.

BEDRH modelFDR-II
format is also supported
by BEDSH and BEDYH
machines

In ES Designer, the new Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination machine


formatavailable with the Chenille Optionsupports Lockstitch, Chenille,
and Sequin stitching in the one design. It switches from Lockstitch to
Chenille whenever it encounters a Chain or Moss command, and from
Chenille back to Lockstitch whenever it encounters a Lockstitch Needle
command. The new format can combine up to 15 Lockstitch needles and 6
Chenille loopers.

Two new machine formats


Two new Barudan FDR-II machine formats are now availableLockstitch
and Chenille Combination. Lockstitch format is available in all product
levels while Chenille Combination is only available with the Chenille
cost-option. See also Selecting machine formats.

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

726

Two new Barudan


FDR-II formats
available

Barudan FDR-II Lockstitch machine


The Barudan FDR-II Lockstitch machine uses a modified Machine Format
Values dialog. FDR-II combines and extends the capabilities of the existing
two Barudan Lockstitch machines. The Barudan FDR-II supports up to 15
needles. You still need to set the number of needles to match that of the
actual machine which may have 8, 9, 12 or 15 needles. The Barudan Z
series machines also support up to 15 needles but only the FDR-II supports
Sequin encoding. See also Adjusting standard machine format settings.
Note Barudan FDR-II cannot be saved to T03 or DSB stitch file formats
without loss of Sequin encoding.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

727

Barudan FDR-II supports


up to 15 needles

Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination machine


Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combination is implemented as a unique
combination of Lockstitch, Chenille, and needle addressing, meaning that
you can combine Lockstitch and Chenille stitches within the same design.
This format is now provided as part of the Chenille cost-option.

ES Designer allows you to select any needle or looper. To do so, we have


introduced the concept of the Chenille Colors machine format value. This

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

728

value notionally divides the palette into Lockstitch and Chenille colorse.g.
a value of 6 means that the first six colors in the palette are reserved
Chenille Colors, while Color Slot #7 and above are reserved for Lockstitch.
Therefore, picking Color Slot #7 will change to Lockstitch.

Barudan FDR-II supports up


to 15 Lockstitch needles and
6 Chenille loopers
First six color slots
reserved for Chenille

Encoding of Chenille functions


The Barudan FDR-II machine can encode multiple Chenille states on a single
stitch:

 Stitch Mode (Lockstitch/Chain/Moss)


 Needle Height (H00...H10)
 Looper Number (Chenille Color 1...6)

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

729

Three Chenille states


encoded on single
stitch

Thus, a Chain, a Looper, and a Needle Height function can all co-exist on the
same empty stitch. The stitch list display has been updated specifically for
the new Barudan FDR-II machines (old machines are unaffected).
Logical functions display as follows:

 Color Change: (Palette #1) ... (Palette #100)


 Needle Height: (H00) ... (H10)
Physical functions display as follows:






Needle: (Needle #C01) ... (Needle #C15)


Looper: (Looper #1) ... (Looper #6)
Chain: (CC)
Moss: (CL)

Adjustable starting Needle Height setting


You can now set the starting needle height via the Advanced tab of the
Machine Format Values dialog for the Barudan FDR-II Chenille
Combination machine format. The default value is H06. The Chenille needle
height should vary with the thread typethickness, material, etcand
sometimes type of stitchingChain or Mosstogether with stitch length.
The starting needle height is simply the height the system assumes the
machine to be set to at the start of the design. You should only change the
software setting if you know the machine to be set to a different starting
height.

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

730

Change software setting if


you know the machine is set
to a different default starting
height

Stitching out existing designs on the FDR-II machine


If you want to stitch out an existing Lockstitch or Chenille design on a
Barudan FDR-II Chenille Combo machine, you must ensure that all
Lockstitch colors are higher than the allocated Chenille colors. Heres how
you do it:

 Open the Color-Object List and collapse all the colors.

Ensure that Chenille


objects use a color slot
equal to or less than
allocated number of
Chenille Colors

 For each color block, ensure the color number for Lockstitch objects is
higher than the allocated number of Chenille Colorse.g. greater than
6. At the same time, ensure that Chenille objects use a color slot equal

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

731

to or less than the allocated number of Chenille Colors. If not, change


colors. It doesnt matter what the actual color is. The palette can be
adjusted at any time. In the example here, the red ES object is allocated
Color Slot #2 while the red Wilcom object is allocated Color Slot #9. The
first is a Chenille object, the second a Lockstitch object.
Warning Conversely, if you want to change from the Barudan FDR-II
format to a pure Chenille or pure Lockstitch machine, you have to divide the
Lockstitch and Chenille portions of the design (cut and paste). Changing
from the Barudan FDR-II to another needle-based machine will change all
the lockstitch needlese.g. Needle 1 in a default Barudan FDR-II machine
will become Needle 7 in a regular Barudan machine because it uses Color
Slot #7.

Sequin encoding
The new Sequin Jump function is a variation of Sequin Off. Sequin Jump
turns off the sequin device, but unlike a full Sequin Off does not raise the
sequin head. This allows the machine to quickly and efficiently make jumps,
then turn Sequin On again to continue dropping sequins.

Sequin Jump turns off


sequin device without
raising sequin head

Sequin Jump functions are inserted automatically if a connector occurs


between two sequin objects of the same color has jumps. Sequin Off
functions are inserted if a connector occurs between:

 a sequin and a non-sequin object


 two sequin objects of different color
 two sequin objects of different sequin type.
A new Sequin Off Mode dialog is invoked whenever you insert or edit a
Sequin Off function and click OK. The dialog prompts you to force the

ES 2006

Chapter 30

Changing Machine Formats

732

sequin head to be raised or stay down as required. See also Editing machine
functions.

Change Sequin Off


mode

Sequin device addressing


You must ensure that the correct needle is used for sequin digitizing. A
sequin device is attached to a needle, typically Needle #1 (left side) or the
rightmost needle (8, 9, 12, or 15) of the Lockstitch head. You must manually
select the needlei.e. by picking the correct needle slot for the sequin
device when digitizing sequin objects.
Warning If the wrong needle is selected and the FDR-II machine receives
a Sequin On command, the sequin device will not be turned on.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

733

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

You can output embroidery designs in a variety of wayspunching to paper


tape, sending appliqu shapes to a cutter, saving designs to specific
machine formats and/or to embroidery disk, or sending directly to machine
for stitching.

Note Wilcom ES provides alternative means for sending designs directly to


embroidery machine for stitching. Depending on your software options, you
can send the design to a machine using either Stitch Manager or ES Machine
Manager. Stitch Manager is described in this section. ES Machine Manager
is described in a separate ES Machine Manager Supplement.
From the same design file, you can also output a production worksheet for
the embroidery machine operator. Designers frequently want to distribute
their designs for viewing in real colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or
without fabric backgrounds. In ES Designer you can save both design
images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

734

This section describes how to create production worksheets. It explains how


to send designs as email attachments, as well as how to output designs as
images. Cutting appliqu shapes is also covered, as well as stitching designs
with Stitch Manager.
Note For details of reading from and writing to embroidery disk and paper
tape, see Embroidery Disks and Paper Tapes.

Creating production worksheets


The production worksheet is the link between the designer and the
embroidery machine operator. It contains a design preview as well as
essential production information, including the design size, the color
sequence and any special instructions. You can customize production
worksheets before printing. You can also print multiple colorways, icons of
color blocks, and backgrounds.
Note If certain thread colors are not available on your printer, they may be
mapped to a different color, including white. If a color is mapped to white,
it will be invisible on the worksheet. Print the design in TrueView color, or
black and white, or turn off color mapping. See your printer manual for more
information.

Printing or plotting production worksheets


Use Print (Standard toolbar) to print production worksheets for the current
design using the current settings.
Create a hard copy of the production worksheet using a printer or plotter.
Set worksheet and printer options before you print, or use the current
options.
Tip Preview the production worksheet before you print to check whether it
is correct. See Previewing production worksheets for details.

To print or plot a production worksheet


1

ES 2006

Select File > Print.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

735

The Print dialog opens.

Click to customize
worksheet

Click to preview
worksheet

Select the printer or plotter you want to use, and enter the number of
copies of the worksheet you require.
Note To customize the worksheet, click Options, and change the
settings as required. See Setting production worksheet print options for
details.

If you are using a plotter, click Properties, and set the pen colors to
correspond with the thread colors in the design.
Refer to your plotters manual for information on setting up pen colors.

Click OK.

Setting production worksheet print options


Use Print (File menu) to access production worksheet print options.
Use Print Preview (File menu) to access production worksheet print options.
Set production worksheet options to show the information you want in the
format you require. You can specify the data to print, graphics to include,
zoom factor, and general options such as company name. You can use a
color printer or a plotter to produce production worksheets. If you are using
a color printer, you can print in TrueView.

To set worksheet print options


1

ES 2006

To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File >
Print Preview.

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

736

Click Options.
The Print Options dialog opens.

Select worksheet
or appliqu
Set zoom factor
for design
preview

Select
information type
to include

Select other
general options

Select graphical
features to
include

Select the option to print a production worksheet or appliqu patterns.


When the appliqu patterns is selected all other options are grayed out.
See Printing appliqu patterns for details.

In the Information to Print panel, select the information type to


include.

 Full information: shows details specified in the Customize


Worksheet dialog. See Customizing production worksheet
information for details.

 Short information: shows summary information about the design.


This and the previous options include information provided in the
Summary tab of the Design Properties dialog. See Viewing design
information in ES Designer for details.

 Stop sequence: lists all stops in the design together with the stitch
number at which they occur, color number, and thread color name
and brand. See also Printing multiple colorways.

 None: shows the design preview only.


 Current Colorway: prints the design in the current colorway only.
 Selected Colorways: prints multiple colorways. See Printing
multiple colorways for details.
5

ES 2006

In the Zoom panel, set the zoom factor for the design preview. This
controls the size of the preview on the worksheet.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

737

 1.0: shows the design at its actual size.


 Show All: scales the design to fill the available space on the
worksheet.

 Custom: lets you set a specific zoom factor.


6

In the Graphics panel, select the graphical features to include.


If you select TrueView, the Draft Quality checkbox becomes available.
Select this checkbox for quicker printing at lower resolution.
Tip Click Standard to reset the printing options to the original values.

Click Display Repeats to set display options for Schiffli repeats.


This is only available with the Schiffli Option. See the Schiffli Option
Supplement for details.

In the General panel, select the other options you require.

 Print in English: deselecting this checkbox prints worksheets in the


same language as the Windows operating system. This feature is
useful when printing to plotters where the device driver does not
support the character set you require.

 Extents Box Around Design: places an outline around the design.


 Company Name: prints a specified company name on the
worksheet. Select a company name from the list, or enter a new one.

 Color Film: prints color blocks in the design as they appear in the
Color List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a single
color block. See Printing color film for details.
9

ES 2006

Click OK.

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

738

Customizing production worksheet information


Use Print (File menu) to access production worksheet print options.
Use Print Preview (File menu) to access production worksheet print options.
You can fine-tune production worksheet information when Full Information
is the selected text option.

To customize production worksheet information


1

To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File >
Print Preview.

Click Options.

In the Information to Print panel, select the Full Information


checkbox.

Click Customize.

The Print Options dialog opens.

The Customize dialog opens.

In the Blocks to Print panel, select the design statistics to include on


the worksheet.

 Left/Right/Up/Down: the margins between the edges of the design


and the edges of the design area.

 End X/Y: the coordinates of the last stitch.


 Max/Min Stitch: the maximum and minimum stitch lengths in the
design.

 Thread Chart Type: the thread chart name used in the design.
 Thread Usage: thread usage statistics by color.
 Total Bobbin: total bobbin thread length.
6

ES 2006

In the Columns in Stop Sequence panel, select the statistics for each
color block.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

739






Stitch Count: number of stitches per color.


Needle Number: the needle number stitching each color block.
Brand: name of the color (may vary from name of thread chart).
Element Name: user-defined name to identify each color block. See
Naming design elements via Design Properties for details.

 Show Colors in Summary: includes actual color samples in the


colorways summary table/s. See also Printing multiple colorways.
7

Select the Use Left Side checkbox to print on the left side.
By default, text prints on the right of the page.

Click OK.

Printing multiple colorways


Use Print (File menu) to print designs in multiple colorways.
Use Print Preview (File menu) to print designs in multiple colorways.
You can print your design in the current or multiple colorways. See also
Working with colorways.

To print multiple colorways


1

To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File >
Print Preview.

Click Options.
The Print Options dialog opens.

Select Current
Colorway or Selected
Colorways

Select Selected Colorways to print multiple colorways.


Tip Select Current Colorway to print the design in the current
colorway only.

ES 2006

Click Colorways.

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

740

The Colorway Options dialog opens.

Select one or more


colorways from the
list

Select Selected Colorways and then select one or more colorways from
the list.

 To select a range of items, hold down Shift as you select.


 To select multiple items, hold down Ctrl as you select.
Alternatively, select All Colorways to print out all the colorways in the
design.
Each colorway is printed on a separate sheet.
6

Click OK to return to the Print Options dialog.

In the Graphics panel, select Background if you want to include the


background color or fabric with the colorway.

Select Background
to include on
worksheet

Tip Select Crop to Design to crop the space around the design.
8

ES 2006

Click OK.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

741

Click OK in the Print dialog or Print Now in the Print Preview dialog.

A colorway summary sheet is also printed. To print colors in the colorway


summary table/s, make sure the Show Colors in Summary is selected
in the Customize Worksheet dialog. See Customizing production
worksheet information for details.

Printing color film


Use Print (File menu) to print separate color films of the design for selected
colorways.
Use Print Preview (File menu) to print separate color films of the design for selected
colorways.
The Color Film option lets you print color blocks in the design as they appear
in the Color-Object List. Consecutive objects of the same color form a single
color block. See also Selecting and viewing objects with the Color-Object
List.

To print color film


1

To access the Print Options dialog, either select File > Print or File >
Print Preview.

Click Options.
The Print Options dialog opens.

Select Color Film

ES 2006

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

742

Select the Color Film checkbox.

Click OK.

Click OK in the Print dialog or Print Now in the Print Preview dialog.
A separate color film prints for selected colorways. See also Printing
multiple colorways.

Printing appliqu patterns


Use Print Preview (File menu) to print appliqu patterns.
Print a copy of appliqu patterns to use in cutting out fabric pieces. Each
appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching sequence.
One copy of the placement outlines is printed to show how their positions
relate to each other. This copy is printed to fit one page. A second copy of
the placement outlines is printed at 100% scaling, with each outline
separated for use in cutting the fabric.
Note Automatically create all the stitching you need for appliqu using the
Auto Appliqu input method. See Digitizing for appliqu for details.

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

743

To print an appliqu pattern


1

Select File > Print Preview.

Click Options icon.


Print Options dialog opens.

Select Appliqu
Patterns

Select the Appliqu Patterns option.


Each appliqu pattern piece is numbered according to the stitching
sequence.

ES 2006

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

744

Click OK.

Click Print Now.

Sending designs as email attachments


Use Send (File menu) to send a design as an email attachment.
Use Open (Standard toolbar) to send a design as an email attachment.
You can attach designs to emails from the design window or via the Open
dialog.

To send designs as email attachments


1

Do one of the following:

 With the design open in the design window, select File > Send, or

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

745

 Click the Open icon to display the Open dialog. Select the file to
send, then right-click it. The popup menu appears. Select Send To
> Mail Recipient.

Select Send To >


Mail Recipient

The email application for your system is launched, and a new email is
created with the design file attached.
2

Enter mailing details and send.

Outputting designs as images


Once a design is digitized in ES Designer, you can output object outlines as
a vector file. This can then be downloaded to a laser cutter through a
program such as CorelDRAW. This can serve various purposes such as
appliqu cutting, multimedia, screen printing, and so on.
Designers frequently want to distribute their designs for viewing in real
colors, in TrueView or otherwise, with or without fabric backgrounds. This
might be for stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs,
or for presentation on the web or in catalogs. ES Designer lets you save both
design images and production worksheets to disk or email them direct.

Saving designs as vector images


You can copy embroidery outlines directly to the Windows clipboard. Using
the Microsoft Clipboard Viewer, you can then save them to CLP format. This
file can then be opened in a program such as CorelDRAW.
Note You may need to install Microsoft Clipboard Viewer from your
Windows operating system installation CD.

ES 2006

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

746

To save designs as vector images


1

Select the object/s whose outlines you want to copy.

Press Ctrl+C to copy them to the clipboard.

Open Microsoft Clipboard Viewer.


The copied outlines appear in the Clipboard Viewer window.

Save the outlines as CLP file format.

Save outlines as
CLP format

This file can now be opened in a program such as CorelDRAW.

Capturing designs as bitmap images


Use Capture Design Bitmap (File menu) to save a design as a bitmap image.
You can save design images to disk or email them direct. This might be for
stock design sales purposes, for approval of digitized designs, or for
presentation on the web or in catalogs. The image can be captured as a

ES 2006

Wilcom ES Online Manual

747

bitmap with or without background color or fabric. It can be captured in


TrueView or otherwise, and can include connectors, outlines and any other
display options provided in ES Designer.

To capture a design as a bitmap image


1

Open the embroidery design.

Select File > Capture Design Bitmap.


The Capture Design Bitmap dialog opens.

Select image
selection option

Select Output
option

Select to include
background color or
fabric

Select Output
format

Select a Selection option:

 Whole Design (1:1): captures the screen image in a ratio of 1:1.


 Current Design Window: captures the screen image at the
currently selected zoom factor.

 Custom: lets you specify a capture area. After clicking OK, you are
prompted to enter a rectangle origin and rectangle corner to
define the area to capture.
Click to enter
rectangle origin

Click to enter
rectangle corner

Select an Output option:

 Save to Disk: lets you save the screen capture to disk. After clicking
OK, the Save Capture Screen dialog opens, allowing you to select
a location, name and format for the captured design image.

 Send via Email: lets you send the screen capture as email. After
clicking OK, a new email message opens with the image attached.

ES 2006

Chapter 31

Outputting Designs

748

 Both Save and Send: lets you both save to hard disk and send as
an email attachment.
Image captured as
Whole Design (1:1)

Select an output format for the screen image from the dropdown
listBMP, JPG, etc.

Select Include Background/Fabric to include the background color or


fabric with the screen capture.

Click OK.

Cutting appliqu shapes


Use Cut Appliqu (File menu) to send appliqu shapes from a design file to a laser
cutter.
Use the Cut Appliqu feature to send appliqu shapes from a design file to
a laser cutter. ES Designer extracts outlines from the design and sends them
to the cutter. Only closed outlines are extracted. You can also send drawing
objects directly to the cutter using this feature. ES Designer also lets you
output object outlines as a vector file. This can then be downloaded to a
laser cutter through a program such as CorelDRAW. See To save designs
as vector images for details.
Note Before you send appliqu shapes to a cutter, make sure it is set up
on your system with the correct Windows (printer) driver. Some
cutterse.g. Iolineuse a standard driver for HP-7475 plotters. Once the
driver is installed in Windows, there is no need for a separate hardware
setup in ES Designer.

To output appliqu shapes


1

ES 2006

Create your appliqu object and duplicate it. See Creating appliqu
objects for details.

Wilcom ES Online Manual

749

Select the duplicated object and click the Complex Fill icon.

Enter stitch angles or press Enter to accept the default.


This creates a Complex Fill object.

Select and ungroup the Complex Fill object.

Repeat these steps for all applique objects in the design.

Select all the drawing objects and cut them to the clipboard.

Start a new design and paste them into it.

This converts the embroidery object into a drawing object.

Tip If you need more than one copy of the appliqu shape, create
multiple copies of the shape, and arrange them so you get the most
efficient use from the appliqu fabric.
8

Select File > Cut Appliqu.

From the Name list, select the appliqu cutter.

The Print dialog opens.


10 Click OK.

Appliqu object

Converted to Complex
Fill object

Converted to drawing
object

Tip If you intend to reuse the design,